Handbook of Construction Tolerances J.G

I
II Handbook of Construction Tolerances

.f
1
II
:gte. LA CONSTRUCTA SAL
rnnrrrr rfrrrf f , rr rrrfrII ( 1IIIIII

Handbook of
Construction
Tolerances
Second Edition
David Kent Ballast
e t-=I[N Tr NN' . "
1 8 0 7 ~
.
'' fWllEY ~
2007 ~
>
John Wiley & Sons, Inc .
m
This boo k is printed un acid-free paper.
Copyright © 2007 by John Wiley & Sons. All rights reserved
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., H o boken, New Jersey

Published simultaneously in Canada
Wil ey Bicentennial Logo: Richard Pac ifico
N o part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval sys tem, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, o r otherwise,
except as permitted under Section 107 o r 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without
either the prio r written permissio n of the Publisher, or authorization through pay ment of the
appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA
01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978) 646-8600, or on the web at www.copyright.com. Requests to
the Publisher for permission sho uld be addressed to the Permissio ns Department, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030, (201) 748 -6011, fax (201) 748-6008, o r online
at www.wiley.com/go/permission s.
limit of liability/ Disclaimer of Warranty: Whil e the publisher and the author have used their
best efforts in preparing this book, they m ake no represe ntatio ns or warranties with respect to the
accuracy or completeness of the contents of this boo k and specifically disclaim any implied war-
ranties of merchantab ility o r fitne ss for a particular purpose . N o warranty may be created or ex-
tended by sales representatives or written sales materials. The advice and strategies contained
herein may no t be suitable for your situation. You should consult with a professio nal where appro-
priate. Neither the publisher nor the author shall be liable for any loss of profit or any other com-
mercial damages, including but not limited to special, incidental, consequential, o r o ther damages.
For general information about our other products and services, please contact our Cusromer
Care Department within the United States at (800) 762-2974, outside the United S tates at
(17) 572-3993 or fax (317) 572-4002.
Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears in
print may no t be available in electronic books. For mo re informatio n about Wiley products,
visit our web site at www.wiley.co m.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:

Ballast, Dav id Kent.
Handbook of constructio n tolerances / David Ballast. - 2nd ed.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographic rt l referen ces and inde x.
IS BN: 978-0- 471 m] )1-5 (clo th )
1. Strucwral enginee ring. 2. Tulerance (Engineering) 3. Building-Details. I. Title.
TH85 1.B35 2007
624.1 '7-Jc22
200603 6206
Printed in the L nited St3te" of Ame rica
ill 9 8 7 6 5 4 j 2 1
Contents
List ,)! Ttlblc.\ Xl

Ad'lloJ1.I ,ledglllcllts :ell!
lli(n )dllctiO)l Xli
Part 1: Construction Tolerances

Chapter 1: Building Layout and Sitework 3
1- 1 Ho rizontal Bu ilding Layo ut 3
1-2 Vertical Building Layullt 7
1-3 C oncrete P:wing 8
1- 4 Asphalt Paving 10
1-5 Pedestrian Paving 13
1-6 G rading and S itework 15
1- 1 Right-of-Way Construction 17
Chapter 2: Concrete 23
2- 1 Reinforcement Placement for Fle xural Members 23
2-2 Reinforcement Placement in Wa lls and Cll iumns 25
2-3 Reinforcement Placement of Prestressing S teel 25
2-4 Co ncrete S labs on Grade 29
2-5 Footings and A nch or Bolts 31
2--6 Piers 32
2-7 Cast -in-Plac e Plumb To lerances 3'5
2-:3 Ca~ t - in-P l ace Sec tional Tolera nces 35
~-9 C ast-in- Place Cunc rete Eleme nts in Plan 37
2--10 C ast-in -Place S tairs 37
~2 -- 11 C-'lass- Fiber-Reinforced Conc rete Pane ls 39
2- ll Architectural Precast Con crete Panels 41
2-- 13 Precast Ribhed Wall Panels 43
2--1f Precast Insul::ttecl W:~t11 Panels 43
2-15 Hollow-Core S labs 47
2-- 16 Precast S ta irs 47
~ -- II Precast Pil ings 49
~ -I,) Prt', rre' ''t'd C'ncrt'te Beams 49
2-- ! 'J Prt' ~ rr(' s~e ,i Single Tees ')1
2 -2~' Prestrc·,sed D, -,u hle Tees 55
2 -21 Prt'c l;,tCclllll11 l1 :3 ,(
r)re' r re :"t~c l Tt't'f.) i~t -; Uf Kevc'wn e Jois ts 57
', ') PrC-':'I.)t CUl ll llll1 Ert'(nun :l')
) -!.,
~ .
vi Contents
--- ---- - -- . - - --- -- - -~
2-26 Precast Structural Wall Panel Erecti,m 63

2-27 Precast ArchitecturJI Wall Panel Erection 67
2-28 G lass-Fiber-Rei nforced Clmc rete Panel ErectiL~n 69
2-29 Auwcbved Aerated Concrete 69
2-30 Tilt-Up Cmcrete Panels 73
Chapter 3: Steel 75
3-1 Mill Tolerances t~) r W and HP Shapes 75
3-2 Mill Tolerances to r Length of Wand HP Shapes 79
3-3 Mill Tolerances for Sand M Shapes and Channels 8 1
3-4 Mill Tolerances for Structural Angles and Tees 82
3-5 Mill tolerances for Pipe and Tubing 85
3-6 Steel Column Erection Tolerances 87
3-7 Location of Exterior Steel Columns in Plan 89
3-8 Steel Beam/Column Connections 91
3-9 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 91
3-10 Elevator Shaft Tolerances 94
Chapter 4: Unit Masonry 97

4-1 Concrete Unit Masonry Manufacturing 97
4-2 Concrete Unit Masonry Reinforcement Placement 99
4-3 Concrete Unit Masonry Construction 103
4-4 Prefabricated Masonry Panels 103
4-5 Brick Manufacturing 104
4-6 Brick Wall Construction 107
4-7 Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile 107
4-8 Facing, Load- Bearing, and N on-Load-Bearing Clay Ttle 11 2
4-9 Terra Cotta Manufacturing and Erection 115
4-1 0 Glass Block Manufacturing and Erection 11 6
Chapter 5: Stone 119

5-1 Granite Fabrication 119
5-2 Marble Fabrication 121
5-3 Limestone Fabrication 123
5-4 G ranite and Marble Installation 125
5-5 Limestone Installation 127
5-6 Fabrication and Installation Tolerances for Slate 128
5-7 Cast Stone Fabrication and Installation 129
5-8 Interior Stone Wall Cladding 129
Chapter 6: Structural Lumber 133

6-1 Glued Laminated Timber Fabrication 133
6-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumber 133
6-3 Plywood Manufacturing 136
6-4 Particleboard ~lanufacturing 139
6-5 Fiberboard Manufacturing 141
6-6 Rough Lumbe r Framing 143
6-7 Wood Floor Framing and Subt100ring 145
6-:3 j\ fera l- Plate-Ccmnected W,'od T[l I~~ Ed'r ici ti'lll IV;
~1111 I(TlIlf! fftffftTtTnnrrTTTTfTlTTln

L
Contents vii
.- - - ------ --- -- _. _ -- - ------- ---- - - - - - -- - - -
(, .') \kL Ii · i'iate· C,mnL'c ted \Xt".)".:! 1i-\Is~ Ercct lo n 14t1

(J_ I L' [\ci"hricateJ StrllLtllr:l l WUOLI 150
( ~ - II :;( luLt ll[al jn ~ lIht(' d P:1I1cb 151
Chapter 7 ; Finish Carpentry and Architectural Woodwork 15 3

7 I tvbnllt~lctliring Toleranc es t~)f Bumd Lumher 15 3
7- 2 S i re - B uilt C3hine ts and Cuunte rwr~ i s:;
r · 3 :-:ite-Bllilt St~l irs anJ Trim 156
7 -4 St:lI1ding and Running Trim iS S
7 -S :\ lchi reL'turaIC:lhnets 160
76 Ivi, ;duiar C:1bincts 163
7- 7 C\JlIll tertops 163
r - S Flush P:me ling 167
7- ') St il e Jnd Rail Paneling 170
7- 10 St:l irwur k 1 n
7- 11 Frames, }lmbs, :md Windows 174
7- l2 Screens 176
7·- 13 Blinds anJ S hutters 177
7- 1·+ t\ rchitectura l Flush Doors 178
7-- 15 St ile and Rail Doo rs-S ize and Flatness 181
7--16 St ile and Rail Doors-Joint Tightness and Flushness 183
7- 17 Architectural Woodwork Installation 185
Chapte r 8: Curtain Walls 189

8- 1 A luminum Curta in Wall Fab rication 189
8- 2 ;\llIminum Curtain Wall Installation 191
S- 3 Sto refront and Entrance Manufacturing 193
8- 4 Storefront Installation 195
Chapter 9: Finishes 197

C) - I light ·G:1 uge Fram ing for Gypsum Wallboard 197
9 --2 Wa llboard Partitions, Ceilings, ~IIlLI Trim 199
9--3 C; lass-Reinforced Gypsum Products 200
C)-A In <tallati on uf LClth and Plas ter 202
()- 5 H )()r and Wall Tile 204
9 ··6 Terra~w Flooring 207
9 - 7 \V'ood Floor ing 208
(LS StLme Fl oor ing 210
'I..f) Aco ustica l Ce iling Installation 210
') - 10 Linem \ 1eta l Ce iling Installatiull 213
:) t I ,~t :l i n l e~, Stc:el Orn: Iffiell WI \kt~ll PWdllCt' 21 4
'J - t ~ C('r:'l'er ~\l l l 'y () rnarnenctl \ itu l Ptll(hl ( t) 2 L6
U l\ Exuuded Aluminum Tubes 21 8
-1. I -J- \I ul n inum Rn,/s, 831's, :JllJ Sh:l ~'e s 2~ C
C1l;\ptd 10: G lazing 2n

[,_' \hnut:lctm ing T,~lt r~\lKc-s t,;r FLt t C;L:t ~s 2~ ~
, ,' \Llfl!lfll'tllrinc: T,dtT l ilCU r(Jr [-) ;·lttc'Trle.J ,in ,_l \Vlr"J (;h" ~~ 1
l."lIi [ "',·, ,L I k ,~ <[[ d l .i t'd)n :' :' l l.:I :;rd l l,irel (; 1b i
viii Contents
10~4 Sealed Insulated Glass Units 228

1O~5 All-lllass Entrances 23()
1O~6 Decllrative Architectural Flat CJbss 23 3
IO~7 Laminated Architectural Flat elias, 2)3
1()~8 Bent Glass 235
Chapter II: Doors and Windows 239

11-1 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 239
11-2 Insulated Steel Door Systems 239
11-3 Detention Security Holluw Metal Duors and Frames 241
11-4 Standard Flush Wood Doors 241
11-5 Standard Stile and Rail Doors 244
I 1-6 Wood Swinging Patiu Doors 246
11-7 I nstallation of Wood Doors 246
11-8 Wood Windows 249
11-9 Aluminum Windows and Sliding Doors 251
11-10 Steel Windows 251
Part 2: Accommodating Construction Tolerances

Guidelines for Accommodating Construction Tolerances 255
Joint Design 255
Accumulated Tolerances 258
Chapter 12: Cast-in-Place Concrete Systems 26 I

12-1 Cuncrete Frame Tolerances 261
12-2 Joint Tolerances 263
12-3 Detailing for Cast-In-Place and Precast Systems 264
12-4 Detailing Brick on Cast-in-Place Concrete 266
12-5 Detailing for Stone on Concrete Systems 269
12-6 Detailing for Curtain Walls on Concrete Frames 271
12-7 Detailing Doors in Cast-in-Place Concrete 273
12-8 Detailing Windows in Cast-in-Place Cuncrete 275
Chapter 13: Precast Concrete Systems 277

13-1 Combined Precast Concrete Frame Tolerances 277
11-2 Juint 1()lerances 278
13-3 Detailing for Precast Systems 279
13-4 Detailing for Precast and Steel Systems 281
13-5 Detailing Masonry and Precast Systems 283
11-6 Detailing Doors in Precast Concrete 286
13-7 Detailing Windows in Precast Concrete 286
Chapter 14: Steel Frame Systems 289

14-1 Accumulated Column Tolerances 2!N
I 'f-2 Accumulated Steel Frame Tderal1ces 290
14-3 Detailing for Steel Structural S\'>tem Tder:mces 293
14-4 Detailing for Precast ,~)n Steel 295
H-1 Detading for Brick ,111 Stet'! 2()5
mnnmmrlllrnrmnrrmnmllllllllHflllfmnmmmmmrmr-
Contents ix
1+ <' [ \ ,t,lli ill ,'! f, \I S to ll", \)ll S t",d Sy>te ms 297

! + 7 1\: r:lilll1~ fur C urLlin \X';tl ls \ )n Steel h :lrnes 299
Chapter I '): Masonry Systems 301

1::;,, 1 'v( ,hUIHY .J o int T(,J euHlCeW ,)
1::;",2 De Llilin g 8ri c k ~lIld t\'b,~)nry Systems 303
I') ,- J [)era tiin;o; t('r ::)t, )l1e "n ~1 as,m ry [bckup 305
I 'i -4 [)eui1m.'; Interi o r Stune u n MJ:'onry 306
1'5--5 DL'Llilillg DUllrs in tvbso nry 309
15 -6 LJeuiling Wind,)w) in ~b)o nry 309
Chapter 16: Timber and Carpentry Construction 313

16- 1 Deuilillg W uud Jo ints 313
16- 2 Det:liling fo r Timber Columns 315
16- 3 Deuiling for Timber Beams 315
16- 4 Detailing fo r Prefabricated Structural Wood 317
16- 5 De tailing for Paneling ,.n Site-Built Substrates 320
16- 6 De ta iling for Cabinetry and Site-Built Substwtes 320
Part 3: Measuring Compliance and Documenting

Construction Tolerances
Chapter 17: Methods of Measurement 325
17- 1 1v1easuring Devices 325
17- 2 Measuring Length 326
17 - 3 Measuring Angles 327
17-4 Me::tsuring Slopes 327
17- 5 lv1easuring Fl a tness, Level, ,md Smoothness 329
Chapter 18: The Uncertainty of Measurement in Construction 333

Id- l The Expression l~ f Me8surement 334
1.'1-2 Express ing Uncertainty 334
1:3- \ Un icsl)fMe asure 338
1b-4 S igni ficant h gures and R(lund in g 339
1:3 -5 \Ietric Conve rsioll HO
Chapter 19: Documenting and Enforcing Tolerances 343

1'} - 1. D0cllmentin,~ T<)ier~mce" {In Drawing> H j
1 9-:~ D,)cLInl e nting To i e r~lnces in Spec ifi cClt i(>Ib 344
19- \ Cuntrac t Aclllllni:,tr8tion 34i-
[ eL 4 T,_,[ en nc es ;m,l :-\ccc'ssibill t\ H4
H7
List of Tables
TJi ' 1e- [' I :VbilltULlllCC- ,md ,--\cc eptance T Jkr:H\cc", ill Ex cc\';~ and in Deficiency, f, lr
:Vk t:d Tlrt"
TtI ~ k: 1-2 ReLltive Pll, iri ,llIal Accu r'1\: ie ~
Tahle 1 -3 Relative- PU5iriunai Acc uraci es tel r Lmd Title Surveys
T1hl<- 1-4 Reco lllmen,ieJ Tu le rances tur Ri gltt- ,)t- Way C\)nstructiun
Tahl e 2 -\ C le,lr Distance Tukra l1ce to S ide Forms and Sotfit~

T:lble 2-2 H Cl ri'lllH zd D imension Tul emnce fllr Footings Cast aga inst Soil
Tlble 2--} T(l le rances fur Tup Elevatiun uf Structural Wall Panels
T1ble 2--+ To ler:ll1ces kll'Top El ev<lt ion of A rchitec tttral W<tll Pane b
T1ble 3-1 Pe rmi ssible V; lriatilm in Camber a nd Sweep tlH Wand HI' Sh apes
Table 3-2 Permissible V:1riatiun in Length for Wand HP Shapes
Table 3- 3 Perm iss ihle Va riat io n f,)r Le ngth and Sljuareness for Milled Shapes
Tlb le3-4 Pe rmi 5:,ible Variatio n in Cruss-Sec tiona l Shapes fo r S, M, C , and hI C S h apes
T:Jble3-5 Permissihle Variation in Length fur S, M, and Channel Shapes
Table 3-6 Pe nnissible Va riati o n in sizes for Angles and Tees
Table 1-7 Pe rmiss ible Variatiu n in Length fo r Angles a nd Tees
T'1bk 3-8 Leng th T(lit:rances f,)r Pipe and Tubing
Tab le 3-9 Twist wl e rances for Square ,wd Rectangular Tubing
T:ble 4-1 AC [ m:bn nry Reinforcement f'la<.: eme nt Tt) lem nces
T1h1e +-: Dilll e l1"i,l ll,ti T ." e r:llKcs uf Prc:fahric:1ted Mastmry Pane l,
T;,hle 'f - 1 Bri ck \LlIlut:l<:ruring Dimt'n,~ itln Ttller;ll1ces
Tabit: 4-,+ Elrick [)i ~ r. i rti ') n T,>ie ra nces
Table +,) r act' [)inKI1,;i.'11 T,'lieranc cs f('r CJLLc,1CLlv EKing Tile
Tahk 'f- C' Be'd D.:f' rh \ Thickl1ess) T,derances f~'r (~ b2e d C la\ Elling Tdt·
Table 4-·7 r)i , [(l rrion To l cr:t nce~ ft'r Ch:ed Cb y Fac ing Til e
T1l:k ·f-,I;; CI :w F.lC in!{ Tile M;lI111t:Kturing D ime n.<I(ll1 T,)l e r:mces
+.() ( 'by F.1Cil1!2 T ile Di,t.,rt i.,n T., leLlric es
' l:1I ~ k,
T;hk' 'i , I LdtTII1 Cc'S f, 'I' (ir:mi[(: Vene" r

'L hlt: ') ~ Hnl , illli <IC e T~, l.: r' jn ( cs h.l r ",Lld ' lt'
'h H.: ~ .. ,i li :fl ",'I" nc' Fl f, rtt:t~ i,·n r; ,kr:m ct' <;
T+k II I \" i;llirnuill S iz(" l,t ["rt" "'::.:I. Crv l' iIl1l'Ii, i"l1 :1 1 Lumher
r .f'lc- " j'! l'Ih',,:',,1 nli .~ k" e" Tt ..k r:tfl( ~ '
-r J"L: h ·· '! L ' l c r'-JlI\I.:.~ (.,-j- Fl _ (n ;._l<::,L. . ( .;-:~ rJ
-~, h! I', . t~..'i\: Li ;' < (-~ : l,l: F'a.rn(- L·l.'« ~rJ Ft(_'I_" n~)~ ~l:·\)(J UI.. t~
,:J'k /' " 1;', [It.- "I :,Lq" ,fk rur :!l': 'r:. l "f2<i 1': ~' t;Jr Fini ,J,n:! rrll '." "·' C ni[)
7nffffil [i il r
'< ii List of Tables
Tlhle 7-3 Flushness :tnd FLnness "tC;lhiller J(lints ;In, 1 P;tnds

Tahl e 7-4 ]" int ""[' )le[;1I1ce.' fIx E1Ct,'ry -A"e mhled c:..ltn f'n l1t'nts
TIl>le 7-5 ]"int T"kr:1nLt." tur Separati(ln b~,tw~'t'n E:lcr,) rv-Assembbl R1C bphsh
and T\1p
T3He 7-6 J<"J im To ler~lI1ce k)r F;lctul"y-.-'\;;sem hlc,1 C, lIHP, llK'llts f"l" \Voud Ve nee r
I\ m e lin g
Tahle 7-7 Joint ""["leranL:t."s t~' r EKt,i rv -Assemhled C'l11f'Unents f.. ,r Stil e :ll1d Rail
Paneling
T11,Ie 7-13 J(l int To leran L:es t~i r EKwry-Asse mhledJ ", iIHS t(lr St:lirw,'rk
Table 7-9 ] u int Tu lera nces fnr Custom Winduws
T1hle 7-- 10 Jo int T",ler,ll1 ces tur Screens
T1ble 7-11 Joint Tnler3nces for Blinds and Shutters
Tahle 7-12 Tightness of Plant-Assembled Joints
Table 7-13 Flushness of Pbrtt-Assemhlt'd Jo ints
Tab le 7-14 Wood-to-Wood Field Jo ints lip to 11 8 Inches (3 m) above Fini shed Floor
T1ble 7-15 Wood-to-Nonwoud Field Joints up to 118 Inches (3 m ) :ctbove Finished
FlOcH
Table 7-16 Nonwood -to-Nnnwood Field Jo ints up to 1181nches (3 m) above Finishe(
Flour
Table 9-1 Tile Manufacturing Tolerances

Table 9-2 Required To lerance for Plane of Substmte for Tile Installa ti on
Table 9-3 Recommended Concrete S lab To lerances for Wood Flo(l ring
Table 9-4 Twist Tolerances fo r Stainless S teel Tuhe Sec tions
Table 9-5 S ize and Squa re ness To lera nces for Stainless S teel Tee Sec tio ns
Table 9-6 S traightness To lerances for Round Tubing
Table 9-7 Straightness To lerances for Bars Made from Square-Sheared Metal
Table 9-8 Selected Toleran ces for Extruded Aluminum Tube Sections
Table 9-9 Selec ted To lerances for Aluminum Rods. Bars. and Shapes
T;lble 10- 1 Allowable To lera nces for C lear. HH Class

Table 10-2 Tolerances t(,r P,merned G lass
T1ble 10-3 Tulemnces fur Wired Glass
Table 10-4 D imensi,ina l To lenm ces t(lr Tempered . Heat-S trengthened, and Spandre l
Glass
T1ble 10-5 Buw Tolera nces fur Tempered . Heat-Strengthened, and Spandrel Gbss
Table 10-6 Dimensional To lerances for Insulating Glass Units
Tahle 10-7 Length :md Width Tulerances fur Symmetri ca lly Lamin a ted Architectural
Glass
Table 10-8 Bow To lerances fur Laminated G lass
Table 10-9 Height :H1d Girth Tolerances fo r Bent Gbss
Tahle 10-- 10 S hape and Acc uracy and C ru<;:;benJ T"l em n L:t's for Bent G I:lss
TIHe 10- [ I \ [ax il11l1m Twi~ t Deviati(J11 t-(.r Bent Cbss
Acknowledgments
For the Second Edition

I ,,,"ukllik c tu th:mk the m:J!1\' ~'ellpl e 1V1l<l Cl)l1frlhur e,,1 t,) lilt:' 111:lkin,l! "t' thi, h",)k . Fur
liw !' ld ,li , h cr, \\:;, "\m :.Ilhl ~ 1 1\1i1lcr. \'ice pre;; iclt'nt ~lIl,II" lhli,her, .tn,1 i\1r. J,)lm C":lm eL' ki,
. 1'· 'I',i ~ iti (l\I ' ed iror, \\'c'[(' in~ frlllllellf J I in :2e trillg [h e prc>j eL't ;;(;lrfeJ. TklllKs : tI ~() tll th e'
,)rher tine ~'eople :U J,) hn \Xl i ley & S,)n $, R;lh e' li 1\1i Ilman, e,iiturial ;l~s i"t:mt, ./u;mne S Iike ,
(,)r c" lpyediting, Jeff Bake r, for ,Iesign and l="lge i:tYL1U t.
Fur v:tlLlable inpllt ;1f1,1 I'ermissi()n ru use nwterial, my ;Ipl'reci:ltio[l goes (() J:lmes R.
rbty II, Tilt-up Concrete Aos,)c i:uion; Parrici;l A. Canfie kl, N;ni"n;ll Sc)cie ty ()t Prufes-
,inned Sllrveyl) r~; lvk hael A. C.lss icly, Truss Plate In."titute; Judith Durham , An:.hitecrurJl
\X/ooJwork lootitute; ;mel J:Hnes Hi eh, lvbrhle Institute of A merica. M y thanb ;dso tu
K:lthleen M. Hooper, A ln e ricC1n S,lCit'ty t~l r Te:,;ting a nd lvbteriab; .lim Owens, India lw
Li,m>wne Institute (lfAme rica; Kathl een PL)WerS, AutL)c i:,ved Aerated Concrete Pwducr
Assoc i:ttioni Christophe r E. Sur;lk , C() mp0site Pane l :,\ss()ci;uion; ;H1d Terry Zinn,
Kitchen C~lbinl't Manuf;1Cturers AS"L1C iation.
For the First Edition

I th:mk the m:my ['eople whu prov id ed I' im] illf"rt11atio n t,) make the first eciiti')[1 ,)f this
I',lok co mpl ete. Credit gc)es t, ) Ken Le rc h J nd Har<lld RL1V in~ , S trllL'tur~d S late Cump;.my;
Jim Owens, Indi;lIl'" Lilne ~ t')fle Ills titute; tvfi c h:ld B:lkl"r: , Facing Til e In "tirute; Phil Ped ·
('[:-,In , G l8Jding, \kBedl1; ,mel Bruc e P'lL,[ey, Americm In"tirute "fTimber C,)J1,;tru c ri')n.
Th ;mb i, ~Ibu du e t" C ree: I\Llrre n,,,, n, Tlmbelwekl (\)[np~U1V; D,JI' iJ Kret'ichrn ;ll1n ,
Fo re'sr Prc,dllcts LJlx,r:lt(On' i ( :h:lrlie C( )ehring. Trltss Phlte In.s tirute; P;l ul N ich olas, TrLb "
J,)iq y!:,cm ilhn; Cnlthl:1 \ liri (l , :\ll1 t' ric;:111 S,J(iet \, ,) t LlJ1ciscll'e A rdlireu"i Jetf L .l\vin-
·k" ,' \me ric:m Archi rn:tura l \1:II1UfILtllrt'fS /\,~,)ci;lti ('n: Bill Lin ~nell, LinL:l1e ll
C:.;n~liltin g SC [\(u.>; B,d· F,)rd, Ll,er /\li~nmcl1L Illc : ,\11 ,[ Dt'rric:k f-hrel,), N:(tl(mal Ter-
:':t::, ; ,In,1 Yk)s~lic :\ " '.),: i 'H iL' n .
L
Introduction
Introduction to the Second Edition

T h c' l-/.llldhvc,k I-,f Cunsrrllcci',';Jl T'/n(tnccs prclvides architects, enl;i llcers, Ccliitractur-" inte-
ri, ,r clc .; i,:;ner.:-;, hwyers, 31hl clthers in v(, lved in the CLlnstruniclll inclu::'try with :1 single -
', :lIre,' ret"erenc'e [,' the rhc luS8ncis Lit industry-::,tanciard tul erances f'lf the manufacture,
f:lh iGltic,n, dn..:i in:.;uILlti,lll (If celil strilcriun mareri:li" and cu mpone nts. The intc,rnwti un
it contJ ins e m be used m aill in J es ign :l nd detailing, te, write bette r spec ifications, to es-
t:lHish what normal practi ce a nd sta nda rd ,)f care are, to ai(1 in co n structiun supervision,
:mel t,) set tle disputes.
Th e c urre nt edition of this b,)ok updates and expands features in the first edition. The
industry tOle ra nces t,x ll1d in the firs t editiun have heen upcia ted if th ey ha ve changed.
~cw sec tions have heen adJed o n right-e,(-way cunstruction, aU((lcicwed aera ted CLlncrete,
tilt-up concrete panels, ime rillr st, lne wall cladding, stru ctura l ins l da ted panels, c1ecura-
tive a rc hitectural glass, hmin ateJ arc hitectural Hat glass, anc l bent glass . Finally, a new
Part .3 h~b been added lm measure ment. Tupics in this parr inc lu(le measuring device::; and
the meth ods o f measurement, th e un certai nty of measurement in con struction, and h ow
the designe r can effecti ve ly ..:Iocum e nt a nd enfurce tolerances o n a project. These topics
h a\,<;: seldo m been covereel as related tll building cnnstrucril)!1 a nd a re especially impo rtant
when conside ring the task nf measuring fc,r compliance with A me ri cans with D isab ilities
Act C-\DA) :lCcessibility reguiati,lns and (, ther building cudes. Co mpliance with t'ller-
~ Il1CeS c:ll1cllll y rIO ~1Chit"; C'll when co rren measurement pr'ltoc,l l, a re used.
lnterestingly, there 3fe st illll1 :my Cll!1Strudiun tolerances that d'l not exist as industry
:>c;1l1Jm,:k ;\Ithuugh m:my can be deri\'ed ti-clln cclmbined incli viell ia l and accumulated wl-
CLll1 CeS , the vZ1riclUS tr:lde ;1 S,"C iiltilll1~ need tcl lcmtinue work o n se tt ing real i,tlC and en -
fll rc<"<lble st:lIldZlr('1s fCI!' bc,t h tu le ra n ces anci unit0fl11 mc'asure111e nt prtltucol,. Thi , is
csrec i:d Iv the e lse in th e ;! reas elf 3cce,s ibil ity and cocle ((l mpl iance_
;\~ in [he_fi r-t eLiitiun, both c uswmary U.S. units el lso ca ll ed Eng lish or inch -pclund
units) ~lnd Sy~ temt: [nterna ti u n ,de (SI) units are used in this bu,)k. (Je nera li y, the cuswm -
~ lry L .S. ullit I' used tir~r, with rhe S ll.lflit in parentheses. H o wever, wh e n a trade associ -
,Il io n ,) r "r~ll1J:lrd.,-wntlng llrgalli :atiun US6 Sf units a5 the preferrecl meas urement, the SI
un ~ ts :lrt give n first, with the CIlStl,llllMy L.S. Imit in parenthese~.
:\5 bc:to re . h11liv.1lent S ilInit5 mav n e,t re lllllslstent thrclllghlilJt rhe bUclk. [n this r()ok
::::1 :,ll1ib Cic-Vt' L,['c-ci h ;] track il,s« '!( i,lt i,)!1, l»c!e-v.Tlting hudv, standards (,rgani:dtilJl1, "r
,,, lin rc' {<::rtr: ccl!t' I'rll1tt',1 Z1S ,.1t'l'e ic'r ed hy rh;1t ;::ruup. F. ,r e X~ll1r l e , cHle ,_,rga ni:.ltiun lli:W
': , n" c: rf I ! ~ aL f..16{ !llln . w hil,~ :m ''-'rhe r ;2 ru uf' may ll.' e 610m a, the c'qulv8lenr ~I climen -
·" 'ill. \X 'lk n :, .'·dt c-·,n·.'- c;,i" n h .l" he t- n lluJe (rdm ') L'S. C Ll ~[() m; lry unit. [he e·_ltiiv,-.J l:'nt
::1 ,.' Ii1 :c ,:-i·"11 i, '~c l1 el: j li\' r' ;I I r:( ! ~' c1 ,_,If ',,' th t' :1t'a r"r milillTlc'fd telr ·. lill1 cIL<i('llS UII.Jer l in .,
-.'. fh e' , :, : :r~' Si ~ l); 1I1 j, or hr~c r ,. I;: I,e!1, i,:o n':. ':1[- t·", dk' f1 c'are,' t k llt h ",f "\ rtl ercr \\ hen 11I.:!'eT :'
xvi Introduction
Introduction to the First Edition

III the Ctllbtrllctitll1 indu>try. :ll1l1l:l teri :IL :He ,b:,:ull1e,1tl) h:lve ' r l'c it'ic dill1 t' lbi ,)lIS :1n,1 t
1( 'c<1 ti, lns tlf construction d e mel\ts :Ir,,' ,linlensiol1t.',1 on the dr:l\v ing, t,l a th cc)retic i
e X:JC t ~'t'"itiun rehtive to clOe ,lr mure da tum p(J ims. ( )t Cl'urse, in reality :111 ,lill1e nsit'
.I [h l f"l, iti,"lb uf il1st~llIed 11\ ~lte ri :1I s v:lry st llnewh"t. The acce pt:lhle ;Imc)unt clf this v:'lr'
ti ,m is the tolerance of the m :lteri~1 ,lr ir1.,t:tlkcl pu:< iri,lO 'If the m:ltl'rial. h~ r s,lIne !lute
ab, such ,IS shop- t',ilxicJted wind,lws , the \':lriati on ma y he S,l ,;Iight :IS t,:. l'e insignifi c;1l
Fl) r ,)ther m:lteri ;1Is, 'S uch :1S cast -in -place cclncrete, the :dl, ,\v:lble t()ler:llKC m;IY be in :
llrtie r ,I f m:lgl1itude ,-)f several inche:; :ll1d m:lV aJ\'crsel y :.Iffec t the instalbti o n 'If oth
C, )l1lp()l1ents. While 5nme m<1te rial s C;1I1 he CUSt(l ll1-cut :lilt! fit :It the jllb ., ite, oth ers C, 1I1
tl'l11ll the fador\' in :1 fiX t,d s i:e a nd must be :ltt:Khed to previoudy :\ cunstructed frame. P
lit the mate ri a ls must be fit toget he r tll s<lti ,:;fy the functicll1a l requirements 'If the huildir
" ,hile be ing relsnn,1 bly eCt1l10mic to huikl.
The constructi o n inclustry is uniq ue in th:1t ttl le cmces r,mge fwm tho lls<lndths of J
inch k)[ ma ny manuf~c t ured item s to seve ral inches fo r ma n y field installed co mlx l n e nt
Each r:mge of tolerances is impo rtant in its clwn right , ,mel t he ~rchite c t and contractl
mw;t knuw what tulerances apply fc)r any g ive n situati on . Then the wlerances must he ~l(
cn miliodated wit h adequa te cleara nces between adjacent eleme nts :1I1d with adjustabl
co nnecticll1s tlr ar rwpriate ly sized ju ints.
Acceptable construction to le rances have becclme established over ~1 lo n.g time . Som
:ire simrly cons idered stanlbrd practice based tll1 years o f field experience a bo ut what i
prac ti ca l and readily achieva ble . M any me based un standards that srecific industries ha v
puhlished a nd reflec t what each industry ag rees is reasonable <:IS a babnce betwee n ease LI
constructi ,ll1, quality, and cos t. BeC1Use of this evuiution, there are innumerable wier
ances that architects, engineers , suppliers, fabrica tors, and contractors must knclw ~1bl> u
and acc ommodate to build well.
For th e firs t t ime , the A rchitect's Handbook of Cons truction Tolerances asse mbles tht
thousands of industry-standard and standard-practice tolera nces t~, r the manufacture , fa b,
ricat icm, and installa t ion of huntlreus of cc) nstructicll1 assemblies, from struc tural steel t(
cera mic tile , a nd shmvs h ow clim e nsi() nal variations mus t be aCCtll11111c,dated in mday',
buiklings. Whether yuu are :111 architect, intericlr des igne r, contract.or, () r specification
writer, yo u will find thi s book in valuable fo r ,lesign ing and de ta iling, establi shing what
l1 urm al practice is, se t tling disputes in the field , and writing mn re accurate specifications.
Because current co nstructi o n techniques require using ~1 cnmbinati o n of factory-built
and site -buil t compo nents assembled in complex ways, it is mo re importa nt tha n eve r that
ynu unde rstand wh a t no rma l wletances a re, h uw the y can accumulate during construc -
ri ,'n, :1I1t1 how you can plan for the m bef,xe they cause trn uble . Ton ofte n, whe n the rea l-
ity <)f tulerances are ignored, the res ults can include costly field modifi cati o ns, dela ys,
des ign compromi ses, c,r even failure nf a builuing co mpunent. Thi s book arms yo u wi th
the know led ge yo u need to help avo id these kinds of rmblems () n yr>ur [,mjens.
P:m 1 l.,f this hO'lk includes a ll [vpes " f mate rial and as;;e mhl y tole rances, from ~truc
tur~il concrete and m,1sonry to fini sh componel1t~ lib:- a rchi tectu r~1 WC)l'c:!wc)rk and ce il -
ings. L leh m ~'lterial, bbricati,m, insta llat iun, ur erection wletil nce is ,.;liowl1 grZlphi c: dl y,
mak ing it easv tc' qu ickl y pull, lut eX3ctlv wh ,l t \'lH I n eed. 111 additi,)l1, \U tl will fin ll guiJ -
ilnee lID how ,)l1e Ol,lteri a l t"lerJnce re btes to an(lthe r ::lI1d he)'\' dimensicln~11 v ~lriatic'n s
, h" ld,1 he KCcltlnted t~) r in design a nd cunstrllction . :\mu ng t. he- man v wle rance J :Jt:l \'c',!J
n ill r'in!' rhh h,m , ll")l)k
Idrocluc tiOI1 xvii
~ ' ~i l" " \' ., ·\ I1"L \;lr i:li'l'.·n [, I C"l!" ; ,[ w!-: en :'lrchi tecrlIral PkCI 'l '."lllr,: te l',III'I" > ([( '111
;J;" 1' L1 :\ t
~ i ;;·. · , hlL '~lIiJdillf;" t; II' C,licrc fL, '~rh , d[, :md [wJ ' :'i rn :111 p:l l ing
• \ " , c" <1-, .• ' .'1 .11LhrJo 1:11' c;l·c ·ill l,h,'C C, llkrl'tc (,'n.,tI:uct.I, ·Il
• f"q !.' i:'h 11\ ' II ' [ , ' :l IFi,:il':l ce Jitr l'.:nsi,.n :'11 di ffcTl' nces (c'r stru erl ICll >te d (dIbr rUC
I " lll .,, :,! h.I'.v rn p\ll·d," t;lr :.1lr:llllln,- nr ,·f ,lther C,ln ',' I.ruClI ,-'n m:H "· I' i:·tls r,) t he:
. r,·,,[ (r. lilli,
• l\l. 'L ~'" lilt t h ,· l· :l~i,· re'j uirc:m t nrs !() r unit lll ~l~onrl' ir,clucli ng (,JIldctL' bLx k.
j,ri, :< .II ·: J (' 1'('1', re:rr:1 C,,lrt:1
• ["'C"l i[.' Ih e: r.,ikran (·; s f'l r <::xr t' riur sr,me cbdding .mel illu str:I[C, h e,w w d e Di! it
I.. ,Lrucui'JI fr:1111in;:;
• [ l,· tr: ( ;ll:' tr:lte> rhc (in c' pl)illt~ ,lf ~1 (c Llml1lod :Hing int,:ri,Ir m:1teria l to le r:lllceS at tin ,
I:.j :c o; ,' Ut It :IS st,.'IW, r :mei ing , ce Llings , :lnd mo re
• U r;;:\ n i:es \\-rn t you n eed co kno w for lle t::lil in g fine cnbinerry <md other woodwLl rk
• j.JU1[i t'ie s [he ,':tri:m ces inv',l IVed wi th Zllurninul1l curtain wa ll comtruction
• St't ' I___,rrh {he ge nernll y :Kc epted limi ts f,)r gypsum w::l llb,x1rd c,)n, rrucri u n includ -
il1~~ gb.'" reiI1f')1:c'ed gv r sul11
~ lliustr:lt t:, the: tL, ler:1l1 c e~ for cerZlmic .mel qu a rry tile so yo u know \Vh~1t kinds of fin -
i, ll in :; t,l lh ti"ms r,l expeCt
• l';-uviJc'i the b:I,., ic (bra for tl(lo ring m ~1te riab >uch .15 terra::o , stone, a nd wuud
• [ li;cll!-:·es th e degree ,If perfec ri o n yo u Gm expect with v::lri,-m s rypes ,Jf gla: ing m;)-
1,'riJ b
• ( ;1 \ ('5 guiJelines for h, )\\' to get the most fwm deco rative :lnd ornamenra l merab
(,' 1' high ,qu:11ity interi o r detailing
ri)u:,tr.1te~ the v:)riati ,) llS ,:ommon with wood and meL'll duo r Zl nd frame cOnStrLlc-
ril'n J i1d irn,l lbri o l1
• :,:. iv~,··A" dw c.) mm on dime n ' io n:ti vari3tions of windo ws and their insrallati,)J1, in-
dlldin :,! '\"")(1. stee l. Jnd a luminum produ ct:;
.. llL:, c':nc", !row to) accommod Zlte com bi nations of tc) l e r~1nces c,) '11mo nly fuund in
!', udJ i n£' C·.)ll SUUd iun such '\~ illa:io nry venee r on ,I sreel o r c,)ncre te {rZline and p re-
,:· t:;t Ce.i r: ,: :-.: c·: u n :1 ., teel (fame:
" [J r,)\·,. ,;,:::. c;J:,:"e,::" J cl(: t:1iL: r~" r p:lrti cularly tro uhleso me materi:;d :md asseml,l ly [,)ler-
:n e e" rl1:1[ ::r.; <)f~en e)verl(;,)ko,d
r h,: li ~;~' '' nl r i(' 11 :lb"ut e:lch to lerance fullo\\'s an identiul f(lt'lnat tu h e ll' ~pt'('d ', (' Ul'
:. < '> e l" f: r, t , ,1 jr:1 I'-' ir: g sh, ,,\\,:; the m:ltc:ri :ll or insralb:l ~ l s~ embl y . ,i th the rertin ent Ji-
! ' ';'i ;;' ['Ai:,[ -.':',rL'lli"n JlloweJ C\' :)11 inc1ustry ~ tZlll,brd ,)r h ' co mmon p racti ce, N ex t . (I n tb e
j ;,' en ·.:; 1' 1:<'::, l h c' ;'c' i~ J h icf writte n Jc-~cri p ti (\ [l :lb( lI,1( rh e essenti al bus '~ ,) nce rning cb."
" "' I>.J ","ll t oh''lVll ~Il,d the to li:T~Il1(b in 'l'l\ved. The arp lieab le industry :; t:Jn(brJ "m'::,ltJ i-
-" L 'l \w : i rd ':'Y OIn t"LlnJ:II\ l n um h ::r ;.ne lisrc''] in C:i~<: vo u W:IIH r;" -Ie" m,· re rese ,lrc!-r, .\fte r
" :1" : ,,, i:.: cI h;,~i j i:;(: I:.'s i') fl '.)( {he rulel'~inc t:s and h,)'.\ (h e,' LJ[l be ;·I(("mHhl(b (t': .l ,\I th
r .~. l<::i '-lt! J n~ ;tr~.J '~~ I,~ ;; : : t rllct 1 0 1l I ;,c (h·,-,d ~ . Fill ;·d l ~l . c r ('5:) .. rc:fe ~t:n (C'5 tl~} ftl:) ("t'.-i ~-\->cr i \ · I j ,~ i ~g
~ i .. .:.~. ; n ,~' i
.!.Jt:"'d :-J'j ',",; ; 1 (.'in \ ~t..:·:> ~'(J~n~ I Lt ~ht"' ;;<;S(: IlIt." l~) (J f.~ (· \' cT.?d iF~::it'.: ri ~-d ~~ if l"l~~·~: t'::-;;:<_· , ~·\·.
:.;~· r ,J [t :I;. >,,:,.J:: · ~,.l~i rc·~ s~s th e ;:dl ~:. nt ~0 r t;:· , n[ :: ubj .:·([ \. ~( ,1 ..:.\.:u rnu L,[::-(i \..j' !i1t'n "'i,,-n ,)\
· ·,:i-. :.. ~r ! 1. 1:' ~ ~ · •.~C"": ~I :· Y\'he r~ ~, ::: t.'a1 ilt ~J\~ i1 1in."'c r ~' ;l c f:-i i1 C(:", !:'I; i i<! :~ ~ , ,. -, t:.c ; 1 :' 1 <-,'J ~2r « ~·: h ':'!l
; ~~l.:,:n:. ri;"'j :.. ~'I:-'=' c <~F:! ; in (:'.~~ in slI ..:h J \V ~; '/ d·'. :·!L i.--'c,r;-i ~ ~ di~' ;-;C(c'r L)t:l c.' ; ~n ,,·dl. ': .'·I\·j .,ti'.. "n ..
\. 1 i f~':":: r -:' !~ ':.'.-: . r<(:< i \\:i n .·~ : 1\..: \\ \" b i ~; '~ ;'; i I ,-V':L'J ~'- ,'\1' ~,J ~ , :'V'; ': : ' ~.l '.. , I; ~ r; ~ :~I t 1 1'. -:' ~ i: \\;; P
;- : l '~ ~· i. -'; ·..1 · ~··, ,";,\J (: n1::' ~ ~ :: -=-l:. ~' ,n-- d": : :id ,j L' :1\\: ir;~~ > :--!,·).....:-.,i, L .::··\' :-,. ;..~ -. : .·t::-~"" : ! lll.~ !:~:'l ::~ i '~
xviii Introduction
- . ... _ ---_. _ - - - .._ ._ - . -- - -
Because tulerances can vary:icl much, 'llw:IYS Lliscllss them with the supplier, LJhric ,lt,
c()ntt:lC tL)r, and insw ller tu Llete rmine 'lCcepahk' ,lmuun t, for ,1 specific arp licati(m. Thl
include the tolerances in the spec ili c lti,l n,. In the tielLt contractor, ofte n do nut huild
tht' theoret ica l to lerances gi ven in inLlustrv sLlIlLbrds (or even know them) so they shUll
be IisteLI in each section 01 the ~rec ific lti,m" especially when they are critiGl l L)r serve
the basis tur subsequent fini sh wurk. In SU Il1 t.' C,lses, the required t(l le r:l nces may be mo
stringent tha t industry standa rds, so unless they Me c blrly spelled LJlIt in th e specific
tions, the cuntractor may build to the less exact ing Llimen5ion.
Th roughollt this book both English and SI units :ire used. In mus t cases , the En g li~
measurement ,lr unit is given first with the equi valent S I unit in parentheses. The eLlui'
alent S I unit ma y n ot be consistent in all parts of the bu,)k. For eX<l mple, 1/4 inch may ~
considered 6.4 mm in some places, wh ile it may be 6 mm in others. This is because in SOil
cases the equi valent SI unit is a mathematical con version using standard conversion fa.
tors and rounded off, while in o ther cases the S I equi va lent is the standard adopted hy
particular trade assoc iation or testing agency and published to a spec ific degree o f acCl
racy. These published SI tolerances have been reprod uced without adjusting th em for cor
sistency with nonstandardized S I units. A s the United S tates slowly con ve rts to the me tri
syste m, mo re and more tolerances will be published in both systems.
Whether you are involved with the deSign, construction, or evaluation of building.
you will find this book a valuable additio n to your reference co llecti on . It will give yo u a
easy -to- use guide to the thousands of construct ion to lera nces c urrently in use and hel
you avo id countless detailing p roblems.
How SI Units Are Used in this Book

This ed ition of the Handbook of Construction Tolerances includes equ iva lent measure
men ts, using the Systeme Internationa le (SI), in the text and illustrations. H oweve r, th,
use of S I units for construction and book publishing in the United S tates is prob le matic
This is because the building construction industry in the United States (with the excep
tion of federa l construction) has generally not adopted the metric system, as it is com
mon ly called. Equiva lent measurements of customary U .S. units (a lso ca lled English 0
inch-pound units) are usually given as soft conversions usi ng standard con ve rsion fac tors
This always results in a num be r with excessive significant digits. When construc tion i:
done using S I units, the building is des igned and drawn acco rding to hard conve rsio ns
where planning dimensions and building products are based on a metric module from thE
beginning. For example, studs are spaced 400 mm on ce nter to acco mm odate panel prod ·
ucts th at are manufactured in standard 1,200-m m widths.
During the transition to Systeme Internat ionale units in the United States, code-writ-
ing bodies, federal laws (such as the ADA), product manufacturers, trade associations, and
other construction -re lated industries ty pically still use the customary US system and
make soft conversions to de ve lop SI equivalents. Some manufacturers produce the Senne
pro(luct using both meas uring systems. Although there are industry standards for develop-
ing SI equi va lents, there is no consistency fo r rounding (l tf when conversions are made.
For example, the Interna tiona l Building Cude shows a 152-mm equ ivalent when a 6- in.
dimen ~ icm is requ ired. The ADA. A ccessib ility G uidelines shows a 150-mm eCJuivalent for
the same dimension.
For the purposes of this buok, the tdk)wing cunvent i,Jns have been ~ldcl~'ted.
TbrLlugh(lut this bO(lk, th e customary L;.S. measurements <Ire given firs t and tbe SI
eqU iva len ts to llclw in parenthe)e~. 1n the rext, the unir suiiix6 fur h.:lT h s v~tem~.' lIch :1:o (t
-
Introduction XIX
,\I' :::IL, :d'L ,h,',II) 11111:e: tllrH!, the Illlrnl'er \0':1111<:', :tlld L:.s,lInil 'lIfhXe':' ,Ire' givL'1l
11.1,11',
: >( 'I:'" fl., ,'[,_ ) ,)",1 ril" Sf ':111l<C ,Itrn [h:H ill p:m:nthc'ses f'lIt ll'irhr l1.lt 1I1llb it the' [ll111l-
:',': I ' :Ii IlIdll:lIdc:I' l'IIt Illlh the unit if It I" lIle'ters elr ,elme Llriwr unit teXLcf't IIlI1lirne'te'fs,
n, I' ;, 'il, l\\:' '[I lIlJ lid C' llbl fI.1,t 1r1l1 pLIL [ice' tur S I 1111 i t, ,In arL' h Itt'L'wr:d clr,1WI ngs; ; I OlllTl-
i-,'r i' U1:Lkr,tell,'I tel be' III 1IIIIIIITlt'lt'rS IIIlle-SS "line e'ther ullit i, giVt'Il, The L'XLc'ptiUIl tIl
:hl' c,'Il\L'llti,lIl ,)CLllrS l,hL'Il:, I1Ilml:wr I, h:l,eLI un:m intefl];I[iLln;11,tI1ncbrrl ur Pf(lclllCt,
Ii: lill' (:1Se, tile [-,rilllaI'v ITle:1SlIfeITlellt is givell fiLit in SI lInit, WIth th<:' U,S, <:,qulvillent III
1',I1'cnthc'SL'" The: ullit slItfix I" shLlwn fe)[ both ill the text as wdl as m the illll,str:lti,m, tLl
;i\"( 'i...} (( ~ntu~il )(1_
\\'I;L'n there is:1 Lltiu ',lI' .SUITle Lelrnbin;1tiLln e,f units wht're it might be confustll,l(, lInit
,1Ittixcs :IlT lIsed r'ej[ :dlllllnlhers; fur example, 6 mm/) m,
\V[wn il 'it;mcLlfrb-writing llrganiwtiLln ,lr;1 trade :1SsoL'iatiLln gives cllIal unib for a par-
ticubr II1c:;]SlIrt'mCnr, thLlse Illllnbers Clre lIO;ecl exactly as they CLlme fwm the source, FClr
L'Xllmrle, one gWlIp might lise 6.4 film as the equivalent for 114 in., while anLlther organi-
:lltiL1ll might lise 6 mm,
\X/hr::n :111 Sl collversiull is lIsed by a code :lgency, such as the International Building
Cude (lBC or published in anLlther reguiati(ln, such as the ADA Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG), the 51 equivalents lIsed by the issuing agency are printed in this bOLlk. For ex-
!Be lIses a 152-ll1m equivalent when i1 6-in, dimensiLln is required, while the
;\Inple, the
ADAAG gi\e~ a liO-rnm eqlliv;llent for the SlIme dimension.
If a specific Cllllversicl[l is nLlt otherwise given by i1 trade associ:1tion or standards-wrlt-
ing organi:'ltiun, when CUll verted values are [(lunded, the 51 equivalent is fUunded to the
Ilearest millil1lder for nllmbers under a few inches unless the dimension is very small (as
for small wler~mces like 1/16 in.), in which case a more precise decimal equivalent is
given.
For dimensions (lver :1 few inches, the 51 equivalent is rounded tel the nearest 5 mm
:md to the [leareS( 10 111m fur numbers over a few feet. When the dimension exceeds sev·
era] feet, the number is rounJed to the nearest 100 mm.
Part 1
Construction
Tolerances
1fllrrr flIt . _ 'llfii l

Figure 1-1 Horizontal building layout
right angle as offset:
steel tape: ±3/4" (19) in 100' (30.5 m) (Latta)

micropter transit: ± 1IS" (3) in 100' (30.5 m) (Latta)
construction laser: ±1 /32 " (0 .74) in 100' (30 .5 m)
ISO 4463 acceptable deviation: ±l .S\lL mm
For example, in 30.5 m (100')

offset tolerance is ±S.3 mm (±3/S")
J I .
--- ----- -0
J J
J J
J J
J J
J I
J J
I J
J J
'.
o
I
J J IS 4463 acceptable deviation:
J
J
J J
J
J I .
Po sition points:
up to 4 m (13'): ±3.0 mm (±lIS")
J
I
J
J
, ove r 4 m: ±l.SYL mm
J J '.
J J
J J For example, in 30.5 m (100')
J
J
J tol erance is ±S.3 mm (±S/16")
J ..... .
J J ,.'
I I
J J
I J
L(m
J J
J
J I
J I
J I
!----------Ep-----------
J ,
- ~ -- r - - -----------0
J
J
I
I
J I
J J I
I
J J
J
right angle layout as ~gle:
o
IS 4463 acceptable deviation:
J J Secondary points:
,, J J I up to 7 m (23'): ±4.0 mm (3/ 16")
steel tape: ±2 min of angle (Latta) .'
J I ove r 7 m (23') : ±l .SVL mm
micropter transit: ±20 sec of angle (Latta)
J
I ,
J
construction laser: ±S sec of angle
For example, in 30.5 m (100')
,, J J
tole rance is ±S,3 mm (±S/16")
,.I , J
ISO 4463 acceptable deviation: ± ~9 degrees
,
J J
J
L (m)
I I For example, in 30.5 m (100')
i t-·~",~olerance is 0.0163" or 58.7 sec of angle
I
,
,,
J • J
;
\
,
.. linear dimensions with steel tape (Latta):
-- -
------------0
I
,
o
±l /S" (3) up to 10' (3 m)
I ±1/4" (6) 10' to 100' (3 m to 30.5 m)
o ±1/4" (6) per 100' over 100' (over 30.5 m)

with construction laser:
± 1/ 16" (2) up to 6,000' (1,800 m)
Chapter 1
Building Layout and

Sitework
1-1 Horizontal Building Layout

Description
\,.)nc elf (he Hr~[ ,,<)llr(6 ()( imlc Cllracib in huiLlIl1J;! (in~tr llcti (l\I is rhe e, t : d; li ~ htn e m d '
huricun w 1 ,mel vtrri c:d rc f,re nc i\1,~ ~v~te rn ~ t; )[ [he hyc)ut ,j ~I bUiklirI <, :1I1e1 sllh;e~lue nt
11l;lrking "Ili ll e ~ ~lI1d Ix nchm8 rb t'o r hori zon t: d :m d ve rt ic '] dirn c ll , i l) n~ ;'I S c'(lI1 :;trIl , ri,)[l
proceed:; . L'JY (l llr is ,lc>pen cien [ ,)11 th e :lc c ur:lc \, " t' th e in~ tnlln e l1t~ u,)ccl, :15 we ll ,I:' ,",n e n -
\irc nlflel1ul "))nditi~) n s :llld [h e "kil l u f [h e ~1el)p k ,",i n g [he h yul\[. This .x·C [;Jln mdllde<;
s,)me ,;{ the h " f\Z, ) nl :d LlV,)lIt :1CdILKi es pos)iHt' I\'i[ll \':Hi( lIl, imL rLlm d Il " :b~ lllnillg the
survey~1r lise,· :I n,Al1ul ciegke o f skill. Thi, :,eOhm :d SCl ,c;ivcs :KClILI(V ~ Lln ~l:lrL Is ,g i'!ell in
three pllhlic::ltium. Refe r t, ) se c ti clll5 (In , p<x ific m :lteri,lb ffx in~hls rrv ~ 1 :'lIlcl :Hd t,) le ran ces
for e8ch sj.'ec ific 111;lteri:1l. Refer to C lupr e r 17 t;J[ mu re Int(' n n:l lil' l1 '. 111 [he c1C C LlLK V ,Jf
me lsurin g i Il~trlll1l e n ts and m eTho d s of me:·lsurem e nt .
\'\/i t h c urre ntl y :l v:,ibl>le slIrv ev in g equq;li11enr , it i,,; [x ,,::- a'i e' r',1 Ia\ () llt ~I hllddin g :mel
lIlo ni w r C\) l1"tnlu i(HI with :\ hit,; h .:leg r-::c: "i JCClIr:'IC\, ill m a nv c;r,es mil c h Iri:.!h t r (h ~1Il is
gener3 1\ \ rcquireci t~)r m (I~ [ cl1 n ~ t[u ct icl\l. Bec;) lI~c "i [hi , ()C [ an, ll:'c'cluoe th e re ~I re tew
st:l[lcbrd, f.A s;ellC: Ld hudJing la v',Hl t , tht.: :Jrchltt:,: t :1\'1'.1 e n~: lll ter ,h," JlLI Ck:lrI\"[;([I: III [h t'
spc::cit ic:)[1,,111, Ivk lt [,'\ <:'1':)1,«" :) rc' n:clilircci , r c,,~ ,)g nicill .>: rh :l[ h! :ch<::r .J, ~ ~;rc' e ' ot :1Lcu ra~:y
;2(:ll<:' I'8I1 , will [e's ult 111 hi (: h c' I'c·':lsrs .
References
J. [( " h:I (( llr:l c ie') III CO llst r\J c th l'~ '"
LIlta, C:mci,f:" n 8 1ilUi llJ [Ji :'d[ 1 -: I, April [')75.
1:'1l: .Ln,.:, U,/ ,1 BI,\!.ii;il) DiX:C::;[S, 15 I-b)) (OtL1W;J, U\:: 111:,Q (l Ite' k 'l Ht",, :lrc'!', in
C,'11:' WJCl i,·;n. >'hr i,.\I1:Ji Rt .st:l!"ch Cuuncil CJ n:4 ,:.! :I, 1'\:'9.
:vf..;,k' )un.li1rJ,; "f 1)1'" ,:[;,-,' ( \.~; ,1I1 h e !')I' llr:!, ~l [) :",l[I ;)r lJ l .>. ,c iell d }\,;t" >~"' II: , 1 S ur vcv "
')1" , ~(~(l-,) \V\A W. ' I(,lI, . nc't/n "r~ ! 111 uc\ e' I, r : lI llhrd , .i-mn I.
~'l f 5T /-f,-"'r.:/" ,,.. k H · ~\.\'; ,; , SeU id l1 5.52 ((;3, ;!I ('r,I"<lj',: , \\ 1> \: 11 ;" 11; ,1 1,-; , [; [\.1 [<:' ",t
::::r:irl,LH,I, '111,'\ Tcd\J 1,'lk,"v ') I : ttr :!': t,. nl s r. ~\ ·;'.;! ~" l; ( ; I, 'l " ~ )i.' _' .':;:; h44tcYj. lll \1l .
Pr._,- I ll,~ r Il rC-L~nJl\' : F:u-,) I~:(~L ri\.J kj~ i .=s. [;:t..~. ',\ \-';\ \< ·.;':~_r ·~ . \= ··' ~1 : L ~ t ' t (' , '---..i t '. >.':~)t r~ ~~; ,:,
\ -. \ ':.. "'\ ,C JI..' ,'1, " ~_~ _~·l .' ':' ".! " r -;:: i J \. ; .C:d n \, 'T '~T'\ L ,_~ n f)I ):-;. ll: t o•• :-:; ~ :~: ~"-. -...(t-'i : ~ ~ ,, \\·\ 1," ....;. ,~ ; ' ,~", Ii . " " :J ", )
:ll Li rr : rn I~!.c, \ v..' ,,\ · h . [r ir; d·--i ~'. c o n.1 ).

1 < :~-.' ·~ ·~l) .~ -t. ,\L"j»r': i~il::~~ [ \L;d~-:·d . , :>J'"( E3 : {{:~L :;.-: ::~-- ·>Cl ril< 1:. -~,~ ' ; :" \\" ; _~~:; ,- l h' ; i ;-" I-',"i;
,
fTTIllt l r ; ;
,
! III [ II
I I
111 111
4 Part 1: Construction Tolerances
Allowable Tolerances
Althuugh there ,Ire nu gener:) lly c1ccertcd srand;InJ s that :He widely used fnr huilding la,
" llt in the U nited S tates, une intern,niunal swnd ard ~ll1d ,lne U.S. l11\ldd standard ma y I·
used tu ga uge what is rea listicall y p,)ss ibl e for m,lst r,uilcling cunstructi<ln :mel laY<lut ,)f sit
elements. The~e standards 111,)Y r,e used tu .guide the develupment ,)f spec ifi ca ti u ns f(lr ir
dividual huilding pr"jecrs <)r to determine ~I reas,'nahle standard in the ab~e nce of spec it'i
projec t requirements.
Inrernati,)nal stand ard ISO 446 3- 1, ;Vlc(lsltrt' Jnent \l<!thods f('JY Building- Setting Ow (I n
'\'It'L1sltrt' Jnt'nt, ,lesc rihes lx,)cedures f(lr est,)hli,hing a survey grid, relating it to a huildin
site, and est,)hlishin.g huilding by,)U( and contr,)l r ,) ints ba3ed un prGperty b(lttndarie, ,1(1,
majo r survey c,)ntrol points. It gives guidance ,)n measurement methods and acceptanc.
criteria (to lerances ) fGr variuus stages uf the process, which includes the primary system
the sec,mdary system, and i',)siti,m points. The rrimary syste m is connected to the nfficia
con twl system (nJ ti<)nal, municipa l, elr u ther higher-order c,)ordinate system) and nor
mally cove rs the entire site. The secondary system is that structural or o ther grid referenc(
system that is used t; lr the erectio n of a particular building. Pusition points mark the loca·
tion of individual elements in the building, both horizontall y and vertically. The standarc
gives acceptance criteria for distance measu rement, angle measurement , plumbing, and
the es tablishment of levels. The [SO ac ceptance criteria are shown in Figure 1-1 fo r sec-
ondary and pos ition po ints and in Figure 1-1.1 fo r primary positioning. For building con-
struction, the acc urac y of individual building layo ut (seco ndary points) and position
points within a building are , in most cases , more impo rtant than the exact position of the
building o n the site. The acceptable values in ISO 4463 - 1 are for general layout and not
specific materials. In this standard, the tolerance level is typica lly given in terms of the
length being measured.
Fo r the structural grid o r reference grid of a building, ISO 4463 suggests that a reason-
able linear dimension tolerance can be ±4.0 mm (± /i'o in.) for distances up to 4 m (13 ft .)
and ± 1.5 mm for distances ,wer 4 m (13 ft.), where L is the length in meters. Fo r position
points, ISO 4463 suggests that a reaso nab le tolerance can be ±3.0 mm (±;;,; in.) fo r dis-
tances up to 4 m (13 ft .) and ± 1. 5 mm for distances over 4 m (13 ft.) where L is the length
in meters. These numbers are very close to the linea r acc uracies published by the Institute
for Research in Construction (IRC) in 1975 (Latta ).
For right angle layout, [SO 4463 suggests that a reaso nable angular tolerance can be
±degrees, where L is the length in mete rs of the shorter side of the angle. In a 30.5-m (100-
ft.) length, this translates to a to lerance of approx ima tely 1 minute of angle (0.01 6 3°) .
This is well within the acc uracy standards of transits 3S well as construction lasers . Viewed
in terms of an offset ove r a length of 30.5 m (100 ft .) , ISO 4463 suggests an allowable tol-
erance of ±S.3 mm (± » in .) . Again, this is well within the capab ilities of a standard tran-
sit as published by the IRC in 1975 and is easily accomplished with constructi,)n lase rs.
In the U nited States, the Na tio nal Society of Professional Surveyors (NSPS) publishes
model standards that are intended ttl be used as guidelines for th,)se indi v l,lu al state Jssoci-
ations, prllfessio nal reg istrari,m boards, stelte surveyi ng agencies, and others who have the
auth" rity of set standards. Secti(ln 0 uf these model standards is to r construction layout sur-
I'eys and the recommended positi o nal accuraci es are given in Tabl e 1-2 in Sect ion 1-6.
The NSPS st:mdard t:x hudding ,1f'tse t stake5 is ± 10 mm \0 .03 it.} ('x horiwnta l p,)si-
tional acc urac y. P<)sitional accuracy in this standard is giYen 3t the 95 perce nt c,)nfidence
leve L This me ~ms, for eXJmple, that if a 200- 1'(. (6 [ · m ) dista nce is measured 100 times, the
meaSlIrt'me n t wi ll j-,e bet wee n 199.97 fr. ~lI1d 200.03 ft. (GO.09 In (06] 0 1m ) 95 ti mes <,ut
,)f lOLl. Refe r ttl Ch ar ter 18 to t ~1 di-;,'ussi c'n d' e\: r rt'~,;i l1 ;! rh e IlI1cc:rt:1 in ty ,)t !11 (" h ure rlJ enr .
-
Ch apt<?rl : Building Layout 8nd Site'Nork
\. ~ ' I :-,' r : ; \ 11 · :11 I -"·l·;· .... ,1.1)\1 , \th.: r ·,-' I ~ 'I.:!, r., q l: l.: ~ k'\ j,_'C" "':': ':: ~ 1.l h: :I :-i :t ...: ...-li " I ; ( I ;( ('\~ . ; 1T1 ,...;It.~" . , Ilhl
,11:i, \\ 11 1< : 11~1 , : i: , ic':r. ,' " ~ i IC( U:I(\, 'lhe' "'\ ; ',(1 :\Cel:I':I<:: ;.'v" I "k'I'''' I!,. I, ',111 Ihe" Te'citi,'
' ,:, \:.,:".1 111',,1'" ,i . I'I',', I he '. d ii·,r:lltl'lll't'd ", , 'quil':lll'n r, I'll<" ('(' 11,i"i, '11 ,' l'l.hkr \\hleh rh e
~" ~ I. I I ; , : 1~ I. • I \ r \. 'I't',j,
~ ,;,'Ih"' " ,\, , )1' 11,; \ '1 1~r i l ,m i, '.' ITII,J,I,',' ,I,I,d, " I" 'lIl'" " II I, ' J. ili Ilhl,illi ·
,,:,' : ,,', ,,: ; I :,' :,1 i",'\ '" ,r. F d'",. t,) (·' upr,.,\, 17 i~, ' r :1 , 11 'e;ll ',,, 11\ ,:t' " In IT, :11 i, . 1i:' (,II\Ct' In c" l" III"
: I ','~ , !"I j,: ,"' , 'r h., : Ill l id ' \'r' :.:1\'<: 11 111 FI,( il l\: I - I :11',' -1e:' II'(,,1 1'1" ' 111 ', ,'\'c r:" 11 1; 111l1 t': 1,' tl lr,'r,'
<'['" f,le" Il fd :111:', 1'1,1 1''' 1"'(',' c" [II: \V lur CHI re l" ,)11"h1\' 1,<.' c'xrc:o(',1 "I'IH'n ci1t"c' ,In ic,l'S ::Ire
:I'C,I, , " :1',·,_, 11 1.1l.l1'11"ic.ll e;ln,li r i .. m5,
\\'!::k "i' ,1',' j."1"', I'C' " ' I:<r ru,: ti,,Jn h 'e r cqu ipl:1cnr i, ,. )[lIlnf '111v lI 'n.! t~ lr ,:c) mlHt'[,-i ,t1
,','li ;;[rlk :' i, ', n, 11'1.11 :\' ,-""',r:lct,) rS ::,[ illu,,, m,xc' [r,j,lit il'l l;'t1 c'\'[Uipnle' ll t I,l\' rc;; idc1\ ti :d :'mel
'111'1 11 .',>l111\ ,cr.:i.d l'", 'il'.;[~ , Th c~ L'xpecteJ jcc(rcc ,)f :ltiC Ur:1C \ whe n 1l,il1;.! Sled t :lpeo: :m,1
I r::11,ir'IS ,,j ,;,, :;: h, '\VIl ill h~l l rt' I-I ,
TI;e ,lil11 c11.,,','I1:11 Olc,'llr:KY f,) r:' 100.. ft. (?oO,5- rnl steel t:!JCt' "'Tend, ,ll1 rh e ,lnwuIH "l
': 1;": , r " ll1~'c' r: l tur,' , I:eJ(si,ll1. :mel :l11gk ()f use. The ;-\.:ltl C' 11:1 I [nstitur(' ofSt,'mJ:1rds :ud Tech·
Ih,I< ,;..:y \:\ IST ) sc' r, Ltl ler:lI1 ces for met:d t:lpe~ a;; "llll\\' \1 in TIHe 1-1. Fo r tvric::Ji s itu ~l t i om
:111,1 wht'n ': It; is lllinil11i :c:,I, the t,) lemnces sbown i11 Figure 1-1 c:m be' expected. If higher
:! (C ULley i, i'l'\Il.: ifc',l: a i:ber 'ih,lul.l be lbed ,)[ ;;ted l:1peS with cCJrrecri (\11 f:'lcto r s indu.led
f,ll' tl'mp er:Hu l'e :lld Ilrhc:r v,'lri:lbles,
Table 1-1 Maintenance and acceptance tolerances,

in excess and in deficiency, for metal tapes
Nominal interval from :ero, ft (m)Tolerance, in (film )

6c'l'iess(j,S111 ) ·,(c\Sl
7 ru ,) "" indll, ivc l ~.l 11l to 9.l rn) (1 6)
n r, j 55, ilhl1l5iv c (').4 rn ltJ 16.8111) (1 ,2)
5iJ I'<loSC' , incl ll , l Vt' \ 17 1 m to 24.4111 ) >" (4,3)
S] ril l ,\:, inc h " llt' (2:+.7 111 W 30,5 1l1 ) ". i,6 4)
Ri.Jll:I'I ,:i,> :,l!' rn :lr:';, l:· i li j.j II1~:), ,.uch :l,,!J, 'U'oe,Il1c1 ;Il1:) Il': uml11 l'rc:i :ll , r,rucrures, e:\l1
:'\C laid " h 3 <Ie'e' l :,,11":: I1k:l' UI'Ill;s:1 ~,: +5 tr;:m,,,k. \\'h'::11 gre':ltt'r ~ICCl.iI·:K \' i~ re'quired,
1.\( w il
,1 tr:11:,:t ,')[ ': ' " ':, rnLd r;; 11 la,., u l,; hulI ld he U,:-c'c1,
Related Sections
i -. ~ p,.:: i.i ir'c L ,:\ ,:,ut
; -(~ {- ;-~,i\ 1 , : ,',) ", j ~:<~"\:_",\' ..1.
6 Part 1: Constructio n Toleranc es
Figure 1-2 Vertical building layout
Accuracy in plumbn ess: (Latta)

spirit level: :± 1/4" (6) in 10' (3 m)
plumb bob: ± 1/8" (3) in 10' (3 m)
tran sit: :±1/8" (3) in 100' (30 .S m)
optical pl umbing device: :±1/ 16" (1.6) in 100' (30.S m)
SmartTool: :±1/32" (0 .8) in 2' (600) or 0. 10
laser plumb: ± 1/32" (0.8) in 100' (30 S m)
ISO 4463 acceptable deviation from plumb :

for heights up to 4 m (13'): D t = ±3 mm (118")
for he ig hts gre ater than 4 m: Dt = ±1.S\" H mm
For exampl e, in 30 .S m (100')

tol erance is ±8. 3 mm (±S/16")
Dt
I
- -·r r-
:
-
I secondary benchmark
I
I
I
0
I
I
I I
I I ISO 4463
I I up to 4 m (13'): ±3 ~ (±1 /8")
I I ove r 4 m (13') : ±1.S'v H mm H (m)
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I secondary benchmark
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ISO 4463
position point + t
I I
±3 mm (1/8")
H (m) I I
I I
I I
I I
I I ISO 4463
I I acceptable deviation:
I I ±S mm (±3/16")
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
! I
flit.
,I II ---- -- - - -- - --
-
_ .-
- -
- - ---- -
'--' primary
I
benchmark
I
0BI
-
L LJ LJ
I
level:
spirit level: ± 1!4" (6) in 20' (6.1 m) (Latta)
water level : ± 1/8" (3) in 30' (9.1 m) (Latta)
optical level: ± 1/8" (3) in 200' (6 1 m) (Latta)
precise level : :±1/ 16" (1.6) in single sight (Latta)
SmartTool: :± 1/32 " (0.8) in 2' (600) or 0 .10

optical level: ± 1/32" (0 .8) in 100' (30 .S m)
digital level : 1: 1.S mm in 1 km (1/16" in 3280')
la ser level: "!:: 1I16" (1.6) in 100' (30 .S m)
1-2 Vertical Building Layout
Description
'" " ',' , :; ~.: h,I :::, ·I:t.I: t, ·1:: I It \, 1,J IJllt:lJ ~i , )lIj " f ~.1 bu ilcl iII,; ~Ir,: "SCil biiJI(-,J , rhe: Il e x t
'",'c ',' i·· 'l'ILlII:'; c·icv::tti " llS, pi Ltrnhn;,.: \'eITI'---;ll.:I': l n e:nt ~ , ;Hld 111;[111-
i ::: .;, ·,_· lIr.' "
. : '!1 ! :~ '. : !c- ·,' I' b. Ti le''': ,II, , ltTt·llt le'lli. n Il Ih e' ;J(' ('UI:ICY ,.-,f th e tn, rnnlk lJts usecl ;I S
'.\ , j : .1 ' . ' I) c' I1" : I· ' Ill IIt' l Ir II C'I IlJ ,li I iUI1 ' :mJ rhe sk i111)( rho::: Pt'· )1"1", tI, ling tbe 1:IYuu r.
:1' i' , ,,, , :, :Ii :I'C lu J c·." , 'lil t:' Ci t die' I.ly,.)llt :KC llracic:-. ~',-'",> ihl e' in c'~ t:.1bli~ hing de -
'. : :: ", ~ " " Ilind' . i;Il,.1 1c-·,' c·l lV itb v: lriO lJ ~ instruments, JSSllmlllg the surve yor w'e ~ :1
':' '1111.1 1 Jc'):IC C' ,,(,kdl
T il e' r,',l u ',lil(c', ·,II "Wll in o the r secr i(,ns I)t" thi ~ hO'Jk f'Jr p lumb :m clle l'e l tC lr
11 ~,i J\"ll1 ;) 1 CI)Jl' 1r11 ;: I1'- '11 ll1:lteria]s and rls:--o emb lies are often mo re 'Jr less :1( (ll],;lte
Ih :11 1 rh,,,c :;/lc)\\'11 ill rili" ., e(tion . Refer to individu:d se([io n:-: f'Jr me)!'e specific
II Ittl J'llI <lti,}Jl ,:n 111(i l !:'tly st:mJarJs for specific:: material s. Refer to C hapter 17 (I'r
1111 'Ie' intorm :lri,.)[1 I1II the :K (.urJ CY of me:l, urin g instlllments ;lnd methods elf
IIIc':l' UICrtlCnt.
References
"I It:lcXlll'i:lCies in C Cln , rlucri on," J. K. Lltt:l, Canadi.111 Building Digest 171,
A rr il 197';. III C:, llld:ii(1 n Building Di.\ c'sts, 1:i I -20C' (O rLnn, ON : llls cit ure
ttJ r R e:-oca rch lJl C' ) IJ ~ rrL1l: ti tJIl, i'JJ t ional R esearch C(lllllC il C~rnad ;} , 1939 ) .
.\f •• ,ld St<mdanls 'J! Prd(lie'<' (0 :1irilersburg, MD: Na tieHl:1 1 S'iCie[) o t Prc)fe~ si0n:1 I
Sur\, eyor" 2 0(\ .~) \\'\\'w.: Icsm.ner/mp:;/mGcieisrelI IlbrJs. html.
\: 1ST H ~mdb(lclkl+ ~ (\lJ, Sec tio n 5.s 2 (Gaither, lJurg, MD: N;.lt iC'1 t:rl Insti tute
,)f S t<md ~ lrd ~ ;1n.l Te( hno lu,W )
htEp: jj rs .nisr. g" v/r>/h td ,x"i2 10/23 S/h-t4200 ) .hm L
PrndlJ ct liter:1t11re : Far" Tedrn,:,le'gies, [IlC ( w\\·IV.b rl,.(ll11l) , Leiea Cie, )"y.;te ms
\ \\'ww. lci (~H!"::" ,, , \ , ft:' rI L .( t ' l 11), TI -, ~, ('l 1J1 Pc)siri()ll in c; ;;;\', [,' 111.)
I. \','\\w.fo:'j.": Clll .C!. lllJ) . ,\lId Tr i rnb l ,~ ( w '.v\l . r ri~n b l C" ( " }[ I I ) .
:'f -[i BuildillS' hl:,.j'le:n. SJlur(Ti)(;I'~ .:Ii:~ i[a l inci illc)mdtr. IVw \v.Jll ,lk :ln1. c-'-,lll
IS,, ) ·H 6 j - l, ,\!, ,,,:n ,.: mci l,'dL·cJlO.L jlJ( B,tihlings- Sc Ct:'l1 ,; Cl ltf,mel \ {~ , l\W<>
'1 " k~lt ,- I-',l'o't I . i'Ll1l ll iri.g " lid O r::'l11i ~(/ l i,.m ,
,\ieds;ning P l'oYc (! :AT<'i , A l·CC!>t.lIlL'c'
(;;'i(e1'I'] , \: (,v c'IJl hcr I C;entT ~I, S \\ic"e ri J nJ: [merl 1 ~ lti,':n; d Olgat li :J ti,) 11 ';,r
:)r;m.j;lr,.II !:I[I''- 'l l. t,):::,,}
\" \\'ith h"riz'·IJ1 I:rl l: l\ ':.L:r, [he re art' no ~ene[;1I1'; accepted 5t :Ill.JclJ'ds t;x Hr tic-:ll
:,I':II Ur. Th ~· rtuJ[lh~ r '; c:i '1 en in rigme 1-? [cir ro] eLl[1CeS :' re J:.Jsed UlIl:)OH6 3
:Id r ,~s c : I '-dl clene I,v rhe In$titute fIX Rese;:rrch in C :'IlStrl1o io n (L3t tJ ). Ho w-
,'c':', "irh ,'';oJ ;'[J'II(fII--; n h S'::TS :m d h~t? r levels, Ort1C:ll lt? v,, 1s. ;Inel di!::i r;lllevc' L.
; :: ;;) <: 1' ~it?!. r,: t ·' "t ;, \I: :Y:.- ..r,: Vt)ssi:)k· . F,Jf c:x:!n :pi e: , S01lk rnJ.ilu f:J I~ tllrd' · ,li:; it;d
'.:' ",' :.' c. In ,i l. :-) ie',. ! 1). i "':· I:": ~P· :-I','. \· (:f:!.: 1.5 lY, ttl p eT k il'J rflc: 1xr if u-'.:d :, I( ,..: \,.")rJ i :- I ~ t ~) t h ~
~ . r::./. : l·~ llr,.T';". r~" ( · ' l r p~1\:· r~ \ h r ; (: ll ~ . ~.: in ~~j t' -· nle ~I~ ~ irl!.' l:· :I:' I ',t \..~"'- r ~ \.:J t ic ·.-,j ::- ('In he HC--
:;' ; -, . c" ,). . ... 1' :1 I II.! ' II', I : I .\ .~ i n . in 1(\: tL. I . Ti l.,' ;-(: . ,,, ;:,<: ,, ' ..- ie' rCI:)C·', ·,h.-; u l,1
. \." -.- :\'-!:-\ . I '-'l l , I' I h . .:- -·f <' I... : ; i ,~ "j ~ i~.: l ~~ L,."t~·t:J ,.~ ; l t [hI:' i~: "t: i I,~I I ' .:; (" I:I...~L; C ,' r'~i...! Li; [' ( "..J 1-,;
i ... · i '"
:11 ~ ": ·; ~S . ; j.'I; r~ :-: 1.-7\: e !:;- ('t td ~:: l. i_~ 'I· ' : ~ · t'cl-:; "; rE: t"",(t ':- ll ~IY l:. .3 ;c r
' ; .i ; ,. t Ill , ; , , ;;, , ~c u .' i !' I ,. ::Ull.~' T l--t: 'H"i':: j -,-cl. ; .r l _ : ':~ ;> , th cs<:: : l; '
l ~ ',
lL
rmrr
/.
For establishing slopes and checking for level, lligital inclinometers are now cl)mmonly
used . The accuracy for a di gital inclinometer (SmartTool) is 0.1 degree (approximately
±Y" in. in 4 ft . l)rl.6 mm in 1,200 mm). They are available in 2- ft . and 4-ft. lengths. Be-
cause local variations oft1atness are possible, large slabs and ramps should be checked with
a transit or constnlction laser to establish overall level or slope.
The NSPS standard for build ing offset stakes is ±10 mm (0.03 ft.) for vertical pusi-
tional accuracy. Positional accuracy in thi s standard is given at the 9 5 percent confidence
level, as described in Section 1-1.
Related Sections
1- 1 Horizontal BUilding Layout
1-6 Grading and Sitework
17- 1 Measuring Devices
18-2 Expressing Uncertainty
1-3 Concrete Paving

Description
Concrete paving includes drives , parking surfaces, and other site paving. In many cases ,
tight tolerances for exterior paving for vehicles is not critical. However, when ex isting
building and site elevations require minimum slopes for drainage (usually X in. per ft. or 6
mm per 300 mm), the tolerances shown in this section should be specified. When ponding
of water might create hazards in any situation, these tolerances should also be specified.
Industry Standards and Recommendations

ACI 117 -06, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary (Farmington Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2006) .
NCHRP Project 20-07{Task 167, An Analysis of the Draft ADA Guidelines for Accessible
Rights-oI-Way, Dav id Kent Ballast, June (Washington , DC: Transportation Research
Board, National C ooperative Highway Research Program , 2004) .
Standard Specifications and Supplements (Washington, DC: American Association of
State Highway and Transportation O fficial s, 1998 )
http://fhwapap04.fhwa.dot.gov/nh swp/servlet/LookUpCategory
UFG S Section 02752, Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Roads and Site Facilities,
and UFGS Section 02754, Concrete Pavements for Small Projects. United Facilities
G uide Specifications, August 2004 (Washington, DC: National Institute of Building
Sciences, 2004) www. ccb.org/docs/ufgshome .
The only industrywide to lerances fo r paving on a constnlction site are published by the
A merican Concrete Institute (ACI) as sh own in Figure 1- 3(a), (b), and (c). For highway
wl. rk, state and local departments of transportation (DOTs) often give allowable toler-
ances in their model specifications or contract requirements. The tolerances by AC I are
for vertical deviations of surfaces below an un leveled straightedge resting on high spo ts.
Sk'r e to lerances are not included in the ACI document.
G uide specifica tions for concrete pavement published as part of the U nified Facilities
Guide Specifications (U FGS ) for military facilities sWte that roads and streets should
h;lw:1 rolerance ,){ ±5 mm ( ". in .) in the long itudinal direc tl un anJ ±6. ') mm (:1, in. ) in
IT IT ffI' '1" ff,"",,'""'T"T'""

Figure 1-3 Concrete paving
10' (3050) '

unleveled straightedge +1/4" (6)
~t'~I:::::::lL_]
(a) mainline pavements in transverse direction (ACI)
10' (3050) ,
unleveled straightedge "' .
,
"- +1 /8" (3)
i J
(b) mainline pavements in longitudinal direction (ACI)
(note: this tolerance is for dowels tolerance envelope - - ;
b'-j-b-
with a projection of 18" (0,45 m) or less)
± 1/4"(6~:f t~y -' -- 0=.- --0 - . - Q= --

I j
- . . ..--f f-.--..------
. centerline of
pavement ±H /4' (32)
(e) lateral placement and alignment of dowels (ACI)
------- - ----
±0.5%
1(1) suggested slope to!em nC9 for co ncrete paving
ttlli i l \l lil l \ I \ I \ I \ t 11 I III11 11 \ i ' : t l l Ii I 1111- - - - --

the transverse direction when measured with a straightedge. Interestingly, in SectiCln

02754, no length of straightedge is specified, and in Section 02752, a 4-meter (12-ft.)
straightedge is required. For other surfaces, such as parking areas, the suggested wleran,
is ±6.5 mm (Y. in.) in both directions.
A research report for the Transportation Research Board suggested an allllwable sic)
tolerance for concrete of ±0.5 percent, as shown in Figure 1-3 (d). The same research r
port surveyed state and city departments of transportation and found that the allowat
tolerances for roadway slupe ranged from a low of 0 percent to a high of 5 percent, with ~
average of 0.6 percent. However, the suggested slope tolerance did nClt indicate the lengl
over which the slope should be measured or in what locations slope should be measure
See Chapter 17 for discussions on measuring slopes and the Hatness of surfaces.
For highway paving, the American Association of State Highway and Transportatic
Officials (AASHTO) publishes the AASHTO Standard Specifications and Supplement
In Section 501 for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, the specifications require a su
face test that limits surface defects to ±S mm under a 3-m straightedge placed at randol
locations. (Section 501 [L]l). This is very close to the commonly used X- in. deviatio
under a lO-ft. straightedge.
When necessary, concrete road pavement, highway barriers, curbs and gutters, an
sidewalks can be placed by specialized paving equipment with a high degree of precisior
Slope tolerances of ±0.13 percent can be achieved for roads and sidewalks using aute
mated equipment guided by stringlines, lasers, or global positioning system (GPS) device:
They are made by a number of manufacturers. However, this equipment is commonly use
only for very long runs of highways or sidewalks.
Related Sections
1-4 Asphalt Paving
1-5 Pedestrian Paving
1-7 Right-of-Way C onstruction
1-4 Asphalt Paving

Description
Asphalt paving includes drives and parking surfaces. Like concrete paving, asphalt pavinf
tolerances are not always critical if sufficient slope is built into the paving f,-lr drainage .
However, when a minimum drainage slope of Y. in. per ft. (6 mm per 300 mm) is required,
the tolerances shown in this section should be specified.
Recommendations
NCHRP Project 20-07(fask 167, An A1U!lysis of the Draft ADA Guidelines for Accessible
Rights-of-Way, David Kent Ballast, June (Washington, DC: Transportation Research
Board, National Cooperative Highway Research Program. 2(04).
SS-l: Model Construction Specifications for Asphalt Concrete and Other Plant-?vlix T'ipes.
November (Lexington, KY: Asphalt Institute, 1984) Out of print.
Standard Specifications and Supplements (Washington, DC: Ame rican Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials, 1998)
http J/fhwapapu4.fhwa.dot.gov /nhswp/servlet/Look UpCategory
U FGS Section 02742, Hot Mix Bituminolls Pc!t'ement. United Facilities G uide Specifica-
tions, August 2004 (Washington, DC: Nationa l Institute of Building Sciences , 20(4)
\V\vw.ccb. org/docs/ufgshome.
- Chapter 1: Building Layout and Sitework 11
Figure 1-4 Asphalt paving
10 ' (3 m) :':: 1; 8" (3) parall el to centerline

-;: 1,4" (6) perpendicul ar to centerlin e
(3) flatn ess tolerances
~ "!:1!2" (13)
1_'__ ________ _______________ ~j ;~~~~;)

-------J .... ±lJ2" (13)
cou;,e
• base course
(b) thickness and elevation tolerances
,- ' - --_ ._.-
ICi ,;u9£lostnci slope tolp l;:tnCe fer aspha lt paving

_. ---_ .. _ -_. _- -- ----_. _-- - -- -
Th ere Jre currently no indllstry tlller~1nc es fur aspk11t paving. Th e'\.st'h i1Ir lmtitiite (.--'\
previou sly haLl tolerances ;1S part of irs ;\1odd Consrrucrion Specifications. T hi s LIUcllment
1111 l<ln ~e r in print JnLI the Asp hi11t Imtitute nll lo nger estilhli ,hes tLl 11:'1',lI1c e). H, )WeVer,
the last edition of the printed vllium e, the recLlmn1enLled tuieranc<'s were ±:,; in . (3) p~1
idlel ro the centerline uf th e Cllml,liKti o n roller and ±;i; in . (6) perpemliclIbr t Ll the c~'nte
line as measured unLler a 10-ft. (.3-m) stra ightedge. See Figure 1-4(a). These pre\'i( lli s
puhlished tu lerances suggest what on e trade urganization dee med reason able.
The previous A I tule rances are cunsistent with suggested limits em surLce smllLlthne
published by AASHTO in its SWlldard Sp<:,cifications and Supplement.). In Sec tion 40 l f,
plant mix pavements, the AASHTO specifications give tw" method~ for testing surt~\Ce
The first method ca lls fix surbces to be tested with a 3-1n (I O- ft. ) straightedge at ranLh
lucations. Variations greater than 3 mm to 5 111m (~~ in. to y,. in.) are to be Cl\rrec teel .
G ui de spec ificat ions fur hut -mix bituminous pavement published as part of the Unific
Fac iliti es Guide Specifications (UFGS) for mil itary facilities states tha t the unevenness,
leve ling and binder courses should n ot vary mo re than 6 mm in 3 m ( Y. in. in 10ft.) and th ~
unevenness of the wea ring course sho uld not vary more than 3 mm in J m (v,: in. in 10 ft.
Researc h done for the Transpo rtati o n Research Board found that the state and city Lit
partments of transportation surveyed repo rteel tolerances ranging from a low of y.: in. in I
ft. (3 mm in 3 m) to a high of 2 in . in 10 it. (50 mm in 3 m) with an average uf 0.37 in, i
10 ft. (9.4 mm in 3 m) .
From these sources, it seems reasonable to expect a tolerance of ±Y< in . under a 10 f
stra ightedge pa rallel to the centerline of the compact ion roller and ±;!, in. unde r a 10 f
straightedge perpendicular to the centerline . If smoothness is n o t critical , it is preferahl
to specify a tolerance of ±/4 in. (6 mm) in both directiuns.
The variatio n of actual elevation from spot elevations shown on the drawings should b
within ± Y) in. (13 mm). See Figure 1-4(b) . This is consistent with the Asphalt Institute
former recommendatio n s as well as the spec ification language in the UFGS specificatiOi
and research do ne fo r the Transpo rtation Research Board .
For thickness tL)lerances, the UFGS specification states that the maximum a lluwah\.
deficiency a t any point should not be more than 6 mm (IS in.) bs than the stated thick
ness. Previous master specifications suggested a base cuurse thicknes, tu lerance of ± ~;: in
(13 mm). Both the previous A sphalt Institute's model spec ificat io ns and UFGS specifi ca
tion state that the average thic kn ess sho uld nut be less than the thi ckness stated on tht
drawings and in the specifications.
The re are no industry-s tandard sk)pe tolerances fi x asph a lt pavemen t, a ltho ugh th E
AASHTO Swnrlnrd Specifications and Supplements specify that asph31t pavers "e set tl
mainta in the transverse slope at ±0.1 percent .
The research report for the Transportation Research Board su ggested an a llowaHt
slope w lerance f~)[ asphalt roadways of ± 1 percent, as sh uwn in Figure 1-4( c). The same
research report surveyed state and city departments of trcmsportation and fo und that the
'I llo wahle tolerances fix asphalt roadway slope ranged from a low ()f :ero percent to ::1 hi gh
L1f 5 percent, wi th a n <11'erage of 0.8 3 percent. As with cuncrete ravement, the sugge .,ted
slupe wler::mce did nnt indicate th e length oVer which t he slope should be me~1Sured or \0
wh,l( I()G1tio ns sklpe should be measured . See C hapter 17 tl)[ discussiuns on measllring
sl'lpes ;mLI the Harness Llf surfaces.
Related Sections
1-1 Cl\nCre re Pavi ng
l-J Pecie:;nian Pav ing
1-7 Ri)< ht -.:,f -\Vw C)llsrrtlCti ,:m
Chapter 1: tllli!dll1q Layout anci Sitework 1:3
1-5 Pedestrian Paving

Description
i . " ' l ' .... ' j t, . ; ~ it i ' . li.:,.i\. .:,(· r, i \: itt·: I. ,f I . ' I~L_ I'ef t' , .l:'- ph ,til , , 1l 1~1 (t : rh.: rt' l e : - 1t" 1: -' · h II" ..;; !h-'l \·- r (" ;1't fl 'l
1
,'..' ;l'<:'; : :~ 1' ; ,\ '; 1)1 .- .... hIJ,r!' 11"'1.' l l·111'· l.rlll . . r(' . . 1 r. ' ( It" j-'( ' [1 ..II. ' ;'" "n\: l' ;:-. 11 ' ,IVIJ i,! r)l.lI1,lin.L: .1I1l1 frt' (": jp t::
: '1 "I .l :d: '. ' j' I'(',,;Jl l ',1,11<.:1 h ld ,ltl!" Il hl l lt c,,,tld J lll1,l:':c riJe, P: IV! U!,:; :m, 1 (,) ,11': lin W ,l( cT
".1 .:', 1:, :1:: ri), i-r lll,lil. >; :I: IJ ' ilh er Pltr,'I'I ,1 1l1 :, ire , rrll Cl.tJrc!S. Thi~ i.:' t"l'cli :r1l v illlr ' ln ,lllf
:" ,', ,:i' l' j'l<lc·,tri :d l [' :1 1 il ,:! i, 11,"n n:dl v , h" IV I) el r It-, w :;1, 'lK .' , fn'lfl ': ill . rc' l' ft . 1(; 111111 plT
1,': 1;:; :, '1 I, : ;:t. I'd rr . \ j ) 'litn ~'c l' ;l\~ min,). nl d(' :Ire> C'ul'tellt ll' nu ilhlll:' tl'l t"IC' r:t llcc"
!, ' :'l·I ~ I "'. (rl' r C I '.\ \·l ·r~. l' rl ck ! ~ ; )ver~, > tl ~ llt', l lr \\.' IJ1~)J \V:l lk ,,\:;1V:":,

\, :! I I ~ -C(i , Spr , ili"l lI d ll:- k 'rF)I,r,tll,'l'S I ~)r l'>mut'r.: C .lllstnlc'til) ll ,l1 d ivjutt!rials , ltlel
, :,;11,1110,[,',(:, (blllllll t.:t, ' n Hilk \ [!: Amt'ri cc1l1 C llocrete l m' titllte , 2(106).
\l:HRI' Pr,~jt'ct ': D-(Yi /Tbk 167 ,:\ " Anllh sis of tht: Dmft ADA Ciuidellnes fin' ACCc'ssihlc'
l\.i,(llts-,)rw.'a)' , D:IVid Kl'nt B;)ll.tst, JlIn e (Wzishingt(l n, DC : Tran~pu rt ati lm R esem ch
hll:l rc1, ~:) ti<ln , d C ,.'( 'r,' ra r.iye t lighll'ay Reseclrc h Program , 2004) .
SS- l: .vl()je'i C(>1) sLnIt'lil :>n SjXc' ific' df(t lY!S jll)' A:;phLllt COllCYt'r2 and Uther rlant-,\ilx Typt's,
\:llve ml:'er (Lex ingwn , KY: ASI,h:1It Im-titllte, lC)iH) ~} llt «{ print.
Tlller:1l1Le;. (u r r,,'clestri :m rZlving arc sh,)wn in Figure i -5, The to le rance fo r cuocrc'te si(le -
w:1lk thtness IS hl",d ,In :rn r\CI ,t~m(hrd, which is ±'.~ in . in 10 ft. (±6 mm in .'\,OSO 111m) .
Tht:re :Ire nu A C. I ~Lllllb[d , (or ;; lore ciC'viatio n, hut a Transpo rt ati o n Rese arch Bua rd [e-
r urt slIggt-:' red a ~ I upt, t>:11e wnce for cu ncrete sidewa lks llf ± 1 rercent for running sl')res
,Ind ±0.5 perU nt f,,,' , i,J (' I\cl lk cross-"k:pes.
To l e ran(' c:~ f,) r ( (II lerde qef'S Zlre :lb 1 hlSecl (In ACT standa rds and ~lre ±~:,. in. ('i rnrn)
('lr riser ht'i,;;h l :w el !: . , in . (5 rnrn) (,) r trc,ld width ~l~ sh (ll\'n in Figm e t ,5( h ). The ln te r-
n:nion:r1 Euikhr;z C hic ~ rll' ) I' " :1 >< -ill . (C) .5 mm ) v;lriatill n I:>et\\'ten th e highest :1l1,j 1'11V"
c;;t extrclrw:; ,){ rr '· t·r~ :ilkll:1',':l<1., wi thin ;l11 V tli ght u t' ~ tair;'.. The Amt'riCc1 ns lcirh Dis(/;iliril's
Act .\c,:usi h l:l v \.:; :11,[ [/1 ', .0 ("[!' '' A(;) (tn ly , terre' rh:.n trf ads :ll 1<'1 risers lllu st I:>e ,tflllli k lrrn
dim'~ n;.i{,n.
T..l IU':l:Kh f,.:r 1'1'1. '[1 '., :,Jk, il re I'J'(',:I '.'11 rll.t' ,"\ sr h ~r1t In., riwk 's prC'l'illrL' 111 , .. del spec ·
il'i ,::tti,er1 .S , wllid . ;1'. ',:, [1 , ' I'.ln ~er P lb li , hec1 . r[.-'\\'(' \·l' r, ,h wi t h :l.'p h,tit r :wing. it >l.lgge<t .;
1'.1,:; ( ,:nl V.le!' · '·"";:lili ·::v il.' 11 dt' tTllt',J rc: l ~':)n,) H e. The> TI'~1l1Sp(lrt<ltiun ReSC'<lrch Bllad rt.'-
','rt ~ l!:~;; C: ; lbl. ;,1, :Pt' r, ,!nanl t' I' )' l.;ph::ti l :, i,:lC: \I' ~llb, lt ::t 1 perC ent (nT runn in)! sk're, :.m.:!
-,- :.) p.: rCe :H f :r :.' f'ktlt : 1,lc\I<ll k u' ls , - , I 'l~'('S .1., , h('lVn 111 riS;uTt: 1- 1(L).
The- rt' :" [t' 11<.'".'t:i j':c.!:-[t\ 1r, ,lc riHlC.(' t;,1' hrick, Cull l rett' un it p,lvers, stllne r ,lVll1g , ':' 1' W':.l':".!
'Y,l:k:; , ~I.l it r!l ~:: ;'~" ."lrt' l "[ltl \. ", d rh e,· "h·, 'l. dd be ~pe c. .· iti t;d h;:l <.; ed 0 11 rh e req uire nle OCs d f the'
Related Sections
.--.,. I\ "i.'l·.,')lt I-' .\. I i : :.;.

~~> :_; t r I· ,, ", ; : \ , P '., :::- ~_' " ';"' j .: ~
Figure 1-5 Pedestrian paving
10' (3050)
flatness: +1/4" (6) / straightedge
·-;---==--- J --
deviation from specmed slope:
running slope: ±1% (1/8" in 10')
cross slope: ±O.5% (1/16" in 10')
(a) concrete sidewalks
(b) concrete steps
flatness:
±1/8" (3) parallel to centerline
I±l/4'~~::+UlariO c~~ deviation from specified slope:

--------- running slope: ±1% (1/8" in 10')
, cross slope::±2% (1/4" in 10')
(c) asphalt walks

1-6 Grading and Sitework

Description
;\Ir1wugh gr;k1ing wierancc:s are nc)t always critica l, they can affect drainage away from a
hl ik!ing, the ;lpl'earance \)f ground Cl)Ver material at the huikling line , and the final ap-
1'':;l r;ll1Ce ()f finish b ndscapi.ng. Because of its nature , sLl il gr::d ing .cannl)t be very acc urate
:lnc! is "uhject «) the skills of the people grading as well as natural forces sllch as rain, snow,
,lIle! treece-thaw cycles. Thi s section includes some II the va rious recllmmended toler-
,lnCl'; for grading.
Industry Recommendations
ISO 4463- 1, Measurement Methods for Buildings- Setting Out and Measurement-Part 1:
Planning and Organization, Measuring Procedures , Acceptance Criteria,
November 1 (Geneva, Sw itzerland : International O rga nizatio n for Standa rdization ,
1989).
Standards of Practice; Section D, NSPS Model Standards for Construction Layout Sur-
~lod.:l
wys (Ga ithersburg, MD: N ational Society of Professional Surveyors , 2003)
www.acsm.net/nsps/mode lstandards. html.
2005 Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTNACSM Land Title Surveys (Was h-
ington, DC: American Land Title Association /American Congress on S urvey ing and
Mapping, 2005) www.acsm.net/ALTA2005.pdf.
CFGS Section 02730, Earthwork. United Facilities Guide Specification s, Oc tober 2004
(Washington, DC: Nation al Institute of Building Sciences , 2004)
www.ccb.org/docs/ufgsh ome.
Landscape Specification Guidelines, 5th ed. (Rockville, MD: Landsca pe Contractors Asso-
ciation, 2000).
SPECTEXT~ Section 02211, Rough Grading, July (Baltimore: Construction Sciences
Research Foundation, 1989).
SPECTEXT Section 02923 , Landscape Grading, July (Baltiml)re: Construction Sc iences
Research Foundation, 1989 ).
There are several sources for recommendeJ tolerances for rough and finish grading as well
~s the h orizontal position of various elements on a building site . The N ational Society of
Profession;)1Surveyors publishes the Model Standards of Practice, which includes guidelines
for the hl. rizl)fital and vertical relati ve positional accuracy of stake placement to mark the
loc3tion (If proposed fixed works. These are sh own in Table 1-2 and in Figure 1-6.
In addition, the NSPS Model Standards includes accuracy standards for property sur-
veys basecllln the intended use of the land. These are shown in Table 1-3.
A nother u.s. standard is the Accuracy Standards for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Sur1!eYs ,
I'ublished by the American Land Title Assoc iatilm (ALTA) and the NSPS as a member
\lq:pn i:ati on of the American C on gress on S urv('Y ing and ~bpping (ACSM). This stan-
Jtrd is used by professional surveyors for the executio n of prope rty surveys (land bound-
;me,). It :l ll ow~ ;1 relati ve pos itional acc uracy for measurements co ntro lling land
h;unJ;1rie~ on A LTA/ACSM land title sun·eys of 0.07 ft. (20 mm) rlus 50 parts per mil-
111m (rpm) The NS P) 1\ todd Swndards (If PracClce ;,dorts thi s sta ndarll for its class ific ation
·)t m hi li .' UfVCVS.
G uide -;pcc it-ic l(ions fur t'a rthwnrk putb , hed a~ I'clf[ ,)f the U nified Fac ilities C,u iJe
5pcc i fi c-lr;cl~ s i.l 'FUS) [(,r lll ili u rv t;lC ili(! t~< '[ ; I rt' ~ rhnt [he , /cc!r ec (,f finl,h r{' f L(r;!, lcd
Figure 1-6 Grading and sitework
/ urban property survey: ±O.OT (21 mm) + 50 ppm

t------------------------------~
:I r==.
F.
~
building offset stakes:
±10 mm (0 .03') (±3/8")
\
"
: \
! ISO 4463 sitework distances:
up to 4 m (13') : ±10 mm (0 .03' or 3/8")
\
I over 4 m (13"): ±5VL mm

: For example, in 30.5 m (100')
\
I tolerance is 28 mm (0.09' or 1-1/16") \
: \
I
I
I
waterline offset stakes:
____ __ __ __ _ ±39~n:~~Ql __\-- --
I
I
I
I
~--~ I
\
\
I
I
I
I
\
I :nU
sewer offset stakes:
rough grading stakes:
±300 mm (1.0')
~:_----II.,~I ±30 mm (0.10')
\
,"
I
I
:
I
I finish grading stakes:
EB
\
±150 mm (0.50')
I
I
:
I
curb offset stakes:
±15 mm (0.05')
I I
I I
0---- -----0
(a) Sitework positional accuracy (NSPS)
NSPS:
Rough grading stakes: ±60 mm (0.20')
Finish and subgrading stakes: ± 15 mm (0.05') or 5/8"
UFGS:
Excavations, embankments, etc. : ±30 mm (0.1' or 1-3/16")
Subgrade: ±15 mm (0 .05' or 5/8")
ISO 4463:
Earthwork subject to normal accuracy requirements:
± 10 mm (0.03' or 3/8")
LeA:
Finish grading: any pOint ±0.2" (0.02') or 3/16" (5 mm)
(b) Grading elevations

l\r~~ I::-
. I,. l:. \\·ithin ')0
'
111m t0. 1 it. ur 1 ;;., in.) of the grades and elevatidns ~hown. Re,1-1uire-
tuen rc" [' lr ';ldwwde rrer;lrar iol1 call fnr elevatiuns t,) not v:lry more than 15 mm (0.05 ft.
I '. ,....
,'r : in.) (Wt11 th,' ,'~C1bli~heJ gL1de and ((()S~ ~ectil>n.

The l-LHldsL'ape Sp<'L'ific<ui,>li GuiJdilleS, puhlished by the LmdsGlpe Contractors Assn-
ci<l ti, 'l1, 'll!.!gests the Lmdscape conWlCtor nt)t rroceed with final work until the finish
J.!ndin)..! ,If topsotl kl~ been uniformly graded to within 0.2 in. (about ;{" in. llr 5 mm).
. Intcrn;ltion:11 st:mc\;Jrd ISO 4463- 1 gives general allowable deviations fur sitew,)rk dis-
[;JnCl'S ~ ll1d de\'ati,) n~ regardless of the site element being rlaced. These are also shown in
fj. 'urc 1-6.
'~Thcre :m: ()ther recommended to lerances f,)r rough and finish grading. Previous
SPECTEXT Iml~tcr srecificati,ms sugges ted the topsotl be within Y; in . (13 mm) of speci-
fied devatilms. For ro ugh gradi ng, SPECTEXT masrer specifications suggested a tolerance
elf ±0.1 ft. ,)r 1 ;/,; in. 00 mm).
Related Sections
1- 5 Pedestrian Paving
1- 7 Right-of-Way Construction
1-7 Right-of-Way Construction

Description
Right-,)f-way construction consists of streets, highways, sidewalks, curb ramps, bus stops,
and other structures that are accessible by the public outside the borders of private prop-
erty. The Federal Highway Administration (FHA), AASHTO, and state and local depart-
ments of transportation (DOTs) all have standards for various components of right -of-way
construction, but few have standards for tulerances. In most cases the tolerance standards
relate tl) roadway smoothness, surface flatness of sidewalks, and curb alignment. Allow-
able dev iations from dimensions and slopes on design drawings and in specifications are
typ ically left to the discret ion of the field inspector of the local DOT.
In ml)St cases, wlerances are n o t a critical part of right-of-way construction, given the
nature and lise of the construct io n and the variables related tl) climate exposure, mainte-
n~mce, and the heavy wear and tear that exterinr elements are subjected to. Where toler-
.
~>
;Jnces are becoming an increasingly implmant issue is in the area of accessibility for
disabled users.
A t this writing, the U.s. Access Board had issued revised draft guidelines for accessi-
hie pub lic rights-of-way, but they h ad not been issued as a final rule , nor h ad the De part-
ment ofJ ustice adopted them as law. In the meantime, current right-of-way construction
rh:lt is funded wholly or in part with federal monies is subject to requirements of various
ex isting tederal laws and ge nerally makes reference to the technical requirements of the
currene ADA,'\G . Individual st3te laws may also app ly. In addition , m o~ t local and state
.Icprtme nrs <)t transpo rt,lfion h ave requirements and guidelines for accessibility to meet
.\ DA gu I,kl in e ~.
The ,lr1tt gUidelines fi)( righrs-of-\\'a y as well ~I S the revised ADAAG bo th state that
",III dimensi ons ;Ire subject (Oc(,nven tional industry w lerance except \\·here the require-
ment is ,' rated :~s ;j r:mge \\'irh spec ific minimum Jnd maximum enJ po ints." (Sec tion
R103 j, i ·;t [be dratt ri ght5·,l· w~lV guiJel ines alKI Secti,m U <)t the re\' i,e" ADAAC
,m"). H " \'1>~ \'e r, rhe ,h:\vis<)rv ill the r~'\ ' i,t'd ADA.ACi "tate;; rhat <xh e rt' :l re·.juireml'nt is J
mini mu l1I ,,<I' ma ximum ,Ji lllen~i < 111 tll ;rr ,j. 'h 11( 't h: l,'e ' ·. V<' >recit'i( n:inil11urn ..mel m~lxi ··
;~11I n l \' n .:l ! ~~ ~ ; nr , ; . t \:.-, I\ ~ f:.H hc~ l)) : l \, I ~"'rl \:.
nTlTITTllll
Figure 1-7 Right-of-way construction
ACI:
vertical deviation of surfaces of
ramps, sidewalks, and intersections
±1/4" per 10' (±6 mm/3 m)
change of level:
+ 1/8" (3) sidewalk running
/ slope: 1%
flatness of
sidewalk:
±1/4" /10' (6mm/3m)
sidewalk cross
/
~+0.5%
concrete
gutter roadway
counters lope: ~ ~~~de: +0.5%
+0.5% , ~halt: +1%
concrete/
roadway
cross slope: +0.5%
asphalt: + 1%
Note: recommended roadway
tolerances are given in the
direction of pedestrian/wheelchair
travel and are opposite of
terminology for the roadway; that is,
pedestrian roadway cross slope is
the running slope of the roadway.
Note: suggested tolerances, not

industry standards. See text.
Table 1-2 Relative positional accuracies
Horizontal Vertical
positional accuracy positional accuracy
Site elements mm it mm it
R,)ullh gra,lin\l sr~)kes ±300 ± 1.0 ±60 ±0.02
Sul'llnlJe rec! ht:'~lJ stakes ±lSO ±O.50 ± 15 ±O.OS
Finish grade blue top stakes ±150 ±O.SO ±15 ±O.OS
BllilJing offset stakes ±10 ±0.03 ±10 ±0.03
Sewer offset stakes ±30 ±0.10 ±10 ±0.03
Waterline dfse t stakes ±30 ±0.1O ±30 ±0.1O
Hvdrant offse t stakes ±30 ±0.10 ±15 ±O.OS
Street lights ±60 ±0.20 ±30 ±0.10
C urb offsets ±15 ±O.OS ±10 ±0.03
Positional accuracy is gi~ 'en at the 95 percent confidence level
Source : Used with permission from National Society of Profess ional Surveyors
Table 1-3 Relative positional accuracies for land title surveys
Classification of survey Acceptable Relative Positional Accuracy

Urban 0.07 ft (21 mm) plus 50 ppm
Suburban 0.13 ft (40 mm) plus 100 ppm
Rural 0.26 ft (79 mm) plus 200 ppm
Positional ilauracy is given at the 95 percent confidence level
ppm: pans per million
S,"urce: USed with pelmission ji'om National Suciet)· of Profes sional Surveyors
There are very few industry standard tolerances for right-of-way construction. A l-
though to lerances exist for architectural construction , it is not generally appropriate to
;lpply these to ex teri or work.
Industry Recommendations
AccessIble RIghrs-o{ way: A Des Ign GLiide, November (Washington, DC: U.S. Archi tec-
tULl I and Tr~msp()rt a tion Barri ers Comp liance BmHd, 1999) .
.\CI 117 ·06 , Sp.:cijrcQrIun5 jor Toltmnces for Corlerete ConsrnLction and Materials and
COmrnC11fdry (Farmington Hills, M1: American C oncrete Insti tute , 20(6).
Am cricdm !I.'irh Disc1bilIri<?s Au c1nd A rchItecwml Barrias An Accessibiliry G uidelines, Julv
23 (\V~bh Ing[()n, DC: C. S. Architectural and Transportat ion Bmriers C umpliance
J),XIr.J , ~..:'04 ) w\v\\'.access·h)ard.gov/aJa-aba!index. htm
\': UIR P Pr')ject 20·07/T3Sk 16 7, A.n .\nalysi5 of the Dmft AVA Guidelines for ACCessible
Ri,4h,,,. (>1- \'0((\' . [' J vid Kent Ba llast, June (\'V;;shi ngr()I1, DC: Tmnsporution Rese:lrch
P"Ir'!' '' dtl<ln; d C,.li"per;lfi \ c' Hi d IlV :l \ R,:'c:\ rch Pl'l ;sr;lIll. ~,~C-+).
Figure 1-7.1 Right-of-way construction
signal device
vertical reach
±1" (51)
signal device
horizontal position
±2" (51)
~f none
~'oo, ~±1' (25)
space: ±2" (51) ./

~ ///
Y'
/
/
protruding objects
at 80" (2030), height: -1" (-25)
protruding objects
at 27" (685), height: + 1" (25)
circulation path: -3/4" (-19)
Note: suggested tolerances, not

industry standards. See text.
Chapter 3
Steel
-
3-1 Mill Tolerances for Wand HP Shapes
Description
Figure 3-1 illustrates some of the allowable variations in cross-sectional size and straight-
ness of standard rolled Wand HP shapes, commonly used for columns. A W shape is a
doubly symmetric, wide-flange shape used as a beam or column whose inside flange sur-
faces are substantially parallel. An HP shape is a wide-flange shape generally used as a
bearing pile whose flanges and webs are of the same nominal thickness and whose depth
and width are essentially the same. The tolerances shown are those that most affect ar-
chitectural detailing and coordination with other materials. Tolerances for web thick-
ness and web depth are not included. Refer to ASTM A6/A6M for a complete listing of
all tolerances for various steel shapes in both U.S. customary units and SI units.
Industry Standards
AISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (Chicago: Ameri-
can Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 2005).
ASTM A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
Testing and Materials, 2005).
In addition to the tolerances shown in the drawing, Table 3-1 gives the allowable varia-
tions in camber, sweep, and length. Camber is the deviation in straightness parallel to the
web. Sweep is the deviation in straightness parallel to the flanges.
When beams are specified with camber AISC (American Institute of Steel Construc-
tion) 303 fabrication, tolerances are slightly different than those required by ASTM
A6/A6M. When beams are received from the mill by the fabricator with 75 percent of the
specified camber, no further cambering is required. Otherwise, the maximum variation in
camber depends on the length of the member. For beams equal to or less than 50 ft. (15
m), the maximum variation is -0, +~ in. (13 mm). For beams longer than 50 ft. (15 m),
the maximum variation is -0, + ~ in. (13 mm), plus Ys in. (3 mm) for each additional 10 ft.
(3 m) or fraction thereof.
AISC 303 requires that inspection of camber be done in the fabricator's shop in the
unstressed condition. Camber cannot be inspected in the field because of various factors,
including the release of stresses over time, the effects of the dead weight of the member,
the restraint caused by end conditions in the erected state, and the effects of additional
Jead load.
Figure 3-1 Mill tolerances for Wand HP shapes
bf= flange width as published in

the Manual of Steel Construction
d = flange depth as published in
x
co
E T' = flange tilt B = flange width in inches (mm)
§: C = maximum depth at any cross section
~
..- ---------~~---------
+
"0 , column work point
II
()
I .. -,,
1/2 B ±3/16" (±5)
±5/16 (±8) for sections
over 426 Ibltt (634 kg/m)
T' = flange tilt
---------~~---------
maximum flanges out of square, F

T +T', = 1/4" (6) for sections
3
12 inches (310) deep and under and
T +T' = 5/16" (8) for sections over 3
12" (310) deep. 3
3
T = flange tilt 1
-
Table 3-1 Permissible variation in camber and sweep for
Chapter 3: Steel 77
Wand HP shapes
Permissible variation, in. (mm)

Sizes Length Camber Sweep
Bange width less Any W' X L, ft.

5
than 6 in. (150 mm)
(2 mmxL, m) (2 mmx L, m)
1/11 L, ft.
Bange width equal Any /8 X 10
to or greater than 6 in.
(150 mm) (1 mmxL, m)
L, ft. h3 •
Certain sections 45 ft. (14 m) 'III
~ XlO wit %m. max
used as columnsa and under
(1 mm x L, m with 10 mm max.)
Over 45 ft.
(14 m) JI • (1111 X L, ft. - 45 )
/8 m. + /8 10
(10 mm + [1 mm x (L, m - 14m)])
a Sections include W 8 x 31 and heavier, W 10 x 49 and heavier, W 12 x 65 and heavier,

W 14 x 90 and heavier. (200 mm deep, 46.1 kg/m and heavier; 250 mm deep, 73 kg/m and
heavier; 310 mm deep, 97 kg/m and heavier; 360 mm deep, 116 kg/m and heavier)
Far other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject
to negotiation with the manufacturer.
Source: ASTM A6/A6M. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Related Sections
3-2 Mill Tolerances for Length ofW and HP Shapes
3-3 Mill Tolerances for S and M Shapes and Channels
. 3-6 Steel Column Erection Tolerances
3-7 Location of Exterior Steel Columns in Plan
• '.c 14-1 Accumulated Column Tolerances
Figure 3-2 Mill tolerances for length of Wand HP
bf= flange width as published in

d = flange depth as published in
~
E T' = flange tilt B = flange width in inches (mm)
~ C = maximum depth at any cross SA(,~Tln",··"·
~ ---------;,.,~------ --
T-
+
"0 'column work point
II
()
,
I .. -I
1/2 B ±3I16" (±5)
±5/16 (±S) for sections
over 4261blft (634 kg/m)
T' = flange tilt
-------;,wpt-------
maximum flanges out of square,
T+T', = 1/4" (6) for sections
12 inches (310) deep and under and
T +T' = 5/16" (S) for sections over
12" (310) deep.
T = flange tilt
Chapter 3: Steel 79
3-2 Mill Tolerances for Length of Wand HP

Shapes
Description
These tolerances are a continuation of Section 3-1 and include allowable variations in
length and end squareness for both unmilled and milled sections. Milled shapes are com-
monly used for columns.
Industry Standards
AISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (Chicago: Ameri-
can Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 2005).
Allowable tolerances are shown in Tables 3-2 and 3-3, as illustrated in Figure 3-2. For W
and HP shapes used for bearing piles, the permitted length tolerances are +5 in. (125)
and --0 in. Note that AISC 303 fabrication tolerances limit fabricated length variation
to ±YI6 in. (2 mm) for members equal to or less than 30 ft. (9,000 mm) and to ±~ in. (3
mm) for members greater than 30 ft. (9,000 mm). For members that have both ends fin-
ished for contact bearing, the tolerance of )'-(z in. (1 mm) is the same as in ASTM
A6/A6M.
Table 3-2 Permissible variation in length for Wand HP

shapes
Permissible variation from specified length, in. (mm)

30 ft. (9 m) and under Over 30 ft. (9 m)
W shapes Over Under Over Under
Beams 24 in. (610) %(10) %(10) %(10 mm) plus ),{6 %(10)
and under (1 mm) for each
additional 5 ft. (1 m)
or fraction thereof
Beams over 24 in. 11 (13) 11 (13) 11 (13 mm) plus ),{6 (1) 11 (13)
(610) and all columns for each additional 5 ft.
(1 m) or fraction
thereof
Figure 3-3 Mill Tolerances for Sand M shapes and

channels
~
B
---
I
...... + T'
t
see Table 3-4 for
A tolerances for A and B A
~T
1
T +T' = 1/32 inlin (0.03 mmlmm) of B
t Camber = 1/8 in x LSft (for nominal size over 3

(Camber = 2 x L, m for over 75 mm)
Camber =1/4 in x LSft (for nominal size under 3

(Camber = 4 x L, m for under 75 mm)
out of square tolerance:
1/64 in/in (0.017 mm/mm) of depth
t:
-~~~~~ ~=-~~-~===--i---~=~~~-- ~~~~~~~ :1
t sweep: subject to negotiation between
manufacturer and purchaser
Chapter 3: Steel 81
Table 3-3 Permissible variations for length and squareness for milled shapes
Milled huth ends Milled one t'l1ll

Length, in. (mm) End out of Length, in. (mm) End out of
~.--~-----
Otler Cnder square, max., Ol'er Under square, max.,

ill. (mm) in. (mm)
I ~Lrth: U h-' '(' ill.
I I 1," t" ~) 20 ITIlll)
;5: (l ) (I) ;.: \ 1) (1)
LCll.~th: () (U /(, ft.
l: II' 21 ro)
Lt·n.!:!th variatiun and out-llf-square variation are additive.

Lc:ngth is measured along centerline of web.
-",jllrCe: AST,\1 A6/A6:\1. COPYlight ASTM International. Rctninted with pennission.
Related Sections
3-6 Steel Cuiumn Erection Tolerances
3-i Location of Exterior Steel Columns in Plan
14-1 Accullllliated Column Tolerances
14-2 AcclImui:ued Steel Frame Tolerances
3-3 M ill Tolerances for Sand M Shapes

and Channels
Description
Figure)·j illu"trate SI)me of the allowable v3nations in cruss-sectional si:e and
str:-ri,d1tne", otstandard wiled S, M, and channel shapes. The tolerances shllwn
are th,'"e that m(~st affect architectural Llerailing and courdination with other
nUkri31<. Tolerance, for web thickness and web depth are not included.
Industry Standards
.-\5Tl\1\(i/,-\6tvL Stdlltitlrd Spt::cifi·cotioll.fin Gt::)lcmi Requir~ments for Rolltd Struc-
IiI: ,/ \Ii ci Blm, PIL][C\" Shc1t'c\, (mel Sheet Piling. (\Vest C111sh"ilOcken, PA:
\'i 1,,"1''': 111 Sl'(ictl fell' Tt·.sting and "fakriab, ~l)05).
iil,~J.llr,,·" r,.' (h", ;.!.'iennLt> dK'I\n in the dr3.willgs, Tables 3-4 dnel 3,,) gi'!e the
;·n· " 1··lf ";m:'lcl,. ns (1 I cr·:,c·',,<:t;(l!1 "\ ,i:,c.., :Illd lellgtb.
Table 3-4 Permissible variation in cross sectional shapes for S, M, C,

and MC shapes
A, depth, in. (mm) B, flange width, in. (mm)

Shape Nominal size, in. (mm) Over Under Over Under
SandM 3 to 7, inclusive (75 to 180) 3/32 (2) 1/16 (2) 1/8 (3) 1/8 (3)
Over 7 to 14 inclusive (180 to 360) 1/8 (3) 3/32 (2) 5/32 (4) 5/3z (4)
Over 14 to 24, inclusive (360 to 610) 3/16 (5) 1/8 (3) 3/16 (5) 3/16 (5)
C andMC Over 11,.1 to 3, exclusive (40 to 75) I/!6 (2) I/!6 (2) 1/16 (2) I/!6 (2)
3 to 7, inclusive (75 to 180) 3/3z (3) 1/16 (2) 1/8 (3) 1/8 (3)
Over 7 to 14, inclusive (180 to 360) 1/8 (3) 3/32 (3) 1/8 (3) 5/32 (4)
Over 14 (360) 3/16 (5) 1/8 (3) 1/8 (3) 3/16 (5)
I'
Table 3-5 Permissible variation in length for S, M, and channel shapes
Allowable variation from specified length, in. (mm)

Over 10 to 20 ft Over 20 to 30 ft. Over 30 to 40 Over 40 to 50 Over 50 to 65
(Over 3 to 6 m) (Over 6 m to 9 ft. (9 to 12 m) ft. (12 to 15 m) ft. (15 to 20 m) Over 65 ft.
inclusive m) inclusive inclusive inclusive inclusive (20 m)
Under <:Ner Under <:Ner Under <:Ner Under <:Ner Under <:Ner Under
S, M, 1 l/Z (38) o o o o o No requiretnents
and
channels
Note: tolerances apply to sections with greatest cross sectional dimension 3" (75 mm) and over. Refer to ASTM A6/A6Mfor
other tolerances.
Related Sections
14-1 Accumulated Column Tolerances
14-2 Accumulated Steel Frame Tolerances
3-4 Mill Tolerances for Structural

Angles and Tees
Description
This section includes information for rolled tees and structural-size angles. There are ad-
ditional tolerances for bar-size angles, which include those with legs less than 3 in. (75
mm). Refer to ASTM A6/A6M for information on these smaller angles and for tee sec-
tions.
Chapter 3: Steel 83
Figure 3-4 Mill tolerances for structural angles and tees
t __ ,,-:::;.---:==::'::' -
, T=3/128in/inofB
-----=--.::,-T (0.026 mm/mm)
T = 1/32 in/in of B for
,_ _ - - - - - ..- . _ 1 1,5"
B Tees over 3 in (75)
(0,03 mm/mm)
(a) cross-sectional tolerances
i
i
I
For sections 3 in (75) and over:
I
~~-- Camber=1/8 in x \ ft ~--
(Camber=2 x L, m)
j sweep: subject to negotiation between

manufacturer and purchaser
(b) sweep and camber tolerances
L ~i
I: I'
~ horizontal surface
(c) position for measuring camber

Table 3-6 Permissible variation in sizes for angles and tees
Variation in depth of Variation in length of angle leg.

tee, A, in. (mm) or width of tee, B, in. (nun) .
Nominal size 1, in. (mm) Over, A Under, A Over, B Under, B
Angles
Over 2 to 3, exclusive (50 to 75) 1116 (2) 1116 (2)
3 to 4, inclusive (75 to 100 inc!.) I/S (3) 3/32 (2)
Over 4 to 6, inclusive (Over 100 to 150 ) I/S (3) I/S (3)
Over 6 (Over 150) 3iJ6 (5) I/S (3)

Tees
11/4 (30) and under 3/64 (1) 3/64 (1) 3/64 (1) 3/64 (1).
Over 11/4 to 2, inclusive (30 to 50) 1116 (2) 1116 (2) 1116 (2) 1116 (2)
Over 2 to 3, exclusive (50 to 75) 3/32 (2) 3/32 (2) 3/32 (2) 3/32 (2)
3 to 5, inclusive. (75 to 125) 3/32 (2) I iJ6 (2) I/S (3) I/S (3)
Over 5 to 7, inclusive (125 to 180) 3/32 (2) 1116 (2) I/S (3) I/S (3)
I
For angles with unequal legs the longer leg detennines the classification.
Source: ASTM A6/A6M. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with pennission.
Table 3-7 Permissible variation in length for angles and tees
Variation from specified length, in. (mm)

5 to 10 ft. excl. 10 to 20 ft. excl. 20 to 30 ft. incl. Over 30 to 40 ft.
(I.5t03m) (3 to 6 m) (6 to 9 m) incl. (9 to 12 m)
Nominal. size, in.
(mm) Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
Under 3 (75) 5/S (16) 0 1 (25) 0 11/2 (38) 0 2 (51) 0
3 (75) and over 1 (25) 0 11/2 (38) 0 13/4 (45) 0 21/4 (57) 0
Industry Standards
Allowable variations in angle and tee sizes are shown in Table 3-6, as illustrated in Figure
3-4. Length tolerances for sizes up to 40 ft. (12.2 m) are shown in Table 3-7. Ends-out-of-
square tolerance for angles is 1'i'28 in. (0.026 mm) per in. ofleg length (IW).
Chapter 3: Steel 85
3-5 Mill Tolerances for Pipe and Tubing

Description
Thi, secti(lll includes illfunn,ltiull for structural pipe and tubing that are cl)ll1lnonly used
t~lr cl)lumns in residential ancllight commercial construction. In most cases, the allowable
mill wlerances are small enough that pwblems with architectural detailing are not en-
c,luntered. The relatively large mill tulerances for length are adjusted at the fabricating
rlant to ml)re precise measurements if necessary.
Industry Standards
ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Fanned Wielded and Seamless Carbon Steel
StrJtctJtral Tubing in Rounds and Shapes (West Conshohocken, FA: American Society
for Testing and Materials, 2003).
ASTM A618/A618M, Standard Specification for Hut-fanned Wielded and Seamless High-
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing (West Cunshohocken, PA: American Society for
In addition to the tolerances shown in Figure 3-5, allowable tolerances in length for both
round and rectangular tubing are shown in Table 3-8.
The dimensional tolerances, A, for square and rectangular tubing vary with the largest
outside dimension but never exceed 1 percent for sections over 5 Y! in. (139.7 mm). Be-
cause this is only about)1o in. (1.6 mm) for a 6-in. section, it seldom presents a problem for
architectural detailing.
Table 3-8 Length tolerances for pipe and tubing
22 ft. (6.7 m) and under Over 22 ft. (6.7 m)

Over Under Owr Under
Length tolerance for specified 1/4 (6.4)
lengths, in. (mm)
Source: ASTM A500. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Table 3-9 Twist tolerances for square and

rectangular tubing
Specified dimension of the longest side, Maximum twist in the first 3 ft.
in. (mm) (1 m) and in each additional 3 ft.
~-----------------------------------
1';2 (38.1) and under 0.050 in. (1.39)

Over 11/2 (38.1) to 2 1., (63.5). inc!. 0.062 in. (1.72)
I,
OYer 21 (63.5) to 4 (101.6). incl. 0.075 in. (2.09)
Over-i (101.6) to 6 (152.4). inc!. 0.087 in. (2.42)
Over 6 (152.4) to 8 (203.2), inc!. 0.100 in. (2.78)
Uver 8 (203.2) 0 112 in. (311 )
Su:trce: ."1ST"! A.500 Copyright -",STM Im2rniltional. Reprintt'.t I<ith permissiDn.
Figure 3-5 Mill tolerances for pipe and tubing
A618:
0= 2" (50) and over: ±1%
0= 1/1/2" (38) and under:
+ 1/64" (0.4), - 1/32" (0.8)
A500:
±0.75%
-:to.at times A
for A pve.r A
51/2" (139.7)
A500:
-10% max.
Pipe 2" (50.8) diam. and over R=3xTmax.---1
I I ! !
1/8 in (10.4 mm) x L, ft (m) I t

L ~ 5 - I r;--- L
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
--L- _ _ ....1_ _ _ _1
.... ......l_ _ _~J _ _~
Chapter 3: Steel 87
Twist tolerances for square and rectangular tubing are measured by placing one end
· he section on a flat surface and measuring the height that either corner, at the oppo-
l' t t
sIte en l 1 of the section, extends above the surface. These tolerances are summarized in
.
Table 3-9.
Related Sections
3-7 Exterior Steel Columns in Plan
3-6 Steel Column Erection Tolerances

Description
Figure 3-6 illustrates some of the erection tolerances permitted by the AISC for the
plumbness of columns and attached spandrel beams. Along with the mill tolerances and
plan tolerances shown in Sections 3-1, 3-2, 3-7, and 3-8, this diagram permits realistic de-
tailing of the attachment of other materials, such as exterior cladding, to a steel frame.
However, AISC 303 states that the accumulated mill and fabrication tolerances cannot
cause erection tolerances to be exceeded. Some of the methods by which accumulated tol-
erances can be accommodated are shown in Chapter 14.
Figure 3-6 shows the permissible envelope within which the working points of
columns can fall. When misalignment of beams is caused by an acceptable variation in
column alignment, the beams are considered acceptable as well. The working point of a col-
umn is the actual center of the column at each end of the column as shipped. The working
point of a beam is the actual centerline of the top flange at each end. The member working
line is a straight line that connects the member working points.
Industry Standards
AISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (Chicago: American
Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 2005).
A column is considered plumb if the deviation of the working line of the column from true
plumb does not exceed 1:500. However, for individual exterior columns, AISC standard
practices limit the total variation to 1 in. (25 mm) toward the building line and 2 in. (50
mm) away from the building line up to the twentieth floor and a maximum deviation of
Yi6 in. (2 mm) per floor above the twentieth floor up to a maximum of 2 in. (50 mm) to-
ward and 3 in. (75 mm) away from the building line.
Although tolerances for anchor bolt placement are not the responsibility of the fabri-
cator or the erector, the AISC code requires that the center-to-center dimension between
adjacent anchor bolt groups and from the established column line not vary by more than
1.; in. (6 mm). The center-to-center distance between any two bolts within an anchor bolt
group carmot vary by more than )i in. (3 mm).
For members with both ends finished for contact bearing, a fabrication variation of no
more than Kin. (1 mm) in the overall length of columns is permitted.
Related Sections
2-5 Footings and Anchor Bolts
Figure 3-6 Steel column erection tolerances
3" (75) for exterior columns
max. slope
1/16" (2)
per story for
exterior columns
20th floor
Q) Tt= 1"
c::
~
C)
c::
32
·s
.c
column line
varies
max. slope
1/500 between
working points
~II: 1/4" (6) base w.P. tolerance

1/4" (6)
allowable plumb
line tolerances
Chapter 3: Steel 89
- 1,,(:1([,)11 ,)t Extt'ril'r Stee! L\,ll1lTl[l' ill Plan

, , -
, I~",lm C,)llll11l1 C,)l1lWltiun5
i l E!.:\·Jt, 'r Sh:ltr T,)!er~ll1Ce5
,1:.'I'r,T 14, Slc't'! Fr~1l11e SYstell1s
-
Description
III ,lck!itiun tu individual culumn tulerances for ['lumb, a ruw uf cu IUI11 115 must fall within
'J','citic,llimit5. This determines the ;di~nl11ent of the tuta! length uf a huilding and the
.di~l1ment uf individual beams between column:;, Figure 3-7 show, the tolerances fur this
,dl'..!nment as well as permissible alignment fur members with field splices.
Industry Standards
.\ISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice fur Steel Buildings and Bridges (Chicago: American
Institllte of Steel Cunstruction, Inc., 20(5).
The working puints at the top, uf exteriur columns in a single-tier huilding ur the \V'lrk-
ing points uf exterior Clliumns at any splice level t(X mnltitier huildings must fall within a
hurizontal envelupe parallel tu the huikling line. This is shown di8grammatically in Fig-
ure 3-7(a). For each culumn, the working points must also t~l11 within the envelupe shown
in Figure 3-6. This huri:ontal envelope is 1'/ in. (38 mm) wide fur buildings up to 300 ft
(91 m) long and is increased )I, in. (13 0101) for each 100 ft (30 m) hut cannot exceed 3 in.
(75mm).
The hurizontallocation of this [Ii-in. (38-mm) envelope d()es nut necessarily have tu
f.lll directly abuve or beluw the adjacent envelupe hut must he within the allowable 1 :500
tolerance in plumbness for columns, as shuwn in Figure 3-6.
If the alignment uf the culumns is within acceptable limits, any single piece he am c,)n-
nected to them is cunsidered in acceptable alignment. Huwe\'er, if the horizontal member
consists of two ur more splices, the field-fabric~Hed member is considered acceptable if the
misalignment d,les not exceed 1:500 between adjacent memhers. This is sh,)wn diagram-
maticallv in Figure 3-7(b) for a heam between two c,)lumns. The same 1:500 misalign-
ment tolerance applies to field-spliced vertical members.
For cantilevered members, alignment is checked by extending a straight line frum the
w,Jrki ng point at the memher's supported end and comparing it with the working line of
the cantilevered member. If the misalignment is equal tu C'f less than ';(,'" of the distance
from the ~npported end to the free end, the member is considered aligned, level, ur plumb,
dependi ng ,)[1 the direction of the cantilever.
Related Sections
3- J !'vI i II T(\ler:1nce~ t~)r W an,l HP Shapes
3-2 \fill Tolerances f~1r Length 'If \'\' ;'tn,l HP Shapes
3-1'1 ~tt'el C,)lull1n Erecthm T, .[er,1I1ee'
)--,\ Be;l!11jC"lumn C,'nnecri,)ns
: -1--1 '\("1111' ,tared C,llll1lll T.lkuncC"
C".)f":r 1-+, -;rc'd Fr::lnt' '-:y,renb
Figure 3-7 Location of exterior steel columns in plan
-------------i---------------
,
~ull~i~i!ln!'_ --- --- --- --- --~-
I
---- -- .
column
=~l-t~-=_- I""--=-_=~==-~/::~m:~:~=~= -; worl<

--~f--------
column
plumbness
ji~ Ta maximum envelope for
tolerances, I working points for all columns
(see Sections at any given elevation; must fall
3-6 and 14-1) within the limits of T a and Tt
Ta = Tolerance away from building line

T t = Tolerance toward building line
Tp = Tolerance parallel to building line (see Section 14-1)
(a) tolerances for columns with continuous intermediate beams
/ ' field splice support ~

500 maximum /' pOint ~
I~---~1~~--ll~~t_~_~
-==::J1
500 maximum
(b) tolerances for members with field splices
Chapter 3: Steel 91
3-B Steel Beam/Column Connections

Description
As stated in Section 3-7, horizontal alignment of beams is considered acceptable when
the ends are connected to columns that fall with acceptable tolerances. This section de-
scribes acceptable variations in both horizontal and vertical placement of beams and tol-
erances of individual columns between floors.
Industry Standards
Figure 3-8(a) illustrates how the horizontal position of an individual beam work point
must fall within the allowable column tolerances shown in Figure 3-6. In addition, the al-
lowable vertical tolerance is determined by measuring from the upper column splice line
to the theoretical beam work point. This distance cannot be greater than Yl6 in. (5 mm) or
less than Yl6 in. (8 mm).
As shown in Figure 3-8(b), the variation in straightness for straight compression must
be equal to or less than Yi',0Cl0 of the axial length between points that are to be laterally sup-
ported. This is a fabrication tolerance as given in AISC 303. For curved members, the
variation from the theoretical curve must be equal to or less than the variation in sweep
that is required for an equivalent straight member of the same length as specified in
ASTM A6/A6M. Refer to Sections 3-2 and 3-3.
Related Sections
3-2 Mill Tolerances for Length of W and HP Shapes
3-3 Mill Tolerances for Sand M Shapes and Channels
3-10 Elevator Shaft Tolerances
Chapter 14, Steel Frame Systems
3-9 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel

Description
ArchitecturaUy exposed structural steel (AESS) is steel subject to normal view by pedestrians
or occupants of a building. It includes, but is not limited to, weathering steel. Because it is
clearly visible, AESS is subject to closer tolerances than standard structural steel that is
hidden from view.
The individual members that must conform to AESS, tolerances must be clearly iden-
tified on the drawings so the fabricator knows which pieces must meet the more stringent
requirements.
Figure 3-8 Steel beam/column connections
column line
column work
(/)
point (W.P.)
C)
c:
.~ I i column spliC& line
§ ii i
~
..c: ~ ~ '.,
II iii theoretical beam
~ 5/16" 11 ~25)j.$JJ50 I work point
g (8) II'., I
II I
~
'C +tt-=-t)~~~;--rr
, --l-l-- - - --
I
iii
iii
iii
'. ,
(a) beam to column connection tolerances (b) allowable tolerances between floors
Industry Standards
AISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (Chicago: AnleriCall
ASTM A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural
Bars, Plates. Shapes. and Sheet Piling (West Conshohocken. PA: American Society
Mill tolerances for out-of-square. out-of-parallel, depth. width, and symmetry are the
same as those for other structural steel shapes. Length tolerances are given in Tables 3-2 ..
and 3-3. Camber and sweep tolerances are one-half those given in Table 3-1. See figUre
3-9(a).
----- -~--------~------------------~-~---------.-----------.----.-~-.--~-~------
Chapter 3:- -Steel 93
-------
Figure 3-9 Architecturally exposed structural steel
camber and sweep:

one half of values in
Table 3-1
(a) camber, sweep, and length
1/8 in (3) if open jOint

_.1-
i
() - -0 maximum 1/16 in. (2)

0 -0 I __ 1_ above exposed, surface
0- -0
(://///1>0// .;<:////
, I
t
(b) jOints (c) welding
, I one half the distances

I, ,
permitted for structural steel
~T
I
,"--
.. . .. ..
L T
I -~ ..
I
I
I ,----
..
I
.. ...
I
I I I
i
j
I
I !
:,
i I
I
I
I I I
I i
I I,
(d) erection
As indicated in Figure 3-9(b), all miters, copes, and butt cuts in exposed surfaces are'
made with uniform gaps of l-§ in. (3 mm) if the designer wants open joints or in reasonable.
contact if designed without gaps. Butt and plug welds cannot project more than).{6 in. (2
mm) above any exposed surface. If grinding or finishing is required, it must be specifically
included in the contract documents.
Erection tolerances are one-half those for structural steel as described in Sections
3-7, and 3-8. However, the designer is responsible for providing adjustable connections
between AESS and any other structural steel or masonry or concrete supports.
Related Sections
3-1 Mill Tolerances for W and HP Snapes '
3-3 Mill Tolerances for Sand M Shapes and Channels
3-4 Mill Tolerances for Structural Angles and Tees
3-8 Beam/Column Connections
3-10 Elevator Shaft Tolerances

Description
Because guide rails of elevators must be adjusted to extremely close tolerances, the struc-
tural framing to which they are attached must be built to a tolerance closer than
construction. Because tolerances required by the National Elevator Industry, Inc. (NEIl)
are more stringent you may want to include the closer tolerances in the specifications if'
recommended by the elevator supplier rather than rely on AISC standard tolerances.
Industry Standards
Building Transportation Standards and Guidelines (Salem, NY: National Elevator Industry•.
Inc.)
The AISC Code of Standard Practice requires the member working points of columns ad-·
jacent to elevator shafrs to be displaced no more than 1 in. (25 mm) from the <::~L<1UJ.WU.~_.,
column line in the first 20 stories, as shown in Figure 3-10. Above the twentieth floor.
displacement can be increased 112 in. (1 mm) for each additional story up to a maximum of
2 in. (50 mm).
However, hoistway tolerances by the NEIl are slightly more stringent. They require a
clear hoistway plumb from top to bottom with variations not to exceed 1 in. (25 mm) at
any point in the first 100 ft. (30.5 m). Above that, the tolerance may increase 112 in. (O.B
mm rather than 1 mm, as AISC uses the SI conversion) for each additional 10 ft. (3 m),
up to a maximum displacement of 2 in. (50 mm).
Chapter 3: Steel 95
Figure 3-1 0 Elevator shaft tolerances
2" (50 mm)----I I-t-

--+-I f--2" (50 mm)
~
LJ
1/32 in (1) per floor maximum
above the 20th floor
20th floor
1 in. (25) max.
1 in. (25) max.
line of member working points
r---plumb
_--,I '1.--_
When entrance walls are constructed of reinforced concrete, the NEIl requires th
the depth of the hOistway door space be increased by 1 in. (25 mm) to compensate for ne
mal field variations. Further, concrete rough openings should be 12 in. (300 mm) wid
than the clear opening width and 6 in. (150 mm) higher than the clear opening height
Related Sections
3--8 Beam/Column Connections
Chapter 4
Unit Masonry
-
4-1 Concrete Unit Masonry Manufacturing
Description
The intlmmltiun in this sectiun includes concrete huilliing brick and .,imilar solid units,
,[,lI1ll;ird hollow luad-bearing and nlJl1-luad-beclring concrete bluck, and prefaced con-
w:te block. Tbe tolerances are measured from the standard, or actual, size of the C(lncrete
b\llck units, whether n1(ldular or nonmodular, rather from the nominal ,i::es llf the blocks.
The actual sizes of Clll1Crete bricks are the manufacturers' desigmlted dimensions. The ac-
nl<ll size of modular cuncrete bricks is usually X in. (10 mm) less than the nomillal dimen-
sion (the width of one mortar joint). The actual size of nonmudular building bricks is
usually;'; in. to ~ in. 0.2 to 6.4 mm) less than the nominal dimension. Standard concrete
hlocks are ;~ in. (10 mm) less than the nominal dimension. See Figure 4-1.
Industry Standards
ASTM C55, Standard Specification for Concrete Brick (West Conshllhucken, PA: Ameri-
can Sllciety fllf Te:;ting and Materials, 2003).
AST~1 C90, Stancbrd Specitleation f()T Hollow Luadbeming Concrete Masonry Units. (West
Conshohucken, FA: American Society tt)r Testing and Materials, 2005).
ASTM C129, Standard Specification for NonloatibearingConcrete Masonry Units. (West
ConshohlJCken, FA: American S(lciety for Testing an,! Materials, 2005).
ASTM C744, Standmd Specification fur Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Mas()nrv
Units. (West Clll1iihohocken, PA: American Society for Tes[ing and tvtateriJI>, 2005).
Alluwable dimensional tolerance for standard non-load-bearing etnJ load-bearin.u: (un-
crete m;'Nll1ry units based on ASTM standards is ±;,< in. (3.2 mm) frum the standard (ac-
tual) llimension. This includes width, height, and length. !-Io\.vever, in practice, units are
lIsually metnufactured to a Y".-in. (1.6-mm) tllierance. For nun-Iuad-bearing concrete ma-
sonry lInits, the face shell thicknes~ cannot be less than ~< in. (13 mm). Fllr concrete huild-
ing brick the tolerance is alsu ±:'" in. (3.2 mm) in "'Iclth, height, and len.~th frum the
standard (actual) dimensilln.
Concrete masonry units used h)r prefaced b\uck m,,,'t meet the tderal1ces llC',u-ihod in
the prC'ceding text. 111 adllition, the wtal \'ariatilln ill tinisbecl bce llimen,inl1' (:<f l'rdiKt'cl
unit, cannot exceell :1:', ill. (1.6 mm) between the largest ,md smalle~t IInit in an\' IClt n{
c,lell si:e. The di~tl 'rticln (If [he [+111(:, and edges, . ( the {ace llf rrt'{al'ell ul1it, fr('ln rhe ':' 'I'-
rt'T( 'nJillg pirtl1e:m,j eJs;eo (it the llli h:rde maCl Inn unit c:)nl1l It l'Xl el"cl' 111. (1.1.' mm )
1t
Figure 4-1 Concrete unit masonry manufacturing
±1/S" (3.2)
±1/S" (3.2)
moulded features (scorest

ribs, patterns), within .
±1/S" (3.2) ± 1/16" (1.6) of specified
placement
(a) standard concrete masonry block or brick
±1/16" (1.6)
face distortion
(b) prefaced concrete masonry unit

Related Sections "

~"~ l>llL1\Tt: l :nit I\b,,,nrv Reinhlr'"t'111t'11t Pbcel1wnt
-+_), l ',1 lnert'rl" Lirllt M,lS(lnry Cnotrllctil)n
4-2 Concrete Unit Masonry Reinforcement

Placement
Descri ption
l\.:i[ltlllU~d concrete unit n1<lsonry is often used for walls, culumns and pilasters, lintels,
.Iil,II'eJlm," The ~,lacement of the reinbrcing is critical to the strength and performance
,,f these constl1lction elements and can affect the placement uf other emhedded items,
,uch a, electrical [:,oxes, plumhing, and structural fasteners, The American Concrete In-
,titLlte prescribes allowable variations in reintlJrcement placement. The Internatiunal
Building Code references the ACI code fl,r its requirements,
Industry Standards
ACI 530, IjA5CE 6jTMS 602, SpeCifications for Masonry Structures Detroit, MI: Ameri-
can Concrete Institute, 2005),
Joint standards of the American Concrete Institute, The Masonry Society, and the Amer"
iean Society of Civil Engineers for reinforcement placement in masonry are shown in Fig"
ures 4-2(a) and (b), Tolerances for the placement of reintlJrcement in walls and t1exural
elements depend on d, the distance from the compression face uf the wall"r t1exuralmem-
ber to the centroid of the reintllrcement. See Figure 4-2(b) and Table 1. When two par- +
allel bars are within the same cell, the clear distance between the hars must be greater
than or equal to the diameter of the hars and not less than 1 in, (25 111m), L,mgituJinal
sp3.cing must be within 2 in, (51 mm) of the required location,
Table 4-1 ACI masonry reinforcement placement

tolerances
d Placement tolerance, T
d:'O. S" (203) ± II," (12. 7)

S" (203):'0. d:S 24" (610) ±I" (25.4)
d'> 2-1-" (6111) ± I' \ )2)
Figure 4-2 Concrete unit masonry reinforcement placem
clear distance between reinforcing

bars and any face of masonry;
minimum of:
1/4" (6.4) for fine grout
1/2" (13) for coarse grout
II
~-- space between

vertical bars: ±2" (51)
(a) ACI tolerance standards
specified distance ±2" (51)

±2" (51)
see Table 4-1
(b) ACI requirements

f!gure 4-3 Concrete unit masonry construction
I
I
I
I
lout of plumb:
I=l=:=::::;g ±1/4" in 10' (±6.4 mm in 3.05 m) location in plan:
±3/S" in 20' (±9.5 mm in 6.10 m) ±1/2" in 20' (±12.7 mm in 6.10 m)
I ±1/2" (13 mm) maximum ±3/4" (±19.1 mm) maximum
~
I
t::=:==ml
I
I
I
JOQOOO!tOJJtl
- f ----------1-
true to a line: 1/2" (12.7) envelope
±1/4" in 10' (±6.4 in 3.05 m) in total length of wall
±3/S" in 20' (±9.5 mm in 6.10 m)
(a) vertical alignment (b) lateral alignment
top of bearing wall level alignment:

relative alignment
±1/4" in 10' (±6.4 mm in 3.05 m)
±1/4" in 10' (6.4 mm in 3.05 m) ±1/2" (±12.7 mm) maximum
±1/2" (±12.7 mm) maximum
location of elements:
~~~~~--~~~~~~ .. ~~~~.~'~~
_ .~
••t'4
J ±1/4" (6.4 mm) in story height
±3/4" (19.1 mm) maximum
(c) level alignment
head joints:
-1/4" (-6.4 mm), +3/S" (+9.5 mm) head joint thickness:
---.I ~
-1/4" (-6.4 mm), +3/S" (+9.5 mm)
-;ir-
multiwythe
wall:
D +1/2" (12.7)
-1/4" (6.4)
(d) jOint alignment (e) cross sectional dimensions
f
Figure 4-4 Prefabricated masonry panels
L, see Table 4-2
H, see
Table 4-2
)V T : + 1/4" (6.4)
out-of-square: - 1/8" (3.2)
difference in length of diagonal face
measurements ±1/8" in 6' (3.2 mm in 1.83 m)
nor
maximum of 1/4" (6.4)
(a) dimensional tolerances
• centerline as shown on
I!3/8 (9'~1 ~ plans and shop drawings
, anchors, inserts, /
connections and
lifting devices
-------------yl.#'out of plane:
) r ±1/8" per 6'
(3.2 mm per 1.83
(b) warpage and inserts
Related Sections
i-I C,l11crete Unit Masonry Manufacturing
, i-1 Cllncrete Unit Masonry Cunstruction
I +-4 PrcfahriGltecl Masonry Panels
I
1 4-3 Concrete Unit Masonry Construction
i Description
This section describes tolerances for laying up standard concrete unit masonry
f Ira 11" dther single wythe or multiple wythe.
Industry Standards
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specifications for Masonry Structures (Detroit,
MI: American Concrete Institute, 2005).
The tolerance for concrete unit masonry as given in ACI 530.1 and the National
Concrete Masonry Association are shown in Figure 4-3. In addition, the align-
ment of columns and walls and the alignment of a wall interrupted by a floor slab
is ±;.1 in. (13 mm) for bearing walls and ±X in. (19 mm) for nonbearing walls. The
ACI 530.1 tolerances for a collar joint, grout space, or cavity width are -X in.
(6.4 mm) and +X in. (9.5 mm).
All of the ACI tolerances apply to concrete masonry walls as well as brick and
other types of masonry.
Related Sections
4-2 Concrete Unit Masonry Reinforcement Placement
4--4 Prefabricated Masonry Panels
Chapter 15, Masonry Systems
4-4 Prefabricated Masonry Panels

Description
Prefabricated masonry panels include shop-fabricated assemblies made from con-
crete units masonry, brick, or structural clay tile.
Industry Standards
AST~I C90 1, Standard Specification for Prefabrimted ?\lasOJHY Panels (West Con-
'hnhocken, P.\: American Society t~1r Testing and klaterials, 200j).
ASTM tdt~r:l1LCe "pecifications only rIO' bte to the hbricarion of 111~ld -hearing and
nnn-Lxlll·be:uing l'anels, .15 ,hown in Figure 4-4. Erecti.:ln t"ierance5 are ~ener
dk r(\~uire(1 te, '''llt~'rm l,) .\CI ~ta!l..:hrJ, .1' JcolTihed 11l ~ecti..:>n 4-1. ['illk'1.-
'i, 'n:1\ t· ,In II)'. c-' ,lel-'en..:1 ( l [ l [he 'ce ,)f the I':md "m..! arc ltstc..:lm 1d·\.:- + l
lmnn'T rr JI r,rrrrIrr, rI
Table 4-2 Dimensional tolerances of prefabricated

masonry panels
size of panel, L or H tolerance

10' or under ±1/8"
0.05 m or under) (±3.2 mm)
10' to 20' +1/8", _3/16"
0.05 m to 6.1 m) (+ 3.2 mm, -4.8 mm)
20' to 30' +1/8", ,-1/4"
(6.096 m to 9.144 m) -- (+ 31 mm, - 6,4 mm)
For each additional 10' (3.05 mm): ±1/16" (1.6mmF
Source: ASTM C 901. CoPYright ASTM Intemariona!.
Reprinted with permission.
Related Sections
4.1 Concrete Unit Masonry Manufacturing
4.2 Concrete Unit Masonry Reinforcement Placement
4-5 Brick Manufacturing
4-7 Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile
Chapter 15, Masonry Systems

Description
This sections covers four categories of brick. The first category, facing brick, is available in
three types: FBS, FBX, and FBA. Only types FBS and FBX have manufacturing tolerances
established by ASTM specifications. The other three categories are building brick, hollow
brick, and thin veneer brick units. Building brick is a solid-clay masonry unit used where
external appearance is not a concern. Hollow brick is clay masonry whose net cross-sec-
tional solid area is less than 75 percent of its gross cross-sectional area. Thin brick veneer is:
a clay masonry unit with a maximum thickness of IX in. (44 mm).
Industry Standards
ASTM C62, Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay"
or Shale). (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials,
2004).
ASTM C216, Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay
or Shale) (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials,
2004).
ASTM C652, Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from
Clay or Shale) (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materi-
als, 2004).
-----------
Figure 4-5 Brick manufacturing

-
,,
i
I
f
\ td
//,t:::r
" ""
" ""
:;.-
:/ "" w = warpage
,... Y
d =distortion
see Table 4-4
maximum out-of-square
dimension:
FBX brick: 3/32" (2.4)
FBS brick: 1/8" (3.2)
(b) warpage and distortion tolerances

ASTM ClOSS: Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale
(West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005).
ASTM manufacturing tolerances apply to each of the four categories of brick mentioned
previously. Although there are several types of brick in each of the four categories,
two types in each category (except building brick) have established manufacturing
ances. These are listed in Table 4-3 and shown diagrammatically in Figure 4-S(a). The tol.
erances for each of the four categories are the same. Distortion tolerances are shown in·
Table 4-4. Tolerances for other types qf brick in each category must be specified by the .
purchaser. ~
Out-of-square tolerances of the exposectface for Type FBS brick is ±~ in. (3.2 rom),
and for Type FBX brick, it is ±%2 in. (2.4 mm).
Related Sections
4-6 Brick Wall Construction
Table 4-3 Brick manufacturing dimension tolerances
Maximum variation from specified dimension, inches, (mm)

Facing brick, Type FBX Facing brick, Type FBS & Building brick
Specified dimension, inches Hollow brick, Type HBX Hollow brick, Types HBS and HBB
(mm) Thin veneer brick, Type TBX Thin veneer brick, Type TBS
3 and under 1/16 3/32
(76 and under) (1.6) (2.4)
Over 3 up to and including 4 3/32 1/8
(76 to 102 inclusive) (2.4 ) (3.2)
(102 to 152 inclusive) (3.2) (4.8)
(152 to 203 inclusive) (4.0) (6.4 )
Over 8 up to and including 12 7/32 5/!6
(203 to 305 inclusive) (5.6) (7.9)
(305 to 406 inclusive) (7.1 ) (9.5)
Source: Compiled from ASTM C 62, C 216, C 652, andC 1088. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
--------
Table 4-4 Brick distortion tolerances
Maximum permissible distortion, inches, (mm)

Facing brick, Type FBX Facing brick, Type FBS
Maximum dimension, inches Hollow brick, Type HBX Hollow brick, Type HBS
(mm) Thin veneer brick, Type TBX Thin veneer brick, Type TBS
8 and under 1/16 1/12
(203 and under) (1.6) (2.4)
Over 8 up to and including 12 3/J~ l/S
(203 to 305 inclusive) (2.4) (3.2)
(305 to 406 inclusive) (3.2) (4.0)
Source: Compiled from ASTM C 216, C 652, and C 1088. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.

Description
This section describes tolerances for laying up standard brick walls, either single wythe or
multiple wythe. The same standards apply to brick walls as apply to concrete masonry
walls.
Industry Standards
ACI 530.l/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specifications for Masonry Structures. (Detroit, MI: Ameri-
can Concrete Institute, 2005).
Technical Notes on Brick Construction, Technical Note 11C, Guide Specifications for
Brick Masonry, Part 4 (Reston, VA: The Brick Industry Association, 1998).
UFOS Section 04200, Masonry. United Facilities Guide Specifications, April (Washing-
ton, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2005) www.ccb.org/docs/ufgshome.
The tolerances in the Guide Specifications for Brick Masonry of the Brick Industry Associa-
tion (BIA) are shown in Figure 4-6. The BIA document states that the tolerances are for
protecting the structural integrity of the masonry elements and may not be adequate for
establishing tolerances associated with aesthetics or visual requirements.
The BIA tolerances are nearly identical to the requirements for masonry construction
given in ACI 530.1, with only slight differences in metric conversions and the length over
which a tolerance is given. However, some tolerances are not given in the BIA Guide
Specifications. Refer to Section 4-3 for ACI tolerances. All of the ACI tolerances apply to
brick walls as well as concrete masonry walls and other types of masonry construction.
Required tolerances given in UFGS Section 04200 generally conform to the BIA
guidelines except for the following:
• Variation from plumb in columns, walls, and arrises in adjacent masonry units:
±Y:: in. (3 mm).
• Variation from level for bed joints and tops of bearing walls, in 10ft. (3 m):
±Y. in. (6 mm).
• Variation from level for bed joints and tops of bearing walls, in 40 ft. (12 m)
or more: ±)! in. (13 mm).
10S Part 1: Construction Tolerances
Figure 4-6 Brick wall construction
out of plumb for external

corners, expansion joints
I a nd other conspicuous lines:
I
I ±1 14" in any story or 20' (±6.4 mm in 6 m)
±1 12" in 40' or more (12.7 mm in 12 m or more)
location in plan:
± 1/2" in any bay or 20'
0 ut of plumb: (±12.7 mm in 6 m)
I ±1 14" in 10' (±6.4 mm in 3m) ±314" in 40' or more
I
±318" in a story height not to exceed _2P' -, (±19 mm in 12 m)
I
(±9.6 mm in 6 m)
±1 12" in 40' or more
(1 2.7 mm in 12 m or more)
~.--
I
II
I
I
out of plumb
in adjacent units:
±1/8" (3) (UFGS guide specs.)
(a) vertical alignment

----- relative alignment
See Section 4-6
(b) lateral alignment

1
top of bearing walilevei alignment (UFGS guide specs):

±1/4" in 10' (±6 mm in 3 m)
±1/2" in 40' or more (±13 mm in 12 m)
ievel for exposed lintels, sills,
J parapets, horizontal grooves

and other conspicuous lines:
±1/4" in any bay or 20'
(6.4 mm in 6 m)
± 1/2" in 40' or more
(12.7 mm in 12 m)
(c) level alignment
head joints (ACI 530.1):

-11/4" (-6.4 mm), +318" (+9.5 mm)
--.I " - -
j
1bed joints (ACI 530.1):
±1/S" in 10'
(±3.2 mm in 3.05 m)
(d) joint alignment (e) cross-sectional dimension
Note: tolerances shown are based on BIA guidelines

unless otherwise noted.
r Chapter 4: Unit Masonry 109
,
i; Related Sections
.
t+-3 Concrete Unit Masonry Construction
! A1 Prefabricated Masonry Panels
I 't-'1 ..
I +-5 Brick Manutactuflng
~ 14-5 Detailing for Brick on Steel
l1S-2 Detailing Bnck And Concrete Masonry Systems
f ___----------------------------------------
r-
[4-7 Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile
Description
St11lctural cby facing tile is load-bearing clay tile having a finish consisting of ceramic
gla:ed fused to the body at above 1,500°F (665°C). Tolerance standards established by
f ASTM C126 also apply to facing brick and other solid masonry units that have a ceramic
gla:ed finish.
There are two grades: S grade (select) is for use with relatively narrow mortar joints,
and SS grade (select sized or ground edge) is for use where the variation of face dimensions
f must be very small. There are various types and core configurations, but tolerances depend
~ on which of the two grades is specified.
l
r Industry Standards
ASTM C126, Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing
Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
I
f
ITable 4-5 Face dimension tolerances for glazed clay facing tile
'~----------------------------------------------------------------~
Specified face Maximum difference

dimension, D, Maximum difference between any unit between largest and smallest
in,mm and the specified dimension, in, (mm)a unit in one lot, in, (mm)
Grade S units
23/8 (60.3) +1/16 (+ 1.6) _3/32 (-2.4) 3/12 (2.4)
]1/4 (95.3) +1/16(+1.6) _3/32 (-2-4) 3/32 (2-4)
51/16 (128.6) +1/16 (+ 1.6) _3/32 (-2-4) 3hz (2-4)
3
5 /4 (146.1) +1/16 (+ 1.6) _3/32 (-2.4) 3/32 (2-4)
3
7 (196.9)
/4 +1/16 (+ 1.6) _1/8 (-3.2) 3/32 (4.0)
11 3/4 (198.5) +1/16 (+ 1.6) _5/32 (-4.0) 3/32 (4.8)
Grade SS units
73/4 (196.9) +1/16(+1.6) -1/16 (-1.6) 1/ 32 (2.4)
15 3/4 (400.1) +1/16 (+ 1.6) -1/16 (-1.6) 3/32 (2-4)
<1When a. unit has a dimension more than 1/4 in (6.4 mm) greater than shown. its tolerance is the
same as for the next larger dimension.
Source: ASTM C i26. Copyright ASTM international. Reprinted with permission.
Figure 4-7 Glazed structural clay facing tile
(a) dimension tolerances
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~d
)~
//
///
//
(b) distortion tolerances

------------------------------------
Table 4-6 Bed depth (thickness) tolerances for glazed clay facing tile
Maximum difference between

Specified bed depth Maximum difference between any unit and largest and smallest unit in
(thickness), B, in (mm) the specified dimension, in, (mm)a one lot, in, (mm)b
Type I, single faced units
13/ 4 +'/8 _'/8 ' /8
(44.5) (+3.2) (-3.2) (3.2)
33/4 +'/8 -3h6 3h6
(95.3) (+3.2) (-4.8) (4.8)
53/4 +'/8 _'/4 ' /4
(146.0) (+3.2) (-6.4) (6.4)
7 3/4 +'/8 -5h6 5h6
(196.9) (+3.2) (-7.9) (7.9)
Type II, two-faced units
33/4 +'/8 _'/8 ' /8
(95.3 ) (+3.2) (-3.2) (3.2)
53/4 +'/8 _'/8 ' /8
(146.0) (+3.2) (-3.2) (3.2)
a When a unit has a dimension more than 1/4 in (6.4 mm) greater than shown, its tolerance is the same as for the next
larger dimension.
b Lot size is determined by agreement between purchaser and the seller.
Source: ASTM C 126. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Table 4-7 Distortion tolerances for glazed

clay facing tile
Specified face dimensions, D, Maximum distortion, d,

(height x length) inches, (mm) 1 Grade inches (mm)
23/s X 73/4 S '/i6

(60.3 X 196.9) 0.6)
5'/16 X 73/4 S '/i6
028.6 X 196.9) 0.6)
5'/15 X 11 3/4 S 1/'6
028.6 X 196.9) (1.6)
33/4 X 11 3/4 S '/16
(95.3 X 298.5) (1.6)
53/4 X 11 3/4 S '/16
046.1 X 298.5) (1.6)
73/4 X 11 3/4 S 5/32
096.9 X 298.5) (4.0)
73/4 X 15 3/4 SS 3/32
096.9 X 400.1) (2.4 )
Source: ASTM C 126. Copyright ASTM International.
Reprinted with permission.
Tolerances are established for face dimensions, Dj bed-depth dimension (thickness), B;
and distortion tolerances, d, as shown in Figure 4-7. Tables 4-5 through 4-7 give the toler-
ances based on the size of the unit used.
Related Sections
4-8 Facing, Load-Bearing, and Non-Load-Bearing Clay Tile
4-8 Facing, Load-Bearing, and Non-Load-

Bearing Clay Tile
Description
Tile conforming to ASTM C34 and C56 is used for concealed walls and partitions,
backup tile, and fireproofing. Load-bearing facing tile conforming to ASTM C212 is
for exposed exterior and exterior walls and partitions where low absorption and high
resistance are required.
Industry Standards
ASTM C34: Standard Specification for Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall Tile (West Con-
shohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2003).
ASTM C56: Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non-load-bearing Tile. (West Con-
shohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005).
ASTM C212: Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile. (West
PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2000).
As shown in Figure 4-8(a), the tolerance for tile conforming to ASTM C34 and C56
only ±3 percent of the specified dimension. Tolerances for structural clay facing tile de-
pend on the type and are illustrated in Figure 4-8(b) and detailed in Tables 4-8 and 4-9.
Related Sections
---------------------------------------------
Table 4-8 Clay facing tile manufacturing

dimension tolerances
Maximum variation from

specified dimension, in, (mm)
Specified dimension, in , (mm) Type FTX Type FTS
) cmJ under '/ 16 '/'1,
(iD.2 ;md under) ( 1.6) (2.4)
Over .J up to ;mel including 4 '/.12 :/16
\ i6.2 tLl 101.6 inclusive) (2.4) (3.2)
Over 4 lip to and including 6 2/ 16 '/16
(101.6 to 152.4 inclusive) (3.2) (4.7)
Over 6 up to and includin.g 8 5/32 4/16
(152.4 to 203.2 inclusive) (4.0) (6.4 )
Over 8 up to and including 12 'l12 5/ 16
(203.2 to 304.8 inclusive) (5.6) (7.9)
Over 12 up to and including 16 0/ 32 6/ 16
(304.8 to 406.4 inclusive) (7.1) (9.5)
Source: ASTM C2I2. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with
pennission.
Table 4-9 Clay facing tile distortion tolerances
Maximum permissible
distortion, in, (mm)
Maximum dimension, in, (mm) TypeITX Type ITS
8 ::ll1.d under '/32 4/ 12
(203.2 and under) (2.4) (3.2)
Over 8 up to and including 12 4/ n "/32
(203.2 to 304.8 inclusive) 0.2) (4.8)
Over 12 up to :md including 16 "/12 "/12
(304.8 to 406.4 inclusive) (4.8) (6.4)
SOtlree: ASTM C2l2. Copyright ASTM International.
Rc-printed with pennission.
Figure 4-8 Facing, load-Bearing, and Non-load-Bearing Clay Tile 1
±3% of specified
dimension, max.
±3% of specified
dimension, max.
±3% of specified
dimension, max.
(a) load-bearing and non-load-bearing structural clay tile
see Table 4-10 for

distortion tolerances
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
see Table 4-9 for

dimensional tolerances
depending on D and B
(b) structural clay facing tile

r Chapter 4: Unit Masonry
.---
115
4-9 Terra Cotta Manufacturing and Erection

Description
TL'rr~l ultta is made by machine extrusion, by mold pressing, or by hand carving. Machine-
L,xrruLkJ terr::t cutta is often called ceramic veneer, Because terra cotta is not used much,
[here ~lre \'ery few manufacturers, ::tnd each may have its own tolerances fllr manufactur-
,',1",..''mel inst::tllation.
Industry Standards
Pllblic Works Specifications, Ceramic Veneer, AlA File No, 9, October 1961, (Archi tec-
tud Terra Cotta Institute [now defunct]).
ASTM C126, Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Strucwral Clay Facing Tile, Facing
Brick, and Solid Masonry Units.(West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Test-
ing and Materials, 2005).
Tolerances for machine-extmded terra cotta generally follow the requirements of ASTM
C126 for type SS units. In addition, specifications developed by the Architectural Terra
Cotta Institute (which are still used by one manufacturer) correspond with the ASTM re-
quirements for finished face dimension tolerances.
However, there is a slight variance between the two specifications concerning flatness
tolerances. ASTM C 126 requirements for sizes less than 5X in. by 11 X in. (146.1 mm by
298.5 mm) is !/'o in. (1.6 mm). For larger sizes, the tolerance increases to Ii, in. (2.4 mm).
Figure 4-9 Terra cotta manufacturing and erection
r
/'
;..-
'"
±0.005"/inch of length
'" '" '"
(0.13 mm/25 mm) '" '"
'" '" '"
ASTM C 126: '" '"
±3/32" (2.4)
'" '" '" ±1/16" (1.6)
;..-
I
'" '"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ",-
I ./
I
I
I
The 1961 specifications call for a flatness tolerance of 0.005 in. per inch of length
mm per 25 mm), as shown in Figure 4-9. Tolerances for erection and for pressed or
carved work should be verified with the manufacturer.
Related Sections
4-10 Glass Block Manufacturing

and Erection -'
Description
Glass block consists of individual masonry units made from partially evacuated
glass units or solid-glass units. Because glass block cannot be cut, openings must be
cise1y formed based on the modular unit size plus allowances for expansion joints,
forcing, and framing.
Industry Standards
IBC, Section 2104.1.2.4, Glass Unit Masonry (Country Club Hills, IL: International
Code Council, 2006).
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specifications for Masonry Structures (Detroit, MI:
American Concrete Institute, 2005).
Currently no industry standards are available for glass block manufacturing.
tolerances should be verified with each manufacturer and erection tolerances stated in
specifications.
The American Concrete Institute has established standards for joints of masonry
units as part of ACI530.1. The International Building Code has adopted these strundalfC
and further states that masonry shall be constructed within the tolerances stated in
530.1. The International Building Code and ACI 530.1 require bed joint thickness
have a tolerance of -l{6 in (-1.6 mm) and +J1I in. (3.2 mm). Head joints must have a
ness tolerance of ±J1I in. (3.2 mm).
Despite the lack of mrunufacturing standards, most glass block is mrunufactured,'
within ±l{6 in. (1.6 mm) of the actual specified size of the unit, as shown in Figure 4-1
In most cases, the mortar joints CaJn accommodate these minor variations without
misalignment.
Variations in vertical and horizontal alignment between adjacent units should be
ified but can be as small as ±%2 in. (1 mm), as shown in Figure 4-10(b). Variations .
plane can be as little as ±l{6 in. (1.6 mm) between adjacent units.
No standards exist for out-of-plane tolerances for an entire wall section between
ing, but it should be possible to build to the same tolerances as a brick wall or no
than ±J1I in. in 6 ft. (3.2 mm per 1820 mm). Masonry construction tolerances given in
117 and ACI 530.1 could also apply (see Section 4-3). For walls a single story high,
of-plumb tolerances may be specified as a total of ±J1I in. (3.2 mm). Joints should be laid
in. (6 mm) thick with a tolerance of ±J1I in. (3.2 mm).
Related Sections
4-3 Concrete Unit Masonry Construction
...
----------- - - -
Figure 4-10 Glass block manufacturing and erection
1
±1/16" (1.6)
I If
------L--t ' - - - - - - - - I / )
~16" (1.6) _~±1/16" (1.6)

(a) glass block manufacturing
, , out of plane:
±1/16" (1.6) between
adjacent units or
±1/8" (3) in 6 ft (1820)
(b) glass block construction

Figure 5-1 Granite fabrication
face variation from

rectangular:
±1/16" (1.5)
heads/calibrated edges:
±1/16" (1.5)
±1/16" (1.5)
bed joints
T: See Table 5-1
deviation from flat surface per

4' (1220) based on type of finish
listed below or 1/3 of joint width,
whichever is greater:
polished,honed
back anchor - - - or fine rubbed
location
sawn, 4-cut, 6-cut
and 8-cut finish
±1/8" (3)
thermal and coarse
stippled finish
pointed or other ±1" (25)

rough cut finish
note: NBGQA specifications convert

1/16 in dimension to 1.5 mm
Chapter 5
Stone
-
5-1 Granite Fabrication
Description
Tili, sccri cll1 inc lll"c,; rd,- r ~lll ce, k·t Ihlck \Tlll.: t' r gr;lIlitc' :mel clim e n'l,"l , Ltln,'. It :1 \"-, III
, hde, d-'l' flcv,er, rc·ill f,:n·," 1. rilill .<!r'l nit l- r,llll' b,
Industry Standards
) [JcCljLc<.ltium ft)) .'\r,hl r,'ctl.m d (;Y,lnit(' \\V: I~ hing t,m. DC N;l ti,)n,) 1 Building Cir.mite
Q uarries -\·;s(lciilti, )n. 2l\lb).
Dimc:nsicm Steme Design rviWlUai \/J ,C Ie Vt' i:md: t\hrHt' Institutc' ,)f :\mericl, Inc.. 20( 3).
Allowable tolerances
\lhximum le n gt h ;md wiJth t"lcrance>. ,1S , h o wn in Figme 5- I,a). are ±/ , in. \l .S mm)
with n max inilim dut -o f-square tuk' wnce o f ±:I;,. in . , 1.5 mm). Thi c.kness to le mnces cle-
ptnd on dle n t·m imll thicknes 'i a nd a re li stc,l in Ta hle 5-1. For quirk mite rs. the tole rance
depends on the width ,)f the n ust' These art' :llso sh,)wn in Ta ble 5-1.
Fbtn,'~o t,·kra neeo d epend o n th e fini sh elf t h e stone. Fo r rulished , h uned. :mel. fine
rubbed fini shes, tlat nt'ss to lerance", c; mnN exceed those shuwn in Figure S- I (h) cl r (lne -
third of th e ~ r('c ifil' d jo int width, wh ic h l'\tr is gre:He r. On surfaces with o ther fini sh es, tht:
t0 ler~1l1ee i:. I h;l[ shuw n in Fig ure 5-1(h) <l r o n e- half the specified jo int width , whicheve r
is grt::,tcr. 1-'1::111('''' r, :,knUll CO ,Ire ,k tt· rmin cd hy :1 I+-tt. (I ,22 0- mm) , lime l1~ inn in any di-
recti en <)n riw ·,urf.ll r:..
,\n ch o ::, 1111 \.'" t 'L' . 1., :;tI(IWIl in FisllfC' 5-I(b\ Wit h the dq,th of ,meh, )1' sinbges within
- l: in . ;: nJ I- Ill . \ l IlI'n ) '\ 11 ;I(lcho r ;'In k l!'.:\' i,,:l I'l.'l't"~ in the'llrf;KL' "t th e ct(ln c . Tht'
width 'H:..Ilc,:,:.lIi (·u " t , 1,)1> "" k<.'[btl lc int(l lh e ed.QL' ,Jt' gr:lIllre Ililist he wi thln .t " ill. (1 .-;
mm) . Th" :!c-ph ,)t h·r~'. 11'111'1' Ix ', \ ithiu '" ir., " S mm) ,'f +:' in . () 111111)
Table 5-1 Tolerances for granite veneer
._---_._-_. __._---
Pand thil'knt'~ ' Fin i~heJ une fal'e, in (rum )
I, ' - ;I ~1
,-) , ., . ! i ;-:;.: - , tt Y, .~ I ' :. j 1,, <1. ) 1 \~ ; -.f " '... r \ . 1"' -,1, i'I'.I· : ~ I I <
, i .I \ i F·:( ! ", : -; ,., i,i l ' /" , " 11:
1,-
I t -E- ..:r- I ~ ..£
t '-.. f· =i .. - 10\
. - -.. '~ --"' .....-.-. .. ... ~
t "" , .~
Figure 5-2 Marble Fabrication
squareness: ±1/32" (1)

±1/16" (1 .6)
see also Table 5-2
-. LY
1..±1 /32.:. 1
(1 )
marble tile
; ~ thickness: .
~-------~ I' 3/S" to 1/2" (10 to 13): ±1/32" (1)
se:~~~~~~~ 5-2 3/4" to 1-5/S" (19 to 41): ±1 /S" (3)
over 1-5/S" (over 41): ±1/4" (6)
,j (±1/32" (1) for thin stock
~=-~-~
- -:::=:
---------= - :;;-4- ~1 deviation from flat surface per
y 4' (1220) based on type of finish
/' listed below or 1/3 of joint width,
I ' whichever is greater:
I '
I I
I I
\ I " ,
pOlished, honed ±1/16" (1 .5)
fabrication deviation from / '

\
\,'
\ I
I
,
,
,
or fine rubbed
sawn , 4-cut, 6-cut ±1/S" (3.2)

square diagonal: ±1/16" (2)
see also table 5-2 ,( \1 and S-cut finish
I \ I I
for finished dimensions I , I
I \ , I thermal and coarse ±3116" (4.8)
I I I stippled finish
I \ , I
I
/ I
\ ,I\
I
pOinted or other ±1 " (25)
I \ rough cut finish
I \
I \
I \
(b) fabrication distortion tolerances

For ;lli,liri ,lnal r"kL1IKc''; un rhe 1",',lti<J11 , si:c" ;m,1 ,lcph ,It ;lI h' lhlr , 1,)[,;, h,)I",:" :111,1
k,' r(' , rc'tc' r ru (hc' in,llIsrrv <;t,1I1,Lircis lis( ,',1 in th is , ,' ,' [ i, ln,
Related Sections
5- i (J r<lni te :11hl Marhle In,;ull<ltiun
1- ) Inkriu r Stune Wa ll Cbl,ling
q- 3 S ton e Ficl))fing
5-2 Marble Fabrication

Description
tIIbrhle to lerances inc lude those fo r thin veneer slahs, ( ll h ic swck, and marb le til e, Thi s
,\.?cti,)n dcle, nut indude newer, reint~)rced, t hin ma rble panels,
Industry Standards
Dimemiol1 Stone Design Manual VI (C leve la nd: Marhle lnstitute uf America, lnc, 2003) ,
Dimensiunal fabrication tc)l e rances are shown in Figure 5-2, Thicknesses tolerances de-
pend o n the basic panel thickness. Final finish to leranc es depend on whether the panel is
finished o n one or buth sides, as listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Finished size tolerances for marble
Thickness (all material)* Finished both faces Finished one face

in (mm) in (mm)
- -- - - - - -,--"-- - , - - - -- - - ,- , -- -- - -- ------- ----,-
Thin Stock ('/+ in to 2 in) +0, -)/l, ±l/lz
(2 em to 5 em) (+0, -l) (±1)
C ubic Stock (2 in +) ±I / :(, ±I /&
(5 cm+) (±2) (±4)
Stone Til e ('/i:' in ur less) ± ;/64
(1'5 mm) (±0,5)
Face dimensions (all material)
- -- - -- -- - --- - --- - -- - - - "
Thin Srock +1 / 10 , -'I': +1/t 6, _ 1/ 1!
(+ 2, -l) (+2, - I)
C ubi c Stock
Ston e: Tile ±';E

(± l)
± -:' ~~
(± l ) \±1 )
:t
( .:t21 (± ~ )
--------------- ---------------------------------------------~
I I I 1'1 f I I I rI I I
Figure 5-3 Limestone Fabrication

-
I'--S, deviation
r ,c:.,=======:;:¥l' from square
see Table 5-3

for values
I.. L
..I
(b) flatness tolerances (c) depth tolerances

Flatness tolerances depend un the finish of the stone. For polished, honed, and fine
rubbed finishes, Hatness tolerances cannot exceed those shown in Figure 5-2(b) or ,me-
third of the specified joint width, whichever is greater. On surfaces with other finishes, the
tllierance is that shown in Figure 5-1 (b) or one-half the specified joint width, whichever
is greater. Flatness tolerances are determined by a 4-ft. (1 ,nO-mm) dimension in <1ny di-
rection on the surface.
Tolerances for anchors are the same as those for granite shown in Figure 5 -1. For addi-
tional tolerances on the location, size, and depth of anchor slots, holes, and kerfs, refer to
the industry standards listed in this section.
Related Sections
5-4 Granite and Marble Installation
5-8 Interior Stone Wall Cladding
9-8 Stone Flooring
5-3 Limestone Fabrication

Description
This section includes standard limestone construction using both single panels and shop-
fabricated assemblies. Tolerances for ornately carved work should be verified with the sup-
plier.
Industry Standards
Indiana Limestone Handbook, 21st ed. (Bedford, IN: Indiana Limestone Institute of
America, Inc., 2002).
Common tolerances are shown in Figure 5-3 and listed in Table 5-3. Common finishes are
indicated in Table 5-3, but special finishes are available that may affect the tolerance of
Table 5-3 Limestone fabrication tolerances
Deviation from Non-critical Deviation from

Length, L, flat surface, F, Critical depth, depth, d, in square, S,
Finish type in (mm) in (mm) D, in (mm) (mm) in (mm)
Smooth machine finish ±!/16 (2) ±!/16 (2) ±!/t6 (2) ±1/2 (13) ±!/16 (2)
Diamond gang finish ±!/16 (2) ±!/4 (6) ±1/8 (3) ±!/2 (13) ±!/t6 (2)
Chat sawed finish ±!/r6 (2) ±!/4 (6) ±!/8 (3) ±!/z (13) ±!/t6(2)
Shot sawed finish ±'/16 (2) ±!jz (13) ±!/4 (6) ±!/2 (13) ±!j:6 (2)
Pre-assembled units 1 ±!/s (3) ±ljs(3) ±!/s(3) ±!/c (13) ±!/s (3)
Panels over 50 ft: (4.6 m;) ±!/& (3) ±!/s (3) ±!/s (3) ±!/2 (13) ±!/8 (3)
Note: In stones having one or mOTe dimensiom Ut'eT 5 ft 0 in (1520 mm), and in many multiple-stone assemblies, tolerances larger than
the above may be necessary. Determination of applicable tolerances wdl result from consultation with the stone fabricator by designers or
engineers. Indiana Limestone tolerances are much smaller than those of most other materials. As a result, tolerance problems usually arise
from ignorance or misuse of the tolerances allowable for other materials.
Source: Indiana Limestone Handbook, 21" ed. Indiana Limestone Imtitute of America, Inc. Reproduced with pelmission
Figure 5-4 Granite and marble Installation

--
suggested
relative alignment: / lintels, parapets,
~
__ ___ :-_____ t
±~ ~~ @Li.~~J ... 0.,-'0)~--"""r_.___ J __ru~_tlca~ions
15....
--f ±1/2" (13) In column

bay and ±3/4" (19)
in 40' (12.2 m)
(a) tolerances for level
theo,.tica]
face of stone
-Y I
I-
I ±1/2" (13) in 40' (12.2 m)
I ...
I I
I I
I I
\ I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
structure -~~
±1/4" (6)
in 10' (3050)
up to ±1/2" (13)
in 40' (12.2 m)
--1 i f--±1/4" (6) in 10' (3050)

not to exceed 3/8" (10)
in story height
(b) tolerances for plumb for walls and columns (c) tolerances out of plane
r
\';lrl(llIS r ieces. PreassemGled units ~1re stone assemGlies consisting uf two ur mure
,((lll e'S ;)s, emGled ar the pbnt usi ng ;)dhes iyes and met,)l accessories whe re re-
LJulred.
Related Sections
5- 5 Limestone InstJlbtiun
5-8 Interiur Stu ne WJIl CL1lkling

Description
This sec tio n cuvers the installation of ex terior granite and marble panels. G ran-
ite and marGie can be installed on a variety of substrates, including stee l framing,
concrete, and masonry. In addition , sto ne can be installed on a steel grid frame-
work anchored to o ther structural backup syste ms. The accuracy with which
stone can be installed depends on the tolerance of the structural framework an d
the clearances between materials, as well as the amount of adjustment designed
into the connections.
Industry Standards
Dimension Stone Design Manual VI (C leveland : Marble Institute of America,
Inc., 2003) .
The installation tolerances shown in Figure 5-4 are those recommended in the
Dimension Stone Design Manual. For exterior com ers or other co nspicuous lines,
plumb tolerances are as shown in Figure 5-4(b), except out-of-plane tolerance
canno t exceed Y; in. (6 mm) for a story. Variation from linear building line should
not exceed y~ in. (1 3 mm) in a column bay and Y. in. (1 9 mm) in 40 ft . (1 2.2 m).
Related Sections
5-1 G ranite Fabrication
5- 2 Marble Fabrication
5-8 Interior Stone Wall C ladding
12-5 Detailing for Stone on Conc rete Systems
14-6 Detailing fo r Stone on Steel Systems
15- 3 De tailing for Stone on Masonry Backup
Figure 5-5 Limestone installation

-
\ __ =-=-..=.:_=7------- ____ QLj~~~~~':altop
- .- . ------ ------ '-f
! ±1/2" (13) in any
D I bay or 20' (6100) nor
3/4" (19) in 40' (12.2 m) or more
(a) tolerances for level
I,...- - -- theoretical
face of stone
~
I
±1/2" (13) maximum
in 40' (12.2 m) or more
, for any element
I
:' , linear building line:
±1/2" (13) in any
I one story ~ bay or 20' (6100)
or 20' (6100) maximum
nor
±3/4" (19) in 40'
(12.2 m) or more
J ±1/4" (6) in 10' (3050)
0'
±3/8" (10) for one story or 20' (6100) maximum

for lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises.
±1/4" (6) for one story or 20' (6100) maximum

for external corners, expansion joints and other !---j cross-sectional
conspicuous lines. i dimensions:
-1/4" (6); +1/2" (13)
(b) tolerances for plumb (c) plan, and cross-sectional tolerances

5-5 Limestone Installation

Description
This sectiun ,Iescribes th e ;11low;1ble se tting wlerances fur exreritlr limesto ne reg:1fJle:;s ,)f
the rype of structural ~ys te m heing used. These tlllerances ;bsume that ~ufti c ient d ear;lI1ce
;111(1 correct anchorage de\' ice~ have been detailed ;md specified.
Industry Standards
Sp.:cijrcmiol1S for C lIt Indiana Limestone , Section 3.3.5 (BeJforLI, IN: Indiana Limestune
Institute of America, 2005) IVWW. iliai.cum/ilibook.pdf.
Tolerances for level me shown in Figure 5-5(a) and include exposed lintels, sills, parapets,
horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines. The Indi:ma Limestone Institute of
America (ILIA) specificat ions note that the stone setting tolerances are masonry industry
setting tolerances, and as a production industry, the ILIA canno t and does not control
them.
As shown in Figure 5-5 (b) , plumb tolerances require that deviatio ns no t exceed \II in.
(6 mm) per any 10-ft. (3,050-mm) length, X in. (10 mm) for a single story or a 20-ft.
(6,100-mm) section maximum, and Y.! in. (13 mm) in 40 ft. (12.2 m) or more. For exter-
nal corners, expansion joints , and other conspicuous lines, the tolerance is ± ~ in . (6 mm)
per 20 ft. (6,100 mm) and ±X in. (19 mm) in 40 ft. (12.2 m) l)r more .
For the position of limeston e components shown in plan and related portions of
columns, walls, and partitions, the tolerance is ±Y.! in. (1 3 mm) in any bay or 20 ft. (6,100
mm) maximum. Plan dimensions must also not vary more than X in. (19 mm) total in 40
ft. (12. 2 m) or more. For co lumns and thickness of walls , tolerances are - \II in. (6 mm) and
+ ~ in. (13 mm).
Related Sections
5-8 Interior Stone Wall C ladding
12-5 Detailing for S tone on Concrete Systems
14-6 Detailing for Stone on Steel Systems
15-3 De tailing for Stone on Masonry Backup
-
Figure 5-6 Fabrication and Erection Tolerances for Slate·
-
varies,
see text
L ~------------r
r ±1/S" (2)
verify with supplier
(a) slate flooring
/ . - - - - - - - - -?
- --:;>I
1 11/16H (2)
J
I V I
±1/16" (2)
verify with supplier ±1/16" (2)
(b) finished dimension slate
5-6 Fabrication and Erection Tolerances

for Slate
Description
Structural slate (for uses other than roofing) is used for flooring, for interior wall facing.
for stair treads and risers, for windowsills, and occasionally for exterior spandrels and fac·
ings. Because slate has natural cleavage planes and is often fabricated with a natural split
face, tolerances for thickness can vary widely, depending on the fabricator, job conditions.
size of panel, and other variables.
Industry Standards
There are no established industry standards for slate tolerances. However, for interior wall
cladding, the standards of the Marble Institute of America are often used. Refer to Section:
5·8.
\ _ ,;1, ,'1'11 Iii h': llrc' 'i, ti, Ii 1.11 ii' 11 1.\1'11 II :Idllre' r-; I I,r , I It !L'tllr: Ii ,pI i I: I';tl "
hI tl l 'l If! n c.: ,I: I[(' [II
:1\
. :Ihili '> ', Iii , \ i i'!1I1!l iii k Jl~:[ h ,111,1 lI'i , lrll. L'illh'1.1,iul1 ,rlllll' i, , 'tklll'illi, lkli h , hl \nill ~
,:" ",,1 ' Ll bhill '! I, ' '.\' irlil" _:: in , 1,2 111I1I l.
F ,rL ;lil 'r.d ,kif tl 'l,r<l ,<': " hh , ,,re' llttl' Il ' fl t'I'iti l'llhv ;ltllil'kn c,,rll1c.:c': ' ill, [11 ill " .'
, ~ , i' > Ill. Ill , rT" ill., :1I1.i " , in, ru I ill, C,l!1,trtl lt i, ll1lkctil, ,h,ltIi ,1 :lC e',>Illl t I'l ,r thi ~
",'" d,k r," " Je' " It r hie' k I)0.,- " , l ' \ ~' n iI' I he' h II [I '11 , I'lt rh l' ,1:", i, C:;lt lc:e'lll lr , 1111 1
11t!1l'11.
I
L: H ~eT llJ kr,H:c e" t'>l- [,, ', 11l ' IT ,,1),1 rhi,:kil l' " 111 ;1\' c>: i,, [ tu r il11l,' llITI'11 ~ b C ,' ,
Related Sections
; _ ' :Y L.r h [e' E lhlc:lci u n
~ -s 111t,'ri, 'r S CI,n e' \\';111 ( :I:I, kling
5-7 Cast Stone Fabrication and Erection

Description
Last , wnt' is :'\11 :,rchit c:Ltural pre c lst CIlncre te huilcl in)! StlHlt: l11:1nuf;ILtured froIn l" lrrb nd
c~l11t'nt ;mel cU:lrse :mJ Hne dgg regdtt's ttl sil11l1hre n;1tum l stone, It is used fnr f,lc in g, trim ,
orn:llnenr' l Cllll1l11l1S, 1111l/,lill),lS, ;lnel cIlpings , ;ullong lIth er ilrchi tectur:d d e me nts,
Industry Standards
SranLl;lrd Spec itk:lti'll1 04 72 O~I , e List Ston e (Lawrenc eville , GA: The CiSt StO[1 e Insti -
tllte , 2(04) ,
F:1lxi CCItiLin J nd e rec til l[1 wlt'r:1l1ce, estahli shed hy the C 'lst S tul1e Instirutt' :1fL' illiistntt d
in Figure' 5-7 . Th e tLlle r;mces of in, (3 111m) llr length divided hy 3(10, whi,~ ht'\' <:r i~
~re,Ht:, r, :Ir pl y to :111 Se LtiLlI1~ 1 elimen:o;i (' ns, tu lenwh, imd W Ji , turtions of twi,[, ~ <JU ;l re , ;1I1e1
camrer,
F<l( in,ert>, do\\' I? \ h ,) l e.~ , tbshll1,l! groovc:s , fa lse jllint;" ~lI1d similar f~~ ,Hurt''i , t1w till e r-
;mc(:' ie', t ,', i11 , (J 111m) i I" the t~.lrl11 ed ,; illl:s "f ,1 lini t. On th e hack I ur lint( ,nned ~ i,It: , th e /.",
GniU!llld e r,IIK e is ill~' re'ht' .j [11 ± >'. in, (1 0 111111),
Related Sections
12--5 D~' I' :1i l ing fo r Stlme c'll C:n li c re re S yste ms
14- (, [ \'[:1 iI i11 ~~ to r S tUl1 t ' ," l1 ~ te d System.,

Description
T\-.i , ' c' d l('11 IIl CLlcic'" (h, i. \!-ri(,irld !l :\l ld iI15l:!ll. lti, ' l1 ' If \! r:lIIlte l l1ull, I.::. lil11 C' tl ll1l' , , !arc ,
::r,,1 ,dh' r ' l' ,, ',rr: ,I"'i"'l i -CL' ;'" d, t', 1 tl',r illreri , 'r \\ :dl , Llcklill,l!:,
Industry Standards
,
- ".. _ "_. _ ,~_ ' '.
~ -" . ,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Figure 5-7 Cast stone fabrication and erection
inserts on
-FigUI
±1/S" (3)
t:J II
/ formed side,
reglets, grooves, etc.
±lIS" (3) 1
orU360 ', ~
f . ========~
F'::::
'
marble a
L
.1/4" (6) max. ; granil
±1/S" (3) [ IA.. . __ V
±1/S" (3)
natural:
~------------------¥
±1/S" (3)
±1/S" (3) or U360
whichever is greater
not to exceed ±1/4" (6)
out-of-square:
±1/S" (3) or I
U360, whichever I
is greater I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
I
I
,
I
- - - - - -)- ~atness:
±1/S" (3) or U360,
(b) distortion tolerances whichever is greater b
±1/S" (3) within plane and

~dge of adjacent unit
I " I I
~I 0
--l'-Joints: +1/16" (1 .5) , -1/S" (3)
(c) erection tolerance
Note: maximum length of any unit

shall not exceed 15 times the average
thickness of the unit unless agreed
by the manufacturer
r--------- Chapter 5: Stone 131
Figure 5-8 Interior stone wall cladding

--
marble and limestone: ±1/32" (0.8)

granite, slate and quartz-based
stone: ±1 /8" (3)
natural stone veneer : ±1/16" (1.6)
thickness:
'--I .. width: same as height..
IV marble and
limestone: ±1/32" (0.8)
flatness:
±1 /16" (1.6) for smooth (
r--~=--=_c::_::-:_::-_--~-h finished stones measured
,, ------
V
along a 4' (1220) dimension
in any direction
\ , \ I
/1 I
I I I
I I
\
, /
/ I
I
, I I
\ I I
\ I I
\ If I
one half the joint size, \ I I I
but not more than 1/ 16" (1 .6) '( I
/ I I
for stones with the largest I ' II I
dimension not greater I \
I \ I I
than 39" (990) I \ I I
I \ I I
I, ,I I
I ,I I
/ \ I I
/ " I
/ \
I \
I' "
~
. ±1/32"
thickness: ±1/32" ( 0 . 8 ) i (0 .8)
(c) stone tiles

Dimensional fabrication tolerances for interior stone are shown in Figure 5-B. ThicknesS)
tolerances as shown in Figure 5-B(a) for granite, slate, and quartz-based stone are largerj
than those for marble and limestone. For smooth-faced stone, the thickness tolerance is.l
±Y.6in. (O.B mm) at exposed edges. For sawn-faced stone, the thickness tolerance is ±Ya in;;
(3 mm) at exposed edges. For thermal, coarse-stippled finished stone and natural-cleft!
slate, the thickness tolerance is X6 in. (4.B mm) at exposed edges. l
The recommended maximum installation variation for interior stone wall cladding as;
published by the Marble Institute of America is ± ~ in. (3 mm) in 10 ft. (3,050 mm), with:
a maximum of Yl2-in. (l-mm) variation between individual stones.
Related Sections
9-B Stone Flooring
15-4 Detailing Interior Stone on Masonry
Chapter 6
Structural Lumber
-
6-1 Glued Laminated Timber Fabrication
Description
The rl ;lu 111lt''' ,h,l\\'1 1 Ill'rl' ;11'1:' t',l r ,t;ll d:l.rd ,!.!irl(',1 LlIn in;l te,1 ti llll'er t,l r t' it hcr int c ri 'lT ,n-
,'\I trillr I h e, T he .k l'l h l(l lvr;1I1 ce:~ d ,,1Ii d e ,1 1' p h t(1 ' l~l;ci; d t: lf',' re" o r c u r ve, 1 , Ir:-IPl' S,
Industry Standards
:\ ITC 1[ 1-2\.\,1 [ , ) tiln,ltmL/()l [)irnt'll-'Ioll, ;1j".lItn/ctimri (~lllc,t LW llil1d ccd Timher (Ce: nte n -
ni;r! , co: .\llwrIL':II ; IIl:,t it:ll l e uf T imbe r Comtruc tiun,
ZOO l \.
.-\NSI/,\ ITe A1 90, I · 2(\12, \X ',,,,,] Prodl/d , : Stn!(nm ri Glt".'ll. Lo minLltt'ci Timber (Wash ing-
tl)ll , [X.> Americll1 N:rrilll1:r1 S t:1 nd :lrds Ins t itut(" 20(2).
The rukr:1Clc es e,t:~ rl ishe,j hy the Alnt:ricaCl I n stin Ite I l{ T imher Con "truction (AITC) are
shdwn in Fig ure: 6- 1 <"In(\ ,rre hased l'n d ime n s i<"l n s a r ri ll? t ime o f m3n ufac tu fl.' , W h en
length ,j ime ns i( ln s me nut spec ified as c ritiL'a l, the tl,ller:lIlces Sh'1WIl in the di:l gram d,l no t
:lPp ly. T h e Glmber III stra ightness t ll iera n ct's arc for the Se(ti,)n :It ti le time (){ m anufacture
withull t crny tll le r:lIl ce t~) r dead- Io,ld detl ecr il)n . Ca mhe r tultra n ces el" n o t app ly to c urved
mc mbor-:;, Sq ll a reness w ler:rncC's ei re h,r snmci:ud rCC ta llgU !:Il' 5ect illns and ,10 n ut app ly to
,peci:] II-: ~ h:lpe d ~ect i l)ns,
Related Sections
6-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural

Lumber
Description
Thi' " ,d l',>ll IliL'lrd,"" Jiln ': I\, i, ;1l ir 'lllt.'t''- ~rnd t llnrt'f' :!t' l1c' r.rl k \J~C',! i, ,r,t rudur: rI .m,\
·"l ilI i!2 . II'
l ,I" e" 'l 'l !J>L IUclc: I nard Irl:nber llf(l~n lise, ! f 'r ; lte·I' lliI ( tilll~h t',lrpc nt n
"T; I.: \ .: ';: l ;" il... ,; \ ". -J ;,: ( I . < ! .:t'. nti(" , '<~.:.;d ... ~ I( I-) ,.... l.- h~ il ·i c> l_ll!rj ..'n.~ l ~' n !U II d:"L-r ,'IS 111 11 d~\.' r ;Tt 1111 ~
:n, 1' :- ( I ! !ll,! 1'"\ :-P li dl) : . t] r!l; ~ ~ ih"~ :": r'.I, hl ~r il <,t inl · !tkii ll ~ , :; il l. \ j:7 Pllll ) I n n (Hll iILll th ick ·
.'..: ~~, L " : . In . (;;' ip, "' ;"t"" ( I '· ile l': l1l. d '.~ · i .ld· L rqrJ~(": r j ", l un ~ I -'lr .~ i. !;' ·r !l L : r·~ I l ~~ l lirl t) !'!. \::fll·
: : '; ; : ; ~ '.. : .! ,.j . . L: !'~ I ! 11"J 1( "" :

Figure 6-1 Glued Laminated Timber Fabrication

-
J
+1/S" (3) per foot of depth;
-3/16" (5), or 1/16" (2) per
foot (300) of depth,
whichever is larger
±1/16" (2) up to 20' (6.1 m)

Over 20' ± 1116" (2) per 20'
(6.1 m) of length or fraction
thereof except where
length dimensions are not
specified as critical
±1/16"(2) (a) dimensional tolerances
t ±1/4" (6) up to L = 20' (6.1 m)

add ±1/S" (3) per each additional
20' or fraction thereof but not to
exceed a total of 3/4" (19)
(b) camber or straightness
carpenter's square
I V
d II
±1/S" (3) per foot (30ori

of depth, d
u
l i
(c) squareness
. _ - - - - .-..--- ~~ - - -
Figure 6-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumber

-
lines of minimum rough \
. . minimum
. 1/8"4()
3
th,ckness and wIdth
\\".
no maxImum r---
I ..
minImum
1/8" (3)
! ,no maximum;
~~ -i--'-20%maYbe
a mimum of 3/32" (2.4)
l' (25) or more
nominallh;ckness [ I I
I . .
J,mhed Ihockoess
.
(a) rough lumber
1-------------------, I
--j ~cision-end trimmed:
±1/16" (1.6) in 20% of pieces
square-end trimmed:
± 1/64" (0.4) for each 2" (50) of
thickness or width
(b) end trimming
2" or less in nominal thickness: +3" (75) , -0"
over nominal 12" (302) wide or

over 20' (6.1 m) long:
+ 12" (305) , -0
~ i~
, ~ equal to or exceeding
dressed sizes,
see Table 6-1
(c) dimension lumber
- - - --
I j
I t
Industry Standards
Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-05, American Softwood Lumber Standard (Gaithers. '
burg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2005) .
Dimension lumber may be ordered either as dry or green lumber. Dry lumber is lumber that
has been seasoned or dried to a moisture content of 19 percent or less, whereas green lum.
ber has a moisture content greater than 19 percent. As shown in Figure 6-2(a), rough lum-
ber size cannot be less than Vs in. (3 .2 mm) thicker or wider than the corresponding
minimum finished thickness or width, except that 20 percent of a shipment cannot be less
than Xz in. (2.4 mm) thicker or wider.
Dressed sizes for dimension lumber must be equal to or exceed those shown in Table 6-
1. These sizes are for dry lumber. Shrinkage that may occur after dressing to dry sizes can
be up to 1 percent for each 4 points of moisture content below the applicable maximum
or 0.7 percent for each 4 points of moisture content reduction for redwood, western red
cedar, and northern white cedar. Sizes for timbers are only applicable for green lumbet and
are Yl in. (13 mm) smaller than the nominal dimension.
Tolerances for trimming to a given length depend on the method, either precision-end
trimmed (PET) or square-end trimmed . For double-end trimmed (DET) lumber, the tol.
erances depend on the certified grading rules of the organization responsible for each
species of lumber.
Table 6-1 Minimum sizes of dressed, dry dimension lumber
Nominal thickness, Minimum actual Nominal width, Minimum actual width,

in. (mm) thickness, in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
2 (50) 11/2(38) 4 (100) 31/2 (89)
2 1z (64)
1
2 (51) 6 (150) 51/2 (140)
3 (76) 21/2 (64) 8 (200) 71/4 (184)
1
3 /2 (89) 3 (76) 10 (250) 9 1/4 (235)
4 (100) Ji/2 (89) 12 (300) 111/4 (286)
41/2 (114) 4 (102) 14 (357) 13 1/4 (336)

Source: Voluntary Product Standard, PS 20-05, National Ins titute of Standards and Technology
Related Sections
6-3 Plywood Manufacturing
6-4 Particleboard Manufacturing
7-1 Manufacturing Tolerances for Board Lumber

Description
This section includes tolerances for plywood intended fo r construction and industrial use
and that confonn to U . S. Product Standard PS 1-95.
r
;
Chapter 6: S tructural Lumber 137
Figure 6-3 Plywood Manufacturing

-
I
~,
' ~O", -1 /16" (1,6)
'"
+0", -1 /16" (1,6) '"
(a) size tolerances
- - i :--
: : ±1 /64" per foot
r -_ _ _ _ _ _ _--;I-" (1,3 mm/m)
: for panels 4 feet
I (1220) and greater
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- -' f-- I
I max, 1/16" (1.6) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
It,; sqll(m~ n ess and straightness (c) thickness tolerances

Industry Standards
Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-95, C onstruction and Industrial Plywood (Gaithersburg,
MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1996).
Voluntary Product Standard PS 2-04, Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use
Panels (Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2004) .
Tolerances from PS 1-95 are shown in Figure 6-3 . Squareness tolerances for panels 4 ft.
(1,220 mm) and greater are shown in the diagram. For panels less than 4 ft. wide, the
square ness tolerance is Yl6in. (2 mm) measured along the short dimension.
Thickness tolerances for various thicknesses and types of plywood are shown in Table
6-2. Thickness tolerances are based on a moisture content of 9 percent oven dry weight
and are measured with a micrometer using an anvil pressure of not less than 5 psi (34 kPa)
or more than 10 psi (69 kPa).
The tolerances in PS 2-04 for structural-use panels are a little less restrictive. The PS
2-04 standards apply to plywood, waferboard, oriented strand board (OSB), structural par-
ticleboard, and composite panels. Size tolerances are +0, - Ys in. (3.2 mm). Thickness tol-
erances are ±YJ2 in. (0.8 mm) for panel thicknesses of l Yt6 in. (20.2 mm) and less and ±5
percent of the specified thickness for thicker panels. Panels must be square within Y64 in.
per lineal foot (1.3 mm per lineal meter) of the longest side measured along the diagonals.
Panel straightness is the same as in PS 1-95 .
Table 6-2 Plywood thickness tolerances
Panel type Tolerance, in (mm)

Sanded panels 3/4 in (19 mm) and less ±1/64 (0.4)
Sanded panels over 3/4 in (19 mm) ±3 % of specified thickness
Unsanded, touch sanded, and overlaid panels IJ/I6 ±1/32 (0.8)
in (20.5 mm) and less
Unsanded, touch sanded, and overlaid panels ±5% of specified thickness
over IJjI 6 in (20.5 mm)
Source: Voluntary Product Standard , PS 1-95, National Institute of Standards and Technology
Related Sections
6--4 Particleboard Manufacturing
6-5 Fiberboard Manufacturing

Description
Particleboard is a panel rroduct made from particles of wood and wood fibers bonded to-
ge ther with synthetic resins or other suitable bonding systems. There are two basic ca te-
gories, one for general construction and one for Hooring rroducts. Within each category
are several grades deve loped for various uses. In the grade designations in Tables 6-3 and
6-4, H means high density, M means medium density, LD means low density, D means
decking, and PBU means underlayment.
Table 6-3 Tolerances for particleboard
Grade tolerances, in (mm)

H-l H-2 H-3 M-l M-2 M-3 M-S LD-l LD-2
Length and width ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080 ±0.080
(2.0) (2 .0) (2.0) (2.0) (2.0) (2 .0) (2.0) (2.0) (2.0)
Average panel ±0.008 ±0.008 ±0.008 ±0.01O ±0.008 ±0.008 ±0.01O +0.005 +0.005
thickness from (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) (0.250) (0.200) (0.200) (0.250) -0.015 -O.Ql5
nominal (sanded (+0.125 ) (+0.125)
panels only) (-0.375) (-0.375)
Source: ANSI A208. I - 1999, Composite Panel Association
Table 6-4 Tolerances for particleboard flooring products
Grade tolerances, in (mm)

PBU D-2 D-3
Length and width +0, -0.160 ±0.080 ±0.080
(+0, -4.0) (2.0) (2.0)
Average panel thickness from ±0.015 ±0.015 ±0.015

nominal (sanded panels only) (0.375) (0.375) (0.375)
Source: ANSI A208 . I - 1999 , Composite Panel Association
Industry Standards
ANSI A20S.1-1999, Starulard for Particleboard (Washington, DC: American National
S tandards Institute, 1999) .
Figure 6-4 Particleboard Manufacturing

-
see Table 6-3
see Table 6-3
(a) size tolerances
\
variation of diagonals:
\ maximum 0.036"
\ /
\ /
per foot of panel width
\ / (3 mm per m)
\ /
/
\ /
\ /
I \ /
I \ /
I \ /
~ . /
I max. 0.016" for
: each 2' of panel
length or width
(1 mm per 1.5 m)
I \
/ \
/ \
/ \
/ \
/ \
/ \
/ \
/ \
/ \ f---------I } , see Table 6-3
/ \
I / \
/ \
(b) squareness and straightness (c) thickness tolerances

Tolerances from ANSI (American National Standards Institute) A20S.1 for squareness
and straightness are illustrated in Figure 6-4. Tolerances for squareness are measured when
the length and width tolerances are satisfied. Tolerances for length, width, and thickness
of particleboard depend on the type and grade. The tolerances for the two categories are
listed in Tables 6-3 and 6-4. The average thickness is the average of eight measurements
taken at each panel corner and at the midlength of each panel edge.
The tolerances in PS 2-04 for structural-use panels are a little different. The PS 2-04
standards apply to plywood, waferboard, oriented strand board (OSB), structural particle-
board, and composite panels. Size tolerances are +0, -:Is in. (3.2 mm). Thickness toler-
ances are ±!l2 in. (O.S mm) for panel thicknesses of '/{6 in. (20.2 mm) and less and ±5
percent of the specified thickness for thicker panels. Panels must be square within Yo; in.
per lineal foot ( 1.3 mm per lineal meter) of the longest side measured along the diagonals.
Panel straightness is the same as in PS 1-95.
Related Sections

Description
Medium-density fiberboard is a panel product made from lignocellulosic fibers bonded to-
gether with a synthetic resin or other suitable binders under heat and pressure.
Industry Standards
ANSI A20S.2-2002, Standard for MDF (Washington, DC: American National Stan-
dards Institute, 2002).
Tolerances for fiberboard are illustrated in Figure 6-5. For panels smaller than 4 ft. by S ft.
(1,220 mm by 2,440 mm), the length and width tolerance is ±Yo4 in. (0.4 mm) per linear
ft.. The thickness tolerances shown are for surfaced panels only. The buyer and seller must
agree to tolerances for unsurfaced panels.
Related Sections
t I I I I
Figure 6-5 Fiberboard Manufacturing
±1/64" per foot

(±1 mm per m)
±1/64" per foot
(±1 mm per m) ±1/S" per foot
(3 per 300) for panels
4' x S' (1220 x 2440)
or longer
(a) size tolerances
variation of diagonals:
\ maximum ±1/64" (0.4)
\ /
\ / per foot of length of panels
\ /
\ / 4' x S' (1220 x 2440) or larger
\ /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
max. 1/64" (0.4)
per linear foot of
edge length
/
/
/
I
/
/
,
/
I
/ ±0.005" (0.127)
/
/ for individual
/ measurement
I
I /
/
/
f of a surfaced panel
±0.010" (0.254)
average measurement
(b) squareness and straightness (c) thickness tolerances

»
6-6 Rough Lumber Framing

Description
Rough lumber framing includes pos ts, beams , Joists, ratters, studs, and o ther wood framing
I()r residential or c,)mmercial construction. It also includes glued laminated timber and
he;lvy rimber clln struction.
Industry Standards
ili!sidl!n1ial Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. (Washingtlln, DC: N ational
Assoc iation o f Ho me Builders RemodelorsTMCouncil, 2005).
L'FGS Section 06100, Rough Carpentry, United Fac ilities G uide Specifications, May
2005 (Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2005)
www.ccb.org/docs/ufgshome.
There is not a single, fi xed standard for ro ugh lumber framing to lerances. Various docu-
ments and industry practices refer to a variety of measurements. In mos t cases, positional
tolerances of framing members of dimension lumber (less than 5 in. in nominal dimen-
sion) are not critical for th e application of finish materials. A to lerance in pos itional tol-
erance of ±Y. in. (6 mm) is frequently used and is acceptable. For heavy timber
construction, a tolerance of ±Yc in. (13 mm) is often used.
However, plumbness tolerance is important because out-of-plumb walls and partitions
can be no ticeable and can affec t the successful application of many finish materials. The
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines require that walls be plumb to within %in.
(10 mm) in any 32-in. (813 mm) vertical measurement. Howeve r, a smaller tol erance of
Y; in. in lO ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm) is often recommended for gypsum wallboard and plas-
ter applications. Fo r gypsum wallboard application , the max imum misalignment of adja-
cent framing members must no t exceed x: in. (3 mm) .
The U FGS guide spec ificat ion requires a to lerance of Y. in. in 8 ft . (3 mm in 2,400 mm)
for layout, straightness of plates and runners, plumb of studs, and true plane of framing
members when the framing will be covered by finishes such as wallboard, plaster, or ce -
ramic tile set in a mortar setting bed. When the framing will be covered by ceramic tile on
a dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive, the to lerances are re-
duced to Y& in. in 8 ft . (3 mm in 2,400 mm) .
A tolerance of Y. in . in 10 ft. provides a reason able tolerance for carpenters while allo w-
ing gypsum wallboard to be installed withoLlt excessive shimming when tighter tolerances
of the wallboard surface are required. For example, if a y,; in. in 8 ft. (3 mm in 2,440 mm)
plumbness is required for a thin-set mortar application of ceram ic tile, the gypsum board
can be shimmed from a Y; -in. to lerance to a V,-in to lerance. However, most wallboard con-
tractors prefer not to shim, so the spec ifier may want to require th e smaller tolerance be
built into the framing specit"ica tions .
Related Sections
6- 2 ~18nufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumbe r
6-7 WOlld Floor Framing and Subf100ring
6-9 \ietal-Plate-Connected Wood TnL"s Erection
6- 10 Prefabri cated Structural Wuod
9-1 In,,ra ll::ttion ,l Light-Gauge Framing fl'l' Gypsum Wa llbuard
9·.'1 Fl." If :lI1d W:lll Tile
- - - - _..._ - - - _ . _ -- - ---- - - - - - -.- - -------
Figure 6-6 Rough Lumber Framing
"'i
-"- I 'plumb:
variation in plane between '\--- ±1/4" in 10'
adjacent framing members: \ (±6 in 3050)
±1/S" (3.2) \ see text
\,
positional tolerance :
±1/4"(; (
~ positional
tolerance:
±1/4" (6)
) ~4"(6)
bows and twists:

maximum 3/4" in S'
(19 in 2440)
Figure 6-7 Wood Floor Framing and Subflooring

- 10' (3050)
.4111 .• - - -_. _. _0. - ". - -- _.- - .- ~. - - ......
r--- l1 ====11=========11~II~II,
, ±1:4" (6) ....
j I::!:==
±1 A " (6)
" ± 1/2" (13)
total or in
20' (6100) . ceiling where
applicable
(a) perpendicular to joists
32" (8 13)
parallel to joist
...
±1 /4" (6) ,
t
"'-- " ' JOlst
..
(b) parallel to joists
6-7 Wood Floor Framing and Subflooring

Description
This "ccr ion includes woo~1 tloors fram ed with standard wood jo ists :md covered with sub-
tl),'rin :o; of r hwond, Vlfticleh():lr(l, or o t her shee t m:1terial a~ a ba~e for unJerlayme nt :md
Oth'..'f fill ioh tl oo ring.
Industry Standards
[( c ,d, 11.[1'<11 ( '"nsrrllc'l i,)fl f\.'r{,·,rm,!)lc:e' l;; l iddincs .)r~l ,·cI. (\X':I ~ hlllgr"n. DC: \i ;uil' I1 ;)l
'\''''e !;lr i" Il,)j H,)rne Buikl",r5 Re IIIC'J ", \, ' r:, '" Clllll1(i l. 2(\' ') ).
Lh;'- ~ c" : (\l m ,-'61 (\~' , 1\, ,u"h C :rJl(llffY . t l1 i ic', \ f ,led Itle' (J ude ~r e(iti ( a ( i,'lb , \ [8\
.' ..\ ' '; \ \\',l ,hinQi(;)1 , L'l<:: ;\ ,Hl('l1 ;'" ln ~ rli llll' elf Bui\,.lin !,; ~(ic:n~' ", ~ . 200 5) . .-\v .l iI.1He
.It ';V'..V ·~\ · . l.· ( b., .~ r ~.:\. k \ L~ ~h (t ~:-:h (~ l nt'.
G.\ .:! (;. \ r,; )1,[d1'1 \ 'lc litl'\HiOIi r 'he' '\r,plil" w'; I' , i):; / Fini 'hiil :,! ',i (;·J!.l.<llln f)',d r.i
'. IX '"h ip':f.,,'!. [1( .. th:, \ ;"f·"ll'!!\ "'.·" r,ti"i'l . \\\.p.
T ,:.k 1('·\.'+ . \, '1 '.c· r1 .,·,! :'11 Lim ',,," , ,' ,' "nl l'·. t 11:1, I !; i i-. fL j "l' .. .. n.i' ;·.1.,.,[ ;;u :!. I·l'! s
\ . '. ' c' : '.\ . ',
As with rough framing, there is no single accepted tolerance for flatness of wood subfloors .
In most cases, the required level depends on the type of finish surface used and other Con-
siderations, such as whether factory-built cabinets will be placed on an uneven floor, re-
quiring shimming.
In general, a level tolerance of ±Yi in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm) for new construc-
tion is a reasonable expectation and is less than the maximum allowable deflection (L/240
for dead and live load) stated by the International Building Code. It also allows for slight
misalignments of supporting members. However, the Residential Construction Performance
Guidelines state a more generous maximum out-of-level tolerance of y.; in. in 32 in. (6 mm
in 813 mm) measured parallel to the joists.
For total variation in floor level, the Residential Construction Performance Guidelines
state a tolerance of ±l1 in. (13 mm) in 20 ft. (6,100 mm) .
If the floor framing is also supporting a gypsum wallboard ceiling below, the Gypsum
Association requires that deflection not exceed L/240 of the span at full design load,
where L is the span. In addition, the fastening surface of adjacent joists should not vary by
more than VB in. (3 mm).
As with other rough framing, if a smaller tolerance than those mentioned is required
for finish materials, such as ceramic tile or wood flooring, it should be specified.
Related Sections
6-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumber
6-10 Prefabricated Structural Wood
9-5 Floor and Wall Tile
9-7 Wood Flooring
6-8 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss

Fabrication
Description
This section includes tolerances for wood trusses fabricated in accordance with the Truss
Plate Institute's quality standards. Although the standards include many details of fabrica-
tion, the tolerances shown in this section include only those that are of most interest to
architects and that can affect the final appearance of a structure.
Industry Standards
ANSI/TPI 1-2002, Natiorud Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Con-
struction (Alexandria, VA: Truss Plate Institute, Inc., 2002) .
Overall dimensional fabrication tolerances for wood trusses are shown in Figure 6-8 and
listed in Table 6-5 . In addition, the Truss Plate Institute's National Design Standard in-
cludes tolerances for connector plate positioning, wood members joint tolerances, and
other aspects of truss fabrication. Refer to ANSI/TPI 1 for these details.
--
Figure 6-8 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Fabrication
height, H
length, L
-I
(a) pitched trusses
-J
l height, H:
±1/8" (3)
.
length, L: ±1/4" (6)
!
-I
(b) parallel chord trusses
Note: tolerances are recommended

manufacturing tolerances for finished
floor truss units from design dimensions
as well as for truss-to-truss variation .
Related Sections
6- 9 Metal-Plate-Connected \(,'ood Truss Erect iun
Table 6-5 Structural manufacturing tolerances for

finished truss units
Truss-to-truss variance Variance from

Dimension of identical design dimensions,
trusses, in (mm) in (mm)
Length' of finished truss unit
Height b of finished truss unit
• Length, for manufacturing tolerance purposes, is the overaU length of the truss unit,
excluding o\!erhangs or extensions .
b Height, for manufacturing tolerance purposes, is the overall height of the truss unit
measured from the top of the top chord to the bottom of the botwm chord at the highest point
of the truss, excluding projections above the top chord and below the bottom chord,
ol!erhangs and extensions .
Source: ANSI/TPI 1-2002 , Truss Plate Institute , (www.tpinst .org) . Reproduced with
permission .
6-9 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss

Erection
Description
This section includes tolerances for wood trusses erected in accordance with the standards
of the Wood Truss Council of America and the Truss Plate Institute.
Industry Standards
BCSI 1-03, Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing and Bracing of Metal Plate Con-
nected Wood Trusses. (Madison, WI: Wood Truss Council of America and Truss Plate In-
stitute, 2003).
Placement tolerances are shown in Figure 6-9. Bow tolerances include the overall bow or
the bow in any chord or panel. Vertical and horizontal placement must be within ±~ in.
(6 mm) of the placement points shown on the drawings. Special hangers or supports
should be designed to accommodate this tolerance. In addition, top-chord-bearing paral-
lel chord trusses will have a maximum gap of )1 in. (13 mm) between the inside edge of the
bearing point and the first diagonal or vertical web at both ends of the truss. See Figure 6-
9(c).
Related Sections
6-8 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Fabrication
Figure 6-9 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Erection

-
i
.. overall length, L
-I
length, L
in inches (mm)
U200 up to 33.3' (10 m)

±1 /4" (6) 2" (51) for L ~ 33.3' (10 m);
same for horizontal bow
(a) bow and vertical placement
I
I
I
I
truss depth, I
o in inches (mm) I
I
I
I
I I
- f--
0 /50 up to 0 = 8' (2.4 m)
2" (51) fo r 0 ~ 8' (2.4 m)
.. ~~
I
±1 /4" (6)
(b) plumbness and horizontal placement
(c) tolerances for top chord bearing trusses

--
6-1 0 Prefabricated Structural Wood
Description
Prefabricated structural wood includes products such as plywood web joists, thin glUed
laminated framing, wood chord metal joists, or any product fabricated in the factory and
composed entirely or mostly of wood products. Structural glued laminated timber is gen-
erally considered in a category by itself.
Previous Industry Guidelines

SPECTEXT Section 06151, Wood Chord MetaUoists (Bel Air, MD: Construction
Sciences Research Foundation, 1990).
SPECTEXT Section 06196, Plywood Web Joists (Bel Air, MD: Construction Sciences
There are no industry standards for the fabrication or placement of prefabricated struc-
tural wood products. Each manufacturer has its own fabricating tolerances. In critical sit-
uations, these tolerances should be verified with the manufacturer. However, the
tolerances shown in Figure 6-10 are representative of several proprietary products at the
time of manufacturing.
Although previous master specifications have suggested a placement tolerance of t~
in. (13 mm), prefabricated structural wood products can usually be placed within a X-in.
(6-mm) positional tolerance, as with rough carpentry.
Related Sections
6-1 Glued Laminated TImber Fabrication
6-11 Structural Insulated Panels

Description
Structural insulated panels (SIPs) are composite building panels consisting of a core of
rigid foam insulation, typically expanded polystyrene, sandwiched between two structural
skins of oriented strand board. They are built in a factory and are used for floors, walls, and
roofs in residential and commercial buildings.
Industry Standards
There are no industry standards for structural insulated panels.
Currently there are no industry standards for SIPs. However, many manufacturers work
with a tolerance from ±Ys in. (3 mm) to ±Xin. (6 mm) for size, placement, and vertical and
horizontal alignment of erected panels. Some manufacturers have tighter manufacturing
tolerances because they use computer numerical controlled (CNC) router technology to.
fabricate panels and openings in the panels. Because of the variety of fabrication and erec-
---- -- --------------- - - - --------- -- - - -- ---- -- - ~--------- - ~ ----- -- ~ - - ------- --------- - -- - - -------
Figure 6-10 Prefabricated Structural Wood

-
i
i
I
+1 /8"(3) I
-1/16" (1 .6) I
1 ~,1" "-, /
±1/16" (1 .6)
(a) plywood web joists
±1 / 16" (1 .6) i
to 12" (305) ; i
±1 /8"(3) .
over 12" (305)
-'----
---
±1/16" (1.6)
i
(b) thin glued laminated framing

Figure 6-11 Structural Insulated Panels
vertical and
horizontal alignment:
±1/S" (3) to ±1/4" (6) in 20' (6100)
±1/S" (3) to
±1/4" (6) maximum
±1/S" (3) to
±1/4" (6) maximum
tion tolerances, these should be verified with the manufacturer and contractor and the re-
quired tolerances should be included in the specifications. It may also be advisable to
allow for small, ~-in . (3-mm) expansion joints to provide clearance for minor erection tol-
erances.
Related Sections
6-1 Glued Laminated TImber Fabrication
Chapter 7
Finish Carpentry and

Architectural Woodwork
7-1 Manufacturing Tolerances for

Board Lumber ·f
Description
This section includes board lumber generally used for site-fabricated finish carpentry and
miscellaneous framing and blocking for other finish carpentry or architectural woodwork.
It does not include standard wood molding shapes.
The American Softwood Lumber Standard classifies board lumber as lumber less than 2
in. (51 mm) in nominal thickness and 2 in. or more (51 mm) in nominal width. Boards
less than 6 in. (150 mm) in nominal width may be classified as strips. Southern pine board
lumber is classified similarly except that boards are 1 in. (25 mm) or more in width.
Industry Standards
Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-05, American Softwood Lumber Standard
(Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2005).
Board lumber may be ordered either as rough lumber or dressed lumber, although dressed
is the most common use. As shown in Figure 7-1 (a), rough lumber size cannot be less than
X in. (3.2 mm) thicker or wider than the corresponding minimum finished thickness or
Width, except that 20 percent of a shipment cannot be less than Xl in. (2.4 mm) thicker or
wider.
Table 7-1 Minimum sizes of dressed, dry finish,

or board lumber
Nominal thickness, Minimum actual Nominal width, Minimum actual

in (mm) thickness, in (mm) in (mm) width, in (mm)
1: (13) ;{, (11) 2 (50) W (38)
i/ (16) % (14) ., (76) 2;1, (64)
;{ (19) X (16) 4 (100) 3i (89)
1 (25) q19) 5 (125) 4}H 114)
1;; (32) 1 (25) 6 (150) 5Y; (140)
IH3S) 1!1, (32) S (200) 7'f, (184)
Source: ProdlKt SWlldard PS '?l'-05, Ntltional In.'riwte of Swndards Jlld Technology
Figure 7-1 Manufacturing tolerances for board lum
lines of minimum rough ."

thickness and width mlnlmu~ 1/8 (3) . .
no maximum I-- minimum 1/8~
I ,no maxlmumf
1" (25) or more

nomlnallhlckness[ f"1~ namlmum01
I
I
finished .
(a) rough lumber
f---------------------,~ ±1/16" (1.6) In

--! !"EreciSlon-end trlmmed~
20% of
-",' "
'
t
square-end trimmed:
±1/64" (0.4)fo,r each 2" (50)
thickness or width ", ,
~----------------~
2" or less In
nominal thickness:
+3" (75)
-0"
over nominal 12" (305) wide ot}

over 20' (6.1 m) long:
+12" (305), -0
(b) dressed board lumber

Chapter 7: Finish Carpentry and Architectural Woodwork 155
Dressed sizes must be equal to or exceed those shown in Table 7-1. These sizes are for
lumber at 19 percent moisture content or less. Shrinkage that may occur after dressing
sizes can be up to 1 percent for each 4 points of moisture content below the appli-
maximum or 0.7 percent for each 4 points of moisture content reduction for red-
western red cedar, and northern white cedar.
Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumber

Plywood Manufacturing
Particleboard Manufacturing
Site-Built Cabinets and Countertops
some residential and small commercial projects, cabinets and countertops are built
However, in mos,t cases, prebuilt cabinets are installed by finish carpenters. Such
and installed cabinets do not follow the tolerances of the Architectural Wood-
Institute described in later sections unless specifically stated in the specifications.
Few standards exist for finish carpentry work, and tolerances for construction and in-
~stalllation often depend on the skill of the individual worker. Two standards that are often
for residential construction are included in this section.
Construction Perfarmance Guidelines, 3rd ed. (Washington, OC: National

'. Association of Home Builders Remodelors™ Council, 2005).
Section 06200, Finish Carpentry (Bel Air, MD: Construction Sciences
lowable Tolerances
. shown in Figure 7-2, the Residential Construction Perfarmance Guidelines limit gaps be-
;tween cabinets and the walls or ceiling to not more than Y+ in. (6 mm). Cabinet faces can
be as much as ~ in. (3 mm) out of line. Countertops should be not more than %in. per 10
(10 mm per 3,050 mm) out of parallel with the floor. The guidelines also allow the
.COlmtlertC)p to be installed proportionately out of level if the floor is not level. However, in
construction, it is possible to shim below the base cabinets to bring a countertop level
conceal the shim space with the finish base.
The Residential Construction Perfarmance Guidelines should be considered maximums,
most competent finish carpenters work to tighter limits. For example, the SPECTEXT
specifications recommend that finish carpentry be scribed when abutting other
components with a maximum gap of ~2 in. (0.8 mm). Adjacent cabinets should not be out
· of alignment by more than ~6 in. (1.6 mm), nor should cabinet comers be out more than
~ in. (3 mm). Cabinet warpage should not exceed Y+ in. (6.4 mm) as measured from the
face frame to the point of furthermost warpage.
• Related Sections
'. 7-5 Architectural Cabinets
· 7-6 Modular Cabinets
· 7-7 Countertops
Figure 7-2 Site-built cabinets and countertops
10' (3050)
±31S" (10)
parallel to
L
:f/
floor T
NAHB: ±1/S" (3)

see text
see also limits In Sections 7-5, 7-6, and 7-7
7-3 Site-Built Stairs and Trim

Description
This section includes woodwork build at the job site by finish carpenters. Site-built
and trim are commonly used in residential and small commercial projects where
built architectural woodwork is not required.
Industry Standards ,
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. (Washington, oc: NationaF
Association of Home Builders Remodelors Council, 2005).
Figure 7-3 Site-built stairs and trim
1/8" (3.2)
maximum
(a) stairs
.,',
,/,'
/
/
~ gaps between miter
edges: 1/8" (3)
maximum
(b) trim
There are few standards for finish carpentry items such as stairs, shelving, and trim.
of these are shown in Figure 7-3. The Residential Construction Performance
ommend that the maximum vertical deflection of interior stair treads not exceed ~
mm) under a load of 200 lb. (90.7 kg). Cracks between adjoining parts that are
to meet flush and cracks between interior stair railing parts should not exceed K
mm). For trim and moldings, openings at joints and at joints between moldings and
cent surfaces should not exceed %in. (3 mm). Gaps at miter comers should not
in. (3 mm).
As with site-built cabinets, most competent carpenters should be able to
stairs and trim to tolerances closer to ~6 in. (1.6 mm).
Related Sections
7-4 Standing and Running Trim
7-10 Stairwork

Description
Standing and running trim are shop-fabricated items such as door and window
base molding, and cornice molding. Standing trim is an item of fixed length l1~U:UlLo;q
a single length of wood. Running trim is a continuous item requiring more
length, such as chair rails or baseboards.
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA:
Woodwork Institute, 2003).
WM 4-99, General Requirements for Wood Moulding (Woodland, CA: Wood !V1UU1\.1.lLUl
and Millwork Producers Association, 1999).
Table 7-2 Tightness and flushness of plant assembled jOints
Location
Miter joint 0.015 (0.4) 0.025 (0.6) 0.25 (0.6) wide 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3) 0.D75 (
wide by 20% of wide by 30% of by 20% of wide by 30% of wide by 20% of 30% of
joint length joint length joint length joint length joint length length
Stop/jamb 0.015 (0.4) x 3 0.025 (0.6) x 6 O.oz5 (0.6) x 6 0.050 (1.3) x 8 0.050 (1.3) x 8 0.D75 (1.9)x
interface (76), and no (152), and no (152), and no (203), and no 203), and no (254), and no
gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur may occur witlt
within 72 within 30 within 60 within 26 within 48 24 (610) ofa
(1829) of a (762) of a (1524) ofa (660) of a (1219) ofa similar gap
similar gap similar gap similar gap similar gap similar gap
Stop joint 0.015 (0.4) O.oz5 (0.6) 0.025 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3) 0.D75 (1.9)
Reprinted with pennissionfrom Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, S,h ed.. by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
Figure 7-4 Standing and Running Trim
±1/32" (1)
±1/32" (1)
(a) stock wood molding
/ flushness, see Table 7-2
/ ; miler jolnl, see Table 7-2
"< / --
I'" K
L
<>
~
~stoPjOi~t, 7-2
see Table
stopljamb interface,
Ii see Table 7-2
(b) architectural woodwork trim jOints (c) architectural woodwork jambs

Figure 7-4.1 Plant assembly of mitered jOints
lemon spline or biscuit clamp nails
(a) premium grade (b) custom grade
For standard stock molding made to the Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers
ation standards, dimensional tolerances are ±~2 in. (1 mm), as shown in Figure 7
As with all tolerances for architectural woodwork built according to the L>.H_UlI.""'."'Q
Woodwork Institute (AWl) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, tolerances
on which of the three grades is specified. Premium is the highest grade. Test ."'-uu'uu,,'~.
shown in Figures 7-4(b) and (c). Joint tolerances for plant-assembled joints are shown
Table 7-2. Methods of plant assembly of mitered joints are shown in Figure 7-4.1.
Related Sections
7-17 Architectural Woodwork Installation
7-5 Architectural Cabinets

Description
This section includes custom-fabricated cabinets, teller lines, desks, display cases,
similar items designed for a particular project. Items included as architectural cabinets
completely manufactured and finished in the mill shop with only minor assembly and
ish touch-up on the job site. The tolerances included here are for both wood veneer
high-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) clad cabinets .
.
f Chapter 7: Finish Carpentry and Architectural Woodwork 161
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th eel. (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
Fabric;)tion tolerances for the three standard AWl grades are shown in Figure 7-5. These
t'Jlerances are the same for both wood veneer and laminate clad cabinets except where
noted.
The gap tolerances are for the fitting of cabinet doors, drawers, and removable panels
and are subject to the size of the component, allowable warpage, hardware, and other in-
stallation variables. The gap tolerances listed are AWl-recommended targeted deviations
and are subject to such variables.
Flatness tolerances shown in Figure 7-5 (c) are measured diagonally after installation,
and the permitted values are listed in Table 7.3. These values are per linear foot or a ftac-
tion thereof.
AWl Quality Standards require that cabinets be installed plumb and square for all
grades and that exposed surfaces be scribed to a wall with a ~I-in. (O.B-mm) gap tolerance
for premium-grade cabinets.
Related Sections
7-2 Site-Built Cabinets and Countertops
7-6 Modular Cabinets
7-7 Countertops
Table 7-3 Flushness and flatness of cabinet joints

and panels
Tolerances, in (mm)
Premium Custom Economy
Flushness, wood veneer 0.001 (0.03) 0.005 (0.13) 0.010 (0.25)
Flushness, laminate clad 0.005 (0.13) 0.010 (0.25) 0.015 (0.38)
Flatness (per linear foot) 0.027 (0.7) 0.036 (0.9) 0.0500.3)
Compiled from information in Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, S,h ed., by the
Architectural Woodwork Institute.
Figure 7-5 Architectural cabinets
gap tolerance:
±1/32" (O.S) premlnum
±1/16" (1.6) custom
±3132" (2.4) economy
- - t - frame
1/S" (3.2)
gap, standard
---H-------1I---door, drawer, or ,.
removable panel'
/" IlflUShness of factory

"l assembled joints,
see Table 7-3
door/drawer flushness:
±1/32" (O.S) premium
±1/16" (1.6) custom
±1/S" (3.2) economy
(a) fitting tolerances
wood cabinets only:
~
:OO1" (0.03) premium
±C.005" (0.13) custom
±C.010" (0.25) economy
(b) edgeband tolerance (c) flatness tolerance

7-6 Modular Cabinets

Description
Modular cabinets are mass-produced casework using a manufacturer's standard details and
sizes. Modular cabinets are adapted for a particular job by using appropriate sizes and filler
panels and finishing with custom countertops. The tolerances included here are for both
wood veneer and high-pressure decorative laminate clad cabinets.
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
ANSI/KCMA A161.1-2000, Recommended Performance and Construction Standards for
Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets, (Potomac Falls, VA: Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers
Association, 2000).
The various tolerances are shown in Figure 7-6. The AWl standards do not have different
tolerances for the three grades normally used; there is only one tolerance for each cabinet
part.
In considering the tightness and flushness of plant assembled joints shown in Figure 7-
.-,1
6(b), a reasonable assessment should be made between the finished product and absolute
compliance with the AWl standard. The Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
standards are more stringent. For exposed exterior joints on the face of the cabinet and be-
tween stiles and rails of a framed door, a maximum gap of 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) is allowed,
with the maximum length of the gap of 30 percent of the total length of the joint. Refer
to ANSI/KCMA A161.1 for other gap limitations.
AWl Quality Standards require that doors and drawer fronts must align vertically, hori-
~
zontally, and in front plane within the Xl-in. (4-mm) tolerance set in the standards. Fur-
t ther, cabinets must be installed plumb and square for all grades, and exposed surfaces must
be scribed to a wall with a ~l-in (0.8-mm) gap tolerance, but for premium-grade cabinets
Il only.
Related Sections
It 7-5 Architectural Cabinets
7-7 Countertops
,
I
I
I
!
7-7 Countertops
Description
The tolerances included in this section include AWl standards for countertops made with
wood veneer, HPDL, post-formed HPDL, combination material tops, solid laminated tops
(butcher block), and solid wood tops. Also included is solid surfacing material used for
countertops.
Figure 7-6 Modular cabinets
fitting of doors and drawers:·· ....

±S/32" (4) door to door,
drawer, or drawer to drawer
±1/16" (1.6) flushness

of adjacent door and
drawer faces
AWl: ±S/32" (4)
~ II AWl flushness of frame:

'J,,-±O.OOS" (0.1)
±1/a" (3.2): door or

drawer to frame
(a) fitting tolerances
",-=~~AWI standards:
S" (12S) max. exposed
a" (200) max. semiexposed
(KCMA s dards: 30% of joint)
--11--- AWl standards:

1/32" (o.a) max. exposed
1/16" (1.6) max. semiexposecl
(KCMA standards: 0.02" or O.S mm)
(b) joint tightness
(c) edgeband tolerance (d) flatness tolerance

-
------
Figure 7-7 Countertops

-
flushness between factory "'-
assembled joints: ,\,
max. 0.005" (0.1) premium '~
max. 0.010" (0.2) custom ~
max. 0.015" (0.3) economy
level:
±1/S" in S'
(±3 mm in 2.4 m)
exposed gap, semiexposed gap,

see Table 7-4 see Table 7-4
(a) joint and flushness tolerances
factory-assembled splash
maximum separation between

splash and top
see Table 7-5
------------
maximum in any 4' x S'
(1220 x 2440) segment:
±1/16" (1) premium
±1/S" (3) custom
±1/4" (6) economy
(b) flatness and separation tolerances

Industry Standards
Master Specifications, Solid Surface Materials. (Arlington, VA: International Cast
Alliance, 2006) www.icpa-hq.org/professionals/mastersp.cfm.
Countertop tolerances are shown in Figure 7-7. When the entire countertop is +~~~~--'"",,,,
sembled, the joint gap tolerances are as listed in Table 7.4 and shown in Figure
When a factory-assembled backsplash is jointed with a: countertop in the field, the
ances are as listed in Table 7.5 and shown in Figure 7-7 (b).
Edges of laminate tops are eased, and there can be a maximum visible overlap of
in. (0.13 mm) for a length of not more than 1 in. (25.4 mm) in any 24-in. (61
AWl installation standards require that countertops be installed within ±X
mm) of the design height and within ±l-t in. in 8 ft. (±3 mm in 2.4 m) oflevel and
However, the AWl standards note that deviations in existing buildings and a lack
performance standards for framing and drywall, gaps between countertops, and
splashes are not the responsibility of the millwork installer. These standards for'
height and level also apply to solid surfacing installations.
Table 7-4 Joint tolerances for factory assembled components
Test location
Maximum gap between exposed components
Maximum length of gap in exposed components
Maximum gap between semi-exposed components 1/32 (0.8) 1/16 (1.6) I/S (3)
Maximum length of gap in semi-exposed 6 (152) 8 (204) 12 (305)
components
Note: No gap may occur within 48 in (1220 mm) of another gap (except adjustable shelf ends)
Compiled from information in Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed., by the Architectural Woodwork
Institute.
Table 7-5 Joint tolerance for separation between factory assembled

backsplash and top
AWl grade tolerances, in (mm)

Maximum separation 1/64 (0.4) x 3 (76) and 1/32 (0.8) x 5 (127) and 1/16 (1.6) x 8 (203) and
no more than one per 4-ft no more than one per 4-ft no more than one per 4-ft' :
(1219-mm) section of top (1219-mm) section of top (1219-mm) section of
Compiled from information in Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed., by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
The suggested master specifications for solid surfacing materials fro In the Internation;11
Cast Polymer Alliance call for an allowable variation in compllllent size '1f ±~~ in. (6 111m)
;1I1,1;1Il allowable variation in opening IcKation from the indicated position of ±~ in. \6
n1ln).
Related Sections
i-2 Site-Built Cabinets and Countertops
7-8 Flush Paneling

Description
This section includes tolerances for both flat wood veneer paneling and HPDL paneling.
Tolerances also include surface-applied moldings. For stile and rail paneling, refer to Sec-
tion 7-9.
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA; Architectural
Tolerances for wood veneer flush paneling are shown in Figures 7-8(a) and 7-8.1(a) and
listed in Table 7-6. Tolerances for HPDL panels are shown in Figures 7-8(b) and 7-8.l(b).
In considering the tightness and flushness of plant-assembled joints for wood veneer
paneling a reasonable assessment should be made between the finished product and ab-
solute compliance with AWl standards. For both types of paneling and all grades, AWl
standards require that panel joints be plumb within ~)6 in. in 96 in. (1.5 mm in 2,440 mm).
For premium-grade panels only, exposed surfaces that are scribed to a wall must have a )1,2-
in. (0.8-mm) gap tolerance.
Table 7-6 Joint tolerances for factory assembled components

for wood veneer paneling
A WI grade tolerances, in (mm)

_._----" --_._-_._------_.--_.- ---"'
Premium Custom ECor1om)'
Interior Exterior Interior Exterior Interi,lr Exterior

-------_._ .. - - -- ------_. -------"" "----,------ --- ... - - . - .. - --- --_._-- _.. _--- - -- ----- ._-- ' . .- -_._. - __..--
. .. -._--'- -
Maximum 0.015 (004) wide by 0.025 (0.6) wide 0.025 (0.6) wide 0.050 (U) wide 0.0'i0 ( I. 3) wi,le r.v 01'75 (1.9) wide by
gap: test 20% uf jointlengm by 30<)(, nf joint hy 20'XI of joint by 30% ot"joint ZO'!'" uf joint length 30'!:" of illint k-ngth
location A length length length
Maximum 0.01.'5 (0.4) x 3 (76). 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.010 (1.3) x 8 0.l150 ( l.3 ) .\ K 0.l'7') (I.l) x I ,~
gap, test and no g"pmay (152), an,l nu g;lp (I 'i2), ,111" no (20.1), an,1 n<\ (20, \. :lIld Ih\ .~.II' (254), ,mJ n" gell'
location B <x:cur within 77. may occur within g"p rna,' occur gap nlay occur ITI;lY llC~'lIr \\ ithill m~l\' o("cur \vithill
(1829) of a ~imilar 30 (762) "f" within 60 (1524) within 26 (66(1) 4H (660) "f;, 24 (6\()) ,,f,,
gnp sim dar gill" nf 3 ~ilnihlr gap llf a Silllilcir gap ;-.llniLlf ~;ll~ ... ilnibr !..!~lr
Flushness 0.001 (1'.03) 0.015 (O.·p 1).c'l)5 (0.1.\ 0.025 (l'.6) Lh'2'i (JFI ,'l''';O (U\
Figure 7-8 Flush paneling
gap test location 8:

see Table 7-6
~~
plumbness: flushness between panels:
±1/16" (1.5) maximum see Table 7-6
In 96" (2440)
(a) wood veneer
~-+- 5/64" (2) min.

design gap
flushness:
0.003" (0.08) premium
0.006" (0.15) custom
0.010" (0.25) <>tV\nnn,v
maximum gap:
Premium: 0.015" (0.4) x 3" (76),
and no gap may occur within 72"
(1830) of a similar gap
Custom: 0.025" (0.6) x 6" (152),

Economy: 0.050" (1.3) x 8" (203),

(b) HPDL veneer

Figure 7-8.1 Flush paneling flatness and alignment
flatness tolerances
for entire wall:
Premium: ±1/32' per ft (0.8 per 305)
Custom: ±3I64" per ft (1.2 per 305)
Economy: ±1/16' per ft (1.5 per 305)
plumbness of panel joints:

no openings or v?ids not to exceed 1/16' in 96'
of any type permitted (1.5 in 2440)
in veneer joint --J r--
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
gap test location A:+--ooIl I
see Table 7-6 I
I
I
plumb ness of gap test location B:

veneer joints: see Table 7-6
±3/16" (4.8) in 96' (2440)
(a) wood veneer
plumbness of special patterns:

Premium: 1/8" (3) in 96" (2440) max.
Custom: 1/4" (6) in 96" (2440) max.
Economy: 318" (9) in 96' (2440) max.
--Jr--
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
alignment of special patterns

sheet to sheet, maximum mismatch:
Premium: 1/16" (1.5)
Custom: 1/8' (3)
Economy: 1/4" (6)
(b) HPDL veneer
.'
< .~
~ r~~{ ~~1tI.~
••,.
.<,"\)":~iJ"
\0: • /;.:'"
G':.:i>iJ!'
~~ ~
, ~ • •
.'
, 'i
"'1
~' ~
, •• '
'f'~ ~
1
!'
,.1!;
. I 'j
..
Related Sections
7-9 Stile and Rail Paneling

Description
Stile and rail paneling consists of flat or raised panels with wood veneer faces or of
lumber, combined in a framework of stiles and rails. Surface-applied molding may
a part of the design.
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwork Quality Starulards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA:
Figure 7-9 Stile and rail paneling
gap test location C

see Table 7-7
J4~L----r--"7 gap test location A,

see Table 7-7
flushness,
see Table 7-7
gap test location B

see Table 7-7
I
)!~n ...:
±1/16" (1.5) maximum
in 96" (2440)
Figure 7-9.1 Stile and rail paneling joint tolerances
/ /
I I
" ' " gap 1
see Table 7-7
Jlion A
DD
DD
/ gap test location C:
see Table 7-7
, I.'-.
I
1/
@=
~ ~
)flushn~~,111
/ see T~t /I.-i
'--- ~ l:::=..
"-- t-- J
I
I
Table 7-7 Joint tolerances for factory assembled components for stile
and rail paneling

Interior Exterior Interior Exterior Interior Exterior
Maximum 0.Ql5 (0.4) wide 0.025 (0.6) wide 0.25 (0.6) wide 0.050 (1.3) wide 0.050 (1.3) wide 0.Q15 (1.9) wide
gap: test by 20% of joint by 30% of joint by 20% of joint by 30% of joint by 20% of joint by 30% of joint
locations A length length length length length length
Maximum 0.015 (0.4) x 3 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.050 (1.3) x 8 0.050 (1.3) x 8 0.Q15 (1.9) x 10
gap, test (75), and no gap (152), and no (152), and no (203), and no (203), and no (254), and no
locations B may occur within gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur
72 (1824) of a within 30 (762) within 60 (1524) within 26 (660) within 48 (1219) within 24 (610)
similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap
Maximum 0.015 (0.4) 0.025 (0.6) 0.25 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3) 0.Q15 (1.9)
gap, test
locationsC
Flushness 0.001 (0.03) 0.015 (0.4) 0.005 (0.1) 0.025 (0.6) O.oz5 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3)
m
Reprinted with permis.rion from Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8 ed., Iry the Architecnaal Woodwork Institute.
F' u ~ ,_
':VA~ ! : ;. :,' , " : I

Tolerances for stile and rail paneling are shown in Figures 7-9 and 7-9.1 and listed
7-7.
In considering the tightness and flushness of plant-assembled joints, a reasoI1Lablle"a
sessment should be made between the finished product and absolute compliance
AWl standards. For all grades of stile and mil paneling, AWl standards require th<>t" .....'"
joints be plumb within l16 in. in 96 in. (1.5 mm in 2,440 mm). For premium-grade
only, exposed surfaces that are scribed to a wall must have a 112-in. (0.8-mm) gap
ance.
Related Sections
7-8 Flush Paneling
7-10 Stairwork
Description
This section includes tolerances for fabrication of staiI1S in the mill shop according ..
Quality Standards.
Industry Standards
Tolerances for stair work are listed in Table 7-8. The corresponding test locations
tory-assembled joints are shown in Figure 7-10. These tolerances apply to the
Table 7-8 Joint tolerances for factory assembled joints for stairwork
Maximum 0.025 (0.6) wide 0.25 (0.6) wide 0.050 (1.3) wide
gap: test by 30% of joint by 20% Of joint by 30% of joint
location A length length length
Maximum 0.015 (0.4)x3 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.050 (1.3) x 8 0.050(1.3)x8
gap: test (76), and no gap (152), and no gap (152), and no gap (203), and no gap (203), and no gap
location B may occur within may occur within may occur within may occur within may occur within
72 (1829) of a 30 (762) of a 60 (1524) of a 26 (660) ofa 48 (612190f a
similar gap similar gap similar gap similar gap similar gap
Maximum 0.015 (0.4) 0.0250.6) 0.25 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3)
gap: test
location C
FlushneSlt 0.001 (0.03) 0.D15 (0.4) 0.005 (0.1) 0.025 (0.6) 0.025 (0.6)
th
Reprinted with pennission from Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8 ed., by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
........................--------------
Figure 7-10 Stairwork
gap test location S,

see Table 7-8
gap test location C,

see Table 7-8
flushness variation: see Table 7-8
ponents shown in the diagram as well as for handrail joints. For premium-grade stairs only,
exposed surfaces that are scribed to a wall must have a X2-in (O.B-mm) gap tolerance.
In considering the tightness and flushness of plant-assembled joints, a reasonable as-
sessment should be made between the finished product and absolute compliance with the
AWl standard.
Related Sections
7-11 Frames, Jambs, and Windows

Description
This section includes components manufactured under AWl Quality .'\r~nffn'I''',
cludes frames and jambs for interior and exterior doors, sidelights, traJ[lS(JIDl8"q
elements; also included are frames, sash, and exterior trim for custom-made:
dows.
Industry Standards
Tolerances for frames and jambs are shown in Figure 7-11(a). These
ances for premium grade, as there are no plant-assembled frames and j
economy grades. Tolerances for windows are shown in Figure 7-11 (b)
7-9. In considering the tightness and flushness of plant-assembled joints, a '.
sessment should be made between the finished product and absolute cornplia
AWl standard.
For both door and window frames in all grades, members must be ins1tallied
level within %in. in 96 in. (3 mm in 2,440 mm).
Table 7-9 Joint tolerances for custom windows
Maximum gap 0.050 (1.8) bV

at test location 20% of joint
length
Flushness 0.025 (0.6)
Reprinted with permission from Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, am ed., by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
Related Sections
7-14 Architectural Flush Doors
p

-------------------------------
Figure 7-11 Frames, jambs, and windows

-
0.015"(0.3) interior / /
0.025" (0.6) exterior
interior: 0.015" (0.4) wide by

20% of joint length.
exterior: 0.025" (0.6) wide by
30% of joint length.
~ interior: 0.015" (0.4) by 3" (756),

frame legs square with header / and no gap may occur within
and parallel to each other within: 72 (1829) of a similar gap
Premium: ±1/16" (1.5) exterior: 0.025" (0.6) by 6" (152),
Custom: ±1/8 (3) and no gap may occur within
Economy: ±3/16" (5) 30 (762) of a similar gap
(a) door frames
fl ushness, --=c---------,..L:--_t__
see Table 7-9
/'
gap test /
location
(b) windows
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7-1 2 Screens
Description
This section includes custom made insect screens for windows and doors.
':::J
Industry Standards i
,~,t~
Architectural Woodwork Quality Starulards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
~'1
Allowable Tolerances ,v~tZ
Tolerances for screens are shown in Figure 7-12 and listed in Table 7-10. For screens ,~
frames in all grades, members must be installed plumb and level within lis in. in 96 in, (1
mm in 2,440 mm). .
In considering the tightness and flushness of plant-assembled joints, a reasonable ,.
sessment should be made between the finished product and absolute compliance with th
AWl standard. '
Related Sections
, i " ...
Figure 7-12 screens~1

~----'~I'-' gap test location C,>~
*;...-
:~ ..
see Table 7 - 1 0 " - : .

~:~
,:,v;i
flushness ~=-t-------- }~
see Table 7-10
gap test location A,

see Table 7-10
gap test location B, --t----------i
see Table 7-10
~..---------------------------------- Chapter 1: Finish Carpentry and Architectural Woodwork 177
Table 7-10 Joint tolerances for screens
A \\/1 grade tolerances, in (111m)

-------------------
Premium, exterior Custom, exterior Economy, exterior
Maximum gal'~ 0.025 (0.6) wide by 30"';, of o.uso (1.3) wide by 30"0 of 0.075 (1.9) wide by 30"/0 of
[t'st location A joint length joint length joint length
Maximum gap, 0.025 (0.6) x. 6 (152). and no 0.050 ( Il) x 8 (203), and no 0.075 (l.lJ) x 10 (254). and no
test location B gap may llCCur withill JO (762) gap may occur within 26 (660) gap may O~CIIr within 24 (610)
of a similar gap ofa similar gap of a similar gap
Maximum gap: 0.025 (0.6) 0.050(1.3) 0.075 ( 1.9)
test location C
Flushness 0.025 (0.6) 0.025 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3)
R~IJrlnted with pC1"IlIissillTl from Architectlll',ll W'oodwork C..hUllil\' StLiIlt/,mf" 8'" ~d., by the' Architectlnal W")(x/Hwk Institute'.
7-13 Blinds and Shutters

Description
Thts section includes custom-made interior and exterior blinds and shutters built with
stile and rail construction.
Industry Standards
Archit.::cwral \'{!oodU'Llrk QttLllity Swnclards, 8th ed, (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
WOlxlw(lrk Institute, 2003).
Tolerances for blinds and shutters are shown in Figure 7-1 3 and liste,1 in Table 7-11. Test
loc8tillL15 for various types (If shutters and blinds are shuwn in Figure 7-13.1. For buth
Table 7-11 Joint tolerances for blinds and shutters

PTemium Cu-~tom Economy
Interior Exterior Interior Exterillr Interior Exterior
Maximum gap: V.C) I ') (0.4) wi,1e (\.025 (0.6) wiele (1.l'25 (0.6) wide (1.050 (1.1) wi,k (1.l'')O (1.3) wide 0.071 (1.9) wide
tt-,t location A hy ~lY.\l (f.ll'inr bv ,O';'!, ,,f j< 'int hv ~l'% uf .i'lint 1:>\' ,0"(, "fjoinr hy 2c"'~'p c.f jnint by )0";, l1f j;)int
lell(!th 11:'11.,,'111 1I:'IItCth length lell~th lell~rh
\f.lxilllum ;4ap, ,'.l'15 ('~'.+) " 1 ['.02'1 (0.6) 0- {i \.'.l'~5 (,'.(i):\ 0 ',1.l~)l:
( l. I) A " l'.0'il' ( I. j) '. S ,'.l'~" \ l.t)) ~ l,;
t<:~t l<lc'ltioll B \ i pl, ~nj II,' g,,}' (I ~~). ,Ird II') 1.15~). 11I1,ln" (2(13), ,111<1 n,) (~l\ ,i. ,,1\ .. 1 lie' (~')+\, .1nein,.'
11\.1': I 'l"(ur \"lthin c,q'l Ill;..lY ,:".CI)r ,L:.:11' 111:1Y ,'t(Cllr ~ilr 1l1.J~ "(\.-llr ,~nr' nl:l~- I 'cellI' .~·,lr 1)1:1\' '"',..Xllf
:~\lS~(),'tJ \I ithin .'l' ! ~t·=! 'I idlln 0l' \ l 'i~+l within ~6 (N'[') II Ith~n -t.') ( 1~ I el) \\irhll1 ~+ 101,_')
,if'! I\.,r ."_I~' ,-,t d ..;II11iLtr ~;Ir ,)t" . 1 .~ln)j\'lr ,~:lp "i ,I ,i Illil.lr ':11,' "f J 'ImiL,r c,:.Ir" ,.j .1 -Imil." ,;W
\hrximum g-,IP: " ,'1'; (,:.'\) c~.I_'~5 (C 6\ 0.i"i\.' ( 1.1) I-\\.:~'~I..: ~ 1, ~) \.".(,:~::; (l '.I!
te~tle'catLon C
,,.,.) i '\" , ,~ , . ' !" !, . r. ': ",",
mmmrmrrn
Figure 7-13 Blinds and shutters
gap test location C,

see Table 7-11
flushness --==+----_
see Table 7-11
gap test location S, - - t - - - - - * l

see Table 7-11
blinds and shutters in all grades, members must be installed plumb and level
in 96 in. (3 mm in 2,440 mm).
In considering the tightness and flushness of plant-assembled joints, a rea.!iOJ;l(lQ
sessment should be made between the finished product and absolute compliance
AWl standard.
Related Sections

DeSCription
This section includes flush wood doors manufactured according to AWl standards,
rily for commercial construction. Doors conforming to premium, custom, and
grade are available. Refer to Section 11-4 for tolerances for standard flush wood
manufactured according to Window and Door Manufacturers Association stru1ClaJrtJ
However, the tolerances are very similar for both standards.
y
Figure 7-13.1 Blinds and shutters gap test locations

--
/
louvered raised panel
~-t---- gap test

location A
gap test ~
location C ~
flat panel
Figure 7-14 Architectural flush doors
out of square:
±1/S· (3.2)
±1/16· (1.6)
±1/16· (1.6)
±1/32"
(O.S)
±1/16" (1.6) ±1/32·

(O.S)
(a) doors not prefit (b) machined for hardware
warp, maximum
deviation: 1/4· (64)
for 1 314· (44) doors
up to ~'..s. x 7'-0·
(1067 x 2134) or
1/4· (6.4) In any
3'·6· x 7'-0. section
for larger doors
(c) warp tolerances (d) telegraphing

Industry Standards
.-\rchitcl'fLmd \'('oodwork Qualit)' Stand..mis. 8th eLL (Potumac Falls, VA: Architectural
\\\)llciwl)['k Institute, 2001),
Figure 7-14 illustrates the tolerances of size, warpage, and show-through or telegraphing.
(TelcgrCIt)hing is the distortion of the face veneer of a cluor caused by variation in thickness
hetween the CClre material and the vertical or hurizuntal edge bands.) The tulerances for
h~1rJware location for machined doors includes locks, hinges, and other hardware.
W,ul'age tolerances apply only to the door ;:md not to its position in the frame. The
!11~lximum deviation of;!.f in. (6 mm) applies to a maximum duor size of 3 ft., 0 in. by 7 ft.,
o in. (900 mm by 2,100 mm) for U<.-in.-thick OS-mm-thick) doors and to a maximum
door size of} ft., 6 in. by 7 ft., 0 in. (1,067 mm by 2,100 mm) for lX-in.-thick (44-mm-
thick) doors. For larger l11-in.-thick doors, the tolerance is measured in any 3-ft., 6-in. by
7-ft., O-in. section.
Refer to the AWl Quality Standards for a complete listing of maximum clearances be-
tween doors and frames and maximum extensions of door faces beyond frames.
Related Sections
11-4 Standard Flush Wood Doors
11-7 Installation of Wood Doors
7-15 Stile and Rail Doors-Size and Flatness

Description
This section includes size and flatness tolerances for stile and rail doors manufactured pri-
marily for commercial constmction according to AWl standards. Doors conforming to
premium, custom, and economy grade are available. Refer to Section 11- 5 for tolerances
for standard stile and rail doors manufactured according to Window and Door Manufac-
turers Association standards.
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed, (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
Figure 7-15 illustrates the tolerances of size, warpage, and show-through or telegraphing.
Joint tightness and flushness tolerances are given in Section 7-16. The tolerances for
hardware location for machined doors include locks, hinges, and other hardware.
Warpage tolerances apply only to the door and not to its position in the frame. The
maximum deviation of 'Ii in. (6 mm) applies to a maximum door size of 3 ft., 0 in. by 7 ft.,
(\ in. (900 mm by 2,100mm) for l\-in-thick (35-mm-thick) doors and to a ma.'limumdoor
size of 3 ft., 6 in. by 7 ft., 0 in. (1,067 mm by 2,100 mm) for 1'i.;-in.-thick (44-mm-thick)
,-hom. Fc)r larger h-in.-thick doors, the tolerance is measured in any 3-ft., 6-in. by 7-ft.,
\..: ~ifl. section.
Refer to the A\VI Ql.L11iry Srmdtlrcls tor .1 c(llnrlete li~ting of maximum clearances be-
l ween clOl1[S and frames and maximum extemimlS of dOl1r faces beyond frames.
Figure 7-15 Stile and rail doors-size and
±1/1S" (2)
±1/32" (1)
±1/1S" (2) ±1/32" (1)
warp, maximum
deviation 114" (S)
for 1 314" (44) doors
up to 3'-6" x 7'-0"
(1067 x 2134) or
1/4" (S.4) in any
3'-6" x 7'-0" section
for larger doors

-
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related sections
7-16 Stile and Rail Doors--Joint Tightness and Flushness
11-5 Standard Stile and Rail Doors
7-16 Stile and Rail Doors-Joint Tightness

and Flushness
Description
This section includes joint tightness and flushness tolerances for stile and rail doors man-
ufactured primarily for commercial construction according to AWl standards. Refer to
Section 11-5 for tolerances for standard stile and rail doors manufactured according to
Window and Door Manufacturers Association standards.
Industry Standards
Joint tightness and flushness for stile and rail intersections are measured at certain stan-
dard points on a stile and rail door. These test locations are shown in Figure 7-16, and the
maximum deviations permitted are listed in Table 7-12. Flushness tolerances of other
joints are listed in Table 7-13.
Table 7-12 Tightness of plant assembled joints
AWl grade tolerances, In (mm)

Maximum gap: 0,015 (0.4) wide 0.025 (0.6) wide 0.25 (0.6) wide 0.050 (1.3) wide 0.050 (1.3) wide 0.075 (1.9) wide
test location A by 20% of joint by 30% of joint by 20% of joint by 30% of joint by 20% of joint by 30% of joint
length length length length length length
Maximum gap, 0,015 (0.4) x 3 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.025 (0.6) x 6 0.050 (1.3) x8 0.050 (1.3) x 8 0.075 (1.9) x 10
test location B (76), and no gap (152), and no (152), and no (203), and no (203), and no (254), and no
may occur within gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur gap may occur
72 (1829) of a within 30 (762) within 60 (1524) within 26 (660) within 48 (1219) within 24 (610)
similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap of a similar gap
Maximum gap: 0,015 (0.4) 0.025 (0.6) 0.025 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050(1.3) 0.075 (1.9)
test location C
Flushness 0.001 (0.03) 0,015 (0.4) 0.005 (0.1) 0.025 (0.6) 0.025 (0.6) 0.050 (1.3)
Reprinted with permission from Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, B"' ed. ,fry the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
~ ~~ "-. ~
> " t,td tf

, I t I .
Figure 7-16 Stile and rail doors-joint tightness

and flushness

see Table 7-12
0 -
""
I
) gap test location
see Table 7-12 '
flushness of plant
assembled jOints,
(maximum variation
in alignment of similarly
shaped surfaces)
see Table 7-13
/
@=
r-
0---
.---
"'" ~flushness,
see Table 7-12
L....- '--

see Table 7-12
Table 7-13 Flushness of plant assembled joints (Maximum variation

in alignment of similarly shaped surfaces)
AWl grade tolerances, in (nun)

Stile and rails None permitted 0.D15 (0.4) 0.005 (0.1) O.oz5 (0.6) 0.010 (0.25) 0.050 (1.3)
Moldings, beads, 0.007 (0.2) 0.007 (0.2) 0.D15(0.4) 0.D15(0.4) 0.030 (0.8) 0.030 (0.8)
rims, etc.
Compiled from information in Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed., by the Architectural Woodwork institute.
Related Sections
>1'5 Stile and Rail Doors-Size and Flatness
11-5 lv!anufacturing Tolerances for Standard Stile and Rail Doors

Description
The Quality Standnrds of the AWl provide general installation standards for various types
llfw(lodwork based on one of the three grades. Normally, the same woodworking shop that
bbricates the material also installs it. This section includes some of the installation stan-
Jarcls that relate to dimensional tolerances.
Industry Standards
Architectural Woodwm'k Quality Standards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
Tolerances for field joints of materials vary depending of whether they are wood-to-wood,
wood-to-nonwood, or nonwood-to-nonwood. For example, wood trim may be placed next
to a stone panel that is part of the woodworker's responsibility. Tolerances also vary de-
pending on the height of the joint above the floor. Tolerances do not apply for joints not
open to building occupants or visible to the general public. These tllierances are shown di-
agrammatically in Figures 7-17(01), 7-17 (b), and 7-17 (c) and are listed in Tables 7-14
through 7-16. In all cases, the maximum allowable length of the gap is 30 percent of the
joint length. An example of these conditions is shown in Figure 7-17.1. The tolerances for
field joints above 118 in. (3 m) are a little less restrictive. Refer to AWl standards for a
complete listing of installation requirements.
Table 7-14 Wood-to-wood field joints up to 118 inches (3 m)

above finished floor
Maximum tolerance, in (mm)

Flat Shaped Flat Shaped Flat Shaped
surface surface surface surface surface surface
Gap width 0.012 (0.3) 0.025 (0.65) 0.025 (0.65) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3) 0.G75 (1.9)
Flushness 0.012 (0.3) 0.025 (0.65) 0.025 (0.65) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1J) 0.075 (1.<)
Compiled from mfonnation in Architecrural 'W'oodwork Quality Sr;:mdarcis, S,e. ed., by the Architectl<r(ll W'oodwork Institlltc.
Figure 7-17 Architectural woodwork installation
flushness:
see Table 7-14
118" (3 m) to
floor or less
gap width:
see Table 7-14
(a) wood-to-wood
gap width:
see Table 7-15
(b) wood-to-nonwood
gap width:
see Table 7-16
(c) nonwood-to-nonwood
7-15 Wood-to-non-wood field joints up to 118 inches (3 m)


PTemium Cwtom Economy
Gapwidtb 0,025 (0.65) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.100 (2.5)
Flushness 0,025 (0.65) 0.050 (1.3) 0.050 (1.3) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.100 (2.5)
Compiled from infonnatian in Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed., by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
e 7-16 Non-wood-to-non-wood field jOints up to 118 inches (3 m)


PTemium Cwtom Economy
Gapwidtb 0.050 (1.3) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.100 (2.5) 0.100 (2.5) 0.125 (3.2)
Flushness 0.050 (1.3) 0.Q75 (1.9) 0.075 (1.9) 0.100 (2.5) 0.100 (2.5) 0.125 (3.2)
Campiledfrom information in Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed., by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
Related Sections
. 7-4 Standing and Running Trim
Figure 7-17.1 Woodwork installation test locations
~ ~
DD
--
DD
~
F" F
~~
, Ii ./
~
~
t=3=
~
t-
~
.---::::::-
~
1/
f-" ~
- 1::::=
'---
~
'---
~
f'-- ~
./ ,~
?
"
~
urtain Walls
Aluminum Curtain Wall Fabrication
ption
curtain wall construction involves several tolerances in addition to fabrication tol-
There are basic material tolerances, building frame tolerances, and erection tol-
In addition, there are required clearances between the curtain wall and other
components that must be provided for. Because metal curtain walls are manufac-
from fairly precise components (aluminum tubing and other shapes, for example)
factory fabricated under controlled conditions, the tolerances for the finished product
"'i .. lh'I"TPI1 to the job site are small and normally do not affect installation.
MCWM-1-89, Metal Curtain WaUManual (Schaumburg, IL: American

Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2002).
H3S.2-2003, Dimensional Tolerances far Aluminum Mill Products (Arlington,
VA: The Aluminum Association, 2003).
Glazing Manual (Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America, 2oo4).
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) does not publish any

standard tolerances for fabrication. Tolerances for aluminum shapes are
in ANSI H3S.2. See Sections 9-13 and 9-14. Commonly used tolerances are shown
8-1. Exact fabricated tolerances should be verified with the manufacturer, as they
vary with the size, material, and configuration of each curtain wall system. In nearly
cases, minor manufacturing tolerances are easily accommodated during erection and
"'""'~Ull1"'lL to the building structure.
'., For erection tolerances, the Glass Association of North America (GANA) Glazing
recommends that within any rectangular framing opening there should be not
than a ~-in. (3-mm) difference in the length of the diagonals. Further, the maximum
of mullions from plumb or horizontals from level should not exceed ±~ in. (3
in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±X in. (6 mm) in any single run. Framing systems that are de-
to have the horizontal and vertical glazing legs in the same plane should have a
maximum out-of-plane offset of ~2 in. (0.8 mm) at the frame comers to avoid unequal
. stresses on the glass.
Related Sections
8-2 Aluminum Curtain Wall Installation
8-3 Storefront and Entrance Manufacturing
13 Extruded Aluminum Tubes
" 9-14 Aluminum Rods, Bars, and Shapes
Figure 8-1 Aluminum curtain wall fabrication
indMdual tubes, shapes.

and other framing mAim"'........
maximum 1/8" (3) between refer to manufacturer's
diagonals in glazing framing spedficationsorsee
Sees. 9-13 and 9-14
height: ±1/8" (3) or

manufacturer's AtArll'lAnrtf
See also Sees. 9-13 ...
and 9-14
maximum. alignment /
offset between two
I.. ..I
width: ±1/8" (3) or
identical members
end to end: manufacturer's standard.
±1/16" (1.5) See also Sees. 9-13
and 9-14
Chapter 8: Curtain Walls 191

Description
Thi, ,,'ction inL"lude$ insrallation toler,mces for aluminum and other metal L~uml.in w:llb.
Tll Il1l:d industry 5wndard tolerances LX manutJcturers' tolerances, it is imperative that
rhe bllikhn.e frame be C(ltlstructed within acceptable tulerances and th:lt connecti()['l de-
rai\$;lllow tor adju~tment Juring erection.
Industry Standards
:\AMA lvlCWM-l-S9, Metul Curwin Wall Manual. (Schaumburg, IL: American
Architectural Manut3cturers Association, 2002).
G;\I\JA OkLzing ManuaL (Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America, 2004).
UFGS Section 08 44 00, Glazed Curtain Wall, United Facilities Guide Specificatiuns,
December 2005 (Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2005)
http://www.wbdg.urg/ccb/OODjUFGS/UFGS%2008°/c,2044%2000.pdf
AJlowable Tolerances
Tolerances for aluminum allLl other metal curtain walls should be stated in the specifica-
tions. In many cases, a lesser or greater tolerance than is normally used is required. In ad-
dition tLl erection tolerances, the specifications should clearly state what the tolerances
for the building frame will be and that the curtain wall manufacturer must accommodate
these framing tolerances. In some cases, the manufacturer will give the required curtain
wall fabrication and erections tolerances to the architect prior to issuing constmction
documents so that the required frame tolerances can be stated for other trades.
The tLllerances recommended by the AAMA for variation from plane and offset of ad-
jacent components are shown in Figure 8-2. For erection tolerances, the Glazing Manual
recommends that within any rectangular framing opening there should be not more than
a ){-in. {3-mm} difference in the length of the diagonals. Further, the maximum variation
of mullions twm plumb or horizontals fwm level should not exceed ±~ in. (3 mm) in 12
ft. (3,66l' mm) or ±),< in. (6 mm) in any single run. Framing systems that are designed to
have the horizuntal and vertical glazing legs in the same plane should have a maximum
out-ot-plane offset of ;;; in. (0.8 mm) at the frame comers to avoid unequal stresses on the
glass.
The Unified Facilities Guide Specifications (UFGS) master specifications recommend
a maximum deviation fwm plane or location from that on the shop drawings of lis in. per
12 ft. (1 mm per 12 m) up to not more than )~ in. (13 mm) in any total length. The offset
from true alignment at the joints between abutting members in line is ±YtD in. (2 mm).
Related Sections
8-1 Aluminllm Curtain Wall Fabrication
::1-4 5tt:>refwnt Installation
12-l' Detailing t~)r Curtain W'alls on Concrete Frames
Ii-- ~ Ddailing tor Curtain Walls on Steel Frames
Figure 8-2 Aluminum curtain wall installation
building frame tolerances

specified elsewhere
±1/8" (3) from location .. listed In curtain wall
shown on the drawings specifications
maximum offset:
1
,:1116 (1.5)
variation from plane:

1/8" per 12' (3 mm per 3600 mm), '
or 1/2" (12) in any tota/length .
Chapter 8: Curtain Walls 193

Description
Storefront construction involves several tolerances in addition to manufacturing toler-
ances. There are basic material tolerances, building substrate tolerances, and installation
tolerances. Because storefronts, like curtain walls, are manufactured from fairly precise
components (aluminum tubing and other shapes, for example) and factory fabricated
under controlled conditions, the tolerances for the finished product as delivered to the job
site are small and normally do not affect installation.
Industry standards
GANA Glazing Manual (Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America, 2004).
SFM-I-87, Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual (Schaumburg, IL: American
Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2002).
As shown in Figure 8-3, the American Architectural Manufacturers Association does not
publish any industry-wide standard tolerances for storefront and entrance. Exact fabri-
cated tolerances should be verified with the manufacturer, as they will vary with the size,
material, and configuration of each system. In nearly all cases, minor manufacturing tol-
erances are easily accommodated during installation if sufficient clearance is provided be-
tween the storefront system and the building substrate. A minimum ~-in. (6-mm)
clearance is required, with a )1-in. (13-mm) clearance recommended.
For erection tolerances, the Glazing Manual recommends that within any rectangular
framing opening there should be not more than ali-in. (3-mm) difference in the length of
the diagonals. Further, the maximum variation of mullions from plumb or horizontals
from level should not exceed ±li in. (3 mm) in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±~ in. (6 mm) in any
single run. Framing systems that are designed to have the horizontal and vertical glazing
legs in the same plane should have a maximum out-of-plane offset of).52 in. (0.8 mm) at
the frame corners to avoid unequal stresses on the glass.
Related Sections
8-1 Aluminum Curtain Wall Fabrication
8-4 Storefront Installation
10-5 All-Glass Entrances
Figure 8-3 Storefront and entrance man
maxim um 1/8" (3) between

diagonals in glazing framing
\1 /
n
\ \ ~/ ~ ~ ~
\
1
1 ~
\ 1
V
1\
1 \
1 \
/~\\ ~ ~ ~
1 ~
",I
\
total length
verify with manufacturer or
I
I
see Sees. 9-13 and 9-14
':
Ii
"
Chapter 8: Curtain Walls 195 I'

~------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
, .',.
~. 1-
~ Storefront Installation
r:,~~/
Description
aecause storefront systems are factory manufactured from precise components, installa-
tion: tolerances
can be quite accurate, provided that the substrate tolerances are small
~gh to allow installation without excessive shimming or calking.
"i.
lrtdustry Standards
dANA Glazing Manual. Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America, 2004.
SFM-1-87, Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. Schaumburg, IL: American
UArchitectural Manufacturers Association, 2002.
SPECTEXT Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts (Bel Air, MD:
~. Construction Sciences Research Foundation, 1989).
~Iowable tolerances
~&:ommended installation tolerances for storefronts are shown in Figure 8-4. In addition,
~\:clearance of!4 in. minimum to !1 in. (6 mm to 13 mm) is recommended between the
~orefront system and masonry and other openings. The floor under a swinging door or re-
volving door should be level to a tolerance of ±l{6 in. (1.5 mm) to prevent the door from
binding.
i, For erection tolerances, the Glazing Manual recommends that within any rectangular
framing opening there should be not more than a ~-in. (3-mm) difference in the length of
From level should not exceed ±~ in. (3 mm) in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±!4 in. (6 mm) in any
iingle run. Framing systems that are designed to have the horizontal and vertical glazing
legs in the same plane should have a maximum out-of-plane offset of Xz in. (0.8 mm) at
the frame comers to avoid unequal stresses on the glass.
Previous SPECfEXT master specifications recommended a maximum plumb mis-
ilignment of 0.06 in. for every 3 ft. (1.5 mm per meter) noncumulative or l{6 in. per 10 ft.
(1.5 mm per 3 meters), whichever is less, with a maximum misalignment of adjacent
nembers of Xz in. (0.8 mm).
Related Sections
L0-5 All-Glass Entrances
Figure 8-4 Storefront installation
maximum 1/S' (3) between

diagonals in glazing framing
offset between adjacent members:

±1/16' (1.5)
\ \ ~/
I
\ I
\ I
Y
1\
I \
I \
I
/~\\
I
plumb: - , floor level under door:

±1/S' per 12' ±1/16' (1.5)
(3 mm per 3660 mm)
----..------...... ~~~------

---------~---
Table 1-4 Recommended tolerances for right-of-way construction
fk.ment surveyed Final suggested tolerance

~<Ichray grade (cross slope)-Concrete +0.5%
Rll~lch;\\' grade cross slope (running grade)-Concrete +0.5%
Sidc'lIalk running slope +1%
Sd':\\,~llk cross slope +0.5%
Flatness (smoothness) of sidewalks ±X"/lO' (±6 mm/3 m)
Curb ramp slupe, main ramp +0.5%
Curb ramp, flare slope +0.5%
Curb ramp gutter counterslope +0.5%
Widths of sidewalks and other paving ±X" (±19 mm)
Elevation points of construction ±0.5" (±13 mm)
Concrete joint size +).tI' (3 mm)
Concrete stairs (riser and tread) ± ).ti' (±3 mm) riser, ±)4" (±6 mm) tread
Placement of detectable warning surfaces ± W' (±19 mm)
Installation of metal handrails and guardrails ±W (±13 mm)
Horizontal pbcement of poles, controls, signs, etc. ±2" (±50 mm)
Vertical placement of handrails, controls, signs, etc. ±1" (±25 mm) None for handrail height.
Street furniture-horizontal placement ±2" (±50 mm)
Street furniture-vertical placement ±1" (±25 mm)
Size of gaps at rail crossings ±X" (±6 mm) light rail and passenger train tracks
Flushness of surfaces at rail crossings ±X" (±6 mm)
Asphalt roadway grade +1%
Asphalt roadway grade cross slope +1%
Asphalt sidewalk nmning slope +1%
Asphalt sidewalk cross slope +0.5%
Asphalt flatness (smoothness) of sidewalks ±X"/lO' (±6 mm/3 m)
Asphalt curb ramp slope, main ramp +0.5%
Asphalt curb ramp, flare slope +0.5%
Asphalt curb ramp gutter cLlunterslope +0.5%
Asphalt widths of sidewalks and other paving ±X" (±19 mm)
Asphalt elevation points of construction ±~" (±13 mm)
Change of level +Y88" (+3 mm)
Source: An Analysis of the Draft ADA Guidelines for Accessible Rights-of-\Vay
Publication No. FHWA-EP-01-027, Designing Sidewalks and Trails far Access, Part II of II:
Best Practices Design Guide, Beneficial Designs, Inc. (Washington, oc:
U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, 2001).
ReWed Draft Guidelines far Accessible Public Rights-of-Way, November 23 (Washington,
oc:
U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, 2005)
www.access-board.gov/prowac/draft.htm.
The only industry standard tolerances for right-of-way construction are (or mainline pave~' .'
ments, ramps, sidewalks, and intersections published by the ACI. Refer to Section 1-3 fOri-
ACI paving tolerances. For ramps and sidewalks, ACI tolerances state that the vertical'i -_
deviation of a surface as measured below an unleveled 10-ft. (3-m) straightedge shall -
exceed ~ in. (3 mm).
In the publication, Designing Sidewalks and Trails far Access, Part II of II: Best t'Tactice"f,;!I
Design Guide, it is suggested that curb ramPs be specified at 7.1 percent ± 1.20 percent
erance. This is intended to give a maximum slope of 8.33 percent (1: 12) as required by
ADAAO.
For specific tolerances for highway and road smoothness, the local OOT teS)pol1lSibte
for construction should be consulted.
There are currently no industry standards for other tolerances of the various "L<:;ILU"JLL~'-'-''lII
that are part of right-of~way construction. The recommendations given in this secti(:>n
based on a report summarizing research conducted for the National Cooperative
Research Program of the Transportation Research Board. For thia research, state and
departments of transportation were surveyed to determine if they had standacls for
ances and if not, what they believed were reasonable tolerances for the ite~ -
questionnaire. Additionally, recently completed right-of-way constru~tio~ was lU<:;i::Il)Ul<:;\.I
to determine if actual construction met the requirements of the ADAAO and if not,
close actual construction came to meeting the requirements. The information was P""""_'.-T"'"
ated to determine what could reasonably be expected of right-of-wayconsciuction -~"~?;.IJI
today's standard construction techniques, tools, equipment, and work crews. Ke<luiJre4
ments by individual state or local departments of transportation may vary.
Some of the suggested tolerances developed by the author of this report are shown in-
Figures 1-7 and 1-7.1 and detailed in Table 1-4. These are not endorsed by the Transporta-:
tion Research Board.
Related Sections
1-3 Concrete Paving:
1--4 AsPhalt Pavirlg
1-5 _Pec,lestrian ~aving_.
20--4 .Tolerances and Accessibility
Chapter 2
Concrete
2-1 Reinforcement Placement for

Flexural Members
Description
This section includes some of the typical tolerances for rebar placement for cast-in-place
beams and other flexural members. Refer to ACI 117 for a complete listing of all place-
ment tolerances and for fabrication of individual pieces of reinforcing steel.
Industry Standards
Commentary (Detroit, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2006).
In reinforcement placement, a tolerance envelope is created by two limitations: the max-
imum reduction on concrete cover or clear distance between the rebar and forms and the
reduction in distance between reinforcement. The clear distance between side forms or
formed soffits is shown in Figure 2-1(a) and given in Table 2.1. However, the specified
concrete cover cannot be reduced more than %in. (10 mm) for members 12 in. (305 mm)
or less in dimension or more than ~ in. (13 mm) for members over 12 in. In any case, the
reduction in cover cannot exceed one-third of the specified concrete cover. For soffits, the
reduction in cover cannot exceed X in. (6 mm). The distance between reinforcement is
shown in Figure 2.1 (b), but the distance cannot be less than the greater of the bar diame-
ter or 1 in. (25 mm) for unbundled bars.
Table 2-1 Clear distance tolerance to side fonns and soffits
Member size, inches (mm) Tolerance, inches (nun)

4 inches ( 10 1) or less ±X (6)
Over 4 inches (10 1) but not over 12 inches (305) ±Ys (10)
Over 12 inches (305) ±~ (13)
Source: Compiled from information in ACI 117
Related Sections
2-2 Reinforcement Placement in Walls and Columns
Figure 2-1 Reinforcement placement for flexural membe"
clear distance to side

forms and soffits:
see Table 2-1
maximum 1/4" (6)

reduCtion in cover to soffits ,
formed soffit
distance between reinforcement:

± 114th specified distance. not
to exceed ±1" (25)
(a) flexural member in cross section
stirrups
the lesser of 3" (76) or
±1"1ft of beam depth
(±83 mm per 1 m of beam depth)
(b) flexural member in elevation

--
2-2 Reinforcement Placement in Walls and

Columns
Description
l\L'll1tllrcement placement for cast-in-place walls and columns follows many of the same
rl'ljllirelll ents as for flexural members. Refer to ACI 117 for a comrlete listing of all place-
lllL'llt tllierances and felr fabrication of individual pieces of reinforcing steel.
Industry Standards
.-\CI 117-06, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary (Detroit, Ml: American Concrete Institute, 2006).
As with flexural members, placement tolerances for walls and columns depend on the
specitled clear cover and the spacing between individual members. The clear-distance tol-
erances given in Table 2.1 apply to walls and columns. As with flexural members, the
specified cover cannot be reduced more than .~ in. (10 mm) for members 12 in. (305 mm)
llr less in dimension or more than Yz in. (13 mm) for members over 12 in. In any case, the
reduction in cover cannot exceed one-third of the specified concrete cover. The spacing
of reinforcement in walls (other than ties) shown in Figure 2-2(a) cannot exceed ±3 in.
(76 mm) excert that the total number of bars cannot be less than that specified. For
columns, the distance between reinforcement is shown in Figure 2-2(b), but the distance
cannot be less than the greater of the bar diameter or 1 in. (25 mm) for unbundled bars.
For bar laps and embedded length, there is no positive tolerance; that is, bars may over-
lap or be embedded more than specified by any amount but not less than shown in Figures
2-2(c) and (d).
Related Sections
2-3 Reinforcement Placement for Flexural Members
2-3 Reinforcement Placement of

Prestressing Steel
Description
Prestressing steel includes tendons used for reinforcement of precast, prestressed concrete
sections. Simple precast reinforcing steel placement tolerances are governed by ACI 117.
Industry Standards
ivlNL 135-00, Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction
(Chicago: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
ACI 117-06, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary (Detroit, Nil: American Concrete Institute, 2006).
L:1teral and vertical placement tolerances for prestressing steel and prestressing steel ducts
are shown in Figure 2-3. ACI 117 sets tolerances based on member depth, while the Pre-
cast/Pre~tressed Cuncrete Institute sets tolerances based on member type.
Figure 2-2 Reinforcement placement in walls and columns
clear distance:
see Table 2-1
member size
±3" (76) clear distance:

see Table 2-1 ±1/4th specified distance
not to exceed 1" (25)
(a) walls (b) columns
#3-#11 bars: -1" (25)

#14 and #18 bars: -2" (51)
#3-#11 bars: -1" (25)

#14 and #18 bars: -2" (51)
(c) bar laps (d) embedded length

•
-
Figure 2-3 Reinforcement placement of prestressing steel
ACI tolerance:
±1/2" (13) for D 24" (0.6 m) or less
±1 u (25) for Dover 24" (0.6 m)
member depth, D
or thickness
PCI tolerance: --'---r'.,
±1/4" (6) -------'-
ACI tolerance: ACI tolerance:
±1/4" (6) for D S" (203) or less ±1/2" (13) for D 24" (0.6 m) or less
±31S" (10) for Dover S" but not ±1" (25) for Dover 24" (0.6 m)
over 24" (0.6 m)
±1/2" (13) for Dover 24" (0.6 m)
(a) lateral placement
D
PCI tolerance: L
±1/411(6)T
ACI tolerance:
±1/4" (6) for D S" (203) or less
±31S" (10) for Dover S" but not
over 24" (0.6 m)
±1/2" (13) for Dover 24" (0.6 m)
ACI tolerance:
PCI tolerance: ---'------Fo-'- ±1/4" (6) for D S" (203) or less
±1/4" (6) ±31S" (10) for Dover S" but not
f over 24" (0.6 m)

±1/2" (13) for Dover 24" (0.6 m)
(b) vertical placement

Figure 2-4 Concrete slabs on grade
specified elevation
(a) level alignment
10' straightedge set

anywhere on the floor
10' (3 m)
z,*'
~~}"
~
¥.
""~
maximum gap
floor surface 90% . 100%
classification compliance compliance
conventional: 1/2· (13) 314· (19)
moderately flat: 318· (10 5/S" (16)
flat: 1/4· (6) 3IS· (10)
(b) 10-ft straightedge method
10' (3 m)
(c) F-number system

~~------~----------------------------------~------
The Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute recommends that the position of tendons

h- ±:'4 in. (6 mm) tor individual tendons and ±~ in. (13 mm) tl)r bundled tendons for pre-
messed secriL)ns such as single tees, dnuble tees, beams, spandrels, columns, ribbed wall
1'~ll1ds, insulated wall panels, and tee joists.
Related Sections
2-1 Reintl)rcement Placement for Flexural Members
2-2 Reinforcement Placement in Walls and Columns
2-4 Concrete Slabs on Grade

Description
Both slabs on grade and elevated slabs are subject to two tolerances. One is the overall tol-
erance above and below the specified elevation, and the other is the flatness and levelness
of the floor finish. Flatness is the degree to which the surface approximates a plane. Lev-
elness is the degree to which the surface parallels horizontal. For a complete discussion of
the F-numbering system, refer to ACI 302.IR-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Con-
struction, and ACI Compilation No.9, Concrete Floor Flatness and Levelness.
Industry Standards
ASTM E 1155-96 (Reapproved 2001), Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor
Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
Level alignment tolerance is shown in Figure 2-4(a). This means that over the entire sur-
face of a concrete slab, all points must fall within an envelope ~ in. (19 mm) above or
below the theoretical elevation plane.
Random-traffic floor finish tolerances may be specified either by the traditional lO-ft.
straightedge method, shown in Figure 2-4(b), or by the F-number system. A third method,
the Waviness Index, is an optional method of specifying floor surfaces. Refer to Section
17 -5 for more information on the Waviness Index.
If the lO-ft. straightedge method is used, there are three floor classifications: conven-
tional, moderately flat, and flat. For a surface to meet the requirements of one of these
three classifications, a minimum of 0.01 times the area of the floor measured in ft.2 (0.1
times the area in m 2 ) must be taken. Ninety percent of the samples must be within the first
column shown in Figure 2-4(b) and 100 percent of the samples must fall within the sec-
ond column in Figure 2-4(b). The orientation of the straightedge must be parallel, per-
pendicular, or at a 45-degree angle to the longest construction joint bounding the test
surface. ACI 117 details the other requirements for taking the samples.
The F-number system, diagrammed in Figure 2-4(c), is a statistical method to measure
and specify borh the local flatness of a floor within adjacent, 12-in. intervals (the FF num-
ber) and the local levelness of a floor (the FL number) over a lO-ft. (3,050-mm) distance.
The higher the FF or FL number, the thtter or more level the floor. To determine if a floor
blls within the tolerances of a particular FF and FL number, measurements must be taken
Figure 2-5 Footings and anchor bolts
top of anchor bolt from

----I" 1-1
.-
.. - - - - - centerline of indMdual
bolts f eclfied I tio
specified elevation: ±1/2" (13) II bolt size
rom sp oca n
tolerance
314" (19), 7/8· (22) ±1/4· (6)
1" (25), 1-1/4" (32), 1-1/2" (38) ±3I8· (10)
1-3/4· (44), 2· (51), 2-112· (64) ±112· (13)
(a) anchor bolts
center of gravity as cast

0.02 times width of
footing or 2" (SO) max.
center of gravity as specified
when supporting masonry:
±112" (13)
!
1
±112" (13) supporting masonry .1
+1/2", -2· (+13, -SO) other footings .~
~ ~~
I -1
I
I
I
I
I
I
+ no limit
-5% of specified depth
1
I
I J
L
.~
A
formed: +2·, -1/2· (+51., -13) j
unformed: see Table 2-2
(b) cross-section area
10' (3050)
(c) relative alignment

,&t££.~~.3.4ol,W"'_'lo.-K"'''-' It J ;I.rt"tr;.e.",:,,:,,~
according to the procedure set forth in ASTM El155-87. In most cases, a sophisticated in-
stnl ment must be used that can take the measurements and perform the calculations nec-
essary for determining the F-numbers. Although there is no direct correlation, an FF50
roughly corresponds to a !i-in. (3.2-mm) gap under a 10-ft. straightedge. For other approx-
imate correlations, refer to Table 17-3.
For slabs on grade, the F-numbering system works well. However, to determine the F-
numbers, measurements must be taken within n hours of floor installation and, for sus-
pended slabs, before shoring and forms are removed. Therefore, for suspended slabs
specified levelness of a floor may be compromised when the floor deflects when the
shoring is removed and loads applied.
ACI 117 gives requirements for five classes of floors that can be specified: conven-
tional, moderately flat, flat, very flat, and super-flat. To meet the requirements for what-
ever class of floor is specified, the procedures of ASTM El155 must be followed and the
test results must meet certain overall flatness (SOFF) values and specified overall levelness
(SOFL ) values. In addition, minimum local values for flatness and levelness must also be
achieved. These are Ys of the SOFF and SOFL values. For example, a "conventional"" floor
must have an SOFF of 20 and an SOFL of 15, while a "super-flat" floor must have an SOFF
of 60 and an SOFL of 40. Refer to ACI 117 for detailed requirements.
Refer to Chapter 17 for more information on measurement methods and proposed pro-
tocols for both flat and sloped surface measurement.
Related Sections
1-3 Concrete Paving
2-8 Cast-in-Place Sectional Tolerances
17-5 Measuring Flatness, Level, and Smoothness

Description
Footings include continuous-spread footings and pad footings. They include foundations
poured in forms or directly against the soil. Anchor bolts (or anchor rods, as they are
called in the steel industry) are typically set by the foundation contractor.
Industry Standards
The allowable tolerances for horizontal deviation of anchor bolts from their specified lo-
cation depend on the size of the anchor bolt and are shown in Figure 2-5(a). These possi-
ble deviations are provided for by oversizing the hole diameters in steel base plates as
recommended by the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. Refer to Section 14-2.
Tolerances for footings include lateral and level alignment as well as cross-sectional di-
mensions and relative alignment of the length along the sides and tops. As shown in Fig-
ure 2-5(b), lateral alignment depends on the width of the footing in the least dimension
based on the center of gravity of the footing as specified and as cast. For unformed foot-
ings, the horizontal cross-sectional dimension depends on the specified width of the foot-
ing and is given in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Horizontal dimension tolerance for footings

cast against soil
Specified width of footing Tolerance, inches (mm)

2 ft (0.6 m) or less +3, -)1 (+ 76, -13)
Greater than 2 ft (0.6 m) +6, -)1 ( + 152, -13)
SOUTce: Compiled from infarmation inACI 117.
The sides and top of footings may slope at a rate not to exceed 1 in. in 10ft. (25 mm ill
3,050 mm), as shown in Figure 2-5(c). Note that thickness tolerance and the top eleva-
tion tolerance cannot be combined to give a tolerance greater than formed top surface tol-
erance.
Related Sections
2-6 Piers
2-1 7 Precast Pilings
14-2 Accumulated Steel Frame Tolerances
2-6 Piers
Description
This section includes drilled piers of three categories. Category A includes unreinforced
shafts extending through materials offering no or minimal lateral restraint, such as water,
normally consolidated organic soils, or soils that might liquefy during an earthquake. Cat-
egory B includes unreinforced shafts extending through materials offering lateral restraint,
which are soils other than those in Category A. Category C is for reinforced shafts.
Proposed revisions to ACI 117 would change the allowable deviation from plumb for
Category A piers to a maximum of 1.5 percent of the shaft length. Refer to the latest edi"
tion of ACI 117 for current tolerances.
Industry Standards
ACI 117-06, Specifications far Tolerances far Concrete Construction and Materials and
Tolerances for drilled piers are shown in Figure 2-6. Note that vertical alignment toler-
ances depend on either the diameter of the pier or its length depending on the category.
Related Sections
2-5 Footings
2-1 7 Precast Pilings
--
Figure 2-6 Piers
theoretical centerline
/ lateral alignment:
/ / lesser of 4.2% of 0
// or ±3" (76)
~~,JIiHL
I - ~ + 1" (25)
------V..,- 3" (76)
...J
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I ~
--'-_ _ _-' ....-~_,..... ---_~~ bottom of pier
,
I, Category A: max. 12.5% of 0
--l I-- Category B: max. 1.5% of L
Category C: max. 2% of L
piers 12" (305) or less: +3/8", -1/4" (+10, -6)

piers more than 12" (305): +1/2", -3/8" (+13, -10)
up to not over 3' (0.90 m)
piers over 3' (0.90 m): +1", -3/4" (+25, -19)
Figure 2-7 Cast-in-place plumb tolerances

heights 83'-4" (25.4 m) or less:
lesser of 0.3% of height or ± 1" (25)
1~
heights over 83'-4" (25.4 m): heights 83'-4" (25.4 m) or less:
lesser of 0.1 % of height or ±6" (152) lesser of 0.2% of height or ±112" (13)
-1r heights over 83'-4" (25.4 m),

lesser of 0.05% of height or ±3" (76)
. - + - - - - outside corner of exposed I
corner columns and control

joints exposed to view
grooves:
±1/8" (3.2) width 2" (51)
or less
±1/4" (6) width 2" to 12"
. (305)
- - - - - t o p of foundation
(a) cast columns, walls, and lines
---J f-- translation and rotation:

I I heights 100' (30 m) or less:
±2" (51) max.
heights over 100' (30 m):

±1/600 times height
with ±S" (152) maximum
relative alignment:
wall thickness: ±1/2" (13) per level
12" (300) or less:
+3/8" (10), -1/4" (6)
>12", <36"(910):
+ 1/2" (13), -3/8" (10)
over 36" (910):

+1" (25), -3/4" (19)
-base of structure
(b) Slip-formed elements

- Chapter 2: Concrete 35
-
2-7 Cast-in-Place Plumb Tolerances
Description
This section includes tolerances for both cast-in-place and vertically slip-formed ele-
ments, It includes visible elements, such as exposed columns, grooves, and expansion
joints, as well as plumb tolerances for concealed column edges, walls, and slab edges.
Industry Standards
Commentary (Detroit, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2006),
Vertical alignment tolerances (plumb) depend on the height of the structure above the
top of the foundation and the location of the line in question, These conditions are shown
in Figure 2-7(a). Note that the vertical tolerance for exterior comer columns and interior
lines also applies to the edges of concealed suspended slabs to which other building ele-
ments may be attached,
For slip-formed structures shown in Figure 2-7(b), rotation is the twisting of a structure
based on a fixed point at the base, while translation is the change in horizontal position
perpendicular to the original position of the structure at the base, The lateral alignment
tolerance of ±1 in, (25 mm) is between adjacent elements,
Related Sections
2--8 Cast-in-Place Sectional Tolerances
2-9 Cast-in-Place Concrete Elements in Plan

Description
This section includes dimensional tolerances for cast-in-place concrete elements. It in-
cludes elevation tolerances as well as cross-sectional tolerances for elements such as
columns, beams, walls, and slabs,
Industry Standards
The various sectional tolerances are shown diagrammatically in Figure 2-8, The level
alignment tolerance of ±}1 in, (13 mm) for lintels, sills, and parapets also applies to hori-
zontal grooves and other lines exposed to view, Offsets listed as Class A, B, C, and D are
for adjacent pieces of formwork facing material. Note that the level alignment of the top
surface of formed slabs and for other formed surfaces is measured before the removal of
shoring, There is no requirement for slabs on structural steel or precast concrete, The tol-
erance for a top of wall is ±X in, (19 mm),
For slabs on grade, the tolerance is -% in, (-10 mm) for the average of all samples and
-X in, (-19 mm) for an individual sample, The minimum number of samples that must be
taken is one per 10,000 ft,2 (929 m 2).
Figure 2-8 Cast-in-place sectional tolerances
see Sec. 2-7 for

vertical alignment
1j
I r 0 .1/2' (13)
offset:
class A:
class B:
class C:
class D:
+1/8" (3.2)
+1/4" (6)
+1/2" (13)
+1" (25)
j
1
1
L·
±3/4" (19) before

removal of shores ~---'----+--'
±1/2" (13) 0 1
1
1
1
1 +1",-1/2"
1 (+25, -13)
1
1
1 floor finishes,
±1/2" (13) 0:1 see Sec. 2-4
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
---------- ------
up to 12" (305~: +3/8"-1/4" (+10, -6)
over 12" (305) to 3' (0.90 m : +1/2", -3/8" (+13. -10)
over 3' (0.90 m: +1", -3/4" (+25, -19)
1 1
L ______ ..J
not to scale
Related Sections
>4 Concrete Slabs on Grade
7- 5 FOl)tings
2-7 Cast-in-Pbce Plumb Tolerances

Description
This section includes lateral dimensional tolerances for cast-in-place concrete construc-
tion. It includes location tolerances for elements such as columns and walls as well as
opening tolerances.
Industry Standards
Tolerances for lateral alignment of cast-in-place building elements are shown in Figure
2-9. The cross-section dimensions apply to columns, beams, piers, and walls.
Related Sections
2-8 Cast-in-Place Section Tolerances
2-10 Cast-in-Place Stairs

Description
The American Concrete Institute's tolerances for cast-in-place concrete only require ad-
jacent risers and treads to be within a listed tolerance. However, the International Build-
ing Code requires that the tolerance between the largest and smallest riser or tread cannot
exceed %in. (9.5 mm).
Industry Standards
International Building Code, 2006, Section 1009.3.2 (Country Club Hills, IL: Interna-
tional Code Council, Inc., 2003).
! Allowable Tolerances
Current ACI tolerances only give allowable variations in height and width between adja-
\ cent risers and treads, respectively, as shown in Figure 2-10. Previous versions of ACI 117
also limited the total rise in a t1ight of stairs to ±y,: in. (3.2 mm) and the total run to ±~ in.
)
i (6 mm), but these tolerances are no longer included as part of ACI 117. If the elevation
II
, of the top surfaces offormed slabs is ±X in. (19 mm), as stated in Section 2-8, there could
be a maximum difference of 1 )f, in. (38 mm) beyond what is shown on the drawings. This
could require riser heights to be adjusted to match actual Hoor-to-Hoor heights.
Figure 2-9 Cast-in-place concrete elements in plan
floor opening
I· +1·, -1/2·
(+25, -13)
.. I
±1/2· (13)
offset:
class A:
class B:
class C:
+1/8· (3.2) .
+1/4· (6)' .
+1/2" (13t.
class 0: +1· (25)
cross-sectional dimensions:
up to 12· (305): +318·-1/4· (+10,-6)
over 12" (305) to 3' (914): +1/2·, -318· (+13, -10)
over 3' (914·: +1·, -314" (+25, -19)
±1· (25)
+1·, -1/2"
(+25, -13)
±1· ±1/2· (13)
! openings 12· (305)
d(,
or smaller
sawcuts, joints, and

weakened plane
embedments
see Sec. 2-7 for plumb --~

tolerances of columns
not to scale
Figure 2-10 Cast-in-place stairs
±1/4" (6)
----------j
-----------------------
I
±3/16" (5) max.

between adjacent treads
! . . . . . !-
I
±3/16" (5) max.
between adjacent risers
see text
deviation from slope or

plane on stair tread from
back to nosing: ± 1/4" (6)
Related Sections
2-8 Cast-in-Place Section Tolerances
2-16 Precast Stairs
2-11 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete Panels

Description
Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete (GFRC) applies to products manufactured with a cement/
aggregate slurry reinforced with alkali-resistant glass fibers. GFRC panels are typically
LlSed for exterior cladding, column covers, and interior finish panels. They can be manu-
factured with or without a face mix of conventional concrete with decorative aggregates.
When a face mix is used GFRC panels have the same appearance as standard precast con-
crete panels. Panels are nonnally %to ~ in. (10 to 13 mm) thick not including any exposed
aggregate or veneer finish, if used.
Industry Standards
MNL-128-0 1, Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels, 4th ed.
Most of the tolerances for glass-fiber-reinforced concrete panel manufacturing are shown
in Figure 2-11. Where tolerances for thickness are shown, increased tolerances should be
allowed at a change in plane, a radius section, stiffening ribs, and similar cOl1StfLlction el-
ements. Generally, manufacturing tolerances can be cl1mpensClted for Juring erecri.m by
Figure 2-11 Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete panels
face of skin to back of steel edge return thickness:

stud or integral rib: ,..1/2",- 0 (+13, 0)
+3/S", -1/4" GFRC backing:
(+10, -6) +1/4", -0"
(+6, -0)
facing thickness:
+1IS" , -0"
(+3, -0)
+1/2", -0
(+13, -0)
variation from
square: 1/S" per 6'
or 1/4" total,
whichever is greater
(3 mm per 2 m
or 6 mm total)
length:
10' (3m) or under: ±1/S" (3)
over 10' (3 m): ±1/S" per 10'
(±3 mm per 3 m)
±1/4" (6) 1/4" (6) max.
stud frame vertical and

horizontal alignment: .
±1/4" in 10' (±6 mm in 3 m)
squareness of frame
width: same tolerances (difference in diagonals):
as length ±3/S" (10)
stud frame size: ±3/S" (10)

--
----- Chapter 2: Concrete 41
U1a k
',ng •'Ill]' ustments in the clearance space, and joints and by forcing out minor variations
in bow and warpage during attachment of the panel to the supporting framework, See the
Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels for a complete listing and ,if
discussion of GFRC panel tolerances.
Related Sections
2-28 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete Panel Erection
2-12 Architectural Precast Concrete Panels

Description
This section includes tolerances for plant-cast and precast prestressed concrete panels
commonly used as exterior cladding. The tolerances shown are some of the most common
with which architects are concerned. Manufacturing tolerances (sometimes referred to as
product tolerances) must be coordinated with erection tolerances and tolerances for other
building systems for a successful project. During construction, one surface is usually desig-
nated as the primary control surface, the location of which is controlled during erection.
The product tolerances given in this section are not additive to the erection tolerances of
the primary control surfaces. However, product tolerances are additive to secondary con-
trol surface erection tolerances. " I
"
Industry Standards
MNL 135-00, Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction
(Chicago: Precast/prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
Some of the primary casting tolerances for flat panels are shown in Figure 2-12. Other tol-
erances exist for items such as haunch dimensions and positions, hidden blockouts, and
other inserts. Refer to Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction
for a complete listing. The bowing tolerances refer to the overall out-of-planeness that
can occur in one direction along a length of panel or in two directions. Warping, on the
other hand, refers to the variation of one corner from adjacent corners. The difference be-
tween diagonals applies to major openings as well as the panel itself.
Related Sections
2-13 Precast Ribbed Wall Panels
2-14 Precast Insulated Wall Panels
2-26 Precast Structural Wall Panel Erection
2-27 Precast Architectural Wall Panel Erection
2-30 TIlt-Up Concrete Panels
Chapter 13 Precast Concrete Systems
Figure 2-12 Architectural Precast Concrete Panels
panel face alignment:

±1/4" (6)
joint width:
--11~) 1 jog between exposed edges: ±1/4" (6) max.

, between nonexposed edges: ±1/2", (13)
-
±1/4" (6)
•
\ I
\ I
\ ±1/S" (3) I
~ flashing reglet \ I
\ I
<0
~ 1 .. ±1/4" (6) _I ~ichitectural I
I
~
,.... /
I
I
-H I- features and I
rustications I
\ I
panel \ I
opening <0 \ I
~
\ I
I panel dimensions
--'-- ---- ---1- ~
,....
\
\ I
when exp osed to view:
, \ I
-H I i
\ under 10 : ±1/S"
I, \
\ I
I
(under 3 m): {±3} .
\ I
I I-
X 10' to 20': +1IS" ,·311
I, I
I
I \
\
\
(3 m to 6 m): (+3, -5)
.. '. - .
I ±1/2" (13)
I
I \
\
20' to 40': ±1/4"·
(6 m to 12 m): (±6)
±1/4" (6) i I
I \
\
3
I , I \
I \ ea. add. 10' over 4O~: ±1/16"
±1/f (13) I
/ \ (ea. add. 3 mover 12 m): (±1.5 per 3
I \
-6. sleeve I
I
I
I
I \
\
. ""-- inserts I /difference betweeri\
I I two diagonals \
I
I / ±1/S" per 6' or ±1/2" \
±111(2~ /D I
I
I
I
I
/
I total, whichever is
greater
(±3 per 1S30 or 13)
\
\
\
-'-
V
weld plates
--iF
joint taper:
1/4" (6) over 10' (3 m) length
3IS" (9) maximum panel thickness:
+1/4", -1/S- ..
(+6; -3)
. ". panel dim. ;
bowing: ± 360F'c ~ > • > > •
max, 1" (2S} .

not to scale
warping:
1/16" per foot of distance from
nearest adjacent comer
(1.5 mm per 300 mm)

Description
This section includes tolerances for plant-cast and site-cast precast and precast, pre-
messed concrete ribbed wall panels. These are similar to double tees but have a slightly
different configuration.
Manufacturing tolerances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) must be coor-
dinated with erection tolerances and tolerances for other building systems for a successful
l'roject. During construction, one surface is usually designated as the primary control sur-
bee, the location of which is controlled during erection. The product tolerances given in
this section are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary control surfaces.
However, product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface erection tolerances.
Industry Standards
Many of the tolerances for ribbed wall panels are shown in Figure 2-13. Refer to Tolerance
Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
The variation from end squareness is ±% in. per 12 in. (±3 mm per 300 mm). Bowing
is limited to the length of the member divided by 360. Differential bowing between adja-
cent panels of the same design is limited to ±J1 in. (13 mm). Warping cannot exceed 716 in.
per ft. (1.5 mm per 300 mm) of the distance from the nearest adjacent comer. The local
smoothness of any surface is ±X in. per 10 ft. (6 mm per 3 m).
The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of plates as well as tendon location is ±X
in. (6 mm). Inserts for structural connections are located within ±J1 in. (13 mm).
Related Sections
2-20 Prestressed Double Tees

Description
This section includes tolerances for multi-wythe wall panels used in single-story struc-
tures. The manufacturing tolerances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) shown
here must be coordinated with erection tolerances and tolerances for other building sys-
tems for a successful project. During construction, one surface is usually designated as the
primary control surface, the location of which is controlled during erection. The product
tolerances given in this section are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary
control surfaces. However, product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface
erection tolerances.
Figure 2-13 Precast ribbed wall panels
flange squareness: - - - - - - ,
±1/S" per 12" width, ±1/2" max.
(±3 mm per 300 mm width, ±13 mm max.)
±1/4" (6)
finished opening: ±1/2" (13)
rough opening: ±1" (25)
+1/4" (6F
-1/S" (-3)r~
sweep: . \ c;,
up to 40' (12 m): ±1/4" (6};4~
over 40' (12 m): ±3/S" (10h
±1/4" (6)
' - - - - flashing reglet ±1/4" (6)
, ---l! 1--±1/S" (3)

±1/S" (3)! ±1/S" (3) !
Industry Standards
Many of the tolerances for insulated wall panels are shown in Figure 2-14. Refer to To ,,:~
ance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
The variation from end squareness is ±~ in. per 12 in. (±3 mm per 300 mm), Bo:w:'~
is limited to the length of the member divided by 360. Differential bowing betWee~~dil.
cent panels of the same design is limited to ±~ in. (13 mm). Warping cannot exceed ~i'~k
per ft. (1.5 mm per 300 mm) of the distance from the nearest adjacent corner. The I' .' .
smoothness of any surface is ±X in. per 10 ft. (6 mm per 3 m). ',~
The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of plates as well as tendon location is ~.
in. (6 mm). Inserts for structural connections are located within ±~ in. (13 m m ) . '
Related Sections
r
-----------------------------------------------------------~------------~
Figure 2-14 Precast insulated wall panels
squareness· \
±1/8" per 12", ±1/2" max.
(±3 mm per 300 mm, 13 max.) I
t t
- r -_ _-r-_L
-------------1-
,,.
!
±1/4" (6) I
I
~. _~~I================~====~
I
I flashing reglet/
tf ±1" (25) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
------f-t----
\
tr v
tI sweep:
I... ±1/2" (13) _I ±1/2" (13)
\ ±1/8" per 20', ±3/8" max.

I (±3 mm per 6 m, ±10 max.)
r --- '--
I
I
I architectural feature",
±1/8" (3)
,.:
:;:==== ~::==============l
"-
I
I
I
I
I
I embedments,
±1/8" (3)
--- I~--8-------8
±1" (25) ,/V
-'" '"'" wythe
'-------------............ thickness:
V
l
T~------~~~--~~I~
±1/4" (6) I ~
±3/8" (10)
Voverall depth:
±1/4" (6)
Figure 2-15 Hollow-core slabs
±1/4" (6)
embedment
elevation end squareness:

±1/S" per 12",112" max.
(±3 mm per 300 mm, 13
- - centerline of blockout
L .....~,.......
±1/4" (6) . . . . . . . .W ......~~_-L_
t plan end squareness:

±112" (13)
length .
bow = 360 maximum
2-15 Hollow-Core Slabs

Description
This section includes tolerances for cored slabs used for floor and roof construction. Man-
ufacturing tolerances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) must be coordinated
with erection tolerances and tolerances for other building systems for a successful project.
During construction, one surface is usually designated as the primary control surface, the
location of which is controlled during erection. The product tolerances given in this sec-
tion are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary control surfaces. However,
product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface erection tolerances.
Industry Standards
Many of the tolerances for hollow-core slabs are shown in Figure 2-15. Refer to Tolerance
Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
The variation from end squareness is ±~ in. (13 mm). When differential camber be-
tween adjacent members of the same design is critical, the amount of tolerance should be
verified with the producer. The local smoothness of any surface is ±X in. in 10 ft. (6 mm
per 3 m). However, this does not apply to the top deck surface that is to receive a topping
or other visually concealed surface. The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of plates is
±14 in. (6 mm).
Related Sections
2-18 Prestressed Concrete Beams
2-25 Precast Floor and Roof Member Erection
2-16 Precast Stairs

Description
Precast stairs may be part of a larger precast building or may be incorporated into a cast-
in-place concrete structure or a composite structure of steel and concrete. The applicable
fabrication and erection tolerances of the base structure must be coordinated with the tol-
erances in this section to ensure that code maximums for variance of riser heights are not
exceeded.
Industry Standards
II Allowable Tolerances
f Overall tolerances and individual step tolerances are shown in Figure 2-16. In addition,
t
r
the maximum difference between two risers is ±J4 in. (6 mm). These step tolerances are
Within the Uniform Building Code's requirement that the largest tread run (or riser height)
Within any flight not exceed the smallest tread (or riser) by more than %in. (10 mm).
Figure 2-16 Precast stairs
±1/2" (13)
skew:
±1/8" per 12", ±1/2" max.
iJ=-3 mm per 300 mm, 13 mm max.)
Thl: sqlldre tolerance for the entire assembly (the difference in length of the two diag-
l'i."
1
+~,~ in. per 6 ft. with a Yc-in. maximum (±6 mm per 1.8 meters, with a 13-mm max-
'11,,) is, -
1Illl1m \':lri,mcc), The position uf inserts for structural connections must fall within Y; in.
I ll~ III In } l)f the specified locatiun.
Related Sections
>10 Cast-ill-Place Stairs
~-2 5 Precast floor and Roof Member Erection
Ch;w tcr 13 Precast Concrete Systems
2-17 Precast Pilings

Description
This section includes tolerances for both solid and hollow pilings. The dimensions illus-
tfitted are for round-, square-, and octagonal-shaped pilings.
Industry Standards
The primary tolerances are shown in Figure 2-17. Note that the length tolerance of ± 1 in.
(25 mm) is smaller than is often necessary. In many instances, a tolerance of +6 in. (150
mm) and -2 in. (50 mm) is acceptable.
For hollow pilings, the wall thickness has a tolerance of +~ in. and ->{ in. (plus 13 mm,
minus 6 mm). Smoothness tolerance is ±>{ in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3 meters).
Related Sections
2-5 Footings
2-6 Piers

Description
This section includes tolerances for rectangular, T-shaped, and L-shaped beams. Manufac-
turing tolerances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) must be coordinated with
erection tolerances and tolerances for other building systems for a successful project. Dur-
ing construction, one surface is usually designated as the primary control surface, the lo-
cation of which is controlled during erection. The product tolerances given in this section
;lrc not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary control surfaces. However, prod-
uct tolerances are additive to secondary control surface erection tolerances.
Industry Standards
\E\L 135-00, Tolerance Manual (OT Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction
(Chic3g0: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
Figure 2-17 Precast pilings
±1/4" per 12", 1/2" max.

(±6 mm per 300 mm, 13 max.) rL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ±1' (25)
I
I
I
±1/S" per 10'-----1
(±3 mm per 3 m) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.. .
.,
~~
.,'
~~,
trt'Figure 2-18 Prestressed concrete beams
stem width ±1/4" (6)
length of
element
±3/4" (19)
_---;?~,J<-__;J'4-+- embedment
/
/
/
/'" sweep:
/ up to 40' (12 m): ±1/4" (6)
/ 40' to 60' (12 m to 18 m): ±1/2" (13)
over 60' (18 m): ±5/8" (16)
t,-
variation from specified camber:
±1/8" per 10', 3/4" max.
(±3 mm per 3 m, ±19 max.)
I~ .114" (6) J tendons:

individual ±1/4" (6)
bundled ±1/2" (13)
,j
J
,
'~' _Allowable Tolerances
" .;..::M~y of the tolerances for precast beams are shown in Figure 2-18. Refer to Tolerance
~~.J!¥Ual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
C:4:",_The variation from end squareness is ±~ in. per 12 in. of depth, with a !1-in. maximum
~,~:.{~-rnm per 300 mm of depth, 13-mm maximum). Camber variation from the design cam-
: ::':~riS ±~ in. per 10 ft., with a ~-in. maximum (±3 mm per 3 meters, with a 19-mm maxi-
mum). However, for members with a span-to-depth ratio approaching or exceeding 30,
this camber tolerance may not apply. If camber tolerances must be controlled with such
span-to-depth ratios premium production measures may be required. Specific job require-
ments should be verified with the producer.
Plate position tolerance is ±1 in. (25 mm) for miscellaneous plates and!1 in. (13 mm)
for bearing plates. The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of miscellaneous plates is ±X
in. (6 rom), and for bearing plates it is ±~ in. (3 mm). Inserts for structural connections
are located within ±!1 in. (13 mm).
Smoothness of any surface must be within X in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3 meters), except
that surface requirements do not apply to top surfaces left rough to receive a topping.
_ _ _III" .nnrrlll
Figure 2-19 Prestressed single tees
flange squareness:
±1/8" per 12" width, ±1/2" max.
±1/4" (6)
±1- (25)
h o f I f - - - - - - - sweep:
up to 40' (12 m): ±1/4" (6)
40' to 60' (12 m to 18 m): ±3/8" (10)
over 60' (over 18 m): ±1/2" (13)
Related Sections
, I') I"'l,,;rre,;;.cd Single Tees
l l'rl',;rrc,~cJ Duuhle Tee,s
: ~ I l'rl'L':I,t Culumns
: ~i l'rl'L':I~r B~':lln ~1nJ Spandrel Erection
: '!l;I!'rl'I' I) PrecJst Concrete Systems
2-19 Prestressed Single Tees

Description
Thi' ,cction includes tlllerances for single tees as commonly used for Hoor and roof struc-
fUrl', The manufacturing tolerances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) shown
hlTC must he coordinated with erection tolerances and tolerances for other building sys-
tL'IllO for a successful project, During construction, one surface is usually designated as the
['rill1:1ry control surface, the location of which is controlled during erection, The product
t"bances given in this section are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary
Cllntrol surfaces, However, product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface
tn:ction tolerances.
Industry Standards
~INL 135-00, Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete
Construction(Chicago: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
~bny of the tolerances for single tees are shown in Figure 2-19, Refer to Tolerance Manual
fiJr Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
The variation from end squareness is ±~ in. per 12 in. of depth, with a Y!-in. maximum
(±3 mm per 300 mm of depth, 13-mm maximum) for depths greater than 24 in. (600 mm).
Fnrdepths 24 in, (600 mm) or less, the end square ness tolerance is ±JI in. (±6 mm). Cam-
"cr variation from the design camber is ±Y4 in. per 10 ft., with a 1;-in. maximum (±6 mm
rtr 3 meters, \vith a 19-mm maximum), However, for members with a span-to-depth ratio,
approaching or exceeding 30, this camber tolerance may not apply. If camber tolerances
must be controlled with such span-to-depth ratios premium production measures may be
rcquired. Specific job requirements should be verified with the producer. Differential cam-
f,n he tween adjacent members of the same design is ±Y.; in. per 10 ft., with a JI-in. maxi-
mum (6 mm per 3 meters, 19-mm maximum).
Plate position tolerance is ±1 in. (25 mm) for miscellaneous plates and Y2 in. (13 mm)
i, 'r hearing plates, The tolerance for the tipping and Hushness of miscellaneous plates is ±Y.
in, (6 mm), and for bearing plates it is ±V- in. (3 mm), Inserts for structural connections
.Ire located within ±)~ in, (13 mm),
Sm,)othnc:ss (If any surface must be within "" in, in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3 meters), except
thdt surface re'lulrement.; do not apply to tl>p surfaces left rough to receive a topping.
Related Sections
2-1," Prestrcosed Concrete Beams
2-22 Prc<,trc.c.,cd r~('lIHe Tf't'<
2-: 5 Prl;C<I.,[ Fbx ,'Illd Rc,,,f Mem].er Erectic'H
U1;lfTcr 13 [-'rc'C8,t ("'l1cree Sv;tenl'
Figure 2-20 Prestressed double tees
flange squareness:
±1/8" per 12" width, ±1/2" max.
±1/4" (6)
+1/4", -1/8"
/. " (+6, -3)
"
" ""
~"
"" sweep:
/ up to 40' (12 m): ±1/4" ~6) ~.
,,/ 40' to 60' (12 m to 18 m): ±318" 10,),:.
over 60' (over 18 m): ±1/2" 13)
--l ~/8" (3)
±1/4" (6)

Description
This section includes tolerances for double tees as commonly used for floor and roof struc-
tures. The manufacturing tolerances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) shown
here must be coordinated with erection tolerances and tolerances for other building sys-
tems for a successful project. During construction, one surface is usually designated as the
primary control surface, the location of which is controlled during erection. The product
tolerances given in this section are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary
control surfaces. However, product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface
Industry Standards
i
Many of the tolerances for double tees are shown in Figure 2-20. Refer to Tolerance Man-
ual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
The variation from end squareness is ±J.il in. per 12 in. of depth, with a ~-in. maximum
(±3 mm per 300 mm of depth, 13-mm maximum) for depths greater than 24 in. (600 mm).
For depths 24 in. (600 mm) or less the end squareness tolerance is ±X in. (±6 mm). Cam-
ber variation from the design camber is ±X in. per 10 ft., with a ~-in. maximum (±6 mm
per 3 meters, with a 19-mm maximum). However, for members with a span-to-depth ratio I
,1 '
approaching or exceeding 30, this camber tolerance may not apply. If camber tolerances
must be controlled with such span-to-depth ratios, premium production measures may be
required. Specific job requirements should be verified with the producer. Differential cam-
ber between adjacent members of the same design is ±X in. per 10 ft., with a ~-in. maxi-
mum (6 mm per 3 meters, 19-mm maximum).
Plate position tolerance is ±1 in. (25 mm) for miscellaneous plates and ~ in. (13 mm)
for bearing plates. The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of miscellaneous plates is ±X
in. (6 mm), and for bearing plates it is ±J.il in. (3 mm). Inserts for structural connections
are located within ±~ in. (13 mm).
Smoothness of any surface must be within X in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3 meters), except
that surface requirements do not apply to top surfaces left rough to receive a topping.
Related Sections
Figure 2-21 Precast columns
end squareness:
--- _ _ _-L--
t ± 1IS" per 12", 3IS" max.
(±3 mm per 300 mm, 10 max.)
±1/4" (6)
±1/4" (6)
bearing surface slope:

±1/S" per 12", 3IS" max.
±1/2" (13) (±3 mm per 300 mm, 10 mm max.)
±1/4" (6)
sweep:
±1/S" per 10', ±1/2" max.
(±3 mm per 3 m, ±13 max.)
/ baseplate: ±1/4" (6)

/ overall dimensions
1 . -_ _.....1
I.. ~I
±1/4" (6)
2-21 Precast Columns

Description
Thi, section includes tolerances for precast concrete columns commonly used to support
f'reclst beams or other structural members. The manufacturing tolerances shown here
must he cOLlrdinated with erection tolerances and tolerances for other building systems for
,1 successful project. During construction, one surface is usually designated as the primary
(lll1twl surface, the location of which is controlled during erection. The product toler-
;lnces given in this section are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary con-
trol surfaces. However, product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface
Industry Standards
Many of the tolerances for precast columns are shown in Figure 2-21. Refer to Tolerance
Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing. Note that
the tolerances for the size and position of haunches are not cumulative. Plate position tol-
erance is ±1 in. (25 mm). The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of plates is ±X in. (6
mm). Inserts for structural connections are located within ±~ in. (13 mm). Smoothness of
any surface must be within X in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3 meters), except that surface require-
ments do not apply to visually concealed surfaces.
Related Sections
2-23 Precast Column Erection
Chapter 13 Precast Concrete Systems.
2-22 Precast Tee Joists or Keystone Joists

Description
This section includes tolerances for tee joists and keystone joists. The manufacturing tol-
erances (sometimes referred to as product tolerances) shown here must be coordinated
with erection tolerances and tolerances for other bUilding systems for a successful project.
During construction, one surface is usually designated as the primary control surface, the
location of which is controlled during erection. The product tolerances given in this sec-
tion are not additive to the erection tolerances of the primary control surfaces. However,
product tolerances are additive to secondary control surface erection tolerances.
Industry Standards
lV/any of the tolerances for tee and keystone joists are shown in Figure 2-22. Refer to Tol-
erance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for a complete listing.
The variation from end squareness is ±Y. in. per 12 in., with a V,-in. maximum (±6 mm
Figure 2-22 Precast tee joists or keystone joists
squareness:
±1/4' per 12', 112' max,
(±6 mm per 300 mm, 13 max,)
' - - - - - sweep: ,.
up to 40' (12 m): ±318' (10H
40' to 60' (12 m to 18 m): ±5/8& (16r~;
over 60' (18 m): ±314' (19t'
±1' (25) vertical and

horizontal planes
±1/8' (3)
(a) precast tee joist
1/4' (6)
~~ ±1/8' (3)
tendons:
individual ±1/4" (6)
bundled ±1/2' (13)
(b) precast keystone joist

'L'r ,0v mill of depth, 13-mm maximum). Camber variation from the design camber is ±Y.
I111. I'cr Iv ft., with a X-in/ maximum (±6 mm per 3 m, with a 19-mm maximum). However,
t~'r 1llt'll1lwrs with a span-to-depth ratio approaching or exceeding 30, this camber toler-
.IIlCL' may not apply. If camber tolerances must be controlled with such span-to-depth ra-
ri,'" premium production measures may be required. Specific job requirements should be
I"crifieJ with the producer. For some types of combined precast and cast-in-place con-
,rructinn, these tolerances may not be required.
Plate position tulerance is ± 1 in. (25 mOl) for miscellaneous plates and l1 in. (13 mm)
t;,r bt.:aring plates. The tolerance for the tipping and flushness of miscellaneous plates is ±Y.
in. (6 mm), and for bearing plates it is ±y, in, (3 mm). Inserts for structural connections
~Ire located within ±l1 in. (13 mm).
Smoothness of any surface must be within Y. in. in 10 ft .. (6 mm in 3 meters), except
that surface requirements do nut apply to top surfaces left rough to receive a topping.
Related Sections
2-24 Precast Beam and Spandrel Erection
Chapter 13 Precast Concrete Systems.

Description
The tolerances given in this section are recommended tolerances rather than strict stan-
dards. They are reasonable variations that can be expected in most situations. However,
because precast erection is subject to many variables and some situations are visually more
critical than others, tolerances should be reviewed with the precast supplier before final-
izing specifications. To minimize costs, the tolerances in this section can be increased
where the members will be covered with other finish material or in structures where visual
appearance is not critical.
The erection tolerances shown in this section must be coordinated with manufactur-
ing tolerances and tolerances for other building systems to which the precast system is
connected. The erection tolerances are based on the primary control surfaces, which are
tbe surfaces that are controlled during erection. The erection tolerances are not additive
to the product tolerances given in previous sections. However, erection tolerances are ad-
ditive to the product tolerances for secondary control surfaces.
TIle erection tolerances shown in this section are primarily for precast element to pre-
cast element.
Industry Standards
(Chicago; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
Tolerances for precast column erection are shown in Figure 2-23. Note that the tolerance
in rlacement from the theuretical building grid line is for the plan location so it applies to
twu -:lireLtions. In addition. the maximum jog in the alignment of matching edges is ±Y. in.
(6 mIll I t(:lf architectural expo,;ecl edges and ±:: ill. (U mm) fnr \ i~ually non-critical edges.
Figure 2-23 Precast column erection
maximum ±1" (25) for maximum

height of structure of 100' (30 m)
II!
+1/4", -1/2
(+6, -13)
bearing haunch
+1/4", -1/2
10' (3 m) (+6, -13)
'::::::z=~~~c=--'---L.."iC elevation datum

,
r--
!, architectural
structural applications: ±1/2" (13)
applications: ±3/S" (9)
theoretical buildIng grid line --J
,
o
p
,
I:
:I
~
i· Related Sections
tI 2-24 Precast Beam and Spandrel Erection

t, Description
~ The tolerances given in this section are recommended tolerances rather than strict stan-
~ dards for beam erection, They are reasonable variations that can be expected in most sit-
~ uations, However, because precast erection is subject to many variables and some
t situations are visually more critical than others, tolerances should be reviewed with the
I
t precast supplier before finalizing specifications, To minimize costs, the tolerances in this
section can be increased where the members will be covered with other finish material or
in structures where visual appearance is not criticaL
t The erection tolerances shown in this section must be coordinated with manufactur-
! ing tolerances and tolerances for other building systems to which the precast system is
t connected, The erection tolerances are based on the primary control surfaces, which are
t the surfaces that are controlled during erection, The erection tolerances are not additive
to the product tolerances given in previous sections, However, erection tolerances are ad-
ditive to the product tolerances for secondary control surfaces,
The erection tolerances shown in this section apply to precast elements attached to
other precast elements, to cast-in-place concrete or masonry, and to steel members,
Industry Standards
(Chicago: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000),
Tolerances for beam erection are shown in Figure 2-24, When a precast beam is placed on
a steel column, the I-in, (2S-mm) tolerance still applies, but it is measured from the cen-
terline of the steel support structure, Joint width is the width of the space between ends of
abutting members,
Related Sections
2-18 Precast Concrete Beams
.. ~.
2-21 Precast Columns "
'.:"
Chapter 13 Precast Concrete Systems 'I'
Figure 2-24 Precast beam and spandrel erection

,I
! bearing width: ±1/2· (13)
bearing area below
±1/4· (6): architectural joints

r column grid
±1/2· (13): exposed structural

joint not visually critical
±314· (19): hidden joint
----i(J
±1/4· (6): architectural edges
±1/2· (13): visually noncritical edges
(a) plan view
±1/S· per 12·, 1/2·

(±3 mm per 300 mm, 13 max.)
max~ I r
for inverted tee beam: ±314" (19)
+1/4.'~1/2"
+6, -13 . .
( ) deSign elevation
I (primary horizontal
I control surface)
precast, cast-in-place,
or steel column
. - . - - - - - column grid line datum
(b) section view

I,
~
t 2-25 Precast Floor and Roof Member Erection
t Description
1b.e tolerances given in this section are recommended tolerances rather than strict stan-
, dards for floor and roof members. They are reasonable variations that can be expected in
most situations. However, because precast erection is subject to many variables and some
f situations are visually more critical than others, tolerances should be reviewed with the
! precast supplier before finalizing specifications. To minimize costs, the tolerances in this
t section can be increased where the members will be covered with other finish material or
; in structures where visual appearance is not critical.
The erection tolerances shown in this section must be coordinated with manufactur- I
ing tolerances and tolerances for other building systems to which the precast system is ,.1
the surfaces that are controlled during erection. The erection tolerances are not additive
I ditive to the product tolerances for secondary control surfaces.
t The erection tolerances shown in this section apply to precast elements attached to
other precast elements, to cast-in-place concrete or masonry, and to steel members.
Industry Standards
(Chicago; Precast/prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
, Tolerances for floor and roof members are shown in Figure 2-25. When a precast floor or
roof member is placed on a steel beam, the I-in. (25-mm) tolerance from the end of the
member to the building grid still applies, but it is measured from the centerline of the steel
I
support structure. When hollow-core slabs are used, the differential bottom elevation of
exposed slabs is ±X in. (96 mm). In addition, the bearing length (in the direction of the ;1
floor or roof member span) is ±Y4 in. (19 mm) and the bearing width is ±~ in. (13 mm).
Related Sections

Description
The tolerances given in this section are recommended tolerances rather than strict stan-
dards. They are reasonable variations that can be expected in most situations. However,
because precast erection is subject to many variables and some situations are visually more
critical than others, tolerances should be reviewed with the precast supplier before final-
izing specifications. To minimize costs, the tolerances in this section can be increased
where the members will be covered with other finish material or in structures where visual
appearance is not critical.
Figure 2-25 Precast floor and roof member erection
,
I,
I,
I,
I
--~
I, --0
I,
(a) plan view
building ele'lfB.tll:m
~atur:.n-0
±3I4" (19): covered with topping;.

±1/4" (6) for bottom ±1/4" (6): pretopped tee/carpet'
of exposed hollow ±3I4" (19): on hollow core slab
core slabs untapped root
precast;· cast"in-place, note: applies tQ' el9\.iiafiO

or steel beafTl. , from
top etEnratl<lflS betwe'e
1-4---+--- column grid line datum adjacent members
(b) section view

···tolerances and tolerances for other building systems to which the precast system is
CoIUlecte,Q. The erection tolerances are based on the primary control surfaces, which are
surfaces that are controlled during erection. The erection tolerances are not additive
product tolerances given in previous sections. However, erection tolerances are ad-
to the product tolerances for secondary control surfaces.
erection tolerances shown in this section apply to precast elements attached to
precast elements, to cast-in-place concrete or masonry, and to steel members.
; dustry Standards
135-00, Tolerance Manual far Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction
\'-""~<'O~' Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2000).
for the erection of precast structural wall panels are shown in Figure 2-26.
leI1lIllCleS
a precast panel is placed on a steel beam, the ~-in. (13-mm) tolerance still applies,
. is measured from the centerline of the steel support structure. Tolerances for the dis-
from the building elevation datum to the top of the panel are listed in Table 2-3.
that the tolerances for the plan location and maximum plumb can increase It in. (3
per story for buildings over 100 ft. (30 meters) high up to a maximum out-of-plumb
2 in. (50 mm). Differential bowing between adjacent members of the same design is
to ±~ in. (13 mm).
retatea Sections
Footings
i Architectural Precast Concrete Panels
Precast Ribbed Wall Panels
Precast Insulated Wall Panels
13 Precast Concrete Systems
2-3 Tolerances for top elevation of structural wall

panels
Type of panel Tolerance, top elevation

from nominal top elevation
Exposed individual panel ±~" (13 mm)
Nonexposed individual panel ±?:I" (19mm)
Exposed panel relative to adjacent panel ±~" (13 mm)
Nonexposed panel relative to adjacent panel ±W'(19 mm)
Source: Compiled from MNL 135-00, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
Figure 2-26 Precast structural wall panel erection
---I , plan location from building grid datum:

~"(13); see text
.
plan location from building grid datum:
±1/2~ (13); see text
-1------0
±3IS" (9): exposed panels
±3I4" (19): nonexposed panels
,
(a) plan
,
,
jOint taper:
±3IS" In 10' (9 In 3 m)
, ± 1" (25) over height of
±1/2" (13) In length of
structure or 100' (30 m),
whichever is less
(see text)
"
--+-....., +1/4", -1/2"

(+6, -13)
±1/4"
top elevation
see Table 2-4
10' (3 m)
building --II Ljoint width:

±3IS" (9)
(governs over joint
elevation datum
(b) section (c) elevation

r.
,;
~
2-27 Precast Architectural Wall Panel

Erection
Description
The tolerances given in this section are for precast panels where appearance is a primary
concern. They are recommended tolerances rather than strict standards and include rea-
sonable variations that can be expected in most situations. However, because precast erec-
tion is subject to many variables and some situations are visually more critical than others,
tolerances should be reviewed with the precast supplier before finalizing specifications. To
minimize costs, the tolerances in this section can be increased where the members will be
covered with other finish material or in structures where visual appearance is not critical.
ing tolerances and tolerances for other building systems to which the precast system is
the surfaces that are controlled during erection. The erection tolerances are not additive
ditive to the product tolerances for secondary control surfaces.
The erection tolerances shown in this section apply to precast elements attached to
other precast elements, to cast-in-place concrete or masonry, and to steel members.
Industry Standards
MNL 135-00, Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction.
Tolerances for the erection of precast architectural wall panels are shown in Figure 2-27.
When a precast panel is placed on a steel beam, the X-in. (13-mm) tolerance still applies,
but it is measured from the centerline of the steel support structure. Tolerances for the dis-
tance from the building elevation datum to the top of the panel are listed in Table 2-4.
Note that the tolerances for the plan location and maximum plumb can increase %in. (3
mm) per story for buildings over 100 ft. (30 meters) high up to a maximum out-of-plumb
of 2 in. (50 mm). Differential bowing or camber between adjacent members of the same
design is limited to ±Y.\ in. (6 mm).
Table 2-4 Tolerances for top elevation of architectural wall

panels
Type of panel Tolerance, top elevation from

nominal top elevation
Exposed individual panel ±Y.!" (6 mm)
Nonexposed individual panel ±Y!" (13 mm)
Exposed panel relative to adjacent panel ±Y.!" (6 mm)
Nonexposed panel relative to adjacent panel ±W' (13 mm)
Source: Compiled from MNL 135-00, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
Figure 2-27 Precast architectural wall panel erection
,
I plan location from building grid datum:
i:1/2" (13); see text
plan location from building grid datum:

±1/2" (13); see text
~
-1------0
joint width:
(a) plan ±1/4" (9)
(governs over joint taper}
,I
I ± 1" (25) over height of
structure or 100' (30 m),
whichever is less 11
±1/4"
top elevation
see Table 2-5
10' (3 m) -+-~+1/4", -1/2"

(+6,-13)
building
elevation datum
(b) section (c) elevation
"'''"' ~ ~ ~~ - • "'" "'~~§~.. e._~....,_.i'~.h~jO,~;;;""':l-k~·' ,...1'""~';;'.J'~.~,,.,.,.~

,
,
Related Sections
1 .:; Flh)rings
~-12 .-\rchifl'ctIIlJI f'reccbt C\lncfete Panel.,
~ ,1:-: f'r,·,rre"ul C,,'nc'rde' Be:llll'
l 'h;q'tc'r II l'rec;bl C,lncrele Sv-;tem,
2-28 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete

Panel Erection
Description
C;!:bs-fiber-reinfl,rcecl concrete (GFRC) panels, described in Section 2-11, are normally
;lrtlChcd W a stiffening ~lssembly clf metal studs. The stiffeners are then attached to the
hlikling structure. As long as sufficient clearance and adequate adjustable fasteners are
pnlVided, GFRC panels can be installed to fairly tight tolerances.
Industry Standards
NINL-128-0 1, Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Rt!inforced Concrete Panels, 4th ed.
(Chicago: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 200 1).
Guideline tolerances for GFRC panels are shown in Figure 2-28. Because GFRC panels
have some flexibility, some of the bowing and warpage can be compensated for during in-
stallation. It is important that tolerances for the structural frame are stated in the specifi-
cations and held during constructicm in order w achieve the GFRC tolerances shovvn
here.
Clearances hetween the GFRC panels and the supporting structure are important and
should be maintained. At least 1 in. (25 mm) shuuld be maintained between a GFRC
panel and steel fireproofing, but I 1,\ in. (38 mm) is preferred. If no fireproofing is used, 1
i/_ to 2- in. (38- tn 51-mm) clelrance sh'luld be detailed in tall, irregular structures. For
precast concrete, 1 i;:-in. (38-mm) clearance is preferred with 1 in. (25 mm) as the mini-
mum. A c!earatlce of 2 in. (51 mm) bet\veen (iFRC panels and cast-in-place concrete is
preferred, with I \/ in. (38 mm) as the minimum. Clearance between columns and GFRC
covers should be at least 2 in. (51 mm) with 3 in. (76 mm preferred).
Related Sections
2-11 Glass-Fiber-ReintCmed Concrete Panels
2-29 Autoclaved Aerated Concrete

Description
A,Lit'lc!3\ed 3erated Ulncrt'te (.l,.A.C) I~ J precast. 1,)w-c1ensity. cementitiolls, manufac-
rure.J bllilJing prodllct made hv mixing ~'urtI3nd cemellt. lime, ~ilica sand ur recycled tly
;I,h, lI'ater. ancl aluminum I-'(""vder (Ir paste and p('uring the mixture intu J mc)ld, The re-
.Ieri, >n her'H",On rhi-' alulllll:um :m.:l CLlllCTde cause., micrc)~covi( buH,le, to !"rm, expand-
ill:..! rhe ,_c,nqert- w ahc'ut five rime' il;' criginiil ",:>iume. The cr.nxrete i~ cut to si:e ancl
ttlrm .11l.:! 'te;;!n·(lIlE'J ill ,I pre';~".Iri=ed ,':h;'IIllI'E'r
, .
Figure 2-28 Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete panel
--, rJoint taper: 1/4" In 10' (6 mm in 3 m)

318" (10) maximum
I
I
I
I comer warpage:
f
I 1/16" per ft. max.
I
I (5 mm per meter)
I 1/4" (6) total Installed between
I
I adjacent pan~s
'>
L
L
-- ~--differential bowing between
panels: 1/4" (6) maximum
panel bowing: U360

with maximum of 1" 5) (f
(a) elevation
---l !-- plumb:±1/4" (6) In 10'
I I maximum 1" (25) for
recommended minimum n-,._ _-'-o,--~---...r--7- of structure or 100' (30
vertical, horizontal, and whichever is less
lateral adjustment of
connections: 1" (25) t;::j For precast
100' (30 m) plumb
~~L----l
can increase at a rate
----------r-- , 1/8" (3) per story over

(30 m) to a max/mum.
of 2" (SO).
face width of joints;
±1/4" (6) panel less than 2()':
±3IS" (10) panel over 20'
I t
I
I o
_____________ ...JI
I
I
t ±1/4" (6) top ele\,atlcin
for Individual 8)¢I()Sj:ldi'
panel
: :i:1/4" (6)
clearance from structure
or fireproofing---see text
f-_ _---=-±-=-=.112.::;-"--..:(~1_23)~p:.::lan~l:.::.oca~ti~0::..:..n-=-=.fr-=.om:. :. :.-_ _ _ _-t For precast buildings over 100'

building grid datum tolerance from datum can ;.."""'",,.....
a rate of1/8" (3) per story over
(30 m) to a maximum of 2" (50);·~'"
(b) section
,.......
f
-- Chapter 2: Concrete 71
il
f Figure 2-29 Autoclaved aerated concrete

t-
~
i
f: 9
Q
:t1/8" (3)
"~:2":
±1/4" (6) in 20' (6.1 m)

--l~
(a) unit size (b) variation from plan location
plumb: level:
:t1/4" in 10',318" maximum ±1/4" in 20',1/2" max. in 49' or more
(±6 mm in 3 m, 10 mm maximum) (±6 mm in 6.1 m, 13 mm max. in 14.9 m)
I
I
I
I
I relative alignment
slope alignment: ±1/4" in 10' (6.4 mm in 3.05 m)
±1/4" in 10' ±1/2" (12.7) maximum
I
I (±6.4 mm in 3 m)
-I
4-1~
I
I
I
~
II
II
II
I 314" (19) envelope
: I in total height of wall (c) level alignment
~t--
(a) vertical alignment
.'
Figure 2-30 Tilt-up concrete panels :l

--------------------------------------------------------------,~
joint width:
up to 20': ±1/4"
(up to 6100): (±6)
ea. add. 10' over 20': ±1/S"

(ea. add 3050 over 6100): (±3)
cannot be increased or decreased
more than 50% of specified joint width
----j r- t alignment of joints· 1/4" (6) max.

±31S" (10) \
\
t I
I
\ I
""flashing reglet insert \ I
\ I
I
CD
I" ±1/4" (6).. , \
\
\
\ I
I
I
"'+l" -
\
\ I
I
\ I
I \ I
I
panel \ I
openings ..- \ I
I \ I
I !e- \ I
--- --'':+: }-'--t- ~ \ I
max. I , ~
\ I panel dimension:
+l \ I
1/S" (3) : I, \
\ I
I up to 20': ±1/4"
(up to 6100): (±6)
\ I
I, -
\I
1\
I \ 20' to 30': ±31S"
! I
I \
\
(6100 to 9140): (±10)
±1/4" (6) I, I
I \
\ ea. add. 10' over 30': ±1/S"
I I I \
I \ (ea. add 3050 over 9140): (±3)
I \
I \
I \
±31S" (10) I \
, I \
I
6 inserts / difference between\
I
\
\
I two diagonals \
/ ±1/S" per 6' or ±1/2" \
±1" (2~ /D I
I
I
I total, whichever is
greater
(±3 per 1S30 or 13)
\
\
\
\
!.V ------
~ maximum deflection of
weld plates, Joint tap er:
±1/4" (6) for up to 20': ±1/4"
tipping and (up to 61 (0): (±6) panel perimeter during
flushness pouring: 1/4" (6)
ea. add. 10' over 20': ±1/S"
(ea. add 3050 over 61(0): (±3)
max. for entire length: 31S" (10)
panel face alignment: ±1/4" (6)

measured at exterior face of
panel thickness: ±3116" (±5)
average variation through any
not to scale horizontal or vertical crolss-,sec::tio~1
, i'
Chapter 2: Concrete 73 ... \'
.. 'I
The resultant product can be used in non-load-bearing and load-bearing applications

;and is lightweight and fire-resistant, and has good insulation properties. It is commonly
formed into blocks and panels. Panels are available in thicknesses of 3 in. to 16 in. (76 mm
'to 403 mm), 24 in. (608 mm) wide, and up to 20 ft. (6.1 m) long. AAC can be cut with
conventional saws and tools.

ASTM C 1386-98, Standard Specification for Precast AutocIaved Aerated Concrete (PAAC)
Wall Construction Units (Philadelphia, PA: American Society for Testing and Materi-
als, 1998).
ASTM C 1555-03a, Standard Practice for AutocIaved Aerated Masonry (Philadelphia, PA:
American Society for Testing and Materials, 2003).
04225 Guide Specification, Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Units. (Autoclaved Aerated
Concrete Product Association, 2005. www.aacpa.org.
ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02, Specifications for Masonry Structures (Farming-
ton Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2002).
ASTM C 1386 requires that unit dimensions of width, height, and length shall not differ
by more than li in. (3 mm) from the specified dimensions. When field cutting is necessary,
ASTM C 1555 requires the tolerances also be ±~ in. (3 mm). Tolerances for larger wall
and roof planks should be verified with the individual manufacturer.
The guide specifications from the AACPA give three tolerances for laying up an AAC
wall:
• Maximum variation from plumb: X in. in 10 ft., 0 in.; not exceeding % in. in 20 ft.,
oin. (6 mm in 3 m; not exceeding 9 mm in 6.1 m)
• Maximum variation from level: X in. in 20 ft., 0 in.; not exceeding )1 in. in 49 ft., 0
in. or more (6 mm in 6.1 m; not exceeding 13 mm in 15 m)
• Maximum vqriation in linear building line from location indicated: X in. in 20 ft., 0
in. (6 mm in 6.1 m)
ASTM C 1555 requires that walls be laid according to the Specification for Masonry
;tructures (Part 3-Execution), ACI 530.1, which requires a slightly different level align-
nent, as shown in Figure 2-29(c).
~elated Sections
-3 Concrete Unit Masonry Construction
~-30 Tilt-Up Concrete Panels

)escription
lit-up construction involves casting concrete wall panels in a horizontal position on-site
nd tilting them into place after the concrete has cured. It is similar to plant-cast concrete
xcept that the panels are cast in the field. Casting and erection tolerances must be coor-
inated with tolerances for the structural frame and other building components, such as
'indows and doors. joints must be designed to allow for the given tolerances as well as ex-
ected building movement. . I
1I 1. '.
~
1
~
Industry Standards
The Tilt-Up Concrete Association's Guideline Specifications (Mount Vernon, IA: The Til
Up Concrete Association, 2002).
The tolerances shown in Figure 2-30 have been developed by the Tilt-Up Concrete fu
ciation (TCA) and are given in Section 1.6 of the TCA Guildeline Specifications. The
mensions of the finished panels, at the time of erection in the structure, must confom
these tolerances unless otherwise specified or approved by the project architect or er
neer. The tolerances for joint width, joint taper, and panel alignment must also confe
to these tolerances unless otherwise specified or approved by the project architect or I
gineer. Refer to the Guideline Specifications for acceptable surface defects for various gra
of site-cast panels.
Related Sections
Chapter 9
Finishes
9-1 Light-Gauge Framing for Gypsum

Wallboard
Description
This ,>ccrion includes tolerances for the installation of steel studs for the subsequent appli-
cation of gypsum wallboard. For gypsum wallboard partitions that are painted or finished
with wall covering, the tolerances shown here may not be required. However, if finish ma-
rerials ,uch as ceramic tile are used or finished clear opening dimensions are required, the
smaller t( ,lerances should he specified.
Industry Standards
GA-216, Application and Finishing ofG}'psum Board (Washington, DC: Gypsum Associa-
tion, 2004).
"Specification Guide for Cold-Formed Lightweight Steel Framing" in Lightweight Steel
Framing Systems Manual3rd ed. (Chicago; Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association,
1987).
ASThf C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
ASTM C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board (West
Conshohocken, PA: American Society fur Testing and Materials, 2004).
;\STM Cl 00 7, Swndard Specificiltion for Installation of Load Bearing (TranwCfse and Axial)
Steel Stllds and Related Accesscnies (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
Te,ting ~1lld tvlaterials, 2004).
The rec,)mmended tolerances from several sources are shown in Figure 9-1. ASTM C 1007
recommends that the plumbness and level of studs be within 1;,;"" of the span, or y,; in. in 10
ft. (3 111m in 3,050 mm). ASTM C840 requires that the attachment surface of any fram-
ing member shall not vary more than !< in. (3,2 111m) from the plane of the faces of adja-
CCnt framing members. The (Jypsum Association also states that adjacent fastening
'LIrtaces (,iti'aming urfurringshc)uld not vClry by more than ~< in. (1 mml.
Preli(Ju, 'pecit'ication guides from the tvletal Lath/Steel Framing Association
(\lL!5L\) Jlsc) recommellded the 'ame tolerances :'IS ASTM CI007. While AST~!
U ~::~ i, ,'nil' for load-f:,e:ll'ing stud.;, the \lL/SFA guideline~ were te'r all metal studs.
Th<, , m.Ter·lll it. WlerJl1Ce is consi,m'nt with the 5ub&trclte reCjuirements for other
ilr',ish lTIdtri:~h, such a~; "uTIle tlives ,J ,'<'TClInic tile 'Y.'tems.
:\:;; r \1 C 7 ).f l'equ irE'S that the sra, i Il.g ,..t ,(lid, ~ll1d Nher tr:1111mg members nut vary by
1~1,'i\: i j.!,:) , ill. ".< n:m) hc,m the required sracing ~m,l rlue the cUl11ular I\e e1ror Jues llc1t
19S Part 1: Construction Tolerances
Figure 9-1 Light-gauge framing for gypsum wallboard~
±1/S" (3)
from specified
spacing
J
4'
level:
±1/S" In 10'-0"
(3 in 3050)
fastening surfaces of.

adjacent framing
members:± 1/S" (3).
exceed ~ in. (3 mm). This is to ensure that the edge of a piece of gypsurit board
dent bearing on half of a stud for fastening.
If the tolerances shown here are not required and specified, it is more likely that a
in. (6 mm) tolerance will be observed in actual construction.
Related Sections
9-2 Wallboard Partitions, Ceilings, and Trim
9--4 Installation of Lath and Plaster
.---- Chapter 9: Finishes 199
9-2 Wallboard Partitions, Ceilings, and Trim

". Description
Although framing tolerances play an important part in the accuracy of gypsum wallboard
construction, in most cases the tolerance of the final finished surface is more important
. than the tolerance of the framing. Several factors can affect the final tolerance. For exam-
." ple, the use of trim pieces, such as comer bead or L-bead, usually extends the edges of fin-
ished wallboard out by about ~ in. (3 mm) or more because of the small ridge on the trim
piece. Shimming the drywall can improve or exaggerate the final surface position. Poor
fastening or slightly bent or warped framing can also affect installation.
Industry Standards
. ANSI Al 08.11 specification for Interior Installations of Cementitious Backer Units
(Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North American, Inc., 2005).
GA-216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board (Washington, DC: Gypsum
Association, 2004).
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. (Washington, DC: National
Association of Home Builders, 2005).
For noncritical applications, finished gypsum wallboard tolerances for metal stud framing
should be taken at ±~ in. (6 mm), as shown in Figure 9-2. This includes positioning of par-
titions based on the dimensions shown on the plans as well as plumbness of walls. This
takes into account the tolerances of framing (~ in. per 10 feet, or 3 mm in 3,050 mm, at
best) and the inaccuracies of fastening and using trim and shim pieces in the application
of the wallboard itself. ANSI Al 08.11 requires framing members of floor joists, wall studs,
. and ceiling joists for backer board for ceramic tile have a maximum variation from plane
of ±~ in. in 8 ft. (3 mm in 2,400 mm).
For wood framing, plumbness and positioning tolerances may be slightly greater be-
cause of the relatively rough nature of wood studs compared with the accurate manufac-
ture of steel studs. This is reflected in the larger tolerance of ±.% in. (9.5 mm) in any 32-in.
(813 mm) vertical measurement called for in the Residential Construction Performance
Guidelines. This translates to a tolerance of ± 1~ in. (19 mm) in an 8-ft. (29 mm in a 2,440-
mm) wall height, although this should be the extreme case.
For ceilings, the Gypsum Association requires that deflection not exceed ~40 of the
span at full design load, where L is the length of the span. However, this would result in a
l{-in. (I3-mm) drop in the middle of a 10-ft. span. In most cases a level tolerance of y,; in.
in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm) should be expected for ceilings.
If smaller tolerances are required for additional finish, such as ceramic tile, the required
smaller tolerance must be specifically stated in the contract documents.
Related Sections
9-1 Light-Gauge Framing for Gypsum Wallboard
9-4 Installation of Lath and Plaster
Figure 9-2 Wallboard partitions, ceilings, and trinl:,
±1/4" in 10'
(6 in 3050)
9-3 Glass-Reinforced Gypsum Prod

Description
Glass-reinforced gypsum products are factory-fabricated components made bya
process using high-strength, high-density; gypsum reinforced with continuous
glass fibers or chopped glass fiber strands. The prefabricated units are C1LU1\"1l'CU,,"~
framing or wood framing, suspended from structure, or otherwise fastened to a .
substrate.
Figure 9-3 Glass-reinforced gypsum products

-
verify with
manufacturer
I
I
I
verify with I
manufacturer I
I
I
I
I
I joint alignment:
±1/8" (3.2)
plumb: straightness:
~ ±1/8" in 10' ±1/4" in 25'
I (6 in 7620)
(3.2 in 3050)
verify with
manufacturer
(a) panel placement
~ ..
I~ JOint WI :
·dth
. ~ 3/8' (10) maximum
plane alignment:
±1/16" (1.6)
(b) panel joints

Industry Standards
Glass Reinforced Gypsum: A Guide. (St. Charles, IL: Ceilings and Interior Systems
Construction Association, 1990).
Tolerances for the fabrication of glass-reinforced gypsum products vary with the
the component, the final finish, the installed position of the component, and the
lighting. Tolerances for straightness, length, width, individual dimensions
overall length, radii, and squareness should be coordinated with the manUlraClturl~f'
clearly shown on the drawings. All comers should have a radiUlS between l16 in. (1.6 .
and ~ in. (3.2 mm) unless otherwise required by the design.
Erection tolerances recommended by the Ceilings and Interior Systems L.onsnuct
Association are shown in Figure 9-3.
Related Sections
9-9 AcoUlStical Ceiling Installation

Description
Lath and plaster includes both veneer plaster installations UlSing gypsum lath and;
dard, three-coat plaster work. BecaUlSe plaster work is site applied and subject to
of the plasterer, wide variations of tolerances are possible.
Industry Standards
ASTM C843, Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster (West
Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1999).
ASTM C926, Standard Specification for Application of Interior Portland Cement-based
ter (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005 ...
ASTM C1396/C1396, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board (West '-'V'.""UJU",,,,,,,,"""
Published tolerances for lath and plaster are shown in Figure 9-4. Tolerances for:
lath are given in ASTM C1396 (shown in Figure 9-4a), but these generally do
the finished surface. Although there are no tolerances for the plan dimeIlliion
the finished surface of plaster partitions, ASTM C843 does give tolerances for
ness for the veneer coats of gypsum plaster. ASTM C843 further requires that
sions and ridges greater than ~ in. (3.2 mm) be removed and that all depressionS
than ~ in. (6.4 mm) be filled level with the surface.
For standard, full-coat, portland cement plaster work, a subsurface plane ~r\I.~1'<I1r\ri'>
±~ in. in 10 ft. (2.1 mm/m) is standard as given in ASTM C926, although good olaste:rtt$
can level a surface to a smaller tolerance than this.
In general, because of possible variations with framing installation, the applicatioq
lath and trim, and the thickness of plaster, it seems reasonable to expect a tolerance of
in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm) or slightly more for most ·plaster work.
Figure 9-4 Installation of lath and plaster

-
+1/8" (3.2)
-3/16" (4~8) /
~Ji'-- veneer plaster:
±1/16" (1.6) base coat
' / ./ ± 1/16" (1.6) finish coat for
/ 1-component systems
± 1/32" to 1/16" (0.8 to 1.6) for
2-component systems
±1/4" (6.4)
"i '" gypsum lath thickness:

±1/32" (0.8) with local variations ±1/16" (1.6)
(a) gypsum veneer plaster on gypsum lath
' ......_»r~±1/4" in 10'

(6 in 3050)
(b) Portland cement-based plaster

As with gypsum wallboard, if tighter tolerances are required because of subsequent

ish materials, such as ceramic tile, or critical opening dimensions, the tolerances
be clearly stated in the contract documents.
Related Sections

Description
This section gives tolerances for glazed and unglazed ceramic tile (mosaic and
quarry tile, and paver tile. Ceramic mosaic tile is tile having a facial area less
wau tile is a glazed interior tile larger in area than 6 in. t. There are tolerances for
ufacture of tile but none for the level of the plane of the tile after installation.
pends on the level of the substrate, the warpage; the thickness, the size, and
tolerances of the tile itself; and the skill of the tile setter.
Industry Standards
ANSI AI08/AI18/A136, American National Standard for the Installation of
(Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North America, Inc., 1999).
ANSI AI37.!, Specifications for Ceramic Tile (Anderson, SC: Tile Council of NoJttl1:;;
2006 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation (Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North .
Table 9-1. The locations of these tolerances are shown in Figure 9-5(a) and 9..5(b).,:,
Table 9-1 Tile manufacturing tolerances
D, facial EW, warpage

dimension, along edges, DW, warpage W,
T, thickness, in percent of percent of on diagonal,
Tile (mm)
Unglazed ceramic mosaic ±0.030 (0.76) ±10 1.0 0.75
Glazed ceramic mosaic ±0.030 (0.76) ±10 1.0 0.75
Glazed wall tile ±0.031 (0.79) ±4.0 0.4 convex 0.5
0.3 concave
Unglazed quarry tile ±0.050 (1.3) ±4.0 1.5 1.0 1.0
Glazed quarry tile ±0.050 (1.3) ±4.0 1.5 1.0 1.0
Unglazed paver tile ±0.040 (1.0) ±3.0 1.0 0.75 1.0
Glazed paver tile ±0.040 (1.0) ±3.0 1.0 0.75 1.0
SouTce: Compiled from information in ANSI A137.1
-
Figure 9-5 Floor and wall tile
diagonal
warpage, OW
see Table 9-1
)
1 thickness, T
see Table 9-1
facial edge warpage, EW

dimension, 0 y-- see Table 9-1
see Table 9-1
(a) floor tile
see Table 9-1

for tolerances
(b) wall tile
B A wedging, W = A - B
see Table 9-1
(c) wedging
'I '~j,~~~ ,~~ ......-~~~~"".~, ....t,,os'4~ __ ,,,,,,.,~.,.~1'J!-,,,,""~~,",, .,.". ~~ ", ~'y 4<'; ~ ttl" ,,'..-... " .... ~~" p, ,~r~",,,,_,, ~..,.o~"" __ ... ~ __ "" ..."" __ ~~~~~~~
. t i
• I .
Table 9-2 Required tolerance for plane of substrate for tile installation
Tile installation
Portland cement mortar bed X in in 10 ft (6 mm in 3 m) X in in 10 ft (6 mm in 3 m)
Dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortar (thin set)a X in in 10 ft (6 mm in 3 m) X in in 10 ft (6 mm in 3 m)
Organic adhesive or epoxy adhesive X6 in in 3 ft (2 mm in 1 m)i no abrupt X in in 10 ft (6mm in 3 m)
irregularities more than \12 in (1 mm)
a Also includes chemical resistant water cleanable tile-setting and grouting epoxy, furan, and modified epoxy emulsion mortar installations.
Source: Compiled from information in ANSI A 108/A 118/A136.
The required tolerances for the plane of the surface over which tile is placed
marized in Table 9-2 and Figure 9-5.1 and based on ANSI 108.1 and the Tue
North America installation handbook.
Related Sections
Figure 9-5"1 Substrate tolerances for floor and wall ti
1/4" in 10' ~6 in 3 m} for Portland cement mortar beds ~

1/4" in 10' 3 In 3 m for thin set mortar beds
1/8" in 10' 3 in 3 m for organic or epoxy adhesive ..
-1
_____d____I____I____I_ -,_I____I____I
~~
1/4" in 10' ~6 in 3 m} for Portland cement mortar beds
1/4" in 10' 6 in 3 m for thin set mortar beds
1/16" In 3' 2 in 1 m for organiC or epoxy adhesive
-- ------------------
9-6 Terrazzo Flooring

Description
r:'rrd;~I) is a c()mpu~ite material poured in place consisring of '>tune chips in a matrix that
,',' ':l'nll'ntitiLlU~, trluJified cementitiou'), ur resinous. Terrazzo is normally installed over
'. 'lllTde subt1ol1rs, but it can be in,;talled over wood flol,r~ if deflection is controlled and
"
.1 "lI1el (ll~hi<)n system is used.
Industry Standards
.,/".:ijlci1tiol1s (Purcellville, VA: The National Terrazzo and tvlosaic A~sociation, Inc.,
~005).
(Purcellville, VA: The Natiunal Terra:zo and t-.losaic Association,
Fid[Jlc55 Toi<2rGllCt;'S
Inc., 2005). Available at www.ntma.com/05_flatness_tolerance.php.
::;tandard tolerances are shown in Figure 9-6. Because terrazzo is ground smooth after it
,ets, the level can usually be brought to within ±;..:; in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm).
\Vhen the pattem and design of the divider strips are critical for appearance, their loca-
tion tolerance should be verified with the terrazzo contractor.
For terrazzo floors, the subfloor must be within certain tolerances for a satisfactory in-
,tallation. Concrete subfloors must be level to within I;.j in. in 10 ft. (6 mill in 3,050 mm).
Related Sections
Figure 9-6 Terrazzo Flooring
- I divider strips
verify with terrazzo .?' /
installer /
,/,-
thickness
. ,:,ubfloor
t't'r'r"rl'tlllrl~~~~~~~~~
9-7 Wood Flooring

Description
Wood flooring includes standard strip, parquet, and laminated flooring as well as
ious types of cushioned wood flooring systems. Because wood flooring is manuJtacl:Ui'e
exacting tolerances, a successful installation usually depends more on the
smoothness of the subfloor than on the tolerances of the wood floor itself.
Industry Standards
ANSI/HPVA EF 2002, American National Standard for Engineered Wood Flooring
VA: Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association, 2002).
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. (Washington, DC:
sociation of Home Builders, 2(05).
SpecGUIDE, 09550, Wood Flooring, May 1988 (Alexandria, VA: The
Specifications Institute, 1988) Out of print.
UFOS Section 09 64 29, Wood Strip Flooring, United Facilities Guide ::,pe~clfjClltj
(Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2006) New
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/DOD/UFGS/UFGS%2009%2064%2029.pdf.
There are no industry standards for manufacturing dimensional tolerances for
ing, as shown in Figure 9-7(a). Strip flooring is manufactured to fit a metal
the time of manufacturing for the moisture content at the time. According to'
Products Laboratory, as the environmental moisture content changes, die
will change size at the rate of about ~2 in. (0.8 mm) for each 4 percent change ..
content.
There are few standards for tolerances for the final finish surface of wood
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines of the National Association
Builders Remodelors TM Council states that a wood floor should not slope mor~
in 20 ft. (13 mm in 6,200 mm) for residential work, but this should be the
A more reasonable tolerance should be the subfloor tolerance as indicated in
ing. In any situation, local floor variation may be more important than an OVI~raJl:.1
Tolerances for engineered wood flooring are shown in Figure 9-7(b).
For strip flooring and parquet flOOring, the subfloor should be level to
10 ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm) with no abrupt projections or depressions. The
specifications require that concrete slab be level to a tolerance of ±~ in. in a
(±3 mm in a 3-m radius):
The toleranceS shown in Table 9-3 for concrete slab substrates for VarlO11lH
-< ' •
stallations were preViously recommended by the Construction ~J)(!Citical:iorl&
Related Sections
Figure 9-7 Wood flooring

-
varies with moisture
I_content, see te~ I
d\~~~~ content,
varies with moisture
see text
+
(a) strip flooring
l
f '<:
" ", ,,,""----- ~~/

,, width tolerance,
, all types: ±0.01 0" (±0.25)
end alignment or squareness: "
factory finished bevel and square edge, AA, A, SP grades:

0.005 in per in of width (0.13 mm per 25 mm of width)
unfinished bevel and square edge, prime grade:

r. ±0.007 in per in of width (0.18 mm per 25 mm of width)
r
J. unfinished bevel and square edge, character grade:
, ±0.009 in per in of width (0.23 mm per 25 mm of width)
f
[,.
!
! (b) plank and block flooring
!
Table 9-3 Recommended concrete slab tolerances

for wood flooring
Installation type Slab tolerance

Cushioned !1.-inch in 1O-feet (5 mm in 3050)
Laminated 7I'.-inch in 1O-feet (5 mm in 3050)
Mastic cushioned X-inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3050 mm)
Rubber cushioned 7I'.-inch in lO-feet (5 mm in 3050)
Steel channel M-inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3050 mm)
SOUTce: Compiled from information in SpecGUIDE, 09550, Wood Rooring, The Construction Specifi-
cations Institute, May, 1988. (out of print)
9-8 Stone Flooring

Description
Stone flooring includes standard thick-set stone (minimum ~ in. or 13 mm thick)
on a thick mortar setting bed and thin stone tiles that are thin-set directly on
wood subfloors.
Industry Standards
Dimension Stone Design Manual VI (Cleveland: Marble Institute of America, Inc.,
For commercial stone floors using ~-in- (13-mm-) thick stone on a thick mortar
bed, the maximum variation of the finished surface is ~ in. in 10ft. (3 mm in
with no more than ~2-in. (I-mm) lippage between individual, ~lll'U\Jl~l-'dL<:U
shown in Figure 9-8. Uppage is the variation between one edge of a stone tile .
jacent stone tile edge. It is more pronounced in thin-set stone tile than
stone floors because there is no thick mortar bed to compensate for minor
subfloor level. Natural cleft flooring slate cannot be set to these tolerances
natural unevenness of its thickness.
As with ceramic tile and wood flooring, thin stone tile is manufactured to
erances, and its successful installation depends as much on the level and ~ll"JVUUI
the subfloor as on the skill of the tile setter. The Marble Institute of America
that wood subfloors for stone tile have a maximum deflection of no more than
span up to 14 ft. (4,270 mm) and that they be level to within).{6 in. in 3 ft. (1.6'
mm). Maximum allowable deflection is %2 in. (5.6 mm). Concrete subfloors .
mortar tile must be level to within ~ in. in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3,050 mm). lYlC.... U.llU.''"'
able deflection is %2 in (5.6 mm). When possible, the maximum variation of
face for stone tile is the same as for thick-set stone floors.
Related Sections
5-6 Fabrication and Installation Tolerances for Slate
9-9 Acoustical Ceiling Installation

Description
This section includes tolerances for both steel and aluminum ceiling suspension
installation for exposed and concealed spline acoustical ceiling systems.
ASTM standards only give tolerances for steel systems. For aluminum systems,
to any tolerances published by the suspension system manufacturer. There are
manufacturing tolerances for suspension systems given in ASTM C635, but
ances are so small that they do not affect the appearance or installation of a "'CIU"l~.'
as the selected system conforms to the standard.
Figure 9-8 Stone flooring

-
joint width: ±one fourth of - ; .
jOint width being used '- '-.. /
~~
-.
·.'
f c
t
thickness:
depends on stone
type and nominal
thickness
Industry Standards
ASTIvf C635, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings (West Conshohocken,
ASTM C636, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
SPECTEXT Section 09511, Suspended Acoustical Ceilings, April (Baltimore: Construc-
tion Sciences Research Foundation,).
Allowable tolerances
Tolerances for connection and level of the various components of a typical ceiling suspen-
sion system are shown in Figures 9-9(a) through 9-9(d). Although ASTM C636 requires
a level of X in. per 10ft. (6.4 mm in 3.05 mm), most ceilings are installed with laser level-
ing devices and can be leveled to within ~ in. in 10 ft. (3.2 mm in 3.05 mm) and often to
within ~ in. over the entire room area. Master specifications, such as the SPECTEXT, rec-
ommend a tolerance of ~ in. in 10ft.
Bow, camber, and twist tolerances are shown in Figure 9-9(e). Unlike normal construc-
tion nomenclature, bow refers to deformation in the vertical direction, whereas camber
refers to deformation in the horizontal direction.
Related Sections
9-10 Linear Metal Ceiling Installation
Figure 9-9 Acoustical ceiling installation
main runner
level: 1/4" in 10'

-
(6.4 in 3.05 m)
(a) carrying channels (b) main runners
±O.015" (0.38)
--l1 ..±O.020" (0.51)
(c) main runner joints (d) intersecting members
camber: 1/32" in any 2' (1.3 mmlm)
(e) bow, camber, and twist

1 Chapter 9: Finishes 213
9-10 Linear Metal Ceiling Installation

Description
Linear metal ceilings are suspended systems using lengths of prefinished aluminum sections
that are clippeJ to carrier sections suspended with wires attached to the structure above.
There is usually a gap between each piece to provide for some sound absorption and for re-
turn air movement.
Industry Standards
SPECTEXT Section 09546, Metal Linear Ceiling System, July (Baltimore: Constmction
Sciences Research Foundation, 1991).
There are no industry standards for installation tolerances for linear metal ceilings, al-
though the SPECTEXT master specifications recommend a maximum variation from flat
plane of~ in. in 10ft. (3 mm in 3,050 mm), as shown in Figure 9-10, and a maximum vari-
ation from dimensioned position of ±Y-( in. (6 mm). They also recommend a maximum
variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads of 2 degrees. As with
acoustical ceilings, the suspension system is installed with laser leveling devices in most
cases, so a tolerance of Va in. (3 mm) is a reasonable expectation for the precisely manufac-
tured components of these systems.
Manufacturing tolerances are determined by each manufacturer.
Related Sections
9-9 Acoustical Ceiling Installation
Figure 9-1 0 Linear metal ceiling installation
o o o
level both directions: 1/8" in 10' (3 in 3050)

9-11 Stainless Steel Ornamental

Metal Products
Description
This section includes tolerances for some of the shapes and stainless steel alloys
used for ornamental construction purposes. There are many ASTM standards
alloys and shapes of stainless steel, and for each product type (bars, sheets,
there are many individual tolerances such as wall thickness, length, squareness,
However, most of these tolerances are so small as to be insignificant (in the order,
sandths of an inch) for most ornamental design and detailing work.
However, when standard stainless steel sections are used for a LU~'lUl.ll-Ut:lillolIleQ;'i
mental fabrication, certain tolerances can be important. These are listed in this.
Industry Standards
ASTM A484/A484M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for ',tml71/p"",
Bars, Billets, and Forgings (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for.,
and Materials, 2005).
ASTM A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing
Tolerances for stainless steel sections that are likely to be important for
shown in Figure 9-11 and given in Tables 9-4 and 9-5.
Table 9-4 Twist tolerances for stainless steel tube ~Il!!t.,.....,..
in (mm)
)1 to 1)1 (12.7 to 38.1), inclusive
Over 1)1 to 2)1 (38.1 to 63.5), inclusive ±0.095 (2.6)
Over 2)1 (63.5) to 4 (101.6, inclusive ±0.125 (3.5)
Over 4 to 6 (101.6 to 152.4), inclusive ±0.250 (6.9)
Over 6 (152.4) ±0.375 (10.4)
Source: ASTM A554. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Table 9-5 Size and squareness tolerances for stainless steel Tee sections
Specified size of Tee, in (mm)" Width and depth, in (mm) Out-of-square, in (mm)
To 1)1 (38.00) inclusive ±~ (2.00) ±~ (1.20)
Over 1)1 to 2 (38.00 to 50.00) inclusive ±% (2.40) ±% (2.40
Over 2 to 3 (50.00 to 75.00) exclusive ±~ (3.60) ±~ (3.60)
a The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for tolerances.
Source: ASTM A484IA484M. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Figure 9-11 Stainless steel ornamental metal products
I
I
I
II
ll~~rjI:Y
--=-:i l--twist: see Table 9-4
tubing
I,
squareness: ±2"
\ \
\
\
\
\
\
leg length:
I
1-
___- ___
...
-4 I ±1/8" (3.00) for legs up to 6" (150)
+3/16", - 1/8" (+5.00, -3.00) for legs over 6" (150)
angles
squareness:
±3/64" per inch of flange width
(1.20 mmlmm)
depth and width:

~:::zz:::;z:zz:::zz:::;dV-:i. ±3/64" (1.20) for channels to 1 1/2" (38.00)
_I ±3/32" (2.4) for channels over 1 1/2" to 3",
exctusive (38.00 to 75.00)
channels
I
I
I
II
width and depth: see Table 9-5
II
U
~ !--squareness: see Table 9-5
tees
Related Sections
9-12 Copper Alloy Ornamental Metal Products
9-13 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products
9-12 Copper Alloy Ornamental Metal _.--,,,.. ..

Description
This section includes tolerances for some of the shapes and alloys of copper
used for ornamental construction purposes. There are many ASTM standards
alloys and shapes, and for each product type (bars, sheets, tubes, etc.), there are
dividual tolerances such as wall thickness, length, squareness, and so on. H"","'''~
of these tolerances are so small as to be insignificant (in the order of mousandt:hl
inch) for most ornamental design and detailing work.
However, when standard copper alloy sections are used for a cus;torn-aleSI;m1e
mental fabrication, certain tolerances can be important. These are listed in
some of the commonly used architectural alloys.
Industry Standards
ASTM B248 and B248M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Uf""~I"'"
Copper and Copper-AUoy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar (West L-U'''''''JllUO'''....cl,4
American Society for Testing and Materials, 2001).
ASTM B249/B249M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought ,
and Copper-AUoy Rod, Bar, and Shapes (West Conshohocken, PA: American
ASTM B251 and B251M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for \yr..",flaltJ
Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube (West Conshohocken, PA: American ,
Tolerances for copper alloy sections that are likely to be important for detailing are,
in Figure 9-12 and given in Tables 9-6 and 9-7. The tolerances for rectangular and
tubing include the copper alloys C22000 (commercial bronze), C23000 {red
C26000 (cartridge brass), and C28000 {Muntz metal}. The tolerances shown for
rod includes the alloy C65500.
Table 9-6 Straightness tolerances for round tubinga
Length of section, ft (mm) b Maximum curvature,

Over 3 to 6, (1000 to 2000), inclusive ±X6 (5.0)
Over 6 to 8 (2000 to 2500), inclusive ±X6 (8.0)
Over 8 to 10 (2500 to 3000), inclusive ±v, (12)
a Not applicable to pipe, redrawn tube, extruded tube or any annealed tube.
b For lengths greater than 10ft. (3000 mm) the maximum curvature shall not exceed
V, in. (12 mm) in any 10-ft. (3000 mm) portion of the total length.
Source: ASTM B251/B251 M. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
- - - ----------------- ------------,---------,------
Figure 9-12 Copper alloy ornamental metal products

-
,/.-/,///'/ /t///////
~=-~-~~~~=1~ //// straightness:

/
/ ±1/2" in any 6' length
/
/
(12 mm in any 2000 mm)
- - --'-' - . twist: 1 per foot of length

0
(1 per 300 mm of length)

0
20 maximum
rectangular and square tubing
straightness: see Table 9-6
round tubing
/
----
/' //
//
,/// ////l/
//
straightness: see Table 9-7

7"///
square or rectangular bar
straightness:
±1/32" up to 2" in diameter
(± 1 mm up to 50 mm in diameter)
rod (drawn)
Table 9-7 Straightness tolerances for bars made from square-sheared metal a c 'c
Tolerance for bars up to 10 in Tolerance for bars over 10 in

Thickness, in (mm)
(250 mm) wide b (250 mm)
~ and under 0.2) ±~6 (1.6) ~2 (0.79
Over ~ to X6 0.2 to 5.0), inclusive ±~ 0.2) Y64 (1.2
Over Yt6 (5.0) ±It (3.2) Yi6 (1.6)
alloys C22000 (commercial bronze). C23000 (red brass). and C26000. (cartridge brass).
a Includes
b Maximum edgewise curvature (depth of arc) in any 72-inch (1800 mm) portion of the total length.
Source: ASTM B248/B248M. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Related Sections
9-11 Stainless Steel Ornamental Metal Products
9-13 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products
9-13 Extruded Aluminum Tubes

Description
This section includes the aluminum products and tolerances that are most likely
concern to a designer detailing a custom-fabricated component using aluminum. '
Many of the other tolerances for aluminum tubing are not included. .
Industry Standards
ANSI-H35.2, Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum MiU Products (Arlington, VA,:
Aluminum Association, Inc., 2003).
ANSI-H35.2 contains many tolerances for individual elements of aluminum
However, most of these tolerances are so small as to be insignificant (in the order of'
sandths of an inch) for most ornamental design and detailing work. Mill tolleraJn~i$',
construction usually affect only the fabrication of components made from aluminum~, .'
as curtain walls and windows. When standard aluminum tubing sections are used for
tom-designed ornamental fabrication, certain tolerances can be important, such a,
straightness, and twist. These are listed in Table 9-8 and shown in Figure 9-13. c
Related Sections
11-9 Aluminum Window Manufacturing
Figure 9-13 Extruded aluminum tubes
,;--"""_""_==--_---;:>1 J
lj
twist:
see Table 9-8
,
;.-
/
/
/
/
/
/
__ / 1/ straightness:
1- ,... __ ------ ---- ,I see Table 9-8
L~===i1/
I ..
width and depth:
-I
see Table 9-8
Table 9-8 Selected tolerances for extruded aluminum tube sectionsa
Inches mm
Type of tolerance Specified width Deviation, in. or degrees b Specified width Deviation, mm or degrees b
Width and depth 0.SOO-0.749 ±0.012 12.S0-20.00 ±0.030

0.7S0-0.999 ±0.014 20.00-2S.00 ±0.36
1.000-1. 999 ±0.0l8 2S.00-S0.00 ±0,46
2.000-3.999 ±0.025 SO.00-100.00 ±0.64
4.000-4.999 ±0.035 100.00-130.00 ±0.S8
S.000-S.999 ±0.045 130.00-150.00 ±l.lS
6.000-6.999 ±0.OS5 lS0.00-lS0.00 ±lAO
7.000-7.999 ±0.065 180.00-200.00 ±1.6S
l. 8.000-8.999 ±0.075 200.00-230.00 ±1.90

~.. Straightness 0.SOO-S.999 0.010 x measured length, ft. c 12.5-1S0.00 1 mm/md
6.000 and over 0.020 x measured length, ft. 150.00 and over 2mm/m
Twist 0.SOO-1.499 1° x measured length, ft; max. of r 12.50-40.00 3°/m but not greater than r
1.S00-2.999 0.5° x measured length, ft, max. of 5° 40.00-80.00 1.5°/m but not !,'Teater than 5°
3.000 and over 0.2S0 x measured length, ft, max. of 3° 80.00 and over 1°/m but not greater than 3°
This table includes tolerances fOT alloys and sizes normtJily used in COllStntction. See A.NSI H35.2 for (1
complete listing of (1U allovs, si~es, <lnd toleranc'€s.

Deviation at lOT1lerS of section. See ANSI H35. 2 for allowable del'idtion In l{'ldth between comers.
Oel'lation from straight in rowllength or In any segment of one iot1t or ))]ore o{ tr1wllengrh.
'r Deviation from straight in rowllength or in (my 30ll 1Tl1ll or longer chord segment of total length .
Source: Based on infc))matiollfrom A1'JSI H35 .2-2003.
9-14 Aluminum Rods, Bars, and ShaDe~;";";
Description
This section includes the aluminum products and tolerances that are most likely·
concern to a designer detailing a custom~fabricated component using rods, bars,
ious aluminum extruded shapes.
Industry Standards
ANSI~H35.2, Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products (Arlington,
Aluminum Association, Inc., 2003).
ANSI~H35.2 contains many tolerances for individual elements of C1'UUllILlWU;
and shapes. However, most of these tolerances are so small as to be insigIlli.til:att
order of thousandths of an in) for most ornamental design and detailing
ances for construction usually only affect the fabrication of components
minum, such as curtain walls, windows, and railings.
Table 9-9 Selected tolerances for aluminum rods, bars, and shapesa
Inches mm
Deviation, in. or
degrees, times the
Specified width or diameter measured length in Specified width or diameter
Product type (and thickness)b feet (and thickness)b
Shapes Width up through 1.4999 0.050 Width up through 40.00

with thickness up through with thickness up through
0.094 2.50
Width up through 1.4999 0.0125 Width up through 40.00
with thickness 0.095 and over with thickness over 2.50
Width 1.500 and over of all 0.0125 Width over 40.00 of all
thicknesses thicknesses
Rectangular bar Width up through 1.499 and 0.050 Width up through 40.00 and
thickness up through 0.094 thickness up through 2.50
Width up through 1.499 with 0.0125 Width up through 40.00 and
thickness 0.095 and over thickness 2.50 and over
Rod, square, All 0.0125 All
hexagonal,
octagonal bar
Shapes/bars Width up through 1.499 1° with max. of 7° Width through 40.00

1.500~ 2. 999 0.5° with max. of 5° 40.00~80.00
3.000 and over 0.25° with max. of 3° 80.00 and over
a This table includes tolerances for alloys and sizes normally used in construction. See ANSI H35. 2 for a complete listing of all alloys,
and tolerances.
b Diameter includes circumscribing circle around shapes like hexagonal bars.
Source: Based on information from ANSI H35.2~2003.
Figure 9-14 Aluminum rods, bars, and shapes
(a) rods and bars
~~.-<
~
~
straightn ess: __',,/ ~ ~ ~

see Table 9-9 ~ ~
//
/
~
/
/
/
/
/
/
"
I :::::J
I
I
II
II
II
U
~l
twist: see Table 9-9
(b) shapes
When standard aluminum shapes are used for a custom-designed ornamental fabrica-
tion, certain tolerances can be important, such as straightness and twist. These are listed
in Table 9-9 and shown in Figure 9-14.
Related Sections
Figure 10-1 Manufacturing tolerances for flat MIClL~!
length
/frame erection
/ see text
width
Table 10-1 Allowable tolerances for clear, flat glass
Ordering thicknesses Thickness range

Traditional Designation. in mm
designation. in mm Min. Max. Min. Max.
Single 2.5 0.085 0.101 2.16 2.57
Double, ~" 3.0 0.115 0.134 2.92 3.40
}1z 4.0 0.149 0.165 3.78 4.19
M6 5.0 0.180 0.199 4.57 5.05
X 6.0 0.219 0.244 5.56 6.20
}{6 8.0 0.292 0.332 7.42 8.43
% 10.0 0.355 0.406 9.02 10.31 ±Mz (2.4)
l1 12.0 0.469 0.531 11.91 13.49 ±~ (3.2)
% 16.0 0.595 0.656 15.09 16.66 ±}1z (4.0)
1{ 19.0 0.719 0.781 18.26 19.84
1-' 22.0 0.844 0.906 21.44 23.01
1 25.0 0.969 1.031 24.61 26.19
SouTce: ASTM C1036. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Chapter 10
Glazing
10-1 Manufacturing Tolerances for Flat Glass

Description
This section includes tolerances for the manufacture of flat glass. It does not include glass
as part of a window assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 for window assembly tolerances.
Industry Standards
ASTM CI036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass (West Conshohocken, PA: American
Society for Testing and Materials, 2005).
Tolerances for the most common thicknesses of flat glass are shown diagrammatically in
Figure 10-1 and given in Table 10-1. For a complete listing, refer to ASTM CI036.
framing opening there should be not more than a %-in. (3-mm) difference in the length of
from level should not exceed ±% in. (3 mm) in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±X in. (6 mm) in any
legs in the same plane should have a maximum out-of-plane offset of),12 in. (0.8 rnrn) at
Related Sections
10-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Patterned And Wired Glass
10-3 Tempered, Heat-Strengthened, and Spandrel Glass
10--4 Sealed Insulated Glass Units
11-13 Lockstrip Gasket Glazing
10-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Patterned

and Wired Glass
Description
This section includes tolerances for the manufacture of patterned and wired glass. It does
not include glass as part of a window assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 for window tolerances.
Industry Standards
ASTM CI036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass (West Conshohocken, PA: American
Society for Testing and Materials, 2005).
t I', i I ~. I:' I.
Figure 10-2 Manufacturing tolerances for patterned:"

and wired glass
see Table 10-2 for values

of width, length, and thickness
length
frame erection tolerance$t···
see text
(a) patterned glass
~~ thickness:
see Table 10-3
±1/16" (1.6) for

each 1/8· (3.2)
of nominal thickness
±1/16· (1.6) for

each 1/8· (3.2)
of nominal thickness
(b) wired glass

Chapter 10: Glazing 225
Tolenmces are shown in Figure 10-2 and listed in Tables 10-2 and 10-3. Note that Under-
writers Laboratories has never approved 1J2-in. wired glass for fire resistance.
framing opening there should be not more than a l1l-in. (3-mm) difference in the length of
from level should not exceed ±~ in. (3 mm) in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±),\ in. (6 mm) in any
legs in the same plane should have a maximum out-of-plane offset of)12 in (0.8 mm) at the
frame corners to avoid unequal stresses on the glass.
Table 1 0-2 Tolerances for patterned glass
Thickness tolerances, (mm) in

Thickness designation, minimum, maximum, Length and width,
(mm)in (mm) in (mm)in (mm) in
(2.5) SS (2.15) 0.085 (2.9) 0.l14 ±( 1.6) Yr,
(3.0) DS (3.0) 0.118 (3.61) 0.142 ±( 1.6) Yr.
(4.0) X, (3.62) 0.143 (4.37) 0.172 ± (1.6) Y1,
(5.0) if, (4.39)0.173 (5.42) 0.213 ±(l.6) Yr.
(5.5) X, (5.43) 0.214 (5.90) 0.232 ±(2.4) X,
(6.0) !4 (5.91) 0.233 (7.60) 0.299 ±(3.2) ~
(8.0) 1J', (7.61) 0.300 (9.10) 0.358 ±(4.0) X,
Source: ASTM C1036. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Table 10-3 Tolerances for wired glass
Thickness designation, Thickness tolerances, (mm) in

(mm) in Min. Max.
(6.0) !4 (6.40) 0.252 (7.60) 0.299
(lO.O) % (8.76) 0.303 (lO.O) 0.390
Related Sections
10-4 Sealed Insulated Glass Units
11-13 Lockstrip Gasket Glazing
- - ~ ~ ~ -
. i ~ i
l I ' ; 1
Figure 10-3 Tempered, heat-strengthened, and

spandrel glass
,,_ thickness: see Section 10-1

~nd Table 10-1 ."
localized kink at tong
marks ±1/16" (1.6)
over a 2" (50) span
hole center to specified
edge: ±1/16" (1.6)
,
,,
,#
,, f
see Table 10-4 for values of
,, length and width
length
II,, localized warp:
±1/16" (1.6) in
any 12" (300) span
frame erection tnll'l'l'l'Inr.A!Il
see text
width
(a) dimensional and flatness tolerances
width
#
I see Table 10-4
for tolerances
;f ff
length
# I
I
ff
I ,
localized warp:
~I I
±3I32" (2.4) in
any 12" (300) span
,--~ ""- -'"
specify bows
be placed in
i
/.
~
direction for
/.~ panels of
glass
(b) strips (c) bow tolerances

Table 10-5 Bow and warp tolerances for tempered,:- ,

heat-strengthened, and spandrel glass,,:"
Glass thickness, in (mm)

Edge dimension, ~, ~z,
Yt.
in (mm) (3,4,5) ~ (6) ¥t. (8) ~ (10)
0--20 (0--500) 0.12 (3.0) 0.08 (2.0) 0.08 (2.0) 0.08 (2.0)
>20--35(>500--900) 0.16 (4.0) 0.12 (3.0) 0.08 (2.0) 0.08 (2.0)
>35-47(>900--1200) 0.20 (5.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.12 (3.0) 0.08 (2.0)
>47-59(>1200--1500) 0.28 (7.0) 0.20 (5.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.16 (4.0)
>59-71 (>1500--1800) 0.35 (9.0) 0.28 (7.0) 0.20 (5.0) 0.20 (5.0)
>71-83(>1800--2100) 0.47 (12.0) 0.35 (9.0) 0.24 (6.0) 0.24 (6.0}'-
>83-94(>2100--2400) 0.55 (14.0) 0.47 (12.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.28 (7.0) ,
'>94-106(>2400--2700) 0.67 (17.0) 0.55 (14.0) 0.39 (10.0)
>106-118(>2700--3000) 0.75 (19.0) 0.67 (17.0) 0.51 (13.0)
>118-130(>3000--3300) 0.75 (19.0) 0.59 (15.0) 0.55 (14.0)
>130--146(>3300--3700) 0.83 (21.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.67 (17.0)
>146-158(>3700-4000) 0.94 (24.0) 0.79 (20.0)
Source: Compiled from ASTM C 1048. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with
For erection tolerances, the Glazing Manual recommends that within

framing opening there should be not more than a ~-in. (3-mm) difference iri
the diagonals. Further, the maximum variation of mullions from plumb or
from level should not exceed ±~ in. (3 mm) in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±~ in;
single run. Framing systems that are designed to have the horizontal and
legs in the same plane should have a maximum out-of-plane offset of ~2 in.
Related Sections

Description
Insulated glass units consist of two panes of glass that enclose a heflmeticatly
space. The panes are held apart by a spacer around the perimeter.
Industry Standards
AAMA MCWM 1-89, Metal Curtain wau
Manual (Schaumburg, IL: American
tectural Manufacturers Association, 1989).
GANA Glazing Manual (Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America;
TR-1200-83 SIGMA Voluntary Guidelines far Commercial Insulating \..I1U;).>-·L7'"
Tolerances. (Ottawa, ON: Insulating Glass ManufactUrers Alliance, 1983k,:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 10-4 Sealed insulated glass units

-
corner to corner
~~ edge thickness:
I see Table 10-6
difference not to
I
exceed 1/4" (6) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\ I
\
\ I
\ I see Table 10-6 for length
~
and width tolerances
/ \
/i,
length
I frame erection tolerances:
I
see text
I
I
I
I
I
I
I "
width
Table 10-6 Dimensional tolerances for insulating glass

units
Width or length, in (mm) Plus, in (mm) Minus, in (mm)

Up to 30 (760) 11I (3.2) l{6 (1.6)
Over 30 to 60 (760 to 1525) ~, (4.0) l{6 (1.6)
Over 60 to 84 (1525 to 2134) l{d4.8) l{d 1.6)
Over 84 (2134) Consult manufacturer
Edge thickness, in (mm) Thickness, range, in Thickness, range (mm)
)< (13) 0.475 to 0.550 12.1 to 14.0
If.(14) 0.535 to 0.625 13.6 to 15.9
?-< (16) 0.600 to 0.700 15.2 to 17.8
;{ (19) 0.700 to 0.810 17.8 to 20.6
1 (25) 0.938 to 1.062 23.8 to 27.0
Source: Compiled from TR-1200-83, Insu/atingGlass Manufacturers Alliance
Recommended tolerances are shown in Figure 10-4 and listed in Table 10-6.
ing units fabricated from flat glass, these tolerances can usually be maintained.
pered glass is used, the bow tolerance is often the controlling factor. In many
tempered glass manufacturer must reduce the range of bow tolerances to allow the
ing unit to be fabricated to within or close to the tolerances recommended by .
ing Glass Manufacturers Alliance.
For erection tolerances, the Glazing Manual recommends that within any
framing opening there should be not more than a %-in (3-mm) difference in the
the diagonals. Note that this is less than the SIGMA Guidelines shown in
Further, the maximum variation of mullions from plumb or horizontals from
not exceed ±% in. (3 mm) in 12 ft. (3,660 mm) or ±X in. (6 mm) in any single
ing systems that are designed to have the horizontal and vertical glazing legs
plane should have a maximum out-of-plane offset of ~2 in. (0.8 mm) at the
to avoid unequal stresses on the glass.
The AAMA guidelines set dimensional tolerances on insulating glaSs uniti
and -J{6 in. (+5.0 mm and -1.5 mm).
Related Sections
10-5 All-Glass Entrances

Description
All-glass entrances consist of a glazing system using a minimum of visible framing
relying instead on silicon sealant, suspended glazing, glass mullions, clamps, ..
special fittings to support fixed glass and glass doors.
Industry Standards
ASTM C1048, Standard Specification Heat-Treated Flat Glass: Kind HS, Kind FT
and Uncoated Glass. (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
Materials,2004).
SPECTEXT Section 08971, Suspended Glass, July (Bel Air, MD: Construction
Because all-glass systems do not rely on rigid framing members of a1UmlnUl[ll*,:~1i
or other materials, the accuracy of the installation depends primarily on
the glass. Most all-glass entrances are in hazardous locations, so tempered or .
glass is used. For tempered glass installations, the bow tolerances listed in Table 1 .
govern. These affect both the plUJ[llbness of the glass and the relative alignment
butt-jointed pieces. To minimize misalignment, adjacent tempered-glass units.
installed with the bow in the same direction. When tempered glass is installed
cealed framing at the floor and ceiling, the dimensional tolerances listed in
must also be accommodated.
For suspended glazing, previous SPECTEXT master specifications recomme:o(
noncUJ[llulative plumb tolerance of J{6 in. (1.6 mm) per 3 ft. (900 mm) or Min. (
-
Figure 10-5 All-glass entrances
plumb for suspended glass:

±1/16" per 3' (1.6 per 914)
or 1/2" per 100' (13 per 30.5 m)
whichever is less
alignment:
±1/32" (0.8)
alignment:---~-~-~~--l
±1/32" (0.8)
section through sill and horizontal jOint
~~ """'" iOi.., J '"",..,,,~, .... ~~~"""" , ... . , . . " ' __ ~-1 ,,>_,.,.....-~ ~,~ "'''''~~ ~ ........""'~i'-."-~_"'._... _ .. ,_""'''''''~_''-~''"''''~J;i....,~.''''~"''"''~.4'~ __ .'".. ti_~''''_I1-;~~, ..... L~_ .. ,",4'"'" ....-'.lIsJ 'fit:
~
per 100 ft. (30.5 m), whichever is less. See Figure 10-5. SPECTEXT also reCC)mIn~ri
maximum misalignment of adjoining glass units of ~l in. (0.8 mm).
Related Sections
Figure 10-6 Decorative architectural flat glass
pattern
off parallel:
±1/16" (1.6) from
locating edge
Chapter 10; Glazing 233
o-s Decorative Architectural Flat Glass

Description
Ue£:OTa~'IIt: architectural flat glass consists of laminated glass products manufactured by using
a screen printing process with fired-on ceramic enamel, typically between the two sheets
~f glass. This type of glazing is often used to reduce light glare, to print images, or for purely
decorative purposes The product may be used in exterior or interior applications.
Industry Standards
Specification No. 95-1-31, Specification for Decorative Architectural Flat Glass (Topeka,
KS: Glass Association of North America, 2001).
This type of glazing product may be produced in a variety of patterns. As shown in Figure
10-6, there is a "locating glass edge" that should be identified on the shop drawings. This
is the edge from which critical pattern measurements are made. In a single piece of glass,
patterns may be located off parallel up to ±J.{6 in. (3 mm) from this edge and up to ±~ in.
(3 mm) from other edges. For line patterns, the maximum variation in both line width and
distance between lines may be ±~2 in. (0.8 mm). Matching patterns between adjacent
pieces of glass is dependent on the skills of the installer.
Unless otherwise specified, the pattern may cover the entire glass panel up to a clear
, edge border of% in. (10 mm) or less. For structural silicone glazing applications, a ~-in. (3-
mm) clear border can be obtained, but it must be specified on the order. The Glazing Man-
ual erection tolerances for framing members are the same as given in Section 10-1.
Related Sections
" I
10-3 Tempered, Heat-Strengthened, Spandrel Glass, and Bent Glass
10-7 Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

Description
Laminated architectural flat glass consists of two or more lites of glass or polycarbonate with
one or more interlayers between the glazing lites permanently bonded under heat and
pressure. The glass may be annealed, heat-treated, tempered, chemically strengthened,
wired, tinted, patterned, or coated. Various types of interlayers are used to impart desired
qualities to the assembly, with polyvinyl butyral (PVB) being one of the most common.
Laminated glass is used in exterior and interior applications.
Industry Standards
ASTM Cll72:,Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. (West
Tolerances for laminated glass units are shown in Figure 10-7 and listed in Tables 10-7 and
10-8. For special laminations, such as those that use polycarbonate, tempered glass, and
complex combinations of lites and interlayers, verify tolerances with the manufacturer.
The Glazing Manual erection tolerances for framing members are the same as given in Sec-
tion 10-1.
I 1, I I
. I ; ,
Figure 10-7 Laminated architectural flat glass
~~ edge thickness:
± summation of values for
maximum thickness of
glass ply from ASTM C
(Section 10-1) and
Interlayer thickness
see Table 10-7 for length 3'

and width tolerances
length
see Table 10-8 for bow tolerances
Table 10-7 Length and width tolerances for symmetrically laminated

architectural glass
Laminate thickness, t, in (rom) glass Patterned and wired glass

t~X +~2,-X6 +~6,-~
(t ~ 6.4) (+4, -1.6) (+7.9,-3.2)
J4<t~l1 +J4,-X6 +~6,-~ +X,-~
(6.4 < t ~ 12.7) (+6.4, -1.6) (+7.9,-3.2) (+6.4, -3.2)
l1<t~l +J4,-~ +~6,-~ +~6,....,~
(12.7 < t ~ 25.4) (+6.4, -3.2) (+ 7.9, -3.2) (+ 7.9, -3.2)

SOUTce: Compiled from TR-1200-B3, Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
l Table 10-8 Bow tolerances for laminated glass
Nominal glass thickness, in (mm)

Edge length, Y.:,X" YJ, Y, }-f6 X %!-~
in (mm) (3.0,4.0, 5.0) (6.0) (8.0) (10.0) (12.0-22.0)
;:;::::-lti (l~-460) X (3.2) ~1,. (1.6) Yr,,(1.6) !-1o (1.6) ))0 (1.6)
18-16 (460-910) };, (4.8 ~i (3.2) X, (Z.4) ;i;, (2.4) )1;.(1.6)
16...48 (910-1220) 1\,(7.1) Y;,( 4.8) ;1;, (4.0) j:; (3.2) ){, (Z.4)
4S-60(1220-1520) )( (9.5) ~, (7.1) Yt, (5.6) Xo{4.8) ~ (3.2)
60...72 (1520-1830) Y:(1Z.7) X (9.5) /1,(7.1) Y, (6.4) )), (4.8)
72--84 (1830-Z130) X; (15.9) Y: (1Z.7) IX, (8.7) ;1" (7.9) 14 (6.4)
84-96 (2130-Z440) X (19.0) X (15.9) i-{o( 11.1) %(9.5) 'y" (7.1)
96-108 (2440-Z740) U (ZZ.2) X (19.0) !(, (14.3) Y. (12.7) X (9.5)
108-120 (Z740-3050) 1 (25.4) )1; (22.2) IX,07.5) X (15.9) Y: (12.7)
120-132 (3050-3350) 1 (25.4) % (20.6) y, (19.0) ){ (15.9)
132-144(3350-3660) IX (28.6) IX, (23.8) %(22.2) Y, (19.0)
144-156 (3660-3960) 1'l~ (31.8) lYr, (27 .0) 1 (25.4) y; (22.2)
Source; Compiled from ASTM C 1048. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted with permission.
Related Sections
f
10-3 Tempered, Heat-Strengthened, Spandrel Glass, and Bent Glass
\ 10-8 Bent Glass

Description
Bent glass is flat glass that has been shaped while hot into a body having curved surfaces.
Bent glass Can be shaped into a single bend or a compound bend, which is composed of
curvature of one or more radii, curved on two or more axes. A single bend nonnally con-
sists of one or two flat areas tangent to the curvature.
Industry Standards
ASTM C1464, Standard Specification for Bent Glass (West Conshohocken; PA: Ameri-
can Society for Testing and Materials, 2000).
Tolerances for bent glass units are shown in Figure 10-8 and listed in Tables 10-9 through
10-11. As shown in Figure 10-8, the crossbend is the deyiation from a straightedge along
a line perpendicular to the curvature measured on the concave side.
For special laminations, such as those that use polycarbonate, tempered glass, and
comrlex combinations of lites and interlayers, \'erif\, tolerances with the manufacturer,
The Gla:jng Manual erection tolerances for framing members are the same as given in Sec-
tion 10-1.
Table 10-9 Height and girth tolerances for bent gl
Height, in (mm)
0-60 (0-1520) ±Yld4.8)

>60 to 78 (> 1520 to 2000) ±~ 0.2) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8)
>78 (>2000) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yld4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8)
Table 10-10 Shape accuracy and crossbend Tnl,ICU·!!lln
for bent glass
glass thickness, in (mm)

~Yl6(3-5) Yr%6 (6-8) ~~ (10-12)
Shape accuracy
Girth, in (mm)
0-48 (0-1220) ±~ (3.2) ±~ (3.2) ±~ 0.2)

>48-96(>1220-2440) ±~ (3.2) ±~ 0.2) ±~ 0.2)
>96-132 (>2440-3350) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yld4.8) ±X6 (4.8)
> 132 (>3350) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±X6 (4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8)
Maximum crossbend
deviation, in (mm)
0-48 (0-1220) ±%2 (2.4) ±~ 0.2) ±~ 0.2)

>48-96(>1220-2440) ±~ 0.2) ±~ 0.2) ±Xd4.8)
>96-132 (>2440-3350) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8)
>132 (>3350) ±Xd4.8) ±Xd4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8)
Table 10-11 Maximum twist deviation for bent ylC:I;~l1'l
Girth, in (mm)
0·72 >72·96 >96·120
Height, in (mm) (0·1830) (>1830.2440) (>2440.3050)
0·72 (0.1830) ±~ (3.2) ±~ (3.2) ±X6 (4.8)
>72·96 (> 1830. 2440) ±X6 (4.8) ±Yld4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yld4.8)
>96·120 (>2440.3050) ±Xd4.8) ±X6 (4.8) ±X6 (4.8) ±~ (6.4)
>120 (>3050) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±Yl6 (4.8) ±~(6.4) ±~ (6.4)
Note: Table applies to ~ in to ~ in (3 mm to 12 mm) glass with a radius greater than 18 in (460 .
twist tolerances on other thicknesses or radiuses, contact the supplier.
Source: ASTM C 1464. Copyright ASTM International. Reprinted With permission.
Figure 10-8 Bent glass

-
girth, see Table 10-8
-----~
height, see Table 10-8
crossbend,
see Table 10-9
I~-+-- straightedge
;r
/
I
I \ \ shape, including radius,
f curvature, and flats
twist see Table 10-9
see Table 10-10
Related Sections
Figure 11-1 Standard steel doors and frames
±3164' (1.2)
(a) door size (b) flatness
/strike
+1/16' (1.6)
centerline - - -1/32' (0.8)
±1/32" (0.8)
LU-_ _ _------'L.I _ '-
1 . .+ 1/16'(1.6).1 1... ±3/32·(2.4)_~

-1/32' (0.8)
±1/16" 1.6)
(c) frame opening (d) frame size
Chapter 11
Doors and Windows
11-1 Standard Steel Doors and Frames

Description
Standard steel doors and frames include products manufactured according to ANSI
A250.8 (previously SDI 100)' Recommended Specifications for StamIard Steel Doors amI
Frames, and include both single- and double-rabbeted frames. This section does not in-
clude special or unusual doors or frame conditions.
Industry Standards
SOl 117, Manufacturing Tolerances, Standard Steel Doors amI Frames. (Cleveland: Steel
Door Institute, 2000).
Tolerances for door and frame size, flatness, and frame preparation are shown in Figure
11-1. In addition to the door size tolerances shown, the squareness of a door is deter-
mined by measuring the diagonals. The two diagonals should not vary by more than Yi6
in. (1.6 mm). To determine flatness, three measurement positions are used. The door is
checked with a straightedge at the top and bottom of the door on both faces and along
both hinge and lock edges on both faces. The out-of-straightness measurement cannot
exceed Yi6 in. 0.6 mm). The door is also checked with a straightedge from corner to cor-
ner on both sides of the door. The out-of-straightness measurement on the diagonal can-
not exceed:X6 in. (4.8 mm).
For additional tolerances on frame thickness and hinge cutout and placement, refer to
SOl 117.
Related Sections
11-2 Insulated Steel Door Systems
11-3 Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Description
The tolerances in this section cover doors and frames. Doors are manufactured to fit the
standard frame opening sizes, with a Xl-in; to Yl:-in. (2-mm to 4-mm) clearance between
the door and the frame. The width is measured from inside of jamb to inside of jamb, and
the neight is measured from the top of the threshold to the inside of the header rabbet.
Figure 11-2 Insulated steel door systems
thickness for 1 314" (44.5) doors:

+3132", -1/32" (+2, -1)
±1/16" (2)
_ _t--.-±1/16" (2)
(d) frame size
Industry Standards·
ISm 100, Door Size Dimensional Standard and Assembly Tolerances for Insulated Steel
Systems (Cleveland, OH: Insulated Steel Door Institute, 1990) Out of print.
Tolerances for door and frame size and flatness previously established are shown in Figure
11-2. These were developed by the Insulated Steel Door Institute, which is no longer
existence. The flatness tolerances shown apply to warpage of the door as well as other
face irregularities.
1
f Chapter 11: Doors and Windows 241
1
Related Sections
11-3 Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames
Description
This section includes tolerances for heavy-duty doors and frames used for detention facil-
ities. Standard steel doors and frames include products manufactured according to ANSI
A2S0.8 (previously SOl 100), Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames and include both single- and double-rabbeted frames.
Industry Standards
ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863, Guide Specifications for Detention Security HoUow Metal
Doors and Frames (Chicago: Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, Division of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 2004).
Tolerances for door and frame size and flatness are shown in Figure 11-3. The flatness tol-
erances shown apply to warpage and bow of the door. Installation tolerances cannot ex-
ceed Yl6 in. (1.5 mm), and plumbness and out-of-square tolerances for installed frames is
±Yl6 in. (±1.5 mm). Plumbness is measured on a perpendicular line from the head to the
floor, and squareness is measured on a line from a jamb perpendicular to the jamb at the
head.
Refer to ANSI/NAAMM/HMMA 863 for standardized hardware locations and stan-
dard clearances.
Related Sections

Description
This section includes flush wood doors manufactured according to the Window and Door
Manufacturers Association (WDMA) standards. Refer to Section 7-14 for tolerances for
standard flush wood doors manufactured according to Architectural Woodwork Institute's
standards. However, the tolerances are very similar for both standards.
Industry Standards
WDMA I.S. lA, Industry Specification for Architectural Wood Flush Doors (Des Plaines,
IL Window and Door Manufacturers Association, 1997).
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. (Washington, OC: National
Association of Home Builders Remodelors ™ Council, 2005).
Figure 11-3 Detention security hollow metal doors and
straightedge
±3164· (1.2)
+1/16· (1.6)
-1/32" (0.8)
MaximumL
3116" (4.7)T ~;;;;;;;;;;;;;...
±3164· (1.2)
I .. ±1/16· (1.5) .. 1
±1/32" (0.8)
I...U.-_ _ _- - "... ,-~
(c) frame opening (d) frame size
Figure 11-4 illustrates the tolerances of size, warpage, and show-through or U::U::l;U"t!'
(Telegraphing is the distortion of the face veneer of a door caused by variation
ness between the core material and the vertical or horizontal edge bands.) The
for hardware location for machined doors includes locks, hinges, and other hardWlin
Chapter 11: Doors and Windows 243
Figure 11-4 Standard flush wood doors
±1/16" (1.6)
I
:±1/16" (1.6)
±1/16" (1.6)
I
J
)
~//~~/16. (1.6)
,,
, I
,,,
, warp, maximum
I deviation: 1/4" (6)
'~, (see text)
I ±0.010" (0.025) in
I any 3" (75) span
I
I
I
t
I
I
I

Warpage tolerances apply only to the door and not to its relation to the .
maximum deviation of Y4 in. (6 mm) applies to a maximum door size of 3 ft., 0 in. hy .
oin. (900 mm by 2100 mm) for 1%-in.-thick 05-mm-thick) doors and to a maxinlUnldd
size of 3 ft., 6 in. by 7 ft., 0 in. (1,050 mm by 2,100 mm) for lX-in.-thick \T1'-UUD-U:'I1I
doors. For lX-in.-thickdoors larger than 3 ft., 6 in. by 7 ft., 0 in. (1,050 mm by 2,100
the tolerance is measured in any 3-ft., 6-in. by 7-ft., O-in. section.
The Residential Construction Performance Guidelines of the National ~iOClancltl
Home Builders Remodelors ™ Council uses the Y4-in. (6-mm) maximum [Ole:rance'j
warping of interior doors.
Related Sections

Description
This section includes size and flatness tolerances for stile and rail doors llUU'lUl'~"""U.:;q
cording to WDMA standards. Refer to Section 7-15 for tolerances for standard
rail doors manufactured according to Architectural Woodwork Institute's staJnd~trds"'.:
Industry Standards
WDMA 1.S. 6, Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Stile and Rail Doors (Des
IL: Window and Door Manufacturers Association, 1997).
Figure 11-5 illustrates the size tolerances for both prefit and non-prefit doors as
erances for warpage. Warpage is measured by placing a straightedge or taut string
concave face of the door at any angle and measuring the distance between the
the straightedge or string and the face of the door. Warpage tolerance is based on a 1 ..
thick door that is 3 ft., 6 in. wide and 7 ft., 0 in. high (44 mm by 1,070 mm by 2,130
The Y4-in. (6-mm) maximum warpage dimension does not apply to larger doors.'i .
The height and width tolerances for doors not prefit do not apply to .... ~'''~._.,..,
These are considered prefit at the time of manufacture and must conform to LU1~".CUI''':~
prefit doors shown in Figure 11-5(b).
Related Sections
7-15 Stile and Rail Doors-Size and Flatness
7-16 Stile and Rail Doors-Joint TIghtness and Flushness
Figure 11-5 Standard stile and rail doors

-
+0" (0)
-3/32" (-2.4)
+ 1/16" (1.6)
±1/32" (0.8)
-1/8" (-3.2)
I
j
I
+1/16" (1.6) ~(O.B)
J
-1/8" (-3.2)
:1
(a) doors not prefit (b) prefit doors
warp, maximum
deviation 1/4" (6.4)
(see text)
(c) warp tolerances

11-6 Wood Swinging Patio Doors

Description
This section includes size and flatness tolerances for wood patio doors maJtlut;lctulte
cording to the National Wood Window and Door Association's standards. The
apply to the overall dimensions of all doors if more than one door leaf is used.
Industry Standards
AAMA/WDMA/CSA lO1/1.S. 2/A440, StandardlSpedficationfor Windows,
Unit Skylights (Schaumburg, IL: American Architectural Manufacturers
Wood and Door Manufacturers Association, and Canadian Standards /'\.S!iOCt3t
2005).
WDMA 1.S. 6, Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Stile and Rail Doors (Des .
IL: Window and Door Manufacturers Association, 1997).
Figure 11-6 illustrates the size and warpage tolerances for patio doors. W",rn<>" .. ·
ured by placing a straightedge or taut string on the concave face of the door at
and measuring the distance between the bottom of the straightedge or string and
of the door after accounting for glazing recess.
Related Sections

Description
Installation of wood doors includes the manufacture and installation of the ..... ~~A,~.f.;
as well as the hanging of the door. The Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers .
ation (WMMPA) publishes quality standards for the fabrication of one-piece
piece interior wood jambs and for exterior wood frames. However, they do not
tolerances for hanging doors within the frames. Prefit clearances of J.jj in. (3 rom)
the door and the frame are given in Architectural Wood Flush Doors (WDMA 1.8.
lished by the Wood and Door Manufacturers Association.
The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWl) lists tolerances for frames l<'UL'~~'
cording to one of their grades (see Section 7-11) and also publishes
which are summarized in this section. For AWl ~lation standards to awly, ..
be specifically called out in the specifications and the doors manufactured
AWl standards.
Industry Standards ,.
WM 1-99, Quality Standards, Hinged Interior Wood Door Jambs (Woodland, CA: Wooer··
Moulding and Millwork Producers Association, 1999).
WM 3-99, Quality Standards, Exterior Wood Door Frames (Woodland, CA: Wood
ing and Millwork Producers Association, 1999).
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed. (Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural;
Figure 11-6 Wood swinging patio doors
+1/16" (1.6)
-1/8" (-3.2)
interior frames and
moldings: ±1/32" (0.8)
+1/16" (1.6)
-1/8" (-3.2)
(a) size tolerances
warp, maximum
deviation 1/4" (6.4)
(see text)
(b) warp tolerances

Figure 11-7 Installation of wood doors
±1/32" (O.S)
{ .'132"
/7
/
/
/
/
""
,,/
,,""f"
bow interior frames:
2" in S'-S" (51 in 3032)
"""" bow exterior frames:
/// 1"in7'(25in2134)
,../
....
(a) WMMPA frame tolerances
max. face of door

behind jamb:
J max. face of
1/S" (4) premium
3116" (5) custom
1 in front of
1/1S" (2)
1/8" (4)
1/4" (S)
311S" (5)
jambs parallel:
±1/1S" (1.5) premium
~ ±1/S" (3) custom
--L.'--_ _ _ _ ~
I ..L.L-_ ±311S" (5.0) economy
(b) AWl installation tolerances

,------'-----------_._---
W:-.1MP st;mdards for jamb fabricatiun are summarized in Figure 11-7(a). The tolerance
t;lr l'upping, which is a deviation in the face of a piece from a straight line drawn from edge
[t ll"Llge, is limited to !,-j~ in. (0.8 mm) in widths less than 4 in. (100 lllm) and to 11,,, in. (1.6
lIun) in widths 4 in. and over.
AWl tolerances tl1r installation are shown in Figure 11-7(b).
Related Sections
i-II Fwmes, Jambs, and Windows
11-6 Wood Swinging Patio Doors
11-8 Wood Windows

Description
This section includes windows manufactured according to NWWDA standards or cus-
tom-build windows made according to AWl standards. Must wood windows for residential
or commercial construction are factory-built units fabricated to very close tolerances.
Therefore, in most cases, the tolerances shown in Figure 11-8(a) apply.
Industry Standards
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440, StandardlSpecificationfor Windows, Doors, and
Unit Skylights (Schaumburg, IL: American Architectural Manufacturers Association,
Wood and Door Manufacturers Association, and Canadian Standards Association,
2005).
NWWDA tolerances are shown in Figure 11-8(a), and AWl tolerances are indicated in
11-8(b). Specific tolerances are listed in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1 AWl jOint tolerances for factory assembled windows
AWl grade tolerances, in, (mm)

Maximum 0.015 (0.4) 0.025 (0.6) 0.025 (0.6) 0.l)50 (1.1) 0.050 (13) 0.075 (1.9)
gap at test by 20 t \ ) of by 30% of by 20% of by 30% of by 20% llf by 30"{' of
l,xation joint length jl1int length joint length joint length joint length joint length
Flushness 0.001 (O.OJ) 0.015 (0.4) 0.005 (0.1) 0.025 (0.6) O.ll25 (0.6) 0.050 (U)
R"prillr.cci with pcnnisslon ji-om A.rc hitecrurc,l \V(IlIt1w(lrk Qual; ry Stan.darLl;, 3th ed., by the :\rchitt'cwrtll \'{-'ooduvrk institlLtc.
Figure 11-8 Wood windows
:t:1/16" (1.5) for dimensions 0
72" (1830) and under .
:t:1/S" (3) for dimensions. ;

between 72" and 144"
(between 1830 and 3660):~
:t:1/16" (1.5) for dimensions

72" (1S3O) and under
:t:1/S" (3) for dimensions

between 72" and 144"
(between 1830 and 3660)
:t:3I16" (4.5) for dimensions

over 144" (3660)
(a) NWWDA tolerances
gap test location,

see Table 11-2
~IC--_ _ --====-- flushness,

see Table 11-2
(b) AWl tolerances

Related Sections
> \1 Ff<lIlleS, Jambs, and \VinJows
11-9 Aluminum Windows and Sliding Doors

Description
Thi' ,ecrion includes aluminum prime windows and sliding glass doors that are manufac-
fI,re,1 according to AAivIA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440. As with other premanufac-
[lIrt'cl windLlw and door units, aluminum windows and doors seldom present problems with
in,talbtion or operatiun as a result of dimensional tolerance problems.
Industry Standards
AAMA/WDMAjCSA 101/I.S. 2/A440, Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and
Unit Skylights (Schaumburg, IL: American Architectural Manufacturers Association,
2005).
Tolerances are shown in Figure 11-9. In addition to these size tolerances, the tolerances of
wall thicknesses and other cross-sectional dimensions of aluminum extrusions given in
ANSI H35.2 apply. Refer to Section 9-14. Note that the tolerances shown in Figure 11-9
do not apply to diagonal measurements.
Related Sections
9-14 Aluminum Rods, Bars, and Shapes
11-10 Steel Windows

Description
This section includes standard and detention steel window units that are manufactured
according to the Steel Window Institute's (SWI) Specifications. As with other premanu-
factured winclLlws, steel windows seldom present problems with installation or operation
as a result of tolerance problems.
Industry Standards
S~el \\'?indows, Specifications (Cleveland: Steel Window Institute, 2006).
Typical dimension tolerances trom a number of manufacturers are shown in Figure 11-10.
III .ldclitlon, S\VI speLificatiol1s require limits on gaps between metal when ventibtor
unit< dre locked ~1I1c1 te$ted before leaving the factory. For commercial side-hung ventila-
rCI" It ~holiid not be possible to heely insert, without fL'rcing, a steel feeler gauge 2 in. (50
;);(0 I wi,le by O.l120 in. (0.51 mm) thick between the in~ide contacts of more than 40 per-
cem (,t the C,)lltaLts. For rrojected venti!awrs, it shoilid nut be po,sible to insert a feeler
,,~Ilig(' ,'.OH Ill. ((l. i0 mm) thick l'etween the inside contacts or to freely insert a O.02ll-in.
\,.::.-) I ·lilm) feeler gauge between more than 4(' percent ,:,f the ((lnLactG.
Figure 11-9 Aluminum windows and sliding doors,:'; ,
1_ same.s height tolerances .1

,0" ._,.
±1/8" (3) for dimensions'
between 72" and 144".-; .
(between 1830 and """lUr.'"
(a) windows
same as height tolerances
I" -I
~========~========~--
±1/8" (3) for dlmenslon~,

between 72" and 144" ';".:,
(between 1830 and 3660L
(b) sUding glass doors

i Figure 11-10 Steel Windows
±1/16" (1.6)
I I
f
~ ±1/16" (1.6)
,
{
~ metal to metal contact
I////"~"""J V
between ventilators and
J frames: see text
f
I
[.
f
'"
~
~.
!
•.,,
For residential window units, it should not be possible to insert a feeler gauge 0.031 in.
(0.79 mm) thick between the inside contacts or to freely insert a 0.020-in. (0.51 mm)
feeler gauge between more than 40 percent of the contacts.
Framing sections made from cold-rolled steel must be constructed so that the glass in
each window will line in the same plane within a tolerance of ±X in. (±6 mm). Framing
members must be designed so that the deflection at the required wind load will not exceed
XlI of the span of the member. A 3 percent mill tolerance in the minimum weights of sec-
tions is allowed. Outside frame members must be designed to lap masonry by at least l1 in.
(13 mm).
, '" lolI-"""~"''-~"~ __...''?~''''~.~~~~~Ji~ ~~ _~~ .. ~ •
'qUI n
Part 2
Accommodating
Guidelines for Accommodating

The tolerances shown in Part 1 describe generally accepted industry standard variations
in the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of individual materials and construction
components. However, nearly all finished building construction is composed of two or
more materials, either in contact with each other or in close proximity. These materials
usually have different manufacturing and installation tolerances, come from different
sources, and have different capacities to be field-adjusted. To make matters more difficult,
some materials are field-fabricated, which can create problems by requiring relatively
large tolerances or can alleviate problems because they allow custom fitting. Therefore, it
is critical for the designer to consider the cumulative effect of different material and erec-
tion tolerances when developing details.
In addition to providing for tolerances, the designer must also account for building
movement and for required clearances. Clearance is the space between two components
and is normally provided to accommodate tolerances and building movement, but clear-
ance can also be required for attached materials, such as fireproofing on steel, or for work-
ing space as the building is constructed, such as space for a worker to tighten a bolt.
Tolerances can be accommodated in several ways. The first is by specifying and enforc-
ing tolerances as small as practical for field-fabricated components. (Prefabricated compo-
nent tolerances usually do not pose as much of a problem because industry-standard
tolerances are smaller and can be controlled in the shop.) While this method can mini-
mize assembly problems and improve the appearance of visible portions of the building,
tight tolerances generally increase construction costs and place an additional burden on
the architect or construction supervisor to make sure that all tolerances are being met.
Even strict supervision is not always practical. For example, under a strict interpretation
of the specifications, a contractor could be required to demolish an entire section of con-
crete construction because it exceeded the specified tolerances by ){ in., but this could se-
riously delay construction, lead to litigation, make for an adversarial work environment
for the remainder of the project, and increase cost unnecessarily.
The more practical method is to understand the reality of construction methods and
plan for them in the design and detailing of the building. This usually involves designing
joints and connections with sufficient clearance and adjustability to accommodate the ma-
jority of expected problems, including the fact that many times actual erection tolerances
exceed recommended industry-standard tolerances. If visual appearance is critical, the
joint or connection also can be designed to make irregularities less noticeable. For exam-
ple, a wide reveal between two surfaces can conceal a slight misalignment of surfaces, or an
overlapping joint easily hides variations in material length and installation tolerance.
256 Part 2: Accommodating Construction Tolerances
Figure P2-1 Types of Joints
(a) butt joints
(b) reveal joints
(c) covered joints
(d) sliding joints
(e) offset joints
Joint Design
A joint is a place where two or more materials come together, either rigidly:
with provision for movement. There are several basic methods of creating .
are better than others for accommodating construction tolerances and IJU'''~'''''·
ment. These are shown in Figure Pl-!.
A butt joint, Figure Pl-! (a), is normally used where two identical materials meet
no movement is expected. However, even two normally rigid pieces of material,
interior wood trim, can shrink or move just enough to be noticeable. When rnn,VPlneJU
expected and tolerances must be allowed, the two materials may be separated
the joint filled with sealant. When sealant is not required, a reveal joint, shown
Pl-! (b), can be used, the reveal concealing both minor misalignments of the
faces as well as allowing for some sideways movement.
Part 2: Accommodating Construction Tolerances 257
Figure P2-2 Sealant Joints
1/2"(13) 1/4" (6)

I~_~
! I --_I 1_-
(a) sealant as installed
3/8" (10)
1
joint expands 1/8" (3); joint expands 1/8" (3)

25% expandability of 25% expandability of
sealant allows for ±1/8" sealant allows for
movement only ±1/16" movement
(b) sealant when expanded
Covered joints, Figure P2-1 (c), can accommodate either small or large clearances and
movement, but they impose a particular appearance to the joint. Sliding joints, Figure P2-
1(d), also allow for a wide range of clearance and movement without requiring a third piece
of material. Offset joints, shown in Figure P-l(e), also articulate a joint and conceal minor
movement. However, if size or installation tolerances must be accommodated, a reveal or
space is required when the two materials are in the same plane or when sealant is required.
For nearly all exterior materials and many interior materials, a joint must be filled with
sealant_ The size of the joint is critical for proper performance. For example, if a joint that
is too narrow expands beyond the capability of the sealant, the sealant will fail. This is
shown in Figure P2-2.
The size of a joint depends on the movement expected, construction tolerances, and
the movement capability of the sealant. Joint movement may be caused by factors such as
thermal expansion and contraction, moisture absorption, and the various forms of struc-
turdl il1uvement, Construction tolerances inclucle both manufacturing and erection toler-
ances, The movement capability of the sealant is measured in the percentage trom
original ,i:e the sealant can expand or contract without failing. Common sealant perform-
ance, are 7!'i, 10, 12, and 25 percent. Some high-performance sealants are capable of 50
percent mo\'ement,
Joint width can be calculated using the following formula:
] = 100{eatL + S) + T
M
where:
] = Joint width, in. (mm)
e = Coefficient of thermal expansion, in./in./°F (mmJmmJ°C)
at = Expected temperature change, OF (DC)
L = Length of the material being joined, in. (mm)
M = Movement capability of sealant, in percent expressed as whole numbers·
T = Construction tolerance of the material, in. (mm)
S = Other expected movement caused by seismic forces or other nOlnthlerrnaL. ca1USl
For example, what would be the minimum joint width between two granitif'
each 5 ft. wide and exposed to a temperature change of 120 oF, if a 25 percent
ance sealant was used? Assume that the coefficient of thermal expansion for
4.7 X 1O~ and that no other movement is expected. From Sections 5-1 and 541
mensional tolerance for granite is ±~ in. (6 mm) and the relative alignment
±~ in. (3 mm). Joint width would be calculated as follows:
] = 100[{11 X 1~)120{60)] + 0.25 + 0.125
] = 0.1354 + 0.25 + 0.125

] = 0.5104 or about!.{ in.
Using the tolerance figures of ~ in. (6 mm) and ~ in. (3 mm) and adding
the worst case. This assumes that two adjacent panels will be oversized by the full
mm) dimension tolerance and one of the panels will be misaligned by ~ in. (3
ever, if this occurred, there would only be about a ~-in. (3-mm) joint at the
construction. Besides being less than the recommended minimum joint of ~ in.
any bead of sealant would be crushed when the panels expanded the remaining~·
mm), or the joint would break if the panels contracted and stre~ the sealant .
25 percent capability. In the case of only two panels, the joint size might have
larged to accommodate this worst case. However, as discussed in the next section,.
tistically improbable that all three conditions would occur simultaneously or
would only be one joint. Chances are greater that several panels would be iri
ate a number of joints, each of which could accommodate a portion of the
tolerance clearance.
Accumulated Tolerances
When several construction components are combined, it is entirely possible that
erance for each component will vary to the allowable maximum in the same direction:
instance, if the allowable tolerance on a stone panel is ±~ in. (6 mm) and five of them
installed in a row, the total length could be as much as 1~ in. (32 mm) shorter or
than designed (not accounting for joints). See Figure P2-3.
However, statistically it is unlikely that this would occur; some panels will be a
longer, some a little shorter than the specified size. Th~ statistically probable total
ance resulting from several combined tolerances can be calculated according to
lowing formula:
Part 2: Accommodating Construction Tolerances 259
Figure P2-3 Accumulated tolerances
total = 1-1/4" (32)
where T is the total tolerance and t1 2, t2 2, to tn 2 are the tolerances of the number, n, of
the individual components. When the tolerances of the individual components are differ-
ent in the plus-and-minus direction, two calculations are required to determine the prob-
able plus and minus tolerances. This formula is applicable where all components have the
same individual tolerances or where various materials and components are combined.
With this formula and the preceding example of five stone panels, the total tolerance
would be as follows:
T = JO.25 2 + 0.25 2 + 0.25 2 + 0.25 2 + 0.25 2
= 0.559" (about '%6 in.), in this case, slightly less than one-half of the tolerance based
on simple addition.
The following sections in Part 2 illustrate some common construction and detailing
situations and show how accumulated and multiple tolerances can be accommodated.
Figure 12-1 Concrete frame tolerances
0 ±O.1 % of height, .
above top of .'~ '.
foundation
'" 0
I
0
.. 0
I
0
I
c:
0
'iii
c:
(I)
E
'6
E
$
~
§
E
.~
-,...
+I
c:
(25.4m) 0
0
I i!E .~
•
0 (I)
~
I/)
E
'6
i
i
0
I
0
I
0
•
I
'"T-'
1- (25)~ 1- (25)
(a) tolerances of multiple columns (b) horizontal tolerance of concrete elemenl$i~ .

Chapter 12
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Systems
12-1 Concrete Frame Tolerances

I"~:·
There are several tolerances for the lateral alignment of the structural frame of a cast-in-
place building as stated in ACI 117, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction
and Materials. In general, columns, walls, and edges of slabs can vary as much as 1 in. (25
mm), and the edges of horizontal openings can vary as much as X in. (13 mm). Any mate-
rial adjacent or connected to a concrete frame must take these tolerances into account.
ACI 117 specifically states that tolerances are not cumulative and that the most restric-
tive tolerance controls. The application of a location tolerance, as discussed in Section 2-
',J-
9, cannot be used to increase the plumb tolerance, discussed in Section 2-7, nor can a
member thickness tolerance increase other tolerances. For example, the lateral position
tolerance is not cumulative along several columns or walls. As shown in Figure 12-1(a},
the total length of a frame should vary no more than 1 in. (25 mm) one way or the other.
A common problem in attaching a facing material, such as brick veneer or curtain
wall, to a concrete frame is the misaligrunent of the faces of the concrete. As shown in Fig-
ure 12-1 (b) and described in Section 2-7, the faces of the concrete, columns, or walls can
vary from plumb no more than the lesser of OJ percent of the height from the top of the
foundation or up to 1 in. (25 mm) maximum on either side of the theoretical line for
heights under 83 ft., 4 in. (25.4 m). For heights over this, the deviation can be no more
than 0.1 percent (Kcoo) times the height (up to a maximum of 6 in. or 152 mm). This cre-
ates a total required clearance envelope of 2 in. (51 mm) for buildings under 83 ft., 4 in.
(25.4 m) and much more for higher buildings, as shown in Figure 12-l(b}. However, be-
tween any two adjacent floors, the misalignment cannot exceed ±OJ percent over a dis-
tance of 10 ft. (3 m) or ±0.2 percent for the outside comer of an exposed comer column
or in a contraction joint groove in concrete exposed to view. A percentage of OJ is about
%in. in 10ft. (10 mm in 3 m). Refer to the following sections in this chapter for common
methods of accommodating concrete frame misalignments.
When exposed, the outside comers of exterior columns and control joint grooves in
concrete have a tighter tolerance. They can vary from plumb no more than the lesser of
0.2 percent or ±X in. (13 mm) for building heights 83 ft., 4 in. (25.4 m) or less and no more
than the lesser of 0.05 percent (X.coo) of the height, or a maximum of 3 in. (76 mm), for
buildings over 83 ft., 4 in. (25.4 m). (See Section 2-7.)
For level alignment, or the position of the tops and bottoms of slabs and beams, the tol-
erance is ±X in. (19 mm) from the specified elevation before the removal of supporting
shores. Even though the thickness of slabs or the depth of beams can vary (see Section 2-
Figure 12-2 Joint tolerances
construction joint, sawcut, ~

and weakened plane \.. ±314" (19)
embedments
o
6", 0....
0 0
I~ <'.
~ 1\
o~
\7
0
......------4----------0----0 -------------:;
.d 0 0 "'v .::j "'v
o \7 7\7<1 0
V 0 ~ 007
(a) construction and control joints
~I..~--+I..·~------------seete~
±1/S" (3) for grooves 2" (51) or less
±1/4" (6) for grooves 2" to 12" (51 to 305)
(b) vertical control jOint grooves
~
p ... 0
b
0
/ " '"LI o¢ 0
of;> 0
v
0
V
,,>0 I>. t::.. , 0
<l ~
. 1>.-I o~ 0
~~o 'I> ~ o~'"
~
,.O~
0
-
-..
0 r>-
,v
.9. ,..-... v 0-- 0 {7 0
~o~""0<l~t::..' ~ --b/J,¢f;>o 00 v
0
--Q.--cr----::J""V
-~----;;:.~-;; ~"C:;x=====;
o <\ 0 - '1>0 O~ "I ':. -0 c> Q
I
f-o....- - - - - ±314" (19)
(c) expansion joints

Chapter 12: Cast-in-Place Concrete Systems 263
t
~ 8), the final position of the member must fall within this X-in. (19-mm) tolerance. The
*k·
tolerance is not cumulative from floor to floor. When concrete slabs are poured on struc-
,', tural steel or precast concrete, the final tolerance is determined by the tolerance of the
supporting steel or precast concrete in addition to the variation in slab thickness, as dis-
cussed in Section 2-8.
Although concrete tolerances have been set by the American Concrete Institute, ex-
perience has shown that many times actual construction exceeds recommended toler-
ances, even when specifically written into the specifications. When conditions warrant,
• tighter tolerances may need to be specified and carefully controlled as construction pro-
gresses, even though this may increase costs beyond what normal tolerances would.
Related Sections
12-2 Joint Tolerances

. Cast-in-place concrete joints include construction, control, isolation, expansion, and
\ building joints. The location tolerance of these joints, either in the horizontal or vertical
1. plane, varies depending on the type of joint and whether or not it is exposed to view.
~ As shown in Figure 12-2(a), construction joints, saw cuts, control joints, and weak-
! ened plane embedments can vary X in. (19 mm) from their location on the plans. The de-
t viation from plumb for control joint grooves exposed to view cannot exceed the lesser of
[ 0.2 percent of the height from the top of the foundation or up to l1 in. (13 mm) maximum
t for heights under 83 ft., 4 in. (25.4 m). For heights over this, the deviation can be no more
than 0.05 percent (l1.ooo) times the height (up to a maximum of 3 in. or 76 mm).
The width of grooves must be within li in. (3 mm) for grooves 2 in. (51 mm) or less in
width and within){ in. (6 mm) for grooves from 2 to 12 in. wide (51 mm to 305 mm).
The relative alignment of the faces of the two separate sections of concrete can vary
depending on which class of surface is specified. These are summarized in Table 12.1. Class
A surfaces are those prominently exposed to public view where appearance is of special
importance. Class B surfaces are for coarse-textured concrete intended for plaster, stucco,
or similar coverings. Class C is the general standard for exposed surfaces where other fin-
ishes are not specified. Class 0 surfaces are for concealed concrete elements where rough-
ness is not objectionable. For walls poured in two separate operations, such as the
expansion joint shown in Figure 12-2(c), alignment is usually not a problem because the
cured portion of the wall is used to align the formwork for the second pour.
Related Sections
Table 12-1 Offset between adjacent

pieces of fonnwork facing
Class of surface Offset tolerance, in (mm)

Class A ±~ (3)
Class B ±~ (6)
ClassC ±11 (13)
Class D ±1 (25)
Source: CompiledfromACI 117
12-3 Detailing for Cast-in-Place and

Systems
Cast-in-place and precast co.ncrete are no.rmally used to.gether when precast
panels are supported with a cast-in-place structural frame o.r when Co.lumns ate .
by cast-in-place fo.undatio.ns. Because both systems have relatively large to.U~rarlc.4
nectio.n detailing must acco.mmodate the Wo.rst expected co.mbinatio.n o.f tol.,,,,,.,,,..
still pro.viding fo.r erectio.n clearances and minimizing erectio.n time.
A co.mmo.n co.nditio.n is sho.wn in Figure 12-3(a), where a pre.cast cladding
tached to. a cast-in-place beam. This detail sho.WS o.nly o.ne o.f many possible,
co.mmodate to.lerances. In additio.n to. clip angles ancho.red to. the precast pan~
shims, angles, channels, and o.ther support members can be cast into. the
Vertical adjustment can also be acco.mplished with leveling bolts instead of
reco.mmended design clearance is 1~ in. (38 mm). This allo.ws fo.r the beam
the maximum o.f 1 in. (25 mm) and fo.r the panel thickness to. be o.ver by the
in. (6 mm). (See Sectio.n 2~12.)
To. minimize Co.st, the co.nnectio.ns sho.uld be designed to. minimize the time
must be held in place with a crane while adjustments and fastening are 11li:l1UC'.·."""".
tio.ns sho.uld also be designed to. be made o.n the to.P o.f the co.ncrete frame so:acces
required between the back o.f the panel and the face o.f the beam.
Fo.r ho.rizontal alignment o.f several panels within a cast-in-place
vertical jo.ints are typically used to. acco.mmodate to.lerance pro.blems, with
co.mmodating a portio.n o.f the to.tal expected to.lerance. Because it: is highlit.
all panels will be either o.versizedor undersized. by the maxim1llI1
fo.rmula described in the introduction: to. Part 2 can be used to' estimate me.
likely fro.m several individUal panels. Procedures fo.r detenUining jo.int
given in the introductio.n to. Part 2.
Ano.ther co.nditio.n is sho.wn in Figure 12-3(b), where a precast column Is
a cast-in-place footing. The footing length must be designed to. acc:ommo.date,·
variatio.ns in length o.f the co.lumn and placement to.lerances o.f the footing whil~
ing fo.r sufficient clearance fo.r gro.uting under the base plate cast o.nto. the UUl.LUlIll.VA
Co.lumn. The co.lumn length may vary by Min. (13 mm), and the to.P o.f the
vary Min. (13 mm) higher than specified o.r as much as 2 in. (51 mm) Io.wer. l'\SliiUU1ll:'
haunch is set at its intended elevatio.n, the Wo.rst case when allo.wing far grautiIl#'J'I
be when the co.lumn is M in. too Io.ng and the footing is M in. too high;
,
,i
Figure 12-3 Detailing for cast-in-place and precast systems
/ steel tube anchored

/ ' to precast panel;
// welded to base plate
// after erection and
I-L-_-_-_-_-_-_-_;..._-_-_-_--.., adjustment
I
0/
I
I
l\
I
~
~
, ~
(7
'i7 C>
±3/4" (19)
cast-in-place
slab tolerance
~
I
I
I if
b
r ~ if
I 6.
I V
4I
f
C::,..
A
L:::,.
4
C::,..
A
I C:>- C:>-
I
I
I
d O;. Q
~f--t- +1" (25) cast-in-place
pa~~'---l
+ 1/4" (6)
thickness tOleran~
f- beam tolerance
~----- -1" (25) cast-in-place
beam tolerance
1" (25) minimum clearance;

1 1/2" (38) preferred
(a) panel to beam connection
precast column - - - I
It____);ze,~~~ - - t - - -_ _ _..... t_ design clearance:

minimum 3/4" (19)
grout space r-r------.. .
<'i
~=-=~'-----. - - - j - - - - - . - - 1 3/4" (44)
<] [> ,
top of footing
{7 tolerance: +1/2" (13)
(b) column to footing connection

(19-mm) grout space is required, the total required clearance should be IX i.ri:.
In case the column is l1 in. short and the footing is 2 in. below the specified
there will be a potential grout space of3~ in. (83 mm). If this is too much, it
creased by setting the haunch at an acceptable l1 in. (13 mm) below its U1L'<OU'!CU
(see Section 2-23) and shimming at the haunch.
In both of these examples, the relevant tolerances for each system must be
along with any required clearances for erection, insulation, mechanical and
terface, or other construction components. Then the extreme conditions must
mined based on the worst-case tolerances. Finally, the connection or joint·
designed to accommodate all the required tolerances and clearances. If the
uation results in a connection that is too large for economical construction; a
must be made concerning whether to decrease the tolerances, possibly
struction costs, or recognize that some compromises in the position, plumb•..
some elements may need to be made.
Related Sections
2-5 Footings
12-4 Detailing Brick on Cast-in-Place'

Concrete
When brick and cast-in-place concrete are used together, the construction
the concrete frame usually dictates the method of detailing. Dimensional
tolerances of brick are relatively minor, as described in Section 4-5. At most.
an individual, standard-size brick may be out of specified plane by about ~2 in;
a result of a worst-case combination of size and warp tolerance.
When brick is laid as an exterior veneer to a backup wall of other ",,,.n",nr,,
studs in a one-story building, the recommended 2-in. (50-mm) cavity betwecmt
adequate to accommodate any minor tolerance of brick manufacturing or
When brick is used with multistory cast-In-place concrete buildings. the
the columns, beams, and slabs may vary as much as 1 in. (25 mm,) in either
Because brick is normally supported at each floor line: in multistory
nection and support systems must be designed to acc()rntnodate the ~OIlctl~ttJ
artce as well as provide the required clearance between the back of the
structural frame and whatever backup wall is used. The Brick InduStrynJ)l>U\..J4~'J._'
mends that brick veneer should vary no more than l1 in. (13 mm) out of plumb.
masons lay up walls to an even closer plumb tolerance.
Figure 12-4 shows a common brick veneer support system using a shelf angle
the concrete frame. The shelf angle is installed over a compressible filler so mall:~ml~
flection of the wall above can occur without bearing on the brick below and
collapsing it. Because the actual elevation of the top of the last brick below the
may vary slightly, the shelf angle must be adjustable in the vertical direction. ..
Figure 12-4 Detailing brick on cast-in-place concrete
concrete insert with

wedge bolt
1" (25) maximum

3/4" (19) face of brick shimming recommended,
to edge of angle, min; if required
1/3 the brick width, max.
' - - - l - - - /ine of backup wall
2" (50) clear space recommended

between back of brick and beam
or backup wall
ally accomplished with a concrete insert with a wedge bolt or with slotted holes in the ver-
tical leg of the angle.
Horizontal adjustment is made by shimming behind the angle if necessary. The maxi-
mum recommended shimming distance is 1 in. (25 mm), which can accommodate the
maximum concrete frame tolerance toward the inside. However, horseshoe-shaped shims
(not washers) should be used with a length about equal to the length of the vertical leg of
the angle so there is full bearing against the concrete. If the concrete frame is constructed
at the theoretical location, no shimming will be necessary. If the concrete beam extends
too far outward, some of the horizontal leg of the angle can be slid farther outward, but the
minimum X- in. (19-mm) recess should not be decreased so there is adequate room for ap-
plying the sealant. In extreme cases, an angle with a shorter horizontal leg may be used,
subject to engineering review.
Note that potential problems can arise if the clearance becomes so small that there is
not adequate space for the bolt head, flashing, and any material that is used to prevent the
bolt head from puncturing the flashing. Depending on the thickness of the angle, the size
of the fastener, and the method of flashing, the 2-in. clearance may need to be increased,
especially in tall buildings. This also provides extra space to allow for oversize manufactur-
ing tolerances of the brick.
·a}'t*","'~~;.;.;~_~~4_""'~'S1_~(~:!"\o;<;.-.~...;lIi~~'.~~'t::F.;. "t.~I$i1..?~"'~ , - > ~
, , • , t ~ 1! I
Related Sections
15-2 Detailing Brick and Concrete Masonry Systems
Figure 12-5 Detailing for stone on concrete ~\lC!~'I'a"',.,.ii
-.jf;X?l--- masonry backup
additional shimming,
if required
toe bar
compressible
filler 1" (25) outward
(max) of
of concrete beam
adjusf$le
anchor at edges
stone panels;
optional location at-
top of panel
stone thickness tolerance;

varies with stone type
12-5 Detailing for Stone on Concrete Systems

To maintain the installation tolerances for granite, marble, and limestone shown in Sec-
tions 5-4 and 5-5, adequate clearances and adjustable connections must be detailed when
stone is attached to concrete. Detailing for stone is similar to brick, but there are some im-
portant differences. Among them are the wider variety of anchoring systems available,
larger thickness tolerances, and the ability for stone panels to be installed slightly out of
plumb (within the standards described in Sections 5-4 and 5-5) along the height of a build-
ing to partially accommodate minor irregularities of the frame, if absolutely necessary.
Figure 12-5 shows a typical gravity support and anchor at a spandrel beam. This is the
most critical connection to accommodate the structural frame tolerances and the stone
tolerances. A variety of lateral anchors are available for various types of backup walls,
which provide for sufficient adjustment to maintain the erection tolerances shown in Sec-
tions 5-4 and 5-5. As with brick, vertical deviations of the concrete frame are accommo-
dated with adjustable concrete inserts or slotted angles. Deviations perpendicular to the
building face are taken up by shimming the support angles. Additional vertical adjust-
ment can be made by shimming between the angle and the bottom edge of the stone.
When determining the minimum design clearance, the following tolerances and con-
struction elements must be combined: the ±1-in. (25-mm) tolerance of the face of the
concrete beam or wall; the thickness of the stone, which will vary depending on the type
of stone and thickness (see Sections 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3); the thickness of the angle; the size
of the bolt head; working space required for erection and fastening; and any flashing, weep
tubes, or other accessories behind the stone.
As with precast panels, horizontal joints and stone movement are normally accommo-
dated by designing the vertical joints between stone sections large enough to absorb both
movement and dimensional tolerances of the stone and concrete frame. Refer to the in-
troduction to Part 2 for procedures for estimating total expected tolerance of several pan-
els and the method for calculating joint width.
Because Figure 12-5 shows a pressure-relieving joint, there is a separate lateral anchor
for the bottom panel. If the joint does not have to accommodate deflection of the panel
above or building movement, both gravity anchorage of the upper panel and lateral an-
chorage of the lower panel can be made with the same connection.
Because the exact method of anchorage varies with the type of structural frame, the
type of stone, loading, and other factors, along with the preferences of individual fabrica-
tors and installers, final details should be verified with the stone fabricator and contractor.
Related Sections
,,' ,
i, Itt I tit
Figure 12-6 Detailing for curtain walls on concrete fi...,..'._,"
±1/S" out of plumb in 12'
tt (3 in 3660)
- - t - - - + - - - - - - - - - - curtain wall assembly
r--- isolator pad
, . . - - - - vertically slotted bolt hole
© field weld for position;

shim if required
©
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ~-+------ ±1" (25) for buildings less than:.'
I 83'~" (25.4 m) high; .' .. '
I
I ±1/1000 times height for tallQI'
see Section 2-7 '
±O.3% maximum deviation 1ft

over 10' (3m) . .
minimum 2" (SO) this Is about 3/S" (10)

actual clearance
no scale
12-6 Detailing for Curtain Walls on Concrete

Frames
If adequate allowance is made for concrete frame tolerances and these tolerances are con-
trolled during construction, most curtain walls can be installed to the tolerances indicated
in Section B-2. There must be provisions for adjustment in three directions: vertical, hor-
izontal, and lateral. In addition, a minimum clearance of 2 in. (50 mm) between the cur-
tain wall and the frame is recommended for curtain wall construction. If adjustment and
clearances are provided, then the minor manufacturing and fabrication tolerances of the
curtain wall can be accommodated, as well as any movement of the building frame and ex-
pansion and contraction of the curtain wall. In extreme cases, where the frame exceeds
tolerances, the curtain wall can be installed slightly out of plumb, following the line of the
frame along the height of the building.
Figure 12-6 shows one typical method of accommodating tolerances. The exact detail
varies with the type of curtain wall used, the interior finishes, and other construction de-
tails. The curtain wall manufacturer and structural engineer should be consulted for rec-
ommended details and for the tolerances that the manufacturer's system requires.
Generally, the connection should be made at the top of the slab to make erection easier.
Serrated angles and bolts, T-shaped clips, slotted holes, embedded anchors, and shims can
all be used to provide the necessary adjustments. When shims are used, the height of the
shim stack should not exceed the diameter of the fastener securing the anchor. If the an-
chor must be higher, special shims and connection details may be required.
Lateral tolerances of the frame can be accommodated by proper design of the vertical
joints of the curtain wall. The lateral frame tolerance can be up to 1 in. (25 mm) between
columns or in the total length of the building. At individual connectors, lateral alignment
can be made by field welding clip angles, with slotted bolt holes or other means. Refer to
the introduction to Part 2 for joint design procedures.
Related Sections
11 ~ ~~~~-"j"""" •
[
I I d "
Figure 12-7 Detailing doors in cast-in-place cone
I.. -112" (-13) ..
(a) opening tolerances
~++----+1/2" (13)
~-----1/4" (6)
-,"",-"""--'''-''-oL-'----l--'-l ~-- +1116' (1.6), _<111. .' . , . . . .'
112" (13) recommended

nominal clearance at jambs
1" (25) nominal clearance at head
(b) jamb detail

12-7 Detailing Doors in Cast-in-Place

Concrete
In most construction, only steel or aluminum door frames are used with cast-in-place con-
crete. If wood frames are used, there is usually a rough wood buck placed between the two
materials, which can be trimmed or shimmed to accommodate the concrete tolerances.
Steel frames are fixed in size, so the frame detail and clearance are critical to sizing the
opening to allow for tolerances and to provide space for a good sealant joint.
Figure 12-7 shows the possible tolerances of both the concrete opening and a steel
frame. The width of the concrete opening may deviate up to )1 in. (6 mm) inward or X in.
(6 mm) on each side. The opening width may also deviation up to 1 in. (25 mm) outward
or)1 in. (13 mm) on each side. The steel frame may deviate up to X6 in. (1.6 mm) outward
and Y64 in. (1.2 mm) inward. This is a combination of frame and steel frame opening toler-
ances as outlined in Section 11-1. The worst case would be when the frame is larger and
the concrete opening is smaller. These combined tolerances are X6 in. (8 mm). If a nomi-
nal ~-in. (13-mm) clearance were detailed, there would be X6-in. (5 mm) gap for applying
sealant.
The sides of the opening could also slope, but ACI requirements do not allow toler-
ances to be cumulative. The allowable deviation from plane for an opening is 0.3 percent
of the height. This translates to about X in. (6 mm) in a 7-ft. (2,134-mm) door opening
height, which is within the allowable ACI opening size tolerances.
The vertical portion of the opening can vary as much as 1 in. (25 mm) oversize and)1
in. (13 mm) undersize. Because the worst-case combined tolerances of the concrete and
the door frame need to be accommodated in the head detail only, the clearance of the
head joint needs to be increased by an additional %in. (10 mm) over the J1 in. (13 mm)
design clearance in the jamb details in order to allow for a }\6-in. (8-mm) gap for sealant.
Therefore, a minimum lis-in. (22-mm) design dimension is required between the top of the
frame and the concrete opening. Detailing a full i-in. (25-mm) gap between the frame
and the concrete would allow for a }16-in. (ll-mm) gap for sealant if the worst combined
tolerances existed. The extra tolerance requirement of %in. (10 mm) for opening height
could also be accommodated in the sill detail.
Related Sections
12-8 Detailing windows in cast-in-place "nll"\,,~a"'.o!'II";'J:"'",
+1"
-1/2" (-13)
specified
opening
steel or aluminum
window size-see text
(b) fitting frames in openings (c) accommodating fixed window

12-8 Detailing Windows in Cast-in-Place

Concrete
l .~
Several types of windows can be used in cast-in-place concrete. These include steel, alu-
minum, and wood. Standard details for steel and aluminum windows are usually the most
sensitive to construction tolerances because these window types are commonly placed di-
rectly in the opening. When wood windows are used, they are usually framed into a rough
wood buck and the exterior and interior joints are covered with some type of trim, which
conceals any accommodation for construction tolerances. Only steel and aluminum win-
dows are considered here.
For a window opening, the finished size can be as much as ~ in. (13 mm) too small or
1 in. (25 mm) too large. This means a possible variation of X in. (6 mm) inward and ~ in.
(13 mm) outward for any jamb, head, or sill section. See Figure 12-8(a). This does not in-
clude any variation in plumb or level for any of the four sides. Although ACI require-
ments state that tolerances are not cumulative, some additional variation is possible.
If an aluminum window is used, one jamb may be as much as)16 in. (1.6 mm) large (see
Section 11-9) and the concrete opening may be as much as X in. (6 mm) too small. If a
nominal X-in. (6-mm) clearance were provided, this would not provide sufficient space for
sealant. As with doors, a minimum !1-in. (30-mm) nominal clearance is a better choice.
This means that the entire opening should be dimensioned 1 in. (25 mm) larger than the
specified width of the frame. See Figure 12-8(b). For storefronts, a !1-in. (13-mm) clear-
ance between framing and the concrete on each jamb is recommended, or a total opening
width 1 in. (25 mm) larger than the storefront framing.
Although misformed openings are not a problem if each is field-measured for a custom
window, this is generally not the case. One method of accommodating fixed window sizes
is shown in Figure 12-8(c). If a notch is cast in the concrete opening, both in or out toler-
ances can be concealed and the joint can be properly sealed without oversizing the sealant
joint. Although this increases form work costs slightly, in some cases it is a preferable op-
tion.
Related Sections
11-10 Steel Windows
... -~r~_~v.,~;:J«",,!;".,.-~\ ~~~'l.i'i~~ - ~ ,., -~, . ' ,~
q . t
Figure 13-1 Combined precast concrete frame
desIgn distance less 1" (25)
I.. panel .. I
±1/S" (3) urider
10' (3050) wide
(a) combined frame tolerances
'0 ±1/4" (6) archItectural edges

~ "/2' (13) noncrl1lcaJ edges
/i .
~r
II double tee
11 ~,e~_~~__ __________t
exposed
precast beam
~-+-- column grid line datum
(b) beam/double tee connection

Chapter 13
Precast Concrete Systems
13-1 Combined Precast Concrete Frame

Tolerances
There are three types of tolerances in precast work that, when combined, can affect the
performance and appearance of a structure: product tolerances, erections tolerances, and
interfacing tolerances. Product and erection tolerances are given in Chapter 2. Interfacing
tolerances are the clearances required for joining different materials in contact with or in
close proximity to the precast work. Interface tolerances also allow for building move-
ment. Because precast work has larger tolerances than many other materials connected to
it, such as masonry, doors, and windows, designing connections, joints, and details is crit-
ical to a successful project. This chapter describes some of the more common types of in-
terfaces.
When precast is joined to other precast work, the product tolerances mayor may not
be additive to the erection tolerances depending on what part of the precast governs erec-
tion. When erection tolerances govern the setting of a primary control surface of a mem-
ber, that erection tolerance is not additive to the product tolerances. A primary control
surface is a surface on a precast element that is dimensionally set and controlled during the
erection process, Two examples are the exposed face of an architectural panel and the el-
evation of a bearing haunch on a column.
However, erection tolerances of secondary control surfaces and product tolerances are
additive. A secondary control surface is one that is dependent on the location tolerance of
the primary control surface. For example, if the top of an exposed L-shaped beam is desig-
nated as the primary control surface for purposes of appearance, the tolerance for the sec-
ondary control surface of the bearing ledge is added to the dimensional tolerance from the
top of the beam to the bearing ledge.
Figure 13-1(a) shows one typical example of combined frame tolerances. Two nonex-
posed columns may be erected to within ~ in. (13 mm) of their designed locations, creat-
ing a possible total variance of 1 in. (25 mm). See Section 2-23 for column erection
tolerances. The panels enclosing the frame would have to be adjusted at the joints in order
to accommodate the frame tolerances as well as the width of the panels. In an extreme
case the panels could be shifted toward the corners of the building to accommodate a large
difference. Refer to the introduction to Part 2 for information on calculating combined
tolerances.
Figure 13-1 (b) illustrates a case where the primary control surface would have to be
designated. In this case the floor elevation might be the controlling factor for the erection
of the double tee, while the primary control surface for the exposed beam might be the
bottom of the beam so it aligns with adjacent construction. Sufficient clearance for the
bearing pad would then have to be determined to accommodate both of these tolerances:
the product size tolerance of both beam and double tee as well as the combined erection
•l
; , , I
I '~
tolerances of the bottom of the double tee and the bearing elevation of the ~"'I1I''''J
clearance between the inside of the beam and the end of the double tee also Cle{lertc:iS
erection tolerances and the product tolerances of both beam and double tee.

Joints are sized to allow for building movement as well as to accommodate LJUJ'UU'"L
erection tolerances. In addition, joints between precast elements have their own
ance. These apply primarily to exposed wall panels. The tolerances of a joint aepenu'
whether it is part of an architectural panel, an exposed structural wall panel. or a
posed structural panel.
Figure 13-2 Joint tolerances
:t1/4" (6) architectural panels

:t3l8" (10) structural panels
:t1/4" (6)

:t3l8" (10) exposed structural wall panels
:t3l4" (19) nonexposed structural wall panels
minimum
recommended
joint size: 314" (19)
(a) panel jOints

:t3l8" (10) exposed structural panels
(b) miter joints

"'..
As shown in Figure 13-2(a), joints between panels can vary between ±X in. (6 mm) for
architectural panels to ±% in (9.5 mm) for structural panels. False joints may be expected
to fall within ±X in. (6 mm) from the designated location as measured from the edge of a
panel.
The alignment between two panels varies from ±X in. (6 mm) for architectural panels
to a maximum of ±X in. (19 mm) for nonexposed structural wall panels. If the outside sur-
face is designated as a primary control surface, this possible lateral variation must be taken
into account when the clearance is calculated between the back of the panel and the
structural frame, but it would not be additive to the product thickness tolerance. Cham-
fered or reveal joints should be used to conceal misalignment.
Usually, joints are sized so that product and erection tolerances can be apportioned
among the joints. Refer to the introduction to Part 2 for the method of doing this. Gener-
ally, a X-in. (19-mm) joint between panels is considered as a minimum to account for tol-
erances and building movement while still providing a large enough joint for sealant.
Figure 13-2(b) illustrates the possible tolerances in a miter joint. Some accumulated
panel tolerances can be accommodated with a miter joint, but if large deviations along a
series of panel are expected and if the variation is designed to be taken up at the comers
of the building, a quirk miter should not be used. Some type of an overlapping joint is a
better alternative. See Section 13-3.
Related Sections
13-3 Detailing for Precast Systems

Most precast-to-precast tolerances can be easily accommodated by using some basic de-
sign concepts, as shown in Figure 13-3. Either reveal joints or chamfered joints should be
used and butt joints avoided. These minimize any minor misalignments by creating a
strong shadow line at each joint. See Figure 13-3(a).
If possible, create overlapping joints at the comers to accommodate accumulated
panel tolerances along the length of the building as illustrated in Figure 13-3(b). Avoid
miter joints, because these have very little room for adjustment.
Spanning across beams and exposed structural columns with spandrel panels and infill
panels is preferable to placing panels within the frame. See Figure 13-3(c). The accumu-
lated tolerances of the columns and panels may result in uneven or oversized joints. If ar-
ticulated columns or beams lines are desired, they can be covered with separate precast
architectural panels.
As shown in Figure 13-3(d), eave beams can be used to accommodate inaccuracies in
panel length and erection tolerances at the roof line in much the same way as comer pan-
els are used. Because eave beams span across several panels, they can also accommodate
reglets for flashing more accurately than trying to align reglets at each panel joint.
When non-load-bearing panels are attached to a structural frame, only two points of bear-
ing should be designed into the panel support system, as illustrated in Figure 13-3(e). These
are the points where erection tolerances are accommodated, usually with shims or leveling
bolts. Various rypes of tieback connections are used at other points to provide lateral support
while accommodating product and erection tolerances and allowing for panel movement.
J, ~):.~'.,!;,;;..fi""~~!1;.~~,,~.!;~,,~.~~~ ... ,w~~~J,lI,;4~;;I/A~~~~~,," '
. , I I
Figure 13-3 Detailing for Precast Systems
I
.. ..
(a) joint design (b) corner conditions
----tle-oac:K connectlon .
span panels across frame
....._ - precast panel
avoid panels within the frame
(c) spandrel panels
tie-back connection
(d) eave beams (e) panel connections

Related Sections
• Section 2-16 Stairs
Section 2-27 Precast Pilings
13-1 Combined Precast Concrete Frame Tolerances
13-4 Detailing for Precast and Steel Systems

Detailing combined precast and steel systems can be difficult because the accumulated
tolerances can be substantial and tolerances for both systems vary depending on the size
and type of member. For example, wide-flange tolerances vary with length and size of
flange, and vertical alignment of the frame varies with building height. Each detail has to
be evaluated individually based on product tolerances, erection tolerances, anticipated
building movement, clearance for fireproofing, structural adequacy, and cost.
Figure 13-4 illustrates a common condition where an architectural precast panel is at-
tached to a steel frame in a perfectly plumb condition for the entire height of the build-
ing. To determine the horizontal design clearance required between the back of the
precast panel and the outside edge of the beam and also the possible minimum and maxi-
mum variation in the bearing length of the precast anchor, several tolerances must be ac-
commodated.
First, erection tolerances of the steel are the most critical. In a building up to 20 stories
high, the steel may vary as much as 1 in. (25 mm) out (toward the building line) and 2 in.
(50 mm) in (away from the building line). See Section 3-6 for exact values. Beam size tol-
erances and beam sweep could add to these distances, but current AISC codes (AISC
303) state that the accumulation of mill and fabrication tolerances shall not cause the
erection tolerances to be exceeded. Second, the precast thickness can vary by X in. (6
mm), and precast bowing could add about %in. (3 mm) for as-ft. (1525-mm) panel. If the
outside face was the primary control surface, this additional %in. (10 mm) would need to
be accommodated in the clearance space. These tolerances add up to a total minimum
clearance of 1}1; in. (435mm), not accounting for fireproofing and building movement and
assuming the edge of the columns did not extend beyond the edge of the beam flange.
If the maximum possible clearance is calculated using this 1%-in. (35-mm) design clear-
ance, in the worst case, the edge of the steel will be 3X in. (95 mm) from the back of the
precast panel if the steel deviates away from the building line and the panel deviates out-
ward. Using these maximum inward and outward deviations, panel anchors would have to
accommodate a 3%-in. (92-mm) adjustment. Additional clearance for fireproofing would
add to this.
For buildings over 20 stories high, the design clearance and subsequent anchor adjust-
ments would need to be increased by an additional 2 in. (51 mm) if the face of the panel
was to remain plumb. Because of the large amount adjustment required, structural consid-
erations, and cost, it is generally impractical in tall buildings to maintain perfectly plumb
precast panels. In these cases the precast concrete panels usually follow the steel frame.
The design clearance between the floor slab and the precast anchor can be estimated
in a similar way. For example, the top of the beam can be set %6 in. (8 mm) high and cam-
ber can add another %in. (10 mm).
In all cases, the architect, engineer, and precast supplier and erector should review tol-
erance and clearance requirements before fabrication begins. The Precast/Prestressed
.- ~'''''-'''''*-.~ W~-'b<<"-,,,.,\WtJ',~~Y~~*,~::t4~~-Jj¥'t'0:tfi~~~"f'~~ ~ ~~~~~~
~ ~ ; ~ I ~
Figure 13-4 Detailing for precast and steel system
--±112" (13) erection tolerance

of primary control surface
weld plate as required

to anchor connector to
steel beam
provide bearing at
centerline of beam
o <1 4 - 0
ILl. - 0 t:::..
I ... 0 4 0t>
I----;;re.-Sl--v
4_~_..s> __4 __
b10ck0ut In slab required

if concrete poured prior to
precast installation
shims or
leveling bolt
fireproofing
If-- 2"buildings
(SO) max. in for .
up to 20 sto~iEi$l,
r------------ 1" (25) out, max.
Concrete Institute recommends a minimum clearance of IX in. (38 mm) between the
back of the precast panel and the surface of the fireproofing. Refer to MNL 135-00 Toler-
ance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction for more information on in-
terfacing tolerances.
Related Sections
14-4 Detailing for Precast on Steel
13-5 Detailing Masonry and Precast Systems

When masonry and precast concrete are used together, the construction tolerance of the
precast frame usually dictates the method of detailing. Dimensional and distortion toler-
ances of concrete block and brick are relatively minor, as described in Sections 4-1 and 4-
5. At most, an individual concrete block may be ~ in. (3 mm) larger or smaller than
specified. Tolerance standards of the American Concrete Institute, American Society of
Civil Engineers, and The Masonry Society (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) require ma-
sonry walls to be laid up to within a iX-in. (13-mm) vertical alignment along the total
height of the wall, with a maximum vertical misalignment of X in. in any lO-ft. section
(6.4 mm in 3.05 m). The top of bearing walls must be within X in. (13 mm) of the speci-
fied elevation.
Figure 13-5 shows one of many possible combinations of masonry and precast: a dou-
ble tee supported by a reinforced concrete block wall with a self-supporting brick veneer.
The end of the double tee (or any other floor or roof member used) should not extend into
the recommended 2-in. (50-mm) cavity, so the minimum clearance between the end of
the tee and the outside face of the block wall should be detennined.
In the worst case, the block wall could slope inward up to X in. (13 mm) and the tee
could be 1 in. (25 mm) too long, so a total clearance of IX in. (38 mm) could be specified.
(Other types of members, such as hollow-core slabs, have other length tolerances.) The
wall and tee might also vary in opposite directions at some point along the wall, so the 1
X-in. design clearance added to a X-in. outward slope of wall and a tee that is 1 in. short
could result in as much as a 3X-in. (83-mm) clearance, leaving only a 4%-in. (1ll-mm)
bearing surface on a standard 8-in. block. This is too small and results in eccentric bearing
on the wall, creating structural problems or requiring an expensive connection and addi-
tional wall reinforcing. To alleviate this problem, the minimum design clearance could be
reduced to 1 in. and the recommended 2-in. cavity increased slightly to account for any
tees that might extend slightly into the cavity. Required clearances for other types of ma-
sonry/precast details can be estimated in a similar manner.
Related Sections
4-3 Masonry Construction Tolerances
Figure 13-5 Detailing masonry and precast system . .
r2" (SO) clearance recommended
flange blocked out

for wall
r1----I--length: ±1" (25)
±3I4" (19) maximum

vertical alignment
tolerance
(a) section view
t ±1" (25)
rO
(b) plan view

Figure 13-6 Detailing doors in precast concrete
/4" (6)
1_ -1/4" (-6) _I
- - + - - - - - - +1/8" (3)
~---- -1/8" (3)
i=---
318" (10) recommended
steel frames: +1/16" (1.6), -3164" (1.2)
nominal clearance
(b) jamb detail

13-6 Detailing Doors in Precast Concrete'

As with cast-in-place concrete, doors in precast concrete are typically framed with .
and, in some cases, aluminum. If wood frames are used, there is usually a rough wood
placed between the two materials, which can be trimmed or shimmed to acc;orrun(xlil
tolerances of the concrete.
Figure 13-6 shows the possible tolerances of both the precast opening and a steel
Tolerances for the precast opening are tighter than they are for cast-in-place frame,
commodating a door is usually not a problem. Because the total opening size of an
tectural precast concrete panel has a ±~-in. (6-mm) tolerance-or ~ in. (3 rum) on
side-a nominal %-in. (1 O-mm) clearance is sufficient. Even if the opening is ~ in.
and the steel door is X6 in. (1.6 mm) larger, there is still a U6-in. (5-mm) sealant
LUll ........""
minum frames have about the same tolerance. Height tolerances can be
the door head or by modifying the clearance at the floor line. If precast ribbed wall
are used, opening tolerances are ±~ in. (13 mm), so the clearance needs to be:
at least l1 in. (13 rum) on each sider
For large garage doors that span across two or more panels, framing is rnn·r,.,·"lifl
The edges of each precast panel at the head of the opening can be over l1 in. (U
(depending on the type of panel), unless the top of the opening is designated as a
control surface. If the edges of adjacent panels are offset, the irregular head section
framed with steel angles or channels to provide a straight, true rough opening.
Related Sections
13-7 Detailing Windows in Precast Con,.. ..O.T~

Several types of windows can be used in precast concrete. These include steel, alumiJt1.~
and wood. Standard details for steeland aluminum windows are usually the most
to construction tolerances because these window types are commonly placed
the opening. When wood windows are used, they are usually framed into a
buck and the exterior and interior joints are covered with trim, which COIlcealf
commodation for construction toIetat'lces. Only steel and. ~uminum windows
eredhere.
For a window opening. the, finished sUe can be as much as ~ in. (6 rum) too·
too large in architectural panels and ±~ in. (13 mm) in ribbed and insulated wall
This means a possible variation of ~ in. or ~ in. (3 mm or 6 mm) in and out for any
head, or sill section. See Figure 13-7(a). This does not include any variation in plumb
level for any of the four sides. .
If an aluminum window is used, one jamb xnay be as much as X6 in. (1.6 mm) too
(see Section 11-9) and the concrete openingxnay be as much as ~ in. (3 mm) tOO SITlJilU«ll
a nominal ~-in. (6-mm) clearance is provided, this provides only a X&-in. (1.6-mm)
for sealant. A minimum %-in. nominal clearance is a better choice. For storefronts,
(13-mm) clearance between framing and the concrete is recommended.
13-7 Detailing windows in precast concrete
- -r-
avoid misalign ment~

7 ±1/4" (6) for
architectural
between adj acent
panels panels
-- I - ,----'-
!..±1/4" (6~ !
(a) window locations
sealant
==jlII
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
I.
interior trim and ------>

finish as required
(b) accommodating fixed window sizes
One method of accommodating fixed window sizes is shown in Figure 13-7(b). By cast-
ing a notch in the concrete opening, both in and out tolerances can be concealed and the
joint can be properly sealed without oversizing the sealant joint. Although this increases
form work costs slightly, in some cases it is a preferable option. With steel windows part of
the steel sash can be cast directly into the concrete.
Related Sections
11-10 Steel Windows
Figure 14-1 Accumulated column tolerances
~ building line (exterior) .
-------------------------------------------------
allowance B/2 + hl1000 + Tp minimum
fireproofing clearance
envelope
t= envelope of':
+ working
§ I
I possible
I erection Tn'~''''''''''
~ I
+ I
~
io I
()
c;, -;-
;.: I
-;8---L------
~ !
I
Ta
I
I
I
~--+---'<----+---'establlshed
column line
on plans
h = distance between sweep: 318' (10) max.

braced points
=
B flange width, max. Tp = 2" (50) maximum in first 20 storieS;
=
C column depth, max. 1/16" (1.6) for each additional
up to a maximum of 3" (76)
Note: for enclosures or cladding that

may follow column aJlghnment the
size of the minimum clearance
envelope may be decreased by the
values of Tt, T a,and Tp.
Chapter 14
Steel Frame Systems

-
Figure 14-1 shows the minimum clearance envelope based on steel erection tolerances
used with enclosures or attachments that must be held to a precise plan location. This
clearance envelope includes the variations in maximum beam depth and width, C and B;
the maximum variation in slope between braced points, h; and the allowable erection tol-
erances toward, away from, and parallel to the building line, T t , T a , and Tp (see Section
3-6). The clearance envelope is measured from the theoretical working point of the col-
umn, which is the actual center of the steel column at the end of the shipping piece. Cur-
rent American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) standards state that the
accumulation of mill tolerances and fabrication tolerances shall not cause the erection
tolerances to be exceeded.
However, when the alignment oflintels, spandrels, wall supports, and similar members
are used to connect other building construction elements to the structural steel frame,
there should be sufficient provisions for adjustment to allow for the accumulation of mill
and fabrication tolerances as well as erection tolerances. Figure 14-1 also shows the addi-
tional tolerances for camber and sweep of the steel framing. Tolerances for adjustable
items are shown in Section 14-3.
Because the various tolerances vary with beam size and height of the building, a toler-
ance envelope can be calculated for each story, but in most cases the worst condition is de-
termined for detailing purposes. For example, in a 20-story building the column can vary
up to 1 in. (25 mm) toward the building line or 2 in. (50 mm) away from the building line
because of erection tolerances. If the column straightness varies by YJ,OC\), the envelope
could be as much as IX; in. (29 mm) outward or as much as 2Yo in. (54 mm) inward (assum-
ing a 12-ft. or 3,660-mm distance between braced points). At the midpoint of the column
between splice points, camber or sweep could add as much as Ys in. (10 mm) to the basic
erection tolerance envelope, See Figure 3-1 and Table 3-1 for sweep and camber toler-
ances.
Even though the envelope of working point tolerance for an individual column can be
up to 3 in. (76 mm) for a 20-story building, AISC standards require that all exterior
columns along one side of a building at each splice line be limited to a 1l1.-in- (38-mm-)
Wide band, as shown inSect ion 3-7. The adjacent envelope above or below each band
must be within the 1:500 slope restriction illustrated in Section 3-6.
In general, if connections between the steel frame and exterior cladding provide for a
total adjustment of 3 in. (76 mm) in a 20-story building, the exterior building line can be
maintained in a true vertical plane. Above this, the facade can be erected to within lri6 in.
(1.6 mm) of plumb per story, with a maximum total deviation of 1 in. (25 mm) from a true
vertical plane. If dimensional or erection tolerances of the cladding material are substan-
tial, these should be added to the steel tolerances as illustrated in sections of this chapter
that follow.
-
Related Sections
3-8 Beam/Colutnn Connections ,',.' -'''--'
-".....,.....,......---------------------------___ ,;~f';
'-'l~
14-2 Accumulated Steel Frame Tolerances ·~~~~1 1
Accumulated tolerances of an entire building frame and the members used to connect
other building elements to the frame can be a combination of mill, fabrication, and erec.
tion tolerances. AISC standards state that the accumulation of mill tolerances and fabrt ..
cation tolerances shall not cause the erection tolerances to be exceeded. Therefore, tht-. .
expected devi~tion of a steel structural frame can be calculated using the erection .
ances given in Sections 3-6, 3-7,3-8,3-9, and 14-1. When other members attached to
frame are considered, mill and fabrication tolerances may need to be taken into a-'-'UUll"
Some of the common conditions are illustrated in this section.
Steel framing begins with the connection of the frame to the foundation with C111~.UVl,.,t
rods, foundation bolts, and other embedded items. Figure 14-2(a) shows acceptable
ances of bearing devices and anchor rod groups. Although these are normally set by a
tractor other than the steel erector, individual rods within a group must be set within J.! in: .
(3 mm) of each other and the group must be set to within X in. (6 mm) of the established
column line through that group. There cannot be more than a X in. (6 mm) variation
tween adjacent anchor rod groups. As shown in Figure 14· 2(b), the accumulated Vat1arlCe,>';'
per 100 fro is also limited to X in. (2 mm per 10,000 mm), with a maximum overall
ance of 1 in. (25 mm) along the entire length of the building.
The location of beam edges relative to other parts of the building can vary as a result .'.
of a combination of tolerances on base plate location, column erection, column
straightness, member size, and beam sweep. Although current AISC standard practices
not allow mill and fabrication tolerances to cause the erection tolerances to be exceeded,), .•
when the attachment of exterior cladding is considered, all tolerances would have to be·
taken into account in order to design the necessary adjustment for the cladding. Figure 14··· '.
2(c) shows an example of a possible condition at the twentieth floor of a building with 30#
fro (9,140 mm) spacing between columns. In the worst case, the base plate could be out by
X in. (6 mm) and the column out by the maximum of 1 in. (25 mm) toward the building
line. AISC standards state that the alignment of an individual, straight member, such as a
beam, is acceptable if the columns to which it is attached are within permissible variations
for fabrication and erection. The beam connecting two columns could be oversized by Ji
*
in. (X in. total but only half of this on one side) and have a sweep up to in. (10 mm). Di·
rect addition of all these tolerances gives a maximum possible outside variance at the mid-'
point of the beam of IX in. (44 mm). It is unlikely that all of these would occur
simultaneously, so the total probable tolerance can be calculated by taking the square root
of the sum of the squares of the individual tolerances according to the method described
in the introduction to Part 2. With this calculation, the total deviation in this example
would be about IJ.! in. (29 mm).
Steel frame tolerances also vary in the vertical direction as diagrammed in Figure 14- .
2(d). The elevation of any beam as measured from the splice point can vary by +X6 in.
(7.9 mm) toward the splice point or -1(6 in. (4.8 mm), as shown in Figure 3-8. In addi-
tion, allowable variations in length of columns can accumulate in a tall building. As the
Figure 14-2 Accumulated steel frame tolerances
I ±1/4" (6) I
top of anchor : - ,
rods: ±1/2" (13) 1
, 1
,
~ ±1/8" (3)
~ 1
, 1
,
1
1 1
I
1
,
.. I
I;.118" (~I ±1/4" per 100'; 1" maximum
(±2 mm per 10000 mm; 25 maximum)
(a) bearing devices and anchor rods (b) accumulated anchor rod groups
~~-r
~ 1/4" (6)
beam sweep: 318" (10) max. T
framing shown at 20th floor see Table 3-1
(c) accumulated frame tolerance example
differential'. -
shortening
TlJ~ c_ c,~.~
~ ,
~e xterior column
! in terior column
cladding attach men

,J
and jOints sized to f
account for verticaI
1 I .....
el evation of concrete
fl oor measured from
~to p of beam
tolerances and
column shortenin g
(d) differential column shortening

<
Figure 14-3 Detailing for steel structural system tolerances

;.
)
abutting ends: ±3I16" (5)
splice line
primary structural frame
.I
,I
±3I8" (10)
steel lintels, wall supports,
',;
mullions, and other items
for use of other trades
(a) adjustable items
~clearance
-.
(b) cantilevered members
plan alignment ~
----------~----------
< ,. ----/1 c::::=-. \ '}
/ 500 maximum
splice point
(c) field-assembled members
num
building is constructed, depending on the sequence of construction, the interior columns

may carry a greater percentage of load, resulting in a differential shortening between in-
terior and exterior columns. Because of this, construction elements on each floor should
be installed based on the elevation of the beams or splice points rather than on a fixed
benchmark on the ground. There should be enough vertical adjustment in the connec-
tions between the steel frame and the exterior cladding to account for these accumulated
tolerances and shortening of the building frame. Joints should allow for a ±%-in. (16-
mm) vertical adjustment.
Related Sections
Introduction to Part 2
14-3 Detailing for Steel Structural System

Tolerances
In addition to the mill, fabrication, and erection tolerances described in the preceding
sections and in Chapter 3, some additional tolerances must be considered in some circum-
stances. Secondary steel members attached to the primary structural frame for the purpose
of supporting work of other trades have their own tolerances. These members are known
as "adjustable items" and are shown diagrammatically in Figure 14-3(a). The tolerance for
both horizontal and vertical positioning is ±% in. (10 mm). This tolerance is valid only if
sufficient clearance and adjustment are shown on the drawings so the steel erector can
meet the tolerances. Vertical position is measured to the upper milled splice line of the
nearest column, and horizontal position is measured relative to the established finish line
at any floor. Architectural exposed structural steel must meet tolerances that are one-half
those for structural steel.
For cantilevered steel, the member is considered plumb, level, and aligned if the angu-
lar variation from a working line of the installed piece to a straight line extending in the
plan direction does not exceed 1:500. See Figure 14-3(b).
When steel members are field-assembled, the same angular variation applies. The field
member is considered plumb, level, or aligned if the actual installed alignment does not
vary from the planned alignment by more than this amount. For example, in a 1O-ft.
length (3,050 mm) this means that the member could be as much as ~ in. (6 mm) off. See
Figure 14-3(c). For irregular shapes, if the fabricated member is within tolerance and the
supporting members are erected with standard tolerances, the irregular shape is considered
to be within acceptable tolerance.
Related Sections
3-9 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel
! ,
Figure 14-4 Detailing for precast on steel
tolerance
weld plate as required
to anchor connector to
steel beam
provide bearing at
centerline of beam
blockout in slab required

if concrete poured prior to
precast installation
o beam erection:
+5/16" (S)
-3/16" (5)
camber: ±3/S" (10)
leveling bolt or shims
fireproofing
'--+--n----+------- 1" (25) out, max., up to 20 stories

thickness: I---- 2" (50) max. in for
+1/4" (6), -1/S" (3) I buildings up to 20 stories
14-4 Detailing for Precast on Steel

Detailing for precast concrete on steel framing requires that the mill, fabrication, and
erection tolerances for the steel be calculated and added to the possible fabrication and
erection tolerances of the precast. Because tolerances for both materials vary depending
on the type and size of member as well and the height of the building separate calculations
need to be made for various conditions and locations in the building.
Figure 14-4 shows an example of a precast/steel detail. The location of the steel beam
can vary as much as 1 in (25 mm) toward the building line and 2 in (50 mm) away from
the building line on a building up to 20 stories. For shorter structures the rate of slope from
plumb is 1:500 as described in Section 3-6. In addition, the width of the flange can vary
±~ in. (6 mm) or Va in. (3 mm on one side). Beam sweep varies with the length of the beam
but can account for another ~ in (10 mm) for a 30-ft. (9,140-mm) length. In the worst
case, these might place the outside edge of the beam lYz in. (38 mm) toward the precast.
Using the root sum-of-the-squares method for determining accumulated tolerances de-
scribed in the introduction to Part 2, the more likely deviation would be about IVa in. (29
mm). Normally, mill and fabrication tolerances cannot cause the erection tolerances to be
exceeded; however, for cladding elements, such as that shown in Figure 14-4, the designer
may want to provide sufficient clearance and adjustment for the accumulation of mill, fab-
rication, and erection tolerances.
The precast thickness can vary up to ~ in. (6 mm) oversize, but the precast erector is
allowed to have the primary control surface within Yz in. (13 mm) from the centerline of
the structural grid. If fireproofing is required around the steel, this must also be added to
the tolerances to determine the total design clearance between the back of the precast and
the edge of the beam or face of fireproofing.
Related Sections
13-4 Detailing for Precast and Steel Systems
14-5 Detailing for Brick on Steel

When brick and steel framing are used together, the construction tolerance of the steel
frame usually dictates the method of detailing. Dimensional and distortion tolerances of
brick are relatively minor, as described in Section 4-5. At most, a surface of an individual,
standard-size brick may be out of specified plane by about %2 in. (4 mm) because of a worst-
case combination of size and warp tolerance.
In other than one- or two-story buildings, the brick is usually supported on shelf angles
at every story. A compressible filler below the angle allows for deflection of the angle as
well as building movement and expansion of the brick panel below. The connection and
support systems must be designed to accommodate the steel frame tolerance as well as to
provide the recommended 2-in. (50-mm) clearance between the back of the brick wall
and the structural frame and whatever backup wall is used. Vertical adjustment must also
nnnmmli
Figure 14-5 Detailing for brick on steel
H 2" (50) recommended

I I clearance
u;
.cJ
0,> 0 <J 4
o eam erection:
+5/16" (S)
·3116" (5)
~-+~~~~~~r=_~_~_~_~_~_~
camber: ±3IS" (10)
fireproofing not shown
~---++--- backup wall

not shown
~1-----H1--------1" (25) out, max.,

up to 20 stories
I--- 2" (50) max. in for

I buildings up to 20 stories
rF-r'--,l:::;=F~"7 '-.."...-r-.,....,.. - -1
h~~~:tulr'l""l'-l~-b-. --'- ~~ott.d hoi. for horizontal adjuslment
flashing
~Sheltangle
be provided so the shelf angle can match the joint location as the brick is laid. In design-
ing the adjustable connection, both the erection and fabrication tolerances of the steel
beam should be considered.
Figure 14-5 shows only one possible way of attaching the shelf angle to the beam. With
this detail. vertical adjustment can be provided by shimming or with vertically slotted
holes. Horizontal adjustment can be provided with slotted holes. Generally, shimming
should not exceed 1 in. (25 mm) and should be done with horseshoe-shaped shims with a
length equal to the length of the angle. Where the steel frame varies at its maximum, the
size of the shelf angle can be decreased or increased subject to engineering review.
Note that potential problems can arise if the clearance becomes so small that there is
not adequate space for the bolt head, flashing, and any material that is used to prevent the
bolt head from puncturing the flashing. Depending on the thickness of the angle, the size
of the fastener and the method of flashing, the 2-in. (50-mm) clearance may need to be
increased, especially in tall buildings.
Related Sections
12-4 Detailing Brick on Cast-in-Place Concrete
15-2 Detailing Brick and Concrete Masonry Systems
14-6 Detailing for Stone on Steel Systems

Detailing for stone facades attached to steel framing is similar to stone on concrete except
that the tolerances for steel framing can be larger for tall buildings. However, in most cases
stone can be installed slightly out of plumb (within the standards described in Sections 5-
4 and 5-5) along the height of a building to partially accommodate minor irregularities of
the frame, if necessary.
Figure 14-6 shows a typical gravity support and anchor at a spandrel beam. This is the
most critical connection to accommodate both the steel and stone tolerances. A variety of
lateral anchors is available for various types of backup walls that provide for sufficient ad-
justment to maintain the erection tolerances shown in Sections 5-4 and 5-5. Vertical de-
viations of the steel frame are accommodated with shims or vertically slotted holes in the
angles. Deviations perpendicular to the building face are taken up by shimming the support
angles or with slotted holes where the angle is attached to the anchor plate in the slab.
In determining the minimum design clearance, the following tolerances and construc-
tion elements must be combined: the erection tolerance of the steel beam, which varies
with height (see Section 3-6); the thickness of the stone, which will vary depending on
the type of stone and thickness (see Sections 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3); working space required
for erection and fastening; and allowance for fireproofing of the steel, if required.
As with precast panels, horizontal joints and stone movement are normally accommo-
dated by designing the vertical joints between stone sections large enough to absorb both
movement and dimensional tolerances of the stone and steel frame. Refer to the introduc-
tion to Part 2 for estimating total expected tolerance of several panels and for calculating
joint width.
-
Figure 14-6 Detailing for stone on steel systems
t - - - - - interior finish wall
safing insulation
not shown
f-i----t--t+--'r-----1" (25) out, max.,

up to 20 stories
2" (50) max. in for

buildings up to 20 stories
tieback as required
----J i--- stone thickness tolerance:

varies with stone type
Because the exact method of anchorage varies with the type of structural frame, the
Related Sections
14-3 Detailing for Steel Structural System Tolerances
14-7 Detailing for Curtain Walls on Steel

Frames
Steel framing is one of the most common structural systems used to support curtain walls.
Even though steel frames have large tolerances, especially for high-rise buildings, the cur-
tain wall can be installed to the tolerances indicated in Section 8-2 if adequate adjustable
connections are detailed and sufficient design clearance is provided. Figure 14-7 shows
some of the tolerance requirements for a typical curtain wall/spandrel beam connection.
Because individual conditions will vary, exact details should be verified with the curtain
wall fabricator and the structural engineer.
Adjustment needs to be provided in three directions: vertical, horizontal, and lateral.
In addition, a minimum clearance of 2 in. (50 mm) between the curtain wall and the
frame is recommended. If adjustment and clearances are provided, the minor manufactur-
ing and fabrication tolerances of the curtain wall can be accommodated, as well as any
movement of the building frame and expansion and contraction of the curtain wall. In ex-
treme cases, where the frame exceeds tolerances, the curtain wall can be installed slightly
out of plumb, following the line of the frame along the height of the building.
Generally, the connection should be made at the top of the slab to make erection eas-
ier. Serrated angles and bolts, T-shaped clips, slotted holes, embedded anchors, and shims
can all be used to provided the necessary adjustments. When shims are used, the height of
the shim stack should not exceed the diameter of the fastener securing the anchor. If the
anchor must be higher, special shims and connection details may be required.
Lateral tolerances of the frame can be accommodated by proper design of the vertical
joints of the curtain wall or, in extreme cases, at the building corners. The lateral devia-
tion from plumb of exterior column as indicated in Section 3-6 can vary at a slope of 1:500
up to a maximum of 1 in. (20 mm) to the twentieth story and up to 2 in. (50 mm) beyond
that. At individual connectors, lateral alignment can be made by field welding clip angles,
with slotted bolt holes, or other means. Refer to the introduction to Part 2 for joint design
procedures.
-
Figure 14-7 Detailing for curtain walls on steel frames
±1/S" (3) out of plumb in 12"

(3 in 3660)
11
__- - I - - - ! - - - - - - - - - - - - - c u r t a i n wall assembly
adjustable anchorage
I ~ lateral adjustment by field

~ I welding or with slotted holes
~~~~~~~o~A~o--~od
o --0--............... /.l
o Z\ G. !f'o'..f:.,-2.~~C:~
beam erection:
+5/16" (S)
o
7
[ -3/16" (5)
~~,.....,.,,~~:t:=i =_=====_ ~
camber: ±3/S" (10)
design
clearance
fireproofing
~--+---++---+------- 1" (25) out, max.
I-- 2" (50) max. in for

I buildings up to 20 stories
2" (50) out and 3" (76) in

maximum for higher buildings
Related Sections
3--6 Steel Column Erection Tolerances
14-3 Detailing for Steel Structural System Tolerances
Figure 15-1 Masonry joint tolerances
j L±1/S" (3)
f---- ±1/4" (6)
(a) brick joints
~, ,...
1/2" (13)
--II-- ±1/S" (3)

I---- ±1/4" (6)
(b) concrete masonry joints
I lilt .... ,IIUI

Chapter 15
Masonry Systems
15-1 Masonry Joint Tolerances

The thickness of masonry joints can usually be held to a ±~-in. (3-mm) tolerance, with
the edges of all vertically aligned joints within a l1-in. (13-mm) envelope. See Figure lS-
I. These tolerances allow for both minor size variations of the masonry and inaccuracies
in laying up the wall. The end of a wall can usually be held to within X in. (6 mm) of the
location shown on the plans.
When expansion joints are required, they should be sized to account for both expan-
sion and contraction caused by temperature changes and for expansion caused by moisture
absorption, as well as for size and construction tolerances. The expansion joint size for a
brick wall depends on the distance between the expansion joints as well as the maximum
expected temperature differential. In most cases, a l1-in. (13-mm) expansion joint will ac-
commodate joint spacing of 20 ft. (6,100 mm) and a 140°F (60°C) temperature differen-
tial. A %-in. (16-mm) joint will allow expansion joints spaced 25 ft. (7,620 mm) apart at
the same temperature differential. If allowances for size tolerances are added and a sealant
with a 25 percent movement capacity is used, most masonry expansion joints will be in
the range of?:; in. to 1 in. (38 mm to 50 mm).
Related Sections
~ Brick Wall Construction
15-2 Detailing Brick and Masonry Systems

Brick and masonry systems usually consist of a backup wall of concrete unit masonry with
a brick facing, as shown in Figure 15-2. If the multi-wythe construction is a bearing wall,
the concrete block is reinforced and grouted. As shown in 15-2(a), the tolerances for the
total width of multi-wythe construction are +11 in. (13 mm) and -X in. (6 mm). This is
based on American Concrete Institute standards. Any furring or interior dimensions that
are critical should take this into account. The face of both wythes must fall within a l1-in.
(13-mm) envelope along the total height of the wall, with no more than a X in. per 10ft.
(6.4 mm per 3 m) variation in vertical slope. See Figure 15-2(b).
Because the cavity between the brick and concrete block is so large (recommended
width is 2 in. or 50 mm), any variation in the size of either masonry unit is easily accom-
modated in the cavity.
" , '!
Figure 15-2 Detailing brick and masonry systems
see Sec. 4-2 for

reinforcement
placement
I.. +1/2" (12.7), -1/4" (6.4) _I

(a) plan view
~il!E£I:lIIED!:5iII!~ I~ ±1/8" (3) individual

joint width
±1/4" in 10' ~
(6.4 in 3 m) lj
~~~~~~ t~ 1/2" (13) envelope

for bed joints
--i~
1/2" (13)
(b) vertical section

Chapter 15: Masonry Systems 305
Related Sections
4-2 Concrete Unit Masonry Reinforcement Placement
15-3 Detailing for Stone on Masonry Backup

To maintain the installation tolerances for granite, marble, and limestone given in Sec-
tions 5-4 and 5-5, adequate clearances and adjustable connections must be detailed when
stone is attached to masonry. Detailing for stone on masonry is similar to stone on con-
crete, but there are some differences. Among them is the need for the stone gravity anchor
locations to be coordinated with the coursing of the masonry. Generally, these anchors
must be made in bond beams as shown in Figure 15-3. As with concrete backup, the stone
panels can be installed slightly out of plumb (within the standards described in Sections
5-4 and 5-5) along the height of a building to partially accommodate minor irregularities
of the frame if absolutely necessary. However, if sufficient clearance and adjustable an-
chors are provided, this is usually not necessary.
Figure 15-3 shows a typical gravity support and anchor at a bond beam. This is the
most critical connection to accommodate the tolerances of the masonry and the stone. A
variety of lateral anchors are available that provide for sufficient adjustment to maintain
the erection tolerances given in Sections 5-4 and 5-5. Vertical deviations of the masonry
are accommodated with adjustable anchors or slotted angles. Additional vertical adjust-
ment can be made by shimming between the angle and the bottom edge of the stone. In
some cases, a separate steel grid system is attached to the masonry wall and the stone is ad-
justed as it is anchored to the grid. Deviations perpendicular to the building face are taken
up by shimming the support angles.
To determine the minimum design clearance, the following tolerances and construc-
tion elements must be combined: the )i-in. (13-mm) tolerance envelope of the face of the
wall; the thickness of the stone, which will vary depending on the type of stone and thick-
ness (see Sections 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3); the thickness of the angle; the size of the bolt head;
the working space required for erection and fastening; and any flashing, weep tubes, or
other accessories behind the stone. Generally, a 2-in. (50-mm) clearance is considered
minimum. For adhered veneer, the mortar between the masonry and stone should be be-
tween)i and 114 in. (13 to 32 mm) thick.
Horizontal size tolerances and stone movement are normally accommodated by de-
signing the vertical joints between stone sections large enough to absorb both movement
and dimensional tolerances of the stone. Refer to the introduction to Part 2 for procedures
for estimating total expected tolerance of several panels and the method for calculating
joint width.
Because the exact method of anchorage varies with the type of masonry structure, the
Related Sections
Figure 15-3 Detailing for stone on masonry backup
adjustable anchor
with shims as
required
---1H1:- 3/4" (19) vertical

alignment envelope
2" (50) cavity

preferred
15-4 Detailing Interior Stone on Masonry

Stone can be applied to interior walls by directly applying the stone to the masonry with
mortar or by using the standard-set method as shown in Figure 15-4. Direct application is
normally only used with thin stone tiles placed in a mortar setting bed, so any variation in
the masonry must be concealed within the thickness of the mortar or the stone must fol-
low the irregularities of the masonry.
The standard-set method uses anchors set into the masonry coursing and plaster spots
at each anchor to hold the assembly tightly together. Because of the gap between the
,III 1
,111111
III ,'111
Figure 15-4 Detailing interior stone on masonry
ceiling
intermediate anchor,
if required
plaster spot ----tIlfl*+m:=c:::IiIII~
+4-
1 1/2" (28)
recommended
dimension
stone and the masonry and the adjustability of the anchors and plaster spots, the finished
surface of the stone can be installed almost perfectly plumb in installations with standard
ceiling heights.
For high spaces where several stone panels are used vertically, intermediate gravity
supports may be required. This can be accomplished by using a steel angle anchored to the
backup wall similar to the detail shown in Figure 15-3. Adjustable anchors can be used in
much the same way they are in exterior applications so that the final wall finish is within
1.; in. (6 mm) of plumb or closer.
Related Sections
9-8 Stone Flooring
15-5 Detailing doors in masonry
±1/4" (6)
r.-----
~~--"""'7'"""?!'"":I
modular masonry dimension
plus 1 joint width
I,ofot----l------- +1/8" (3)

' - - - - - - - -1/8" (3)
,,
j
J
j
j
j
i
"j
~
• (50) frame
steel frames:
-----J +1/16" (1.6), -3/64" (1.2)
3/16" (5)
nominal clearance
(b) fitting frames in openings
, 'II
I
15-5 Detailing Doors in Masonry

In most masonry construction, only steel door frames are used. If wood frames are used, a
rough wood buck is usually placed between the two materials, which can be trimmed or
shimmed to accommodate the masonry tolerances. Steel frames are fixed in size, so the
frame detail and clearance are critical to sizing the opening to allow for tolerances and a
good sealant joint. When possible, the masonry opening size should conform to standard
modular masonry sizes (8 in. or 200 mm) to avoid the expense of cutting the masonry. This
way either full or half-size blocks can be used.
Figure 15-5 shows the possible tolerances of both the masonry opening and a steel
frame. For example, using a 36-in. (914-mm) door with 2-in. (51-mm) frames gives a total
frame width of 40 in. (1,016 mm). The total width of the masonry opening is 40 in. plus
the width of one joint (about %in. [10 mm]). This leaves just X6 in. (5 mm) on each side
to accommodate the door and any tolerances that may exist. If the steel frame is oversized
by its tolerance of Yt6 in. (1.6 mm) and the masonry is inward by )t in. (3 mm) and slightly
out of plumb, there may be inadequate space for the frame. Normally, this problem is pre-
vented by placing the frames in position and building the wall around them. If this is not
possible, it is better to use 1l-{-in. (38-mm) frames to provide more clearance. Other door
sizes may require cutting the blocks.
Related Sections
15-6 Detailing Windows in Masonry

Several types of windows can be used in masonry openings. These include steel, alu-
minum, and wood. Standard details for steel and aluminum windows are usually the most
sensitive to construction tolerances because these window types are commonly placed di-
rectly in the opening. When wood windows are used, they are usually framed into a rough
wood buck and the exterior and interior joints are covered with some type of trim, which
conceals any accommodation for construction tolerances. Only steel and aluminum win-
dows are considered here.
As with doors, the masonry opening size should conform to standard modular masonry
sizes to avoid cutting the masonry. For a window opening, the finished size can be as much
as Xin. (6 mm) too small or too large or a possible variation of)t in. at each jamb. See Fig-
ure 15-6(a}. Although ACI standards allow bed joints to fall within a l-{-in. (13-mm) tol-
erance envelope, the vertical dimension of a masonry opening usually varies no more than
X in. in 10 ft. (6 mm in 3,050 mm).
The flange of steel windows is usually placed between the wythes of masonry, so toler-
ances are easily accommodated. If aluminum windows are used, one jamb may be as much
as Yt6 in. (1.6 mm) too large (see Section 11-9) and the masonry opening may be as much
as )t in. (3 mm) too small. If a nominal X-in. (6-mm) clearance is provided, this would pro-
vide only a Yt6-in. (1.6-mm) space for sealant and for expansion of the window and ma-
15-6 Detailing windows in masonry
±1/4" (6)
±1/2" (13)
~ interior finish
- __________________ --,...---- as required
~~~~~~~~~~. I
I I
I I
'>i+III1----t---- +118" (3)
~----1/8" (3)
nominal 318" (10) clearance
~-- window dimensions:

see Secs. 11-9,11-10
(b) fitting frames in openings
"'llltlllliitittl
sonry and any movement that may occur. A minimum %-in. (lO-mm) nominal clearance
is a better choice. For storefronts, a >1-in. (13-mm) clearance between framing and the ma-
sonry is recommended.
Related Sections
11-10 Steel Windows
Figure 16-1 Detailing wood joints
(a) butt joint (d) reveal
(b) eased edge (e) batten
(c) overlapping jOint (f) corner reveal
....- - face of waif varies
cap molding
3
base
2 base shoe folfows

contour of floor
-[-----------
floor level varies
(h) base detail
(g) alignment in five planes

Chapter 16
Timber and Carpentry

Construction
16-1 Detailing Wood Joints

Tolerances of rough carpentry, finish carpentry, and architectural woodwork are normally
accommodated by designing joints that conceal or allow for size and movement devia-
tions, Even when wood is precisely cut to fit a particular construction detail, either on the
job site or in the mill shop, the tendency for wood to shrink and expand with changes in
moisture content requires joints that conceal movement.
A typical butt joint, as shown in Figure 16-1 (a), may be perfectly fit in the shop, but
any slight movement or change in moisture will cause it to open. Using an eased edge as
shown in Figure 16-1 (b) conceals any slight movement or cmcking at the joint line. How-
ever, even this type of joint cannot accommodate larger movement or size tolerances of
the wood or the substrate to which it is applied. An overlapping joint with a reveal can
easily accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances and any movement that may
occur. One type of overlapping joint is shown in Figure 16-1 (c).
Other types of joints that accommodate tolerances and movement by emphasizing the
joint are shown in Figures 16-l(d), 16-1(e), and 16-1(f). These concepts work with finish
carpentry as well as architectural woodwork. For example, any misalignment of the two
planes of wood shown in 16-l(d) is not noticeable because of the space separating them.
In addition, if one piece is undersize or oversize, the reveal space can take up the extra di-
mension.
Whenever possible, joints or details that requirement alignment in three, four, or five
planes should be avoided because it is very difficult to get everything aligned and all joints
equal. Figure 16-1 (g) shows one example: a cabinet door for which maintaining alignment
and allowance for tolerances throughout the life of the cabinet is nearly impossible.
Figure 16-1 (h) shows one common example of how wood trim is used to accommodate
and conceal tolerances of adjacent construction. The wood base covers most of the gap
between the wall and floor, while the relatively flexible base shoe follows any contour
variations of an uneven floor. The cap molding is flexible enough to follow any contour
variations of the wall.
Related Sections
7-1 Manufacturing Tolemnces for Board Lumber
7-17 Architectuml Woodwork Installation
c
-
Figure 16-2 Detailing for timber columns
allow rough framing -_o/J

position: ±1/4" (6)
enlarged hole in
base plate
shim as required
-j
±1/4" (6)
(a) small columns
allowable timber --.-I

position: ±1/2" (13)
1.....l.... . . J V " 1 _ - _ slotted hole if required

for precise alignment
o I .<1 0 U
D flll ~
<>011 I FI~I 0
't> 0
o'V "
,,'1>, "Ip......
I..l. I II
0
"'I 11 l>j,"'l
YL
'7 1
o·
c JII' .:l
!> ,t> 0 '"
~+----t-___- ± 1/4· (6)

\
1
(b) heavy timber columns
IlffUlnm
16-2 Detailing for Timber Columns

Timber columns can be either dimension lumber (up to 4~ in. [114 mm] in thickness),
heavy timber (5 in. [127 mm] or over), or glued laminated timber. In each case, the con-
struction tolerances involved include the size and installation tolerances of the timber, as
well as the tolerances of any attached construction such as concrete foundations and an-
choring devices.
Figure 16-2 illustrates how timber columns can be positioned accurately when at-
tached with anchor bolts to foundations. As shown in 16-2(a), column base plates are
available with enlarged holes, allowing the plate to be positioned even when the anchor
bolt is out of location by X in. (6 mm) or more. See Section 2-5. If such an adjustable an-
chor is not used, the position of the column should still be within its allowable X-in. (6-
mm) position tolerance, as described in Section 6-6.
For heavy-timber and laminated columns, anchors with slotted holes can be used if
precise alignment is required and the columns are predrilled. However, in most cases, the
position of the timber is not critical and can be off by the allowable X in. (6 mm) of the
anchor bolts and still be within allowable tolerances for heavy-timber position. To accom-
modate size and squareness tolerances and expansion, there should be a ~-in. (3-mm)
clearance between the timber and any steel anchorage device.
Related Sections
6-1 Glued Laminated Timber Fabrication
6-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumber
16-3 Detailing for Timber Beams
16-3 Detailing for Timber Beams

As with columns, timber beam can either be dimension lumber (thicknesses up to 4~ in.
[114 mm]), heavy timber (5 in. [127 mm] or over), or glued laminated timber. There are
generally few problems with dimension lumber because it can be cut, trimmed, and
shimmed on the job site to meet positioning tolerances of ±X in. (6 mm), as detailed in
Section 6-6. Any misalignments are normally concealed with finish materials.
Heavy-timber and glued laminated timber construction requires more thought in de-
tailing because these are often exposed and are part of the design aesthetic of the building.
Figure 16-3 shows two common framing situations where clearances for construction tol-
erances are critical. At least a ~-in. 03-mm) clearance should be detailed between the
end of a beam and any other structure, such as a concrete beam pocket. See Figure 16-
3(a). The clearance allows for any length tolerance of the beam and minor misalignments
of the anchor device and bolt hole position. As with any heavy-timber framing, there
should be a lis-in. (3-mm) clearance between the timber and any steel anchorage device.
As shown in Figure 16-3(b), oversized or slotted holes can be used in steel connectors
to accommodate size and position tolerances if positioning is critical and if allowed by the
structural requirements of the bolted connection. If steel columns are used, their erection
tolerance must also be considered
r
Figure 16-3 Detailing for timber beams
1/2" (13) clearance 11--...---- length tolerance, see Sec. 6-1

o 0
elevation
side clearance: 1/8" (3) ~H;;;:~;:ll"""'/~--:::::---1
1/8" (3) rtF;;;;g;.-"";;;;"'i

plan
(a) beam at foundation wall
-----jil---1/2A clearance
1-----..:=----"
~--~------~I~-----=~--~
,
~~~!~~~
I
slotted or
oversized holes
c@=l I,
I
U-plate connector
.. I" ±1/2" (13)
(b) beam at column

~elated Sections
}'-1 Glued Laminated Timber Fabrication
}'-2 Manufacturing Tolerances for Structural Lumber
5--(i Rough Lumber Framing
l6-2 Detailing for Timber Columns
16-4 Detailing for Prefabricated Structural

Wood
Prefabricated structural wood members-such as trusses, I-joists, and thin, glued lami-
nated framing-are made to exacting standards, and their manufacturing tolerances are
clearly defined. However, when these materials are used with other structural components
such as dimension lumber, masonry, and steel, the combined effects of all tolerances must
be considered to prevent misfits during erection, field cutting or trimming, or tights that
do not allow for wood expansion or building movement.
Whenever possible, prefabricated structural wood should be used with compatible
framing. Even using prefabricated structural wood members with standard dimension lum-
ber can result in undesirable offsets because the manufacturing tolerances of both materi-
als are different. For example, as shown in Figure 16-4(a), a thin, glued laminated joist
over 12 in. (305 mm) deep could be ~ in. (3 mm) smaller than its nominal depth dimen-
sion. An adjacent piece of dimension lumber could be oversized by the same amount, re-
sulting in a misaligrunent ofl-{ in. (6 mm) or more.
Supporting framework for either pitched or parallel chord trusses should be dimen-
sioned to accommodate the length tolerances of the trusses as well as possible out-of-
alignment plan tolerances of the supporting members. This is especially critical where
sheathing or other exterior finish materials must be applied over both construction assem-
blies. See Figures 16-4 (b) and (c). In most cases, elevation tolerances for trusses are not
critical.
Related Sections
6-8 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Fabrication
6-9 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Erection
6-10 Prefabricated Structural Wood
-
Figure 16-4 Detailing for prefabricated structural wood
can exceed nominal

dressed size
----t-- thin glued

laminated jOist
l-jOist~ or beam
±1/8" (3) ver 12"
(±3 over 3 5)
.' ;
compatible members incompatible members
.{
(a) prefabricated structural wood
1-1--- ±1/4" (6) up to 30' (9144)

±3/8" (10) 30' to 50' (9144 to 15240)
±1/2" (13) over 50' (15240)
(b) pitched wood truss
IIr=-----=;----
II
II
II H------A.L-++----Iength tolerance:
II see Sec. 6-8
exterior finish~1
""'------ supporting member tolerance
(c) parallel chord truss

Figure 16-5 Detailing for paneling on site-built substrates
/ /
wood paneling
substrate
wall not plumb
base
floor out of level
(a) elevation
clearance depends on
substrate type
Z-clips or wood cleats
blocking and
shims as required
base follows
substrate -+-~ contour of floor
(b) detail section

16-5 Detailing for Paneling on Site-Built

Substrates
Wood paneling is fabricated in the mill shop to exact sizes and squareness but must be in-
stalled on substrates that are usually not level, plumb, or square. See Figure 16-5(a}. If suf-
ficient clearance is provided, blocking can be installed against the wall substrate so a line
connecting the faces of the blocking is plumb. When the paneling is suspended or fas-
tened on the blocking, it will also be plumb. In some cases, such as with accurately con-
structed gypsum wallboard partitions, only minor shimming of the Z-clips or wood cleats
used to suspend the paneling is required. In other situations, such as on rough concrete
walls or in older buildings, extensive blocking and shimming may be required to build out
to a plumb and level plane. See Figure 16-5(b}.
If floors or ceilings are extremely out of level, base trim or cornice molding can be used
to conceal the variation in gap size between the bottom or top edge of the paneling and
the ceiling or floor, respectively. Corner details must also be developed that allow the pan-
eling to be installed in rooms that are out of square.
Related Sections
7-8 Rush Paneling
16-6 Detailing for Cabinetry and Site-Built

Substrates
Most cabinets are manufactured in a shop or factory to exact sizes and squareness and must
be fit into less exacting construction where walls are not plumb, floors level, or corners
square. Even site-built cabinets must be fit into less-than-perfect existing construction.
Cabinet detailing should provide ways to tightly mate the cabinets to adjacent construc-
tion while maintaining the overall design style of the installation.
Figures 16-6(a} and 16-6(b} schematically illustrate the places where typical cabinets
must be matched to the surrounding construction. For upper cabinets and shelving, simi-
lar fits must also be made at the ceiling. Because most partitions are not exactly plumb or
perfectly smooth, there should be a clearance behind the cabinet back so the cabinet only
touches the partition at the countertop. The dimension of the clearance depends on the
condition of the partition, but it is normally X in. to l1 in. (6 mm to 13 mm). In most cases,
the top of the backsplash is built wider than necessary so it can be scribed to fit the out-
line of the partition when the countertop is installed. Any shimming required to level the
cabinet must be concealed with a finish base.
Where a vertical edge of a cabinet or other woodwork touches the partition, the joint
can be finished with one ofthe methods diagrammed in Figure 16-6(c).
Related Sections
7-5 Architectural Cabinets
74i Modular Cabinets
7-7 Countertops
f I tt
Ilmll
=igure 16-6 Detailing for cabinetry and site-built substrates
clearance
wallboard: ~
1/4" in 32"
(6 in 813)
plaster:
1/4" in 10'
(6 in 3050)
/
(a) schematic cabinet section
scribe or trim
scribe or trim
/
(b) plan view
reveal scribe flush scribe trim
(c) types of scribes and trim
,t'- "11
Part 3
Measuring Compliance and

Documenting Construction
Tolerances
The individual and combined tolerances and methods of detailing shown in Parts 1 and 2
give the design professional guidance in how to accommodate inaccuracies in construc-
tion. However, construction must be measured to verify that tolerances are within the re-
quired standards or that they exceed standards and justify remedial work.
Like construction, measurement itself is not completely accurate and introduces some
uncertainty into the process of verifying compliance. This part describes the instruments
commonly used in construction measurement, measurement protocols, how measurement
is expressed, and the uncertainty of measurement and offers some suggestions for docu-
menting design requirements for tolerances in order to minimize problems on the job site.
Illtlllll'" Illtt,
Chapter 17
Methods of Measurement
17-1 Measuring Devices

Many instruments are currently available for measuring distances, angles, and slopes, as
well as the roughness of surfaces. These range from inexpensive, moderately accurate
measuring tapes and carpenter's levels to extremely accurate, automated electronic de-
vices costing tens of thousands of dollars. The problem is not a need for a good measuring
instruments but an agreement on which instruments to use and a protocol for using them
to check for tolerance compliance.
Metal measuring tapes are the most commonly used tools for measuring distances. They
are inexpensive, easy to use, and available in English or metric units. Most tapes used in
construction are graduated in units of l16 in. or in millimeters. Accuracy depends on the
quality of manufacturing, how they are maintained, and correcmess of use.
The dimensional accuracy for a lOa-ft. (30.5-m) steel tape depends on the amount of
sag, temperature, tension, and angle of use. The National Institute of Standards and Tech-
nology (NIST) sets tolerances for metal tapes as previously shown in Table 1-1. However,
for typical situations and when sag is minimized, the tolerances shown in Figure 1-1 can
be expected. If higher accuracy is required, a laser should be used or steel tapes with cor-
rection factors included for temperature and other variables.
Sonic measuring devices send out an inaudible noise and measure the time it takes to re-
ceive the echo. They are inexpensive and easy to use, but their range is limited; they can
only measure a hard, reflective surface perpendicular to the sending unit; and they are not
very accurate. Accuracy depends on the manufacturer, but it is approximately ±3 in. (76
mm) over a distance of 50 ft. (15 m).
Laser rangefinders, also called electronic distance meters (EDM), are small, handheld
devices that measure the time it takes for light to travel from the instrument to the meas-
ured surface and back. The accuracy varies with the individual manufacturer's device and
whether it is used with or without a reflector, but for a reflector unit, ranges are from ±l16
in. at 650 ft. (±1.5 mm at 200 m) to ±~ in. at 330 ft. (±3 mm at 100 m). Accuracy de-
creases over longer distances. They are moderately expensive but much less costly than
construction lasers.
Carpenter's levels are used for setting level and plumb only. For determining angles, the
level must be used with a measuring tape to determine slope. This introduces several
sources of possible errors but uses inexpensive and readily available tools.
Digital inclinometers, while slightly more expensive than standard levels, are easy to cal-
ibrate and use and can measure slopes in degrees, percent, and fractions per foot. They
have an accuracy of 0.1 degree and come in 2-ft. and 4-ft. lengths. The individual elec-
tronic module can also be mounted on other devices to create customized measuring in-
struments.
Transits and construction lasers are useful for setting or measuring overall elevation
points to determine a total slope. Most construction lasers have an accuracy of ±l16
,.,""'" """",,'1. InmrrH~

326 Part 3: Measuring Compliance and Documenting Construction Tolerances
in. in 100 ft. (1.6 mm in 30.5 m) and even greater accuracies in shorter distances. While
these instruments have the necessary accuracy to determine distances and elevation
points, they are not as well suited for measuring local variations of slope over small
distances.
Electronic instruments have been developed to measure floor flatness. Originally created
to measure the flatness of concrete floors in critical applications such as narrow-aisle ware-
houses, these devices might also be adapted for use in measuring slope flatness. Their dis-
advantages include a high initial cost and training needed for their proper use. Some of
these devices were developed to more accurately and easily measure floors according to
the F-number system and the waviness index, which are described later in this chapter.
Electronic instruments include the F-meter, Dipstick®, and FloorPro®. Other devices are
listed in the References section at the end of this chapter.
Laser scanners use laser beams to automatically develop a three-dimensional image of a
space. These types of instruments could be used to measure floor flatness and level, but
they are very expensive, require training, and give accuracies in excess of what is needed
to verify compliance with most construction tolerances. For example, one manufacturer's
laser instrument can measure to within 0.001 in. {0.025 mm}.
17-2 Measuring Length

The method of measuring length depends on the type of tool being used, the distance
being measured, and the degree of accuracy required. For example, using a standard metal
tape measure with a hooked end requires different techniques than using a laser range
finder.
When a metal tape is used, at least two measurements should be taken, preferably in
opposite directions. Three measurements are even better so the third can confirm which
~ ,
of the first two is more accurate. I
ISO Standard 4463-1 states that when one is measuring distances with a tape, the
measured distance should not be greater than twice the length of the tape. When accuracy
is critical, the measured values should be corrected for temperature, sag, slope, and ten-
sion. A tension device should also be used with the tape. However, for most construction
measurement and verification of tolerances, these additional steps may not be required.
The NIST Handbook 44, Section 10.3 gives the following rules for the reading of indi-
cations on graduated scales if one desires to read or record values only to the nearest grad-
uation. If the indicator is between two graduations but is closer to one graduation than to
j
the other, the value of the closer graduation is the one to be read or recorded. In the case
l
where, as nearly as can be determined, the indicator is midway between two graduations,
\
the odd-and-even rule is invoked and the value to be read or recorded is that of the grad- 1
uation whose value is even. In most cases, readings can be no more accurate than the ~
smallest graduation. Generally, a measurement device should read one unit more accurate
than the required tolerance reading {one more decimal place or fractional graduation}.
For measurements using an EDM between primary points and secondary points and be-
I
j
I
tween secondary points, ISO Standard 4463-1 recommends that the distance should be j
greater than 30 m (100 ft.) and should be measured from each end. If it can be demon-
strated that a particular instrument has a greater accuracy at shorter distances, lengths less
than 30 m are acceptable. For all electronic instruments, the manufacturer's recommen-
dations should be followed.
fill
17-3 Measuring Angles

For verifying compliance with most tolerance requirements, the measurement of angles is
generally not as important as measuring length or slope. ISO Standard 4463-1 states that
angles should be established with a theodolite reading directly to one minute of angle
or better. Angle measurements should be made in at least one set, and the set defined by
two observations, one on each face of the instrument. An accuracy of greater than 1
minute of angle is readily possible with construction lasers. Some instruments can meas-
ure to within 1 second of angle (0.00278 degrees) and most to within 5 seconds of angle
(0.01389 degrees).
17-4 Measuring Slopes

Measurement of surface slopes for conformance to tolerance requirements is usually re-
quired for accessible ramps and other surfaces and for drainage. Requirements for accessi-
ble ramps generally give a maximum allowable slope and requirements for drainage
typically call for a minimum slope.
Although many proposals have been made, there are no standard protocols for meas-
uring the slope or cross-slope of a surface, especially one that is designed as part of an ac-
cessible route. The slope of walking surface is the angle from level in the direction of
travel. The cross-slope is the angle from level perpendicular to the direction of travel.
Some of the currently available methods of measuring slope are outlined in the follow-
ing. Some methods are standardized and others are merely suggested. At this writing,
there are no industry standards for measuring slopes, although a project by the U.S. Ac-
cess Board is attempting to encourage the development by industry trade groups of stan-
dard ways of measurement for various materials.
Spot Elevations and Calculation Method

This is one of the standard methods of determining slope. With a transit or theodolite,
spot elevations are taken at the top and bottom of a ramp or other slope. Then the dis-
tance between the elevations is used to calculate the overall slope, either in percent or
inches per foot (millimeters per meter). Although this method is easy, it is not good for de-
termining local variations, which can be important for drainage or accessibility.
Department of Justice Method

In the tips and techniques section of Survey Tools and Techniques, the checklist states that
slopes can be measured in three ways: with a land survey to shoot grades, with a digital
level, or with a 24-inch-Iong builder's level and tape measure. The directions for using a
builder's level are as follows: "Using a builder's level, place the level on the pavement at
the steepest point parallel to the direction of the slope. While holding the uphill end of
the level on the pavement, place a pencil under the other end and roll it toward the up-
hill end of the level until the horizontal air bubble shows level. Use the tape measure and
measure the open gap at the downhill end of the level to establish the critical dimension.
For a 1:50 slope this is ~ inch; for a 1:20 slope it is approximately IX inch and for a 1:12
slope it is 2 inches."
Digital Inclinometer Method

Digital inclinometers provide a fairly convenient way to measure slope. After a simple cal-
ibration process, the inclinometer is placed on the surface and the reading is taken off the
device, either in percent, angle, or feet per inch. Inclinometers are available in 2-ft. and
4-ft. lengths, so local variations can be checked against requirements. The individual
electronic unit can also be mounted on a shorter beam, usually I-ft. (305-mm) in length,
to measure even smaller local variations. However, there are no standards specifying how
many individual measurements should be taken or where they should be taken.
Original Research for ANSI A117.1 (1957-1961)

In the original research for ANSI All 7.1-1961, American National Standard Specifications
for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to, and Usable by, the Physically Handicapped,
ramps were assessed for flatness based on measuring 18-inch increments on both edges of
the ramped surface. Both slope and cross-slope were measured. These guidelines for meas-
urement were deleted from later versions of the standard.
Grid Method
In a draft document for accessibility design guidelines, one U.S. city suggested that slope
and cross-slope of exterior ramps and landings should be measured with a 2-ft. (600-mm)
digital level, every 24 in. (600 mm) in both directions, providing a 24-in. (600-mm) grid.
If obvious troughs or ridges were visible, the level was to be placed so that it read the steep-
est slopes on the surface. The slope tolerance was to be based on the surface slope require-
ments. For measuring surface plane, the guidelines suggested that the level be placed so
that its center was over a trough or on the high point of a ridge with an equal gap at both
ends of the level. The gaps were then to be measured with the measurement falling within
certain tolerances. For slopes less than 5 percent, the tolerance was +0.9 percent maxi-
mum, with an allowable X-in. (6-mm) gap under the straightedge. For slopes from 5 per-
cent to 8.3 percent (l:12), the tolerance was + 1.2 percent maximum, with an allowable
iii-in. (lO-mm) gap.
5-Ft. Overlapping Intervals

As published in Concrete Construction magazine, September 1998, author Eldon Tipping
made suggestions for a specification for sloped random-traffic floors such as parking decks,
ramps, and other sloped surfaces, but not necessarily for accessible ramps. The author sug-
gested that each ramp should be evaluated independently as a Random-Traffic Test Sur-
face. Slopes were to be measured with a Dipstick Floor Profiler (Face Construction
Technologies) within 16 hours after completion of final finishing and, where applicable,
before removal of any supporting shores. Sample measurement lines were to be parallel or
perpendicular to slopes shown on the drawings. Measurement lines that were parallel to
slopes were to connect elevation control points. At least two sample measurement lines
were to be taken per bay and in perpendicular directions where slopes permitted. The
minimum length of measurement lines perpendicular to the slope were to be one column
bay. In the testing report, slope departures were to be calculated at 5-ft. overlapping inter-
vals along each sample measurement line.
The author suggested a maximum departure from specified slope of concrete of ±iii in.
over a distance of 10 ft., ±)1 in. over a distance of 20 ft., and ±X in. between control
points.
, It , I
(fUll
1-Ft. Incremental Methods

As published in Concrete Technology Today, April 2001, author Jean Tessmer, accessibility
consultant for Space Options, suggested that ramp slopes be measured with a digital incli-
nometer mounted to measure I-ft. increments. The line of measurement should be paral-
lel to the long edge of the ramp. Longitudinal measurement lines should be spaced 3 ft.
apart, but in no case should fewer than two lines be used. For cross-slopes, measurements
should be taken every 6 ft.
Similar to this method was one developed by a professional trade association commit-
tee to measure ramp slopes. The committee suggested taking measurements using a digital
inclinometer with an accuracy of ±0.1 percent mounted on an aluminum beam with ro-
tating ball joint on metal pads at 12 in. on center. For longitudinal lines, measurements
were to be taken in minimum 5-ft. lengths running parallel to the long dimension, with
one measurement line per 3 ft. of width and within 2 ft. of edges, spaced equidistant apart,
with not less than two lines evaluated for each ramp.
For transverse lines, measurements were to be taken in minimum 2-ft. lengths along a
line running parallel to the long dimension, with one measurement line per 6 ft. of length
and within 2 ft. of ends, spaced equidistant apart, with not less than two lines evaluated
for each ramp.
17-5 Measuring Flatness, Level, and

Smoothness
Measurement of floor surface flatness, level, and smoothness for conformance to tolerance
requirements is usually required for super-flat floors, for the application of finish flooring
materials, and for accessible surfaces. Flatness is the degree to which the surface approxi-
mates a plane. Levelness is the degree to which the surface parallels horizontal. Smoothness
is the degree to which the surface is free from roughness.
There are no standards for how smoothness of surfaces is defined for accessibility or
how a surface can be measured directly. However, ISO 2631-1, Mechanical Vibration and
Shock-Evaluation of Human Exposure to Whole-Body Vibration-Part 1: General Require-
ments, does describe methods of measuring whole-body vibration as a result of surface
finish.
There are three standard methods for measuring surface flatness of smooth, concrete
floors: the 10-ft. straightedge method, ASTM E 1155, and ASTM E 1486. However, there
are currently no generally accepted measurement protocols for determining the flatness,
waviness, or smoothness of floor surfaces for accessibility.
1O-Ft. Straightedge Method

This is the classic method for determining the flatness of concrete and other types of fin-
ished floors. When used as a specification or requirement, a maximum deviation in length
under the straightedge is given, such as "no point shall exceed Y.! in. under a 10-ft. straight-
edge." However, there is no standardized protocol to measure deviations in lengths less
than 10 feet unless a specification states a maximum gap under a shorter straightedge.
The lO-ft. straightedge method has been a standard in ACI 117, Specifications for Tol-
erances for Concrete Construction and Materials, for many years and will be optional as part
of the new ACI 117-06. For ramps, ACI 117-06 will refer to RMS levelness tolerance as
defined in paragraph 4.11 in ASTM E 1486.
"" "I ·ttt

F-Number System
The F-number system, ASTM E 1155, Standard Test Method far Determining Fp Floor Flat-
ness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers, was developed primarily to aid in the construction of
super-flat industrial floors. When tolerances are specified using the F-number system, both
the overall levelness and the flatness can be defined. The flatness number also gives an in-
dication of the "bumpiness" of the surface.
The F-number system develops two number ratings, the FF and the FL' The FF defines
the maximum floor curvature allowed over a 24-in. (600-mm) length computed on the
basis of successive 12-in. (300-mm) elevation differentials. The FL defines the relative
conformity of the floor surface to a horizontal plane as measured over a 10-ft. (3.05-m) dis-
tance. Statistical sampling procedures are used to determine a floor's F-numbers. F-num-
bers are reported as two numbers such as FpJO/FL24. The higher the number, the flatter
and more level the floor.
There are several methods given in ASTM E 1155 that can be used to measure a floor
and develop the F-numbers. However, in practical terms, sophisticated electronic measur-
ing devices developed specifically for this purpose are used. They are expensive and re-
quire some amount of training.
Although direct equivalents are not appropriate, an FF of 25 approximately correlates
to a X-in. variation under an unleveled lO-ft. straightedge. An FF of 50 approximately cor-
relates to a ~-in. variation under a 10-ft. straightedge. Other approximate correlations are
shown in Table 17-1.
Concerning issues of vibration and,rollability, the F-number system is probably a bet-
ter measure than the straightedge because it takes into account local variations of flatness.
However, it was not developed to measure slope.
For slabs-on-grade the F-numbering system works well. However, to determine the F~
number for levelness of suspended slabs, ASTM E 1155 requires that measurements must
be taken within 72 hours of floor installation and before shoring and forms are removed.
For elevated slabs under current standards, the specified levelness and flatness of a floor·
may be compromised as the floor deflects when the shoring is removed and loads are ap- .
plied. However, local variations that could affect vibration and rollability would probably
not be affected to any significant degree by slab deflection.
Additional limitations with the F-number system are that the measurements do not
cross construction joints and only come within 2 ft. of penetrations. Construction joints
as well as other types of joints can affect vibration and rollability. The F-number system
will be optional as part of ACI 117-06,
Table 17-1 Approximate correlations between

F-numbers and straightedge gaps
F-number Gap under an unleveled 10-ft

(3.05 m) straightedge, in (mm)
FF 12 ~ in (13)
FF20 Y,6 in (8)
FF25 Y4in(6)
FF32 )1,6 in (4.8)
FF50 li in (3)
Source: ACI 117
..........---------------
Waviness Index
The Waviness Index, ASTM E 1486, Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Tolerances
Using Waviness, Wheel Path and Levelness Criteria, was developed in response to the discov-
ery that the F-number system was not particularly responsive to floor deviation wave-
lengths between 4 and 15 ft. FF detects floor quality for wavelengths of 1.5 to 4 ft. FL
detects variations when wavelengths are from 15 ft. to 80 ft. The Waviness Index provides
information about flatness in the wavelength range between 1.5 ft. and 20 ft., which was
deemed important to measure floor flatness as required by forklift trucks.
The Waviness Index measures the bumps and dips in a floor surface as the average of
deviations up or down from the midpoints of 2-,4-,6-,8-, and lO-ft. chords. In addition
to providing a single Waviness Index number, the measurement method can also provide
a computer-simulated deviation from a 10-ft. straightedge. This gives similar values as
using a straightedge manually, but with the advantages of following a defined profile line
according to the procedures in ASTM E 1486 and using an instrument that more accu-
rately measures deviations.
As with the F-number system, determining the Waviness Index can be performed in a
variety of ways, but practically, a sophisticated instrument must be used, along with com-
puter software that performs the calculations and reporting. The test method does not
apply to clay or concrete unit pavers. The Waviness Index method will be an alternate
method of determining flatness as part of ACI 117-06.
Industry Standards
ASTM E 1486, Standard Test Method for Detennining Floor Tolerances Using Waviness,
Wheel Path and Levelness Criteria (West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
ASTM E 1155, Standard Test Method for Determining Fp Floor Flatness and FL Floor Level-
ness Numbers (West Conshohocken, PA: American SOCiety for Testing and Materi-
als, 2001).
ISO 2631-1, Mechanical Vibration and Shock-Evaluation of Human Exposure to Whole-
body Vibration-Part 1: General Requirements (Geneva, Switzerland: International
Organization for Standardization, 1997).
ISO 4463-1, Measurement Methods for Buildings-Setting Out and Measurement-Part 1:
Planning and Organization, Measuring Procedures, Acceptance Criteria, November 1
(Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1989).
Product literature, Leica Geosystems (www.leica-geosystems.com). Topcon Positioning
Systems (www.topcon.com), and Trimble (www.trimble.com).
References
Accessible Route Rolling Profiler. Available from Space Options® Inc., P.O. Box 29,
Kula Hawaii, 96790.
Digital floor profileograph. Combined Flooring Services, Ltd., 99 Lakewood Road,
Chandlers Ford, Hampshire, UK S0535AD, 44(0) 2380262017,
www.floorsurvey.com
Dipstick®Z272 Floor Profiler. Face Construction Technologies, Inc., 427 West 35th
Street, Norfolk, VA 23508, www.dipstick.com.
F-Meter. Allen Face & Company, 3404 Enterprise Drive, Wilmington, NC 28405,
www.allenface.com
FloorPro®. Ytterberg Scientific, Inc., 26124 Fawnwood Court, Bonita Springs, FL 34134,
www.flatfloors.com.
Latta, J. K. "Inaccuracies in Construction," Canadian Building Digest 171, April 1975. In

Canadian Building Digests, 151-200 (Ottawa, ON: Institute for Research in Construc-
tion, National Research Council Canada, 1989).
NIST Handbook 44-2003, Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Requirements
for Weighing and Measuring Devices (Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of
Standards and Technology). Retrieved April 7, 2006, from http://ts.nist.gov/ts/
htdocs/230/235lh442003.htm.
Product literature, Leica Geosystems (www.leica-geosystems.com). Topcon Positioning
Systems (www.topcon.com), and Trimble (www.trimble.com).
Scanner III, Combined Hooring Services, Ltd. 99 Lakewood Road, Chandlers Ford,
Hampshire, UK S0535AD 44(0) 2380262017, www.floorsurvey.com
Tessmer, Jean. "Building Hatness into Walks and Ramps," Concrete Technology Today,
April 2001.
Tipping, Eldon. Proposed Tolerances for Sloped Surfaces. Concrete Construction, Septem-
ber1998,pp.769-770.
U.S. Department of Justice. Survey Tools and Techniques, ADA Checklist for New Lodging
Facilities. (1999). Retrieved April 7, 2006, from www.usdoj.gov/crt/ada/ckstools.htm.
Related Sections
1-1 Horizontal Building Layout
1-2 Vertical Building Layout
Chapter 18
The Uncertainty of
Measurement in
Construction
In construction, as in any other discipline, no measurement is exact. There are always un-
certainties about any measurement, and these uncertainties need to be taken into account
when verifying compliance with an allowable tolerance. There are several interrelated as-
pects to measurement uncertainty, which are described in this chapter.
18-1 The Expression of Measurement

Expression is how a measurement is stated, whether it is a design requirement on drawings
or a measurement of an existing physical element. How a value is stated may imply, but
doesn't always, a certain amount of accuracy. For example, saying something is 2.5568 feet
long implies an accurate measurement. Saying the same thing is "two and one-half feet
long" implies the measurement is approximate.
In the way most construction measurements are expressed, the number mayor may not
indicate the accuracy of the measurement. For example, in construction, writing or saying
an item is 6 ft., 4 in. long could mean it is very close to that length-say, within >16 in., or
that the measurement has been rounded off to the nearest inch and the measurement is
only within about one-half inch of the stated value. In architecture and construction,
there is no standard way, typically, to designate the precision of a measurement when the
feet and inch system is used.
With SI units the situation is less ambiguous. Because it is standard practice in the con-
struction industry when using SI to use either millimeters or meters for design dimensions
and most tape measures and other instruments are graduated in millimeters, a design re-
quirement or measurement in millimeters, especially if it ends in a nonzero number, im-
plies an accuracy of ±O.5 mm. If meters are being used, the position of the decimal point
(if any) indicates (or should indicate) the precision based on significant figures as dis-
cussed later in this chapter.
One of the problems with using fractional units in construction is that ftactions are ex-
pressed to the nearest "reduction" even though the design requirement or measurement
might have been established to a greater degree of accuracy. For example, a measurement
expressed as 414 in. could mean the item was measured as 41?{6 in. with the ftaction reduced
or that it was measured to the nearest quarter of an inch so the accuracy is ±% in. rather
than ±7Sl in.
rmIT"
18-1 Normal distribution
~ Mean
c:
e
::::l
g
-o
~
:0
«I
.0
e
a.
Value of
reading
18-2 Expressing Uncertainty

Measurement uncertainty is a factor that is widely used in many other fields, such as sur-
veying, automotive manufacturing, machining, and physics. To date, it has not been used
in the construction industry to any appreciable extent. A measurement uncertainty is
simply a quantified doubt about the result of a measurement. An error is the difference be-
tween a measured value and the theoretical true value. Any error whose value is unknown
is a source of uncertainty. The measurement uncertainty must be known to determine if
compliance with a tolerance has been achieved.
Uncertainties and errors in measurement can come from many sources, such as the
measuring instrument, the item being measured, the skill of the person measuring, the
measurement process, and the environment. For example, in measuring the distance be-
tween two stud walls with a metal tape measure, uncertainties and errors could come from
one or more of the following conditions:
• The tape measure could be slightly mismarked or the end hook could be out
of position.
• The tape might sag or be bowed during the measurement.
• The tape may not be placed perpendicular to the studs, resulting in a slightly
diagonal measurement.
• The studs could be out of plumb, making a measurement taken at the floor level
different than one taken 5 ft. above the floor.
• The person measuring could bend the end of the tape on one of the studs to get
an inside measurement instead of overlapping the tape on the face of the stud,
resulting in a less accurate reading.
• The person measuring might have poor eyesight or the measurement could be
taken in dim lighting conditions, resulting in a reading error.
• The person measuring could round off from the smallest tape graduations to a
larger fraction, thinking that it was "close enough."
'. .e
In addition, errors and uncertainties may accumulate. In the preceding example, the de-
sired measurement may have been made to mark a chalk line on the floor for stud layout.
The initial measurement may be slightly off, the position of the stud runner may not have
been placed exactly on the chalk line, the studs may be out of plumb or twisted, and the
wallboard might bow slightly or otherwise not be installed tightly on the stud. Anyone of
these errors and uncertainties may in itself be insignificant, but added together, they may
create a problem. However, as described in the following, the combination of two or more
uncertainties is not a direct addition, but a statistical calculation.
In the preceding example, the accuracy of the measurement mayor may not be impor-
tant. If the two walls were for an office, the measurement and any fractional errors would
probably not be important. If the measurement was part of the construction process to
build a required exit or an accessible corridor, or a space for a piece of built-in equipment,
the final distance between finished walls would be important.
In some cases the source of the error, such as a temperature differential affecting a
metal tape measure, may be so small as to be insignificant. In other cases, such as tape sag
or out-of-plumb or out-of-square construction, the uncertainty can be important.
Calculating Uncertainty
The calculation of measurement uncertainty is based on theories and methods of statistics
and involves some complex mathematics. There is a standard method for calculating and
expressing measurement uncertainty. The method is described in the Guide to the Expres-
sion of Uncertainty in Measurement (often called GUM). This guide is the result of an in-
ternational effort to standardize the expression of the uncertainty of measurement. For the
United States, minor editorial changes were made and the guide is published as the U.S.
Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement, ANSI/NCSL Z540.2. Although it is
beyond the scope of this book to describe the method of calculating uncertainty in detail,
the following process outlines the basis of the procedure. The reader is directed to the ref-
erences at the end of this chapter for a more complete description.
Before uncertainties can be calculated, it is important to understand that anytime
more than one measurement is taken of the same distance, there will be slightly different
readings. The differences may be the result of several factors, some of which were given
previously in the example of measuring between two stud walls. The values of many meas-
urements may be spread out or distributed in several different ways, but two are most com-
mon. These are also called probability distributions.
The first type of distribution is called normal. When many measurements are taken of
the same distance, their values may randomly fall anywhere, but most values will likely fall
near the mean (or average) than farther away from the mean. That is, the probability of
any measurement falling near the mean is higher when it is near the mean than when it
differs widely from the mean. When graphed, the results form the classic bell-shaped curve
shown in Figure 18-1. To determine how far values vary from the mean, the standard de-
viation is used. The standard deviation is a statistical calculation and is a measure of how far
all the individual values in a set of numbers differ from the mean of the set.
The second type of distribution is called rectangular, or uniform. In this case, values are
likely to be spread evenly above and below the average (mean). As the name implies,
when graphed, the distribution is in the shape of a rectangle, as shown in Figure 18-2.
The first step in calculating uncertainty is to recognize the various contributing factors
and determine which way to evaluate them. There are two ways to evaluate uncertainty:
Type A and Type B evaluations. Type A evaluations are based on statistical methods and
are generally based on many readings of the same measurement. Type B evaluations are
-
18-2 Rectangular distribution
Mean
-
o
>.
~
:0
co
.0
e
a.
i
I~~~
I
~(----------------~)
I
Full width reading
based on anything other than statistical estimates and may include factors such as past ex-
perience with similar measurements, manufacturers' specifications of a measuring instru-
ment, or simply professional judgment. For example, a Type A evaluation could be several
measurements taken with the same tape measure of the same distance. This would be eval-
uated statistically and would result in a normal distribution, as shown in Figure 18-1.
Reading a tape measure is an example of a Type B evaluation. If the tape is graduated
in eighths of an inch, then any reading would give an error of ±X6 in., for a total interval
of %in. It is equally likely that any reading would be evenly distributed within this inter-
val. This would result in a rectangular distribution, as shown in Figure 18-2.
The second step in the process is to calculate the uncertainty of each contributing fac-
tor in a measurement and express each as a standard uncertainty. The starulard uncertainty
represents the uncertainty of a measurement expressed as a margin equal to plus-or-minus
one standard deviation. Each contributing factor must be reduced to a standard uncer-
tainty so they can be combined in the next step.
The third step is to calculate the combined uncertainty using the root sum-of-the-
squares method. This is the same formula described in the introduction to Part 2. Each un-
certainty is squared, then all are added together, and then the square root of the total is
taken.
The resulting combined uncertainty represents a confidence level of approximately 68
percent, or one standard deviation, CJ'. This can be represented on a bell-shaped graph sim-
ilar to that shown in Figure 18-1. Figure 18-3 shows the same graph with standard devia-
tions applied. Within one standard deviation from the mean, statistical analysis states that
approximately 68 percent of all points will fall within this area.
In most cases a higher level of confidence is wanted, so the combined standard uncer-
tainty is multiplied by a coverage factor. A coverage factor of 2 gives a confidence level of
approximately 95 percent, which is two standard deviations, as illustrated in Figure 18-3.
A coverage factor of 3 gives a confidence level of over 99 percent. Generally, a coverage
factor of 2 is used.
, · IIIII11
18-3 Measurement of confidence level
Mean
Q)
CJ
c:
e!
:J
8o
'0
:c
CIS
.0
e
Q.
I I I I
I 68% I Value of
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:<
lcr
>:lcr I
I
I
I
I
I
reading
I 95% I
I l( )I I
I
I 2cr 2cr I
I
99.7%
:< >I
3cr 3cr
0" =standard deviation
After the calculations are made, the measurement can be stated so the information can
be used. When measurements are expressed to include uncertainty, three things must be
included: the value of the measurement, the calculation of the uncertainty, and the level
of confidence. For example, "The distance is 4Bl1 in. ±116 in. with a 95 percent confidence
level." This means that there is a 95 percent probability that the distance and any meas-
urement taken will be within 116 in. of 4Bl1 in.
When verifying that a construction element or measurement is within tolerance lim-
its, one must know the value of the measurement as well as its uncertainty. There are four
possibilities, as shown in Figure 1B-4.
Figure 1B-4(a) shows that a measurement and its uncertainty range may be totally with
tolerances limits, in which case it can be confidently stated that the item complies with
tolerances. A measurement and its uncertainty range may be totally outside of tolerance
limits, as shown in Figure 1B-4(d). In this case, the item clearly does not comply. In some
cases the measurement may be within tolerance limits and a portion of the uncertainty
range may be within tolerance limits, but some of the limit may lie outside of the tolerance
range. See Figure 1B-4(b). In this case it is likely that the measurement complies with tol-
erance limits, but there is some doubt. Figure IB-4(c) shows an instance where there is
even more doubt about compliance. A measurement and most of the uncertainty range
lies outside the tolerance limits, but a portion lies within the limits. In this case the meas-
ure probably does not comply, but it is possible that it does meet the requirements.
18-4 Four conditions or tolerance compliance
Upper limit
-- - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - -l:Dweriiiiiit
(a) (b) (c) (d) (tolerance)
Upper uncertainty
I Measurement
Lower uncertainty
18-3 Units of Measure

Even though the United States has officially adopted the SI system, the customary U.S.
(inch-pound) system is still the predominant method used for construction measurement.
The SI system is used for federal construction, for military work, and for work done out-
side of the United States. Some trade associations and publications (such as the Ameri-
can Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers, or ASHRAE)
have adopted the SI system as their primary method, with customary U.S. units being sec-
ondary. Some publications, such as the ADA Accessibility Guidelines, give requirements in
both units so no conversion is necessary.
Units of length are generally in feet, inches, and fractions of an inch for most architec-
tural and interior design work and in feet and decimals of a foot for civil engineering work.
Millimeters and meters are used when the SI system is employed.
Angles and slope are expressed in many different ways in architectural and landscape
design. For slopes and angles, in the customary U.S. system, designers use percent (feet per
100 feet), ratio (e.g., 1:12), inches per foot, degrees, and inches per 12 inches (for roof
slope). These different methods can cause confusion and errors and can create inaccura-
cies and some difficulty in converting one unit to another.
Although the official unit of two-dimensional angles in the SI system is the radian,
the Metric Guide for Federal Construction recognizes that degrees are used worldwide
and the modem metric system allows their use with SI when the radian is impractical.
The preferred method for expressing surface slope in SI units is millimeter/meter for
drainage slope. The Metric Guide for Federal Construction recognizes the use of nonmetric
degrees/minutes/seconds for representing plane angles in surveying.
For surface smoothness and planarity, the traditional system has been to describe the
amount of variation from a true plane within a certain distance, such as X in. under a 10-
Uuuuu
=
ft. straightedge. Newer electronic devices make it possible to express and measure pla-
narity more precisely, such as with the F-number system, as described in Section 17-5.
As described in Section 18-1, the expression of measurement can communicate the
level of accuracy required in a design dimension or in a measurement result. The SI sys-
tem is better suited to expressing accuracy because significant figures imply a level of ac-
curacy that fractions of an inch do not as they are currently used in construction industry.
18-4 Significant Figures and Rounding

Significant figures in a number are all the nonzero digits and any zeros between them and
any trailing zeros to the right of the decimal place. For example, the number 20.030 has
five significant figures, while 0.0034 has only two. A number such as 300 has only one sig-
nificant figure. If it is written as 300., with the decimal point included, it has three signif-
icant figures. However, there are differences in usage, with trailing zeros in numbers
greater than 1 and various methods for expressing them.
Significant figures can be used to express a desired degree of accuracy or an uncertainty
in measurement. For example, if an item is described as being measured 3.05 m long, it
could mean that the item was between 3.045 m and 3.055 m, or a range of 0.010 m or 10
mm (not using the rounding-to-even method). If the same item was described as being
measured 3050. mm long (with the decimal), it could mean that the item was between
3049.5 to 3050.5 mm, or a range of only 1.0 mm.
However, significant figures can only be used with decimal numbers. They cannot be
extended to fractional measurements like X in., based on current practice, which is to re-
duce fractions. The measurement X in. could be expressed as ~6 in. to indicate that the
nearest sixteenth of an inch was the accuracy, but this would take a change in industry
standard practice. Another way to do the same thing is to specifically indicate the toler-
ance required by using a plus-or-minus dimension. For example, 6'4" (±~"). Converting a
fraction to a decimal can be problematic because as the fraction gets smaller, the number
of significant figures in the conversion increases and the converted decimal number may
suggest a higher degree of accuracy than the corresponding fraction would. For example,
>1 is clearly 0.5, but 7f6 is 0.0625. To compare both equally, the 0.5 would have to be ex-
pressed as 0.5000.
For slopes, the use of percent or angles as units allows decimals to indicate accuracy or
uncertainty, but "fractions of an inch per foot" does not.
Rounding is reducing the significant digits in a number while trying to keep its value
similar. Rounding can be used to reduce decimal numbers when they are generated by soft
conversion from inch-pound units or fractions. Rounding can also be used to change one
number into a less-accurate number when a larger tolerance is acceptable. For example, if
a tolerance is ±0.5 in., then a measurement of 12.4 in. could be rounded to 12 in.
Generally, rounding is performed one of two ways. (1) If the last digit is between 1 and
4, the next-to-Iast digit remains as is. If the last digit is between 5 and 9, the next-to-Iast
digit is increased by 1. (2) The second method is similar, except that when the last digit is
5, the next-to-Iast digit is increased by 1 if it is an odd number; otherwise, the next-to-Iast
digit is left even. This is sometimes known as the "round-to-even" method and attempts
to eliminate bias that results when 5 is always rounded up.
The National Institute of Standards and Technology, in its Handbook 44, Section
10.2, gives general rules for rounding-to-even as described in the preceding paragraph.
The NIST guidelines further state that when the figure to be rounded off is 5 followed by
III r
any figures other than zero(s), the figure in the last place to be retained should be in-
creased by 1. When there are two or more figures to the right of the place where the last
significant figure is to be, the entire series of figures must be rounded off in one step and
not in two or more successive rounding steps.
The NIST Handbook 44, Section 10.4 also gives rules for rounding common fractions.
The rules are applied to the numerators of the fractions that have, if necessary, been re-
duced to a common denominator. If the numerator is less than one-half, then drop; if
more than one-half, then add. If the numerator is exactly one-half, then round to the
nearest even numerator in the round-off fraction. For example, rounding off a %-in. meas-
urement to the nearest quarter inch would be l1 in. because it is between X in. and 1.1 in.
and the numerator in the 1.1 is even. However, %in. would be rounded down to l1 in. be-
cause the numerator in 1.1 is even, rather than the odd numerator in X in.
18-5 Metric Conversion

Converting dimensions from one system of measurement to another can create problems
when trying to establish tolerances or verify compliance with tolerance limits. If not done
thoughtfully, conversion can lead to an increase or decrease in implied accuracy, losing
the intent of the original value.
Using conversion factors to change inch-pound units to SI units (soft conversion) can
lead to a misleading level of accuracy. For example, 8% in. converted to SI using the con-
version factor of "25.4 rom = 1 in." yields 212.725 mm. The %dimension suggests an ac-
curacy of ±YI'6 in., which is 1.5875 mm. The 0.725 part of the converted dimension suggests
an accuracy of ±0.OOO5 mm, which is 3,175 times smaller! Clearly, reasonable judgment
must be used when making soft conversions.
In the Metric Guide for Federal Construction, 1st edition, published by the National In-
stitute of Building Sciences, the following conversion method is suggested. To convert
inch-pound measurements to metric, convert the mixed inch-pound units (feet and
inches) to the smaller unit (inches) before converting to metric and rounding. Then,
Table 18-1 Suggested inch-pound measurements

to SI units
English Metric Rounding Tolerance

(inch/feet) (inches x 25.4, rounded to mm/m)
< X inch nearest tenth of a millimeter
X inch to < 3 inches nearest millimeter
3 inches to < 10 feet nearest 5 millimeters
10 feet to - 33 feet nearest 10 millimeters
(where conversion is less than 10 000 mm)
- 33 feet and greater nearest meter
(where conversion equals or exceeds 10 000 mm)
SOUTce: Accessible Rights-oi-Way: A Design Guide. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board. November 1999.
www.access-board.govlpublicationsIPROW%20GuideIPROWGuide.htm
nn~
round the metric value to the same number of significant digits as there were in the inch-
pound number. For example, using this system, 6 ft, 10 in. becomes 82 in.; 82 in. X 25.4
mm/in. = 2,082.8 mm; round to 2,100 mm. No matter which method is used, converting
from customary U.S. units to SI in a soft conversion should not lead to a false representa-
tion of precision.
Another method of converting from inch-pound units to the SI equivalent is to base
the rounding in SI on the size of the inch-pound unit. The U.S. Access Board has pro-
posed a conversion table for converting from English units to the SI equivalent that in-
cludes rounding of the metric equivalent. This method is shown in Table 18-1.
Several methods can be used to convert SI units to inch-pound units. A conversion
calculator can be used that will generally give, depending on the calculator, an equivalent
in feet, inches, and fractions down to Y64 in. If this level of corresponding accuracy is not
required, the user must decide what other smallest fractional unit will be used; for exam-
ple, li in., Yi'6 in., or ).)2 in.
In some cases, conversion is not necessary because the agency or publication being
used has developed requirements in both measurement systems or is explicit in how any
conversion is to be made. For example, the ADA Accessibility Guidelines gives require-
ments in both units. The ASHRAE Handbook is published in two versions, one with SI
and one with inch-pound units. The International Building Code gives the exact conversion
factors that should be used when switching from inch-pound units to SI units.
Generally, when measuring for compliance with tolerances, the same unit of measure-
ment should be used for checking as was used to state the requirement in the first place.
When decimal numbers are used, the number of significant figures stated in the require-
ment should be used to determine the suggested tolerance, if none is otherwise stated. For
example, if a ramp slope is required to be 4 percent, any slope from 3.5 percent to 4.5 per-
cent should be acceptable (a ±0.5 percent tolerance).
References
ANSI/NCSL Z540.2-1997 (Rev. 2002), U. S. Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in
Measurement. New York: American National Standards Institute and the National
Conference of Standards Laboratories, 2002.
Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement (ISBN 92-67-10188-9). Geneva,
Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1993.
International Vocabulary of Basic and General Terms in Metrology. 2nd ed. (VIM).
Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1993.
Metric Guide for Federal Construction. 1st ed. Washington, DC: National Institute
of Building Sciences, 1991.
Taylor, Barry N., and Chris E. Kuyatt. NIST Technical Note 1297, Guidelines for
Evaluating and Expressing the Uncertainty of NIST Measurement Results
(Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1994)
http:// physics.nist.gov/Pubs/guidelines.
Related Sections
Part 2 Accumulated Tolerances
----------------------------
Chapter 19
Documenting and
Enforcing Tolerances
For any construction project, the architect and engineer should clearly state in the con-
struction documents what tolerances will apply and how those tolerances will be en-
forced. Lacking clear definition of tolerances in the construction documents, industry
standard tolerances as described in this book generally apply. When there are no industry
standard tolerances and none have been defined in the documents, resolution of problems
related to tolerances must be accomplished by general agreement, arbitration, mediation,
or litigation.
Regardless of what tolerances or measurement protocols mayor may not exist, archi-
tects, engineers, and other designers have the tools with existing construction practices to
achieve compliance with tolerances. It is simply a matter of clearly communicating four
things: (1) the tolerance allowed, (2) the standards used, (3) how compliance will be ver-
ified, and (4) what the result of noncompliance will be. Of course, if industry standards do
not exist, the architect or designer must create their own for each project. The existing
tools for communicating and enforcing tolerance limits include drawings, specifications,
preconstruction meetings, and construction observation. In some cases, designers can use
these tools as they exist. In other cases, only slight changes are required to adapt them to
communicate tolerance requirements.
In addition to documenting tolerances, other traditional techniques can also be used,
as they always have been, to accommodate the inaccuracies of construction. These tech-
niques include providing proper clearances in details, building in adjustability, designing
proper joint widths, using overlaps, and employing similar construction methods.
19-1 Documenting Tolerances on Drawings

Existing Practice
Current practice for architectural and construction engineering drawings establish ambi-
guity and the potential for accumulated measurement error. For example, architects typi-
cally use chain dimensioning. If the contractor follows the chain in layout, slight errors
can accumulate to the final dimension. It is also not standard practice to assume that a
fractional measurement indicates a significant figure or the implied accuracy required. An
architect may dimension something as 14'-6" and want that to be built within a X-in tol-
erance, not a l1-in tolerance, as the number 6 might indicate.
It is also typical practice for architects to use the values published in guidelines and
standards and repeat the value on the drawings. If the value is a minimum or maximum or
a range, this fact may not be communicated to the contractor, who may think that there
is a tolerance allowed.
When a dimension is especially important, drafters may use the word "HOLD" or a
similar word to indicate that a dimension is important. Less important dimensions may
have a plus-or-minus sign (±) as a prefix or suffix to indicate that this dimension may vary
slightly. However, in both cases the amount of the allowable variation is not clear.
Although significant figures could be used as a way to state expected accuracy or cer-
tainty in a measurement, the practice of using feet, inches, and fractions of an inch do not
allow this as the method is currently used.
Possible Changes
There are several modifications to drawing practices that could be made to improve com-
munication of important values. These include the following:
• When a dimension range is the regulatory requirement, use the midpoint of the
range as the drawing dimension.
• When a maximum or minimum dimension is a regulatory requirement, use a draw-
ing dimension that is less or more than the limit. The amount should be deter-
mined by the expected tolerance of the construction element.
• Use the plus-or-minus symbol (±) after a dimension when it must be made clear
what the expected tolerance is. Also include a general note stating that no addi-
tional allowances either plus or minus will be allowed. For example, 6'-4" (±W').
• When using feet and inches to dimension drawings, use the denominator of frac-
tions to indicate the "significant figure." Alternately, use the reduced fraction with
the significant figure fraction in parentheses. For example, in communicating that
the tolerance is ±Yr6 in., write 6'-4YJ6" or 6'-4)1" (YJ6").
• Use datum dimensioning when the position of one item is particularly important.
Do not dimension it based on one or more dimensions in a string.
• For ramps, dimension both overall length and elevation to indicate a slope less
than the maximum allowable. If necessary, include requirements for smoothness
and the method of taking measurements to verify compliance.
19-2 Documenting Tolerances in

Specifications
Specifications provide an ideal place to solve many of the problems with communication.
Specifications allow the requirements to be stated as succinctly or as elaborately as re-
quired. Further, courts place great importance on specifications when disputes arise.
Current practice using the Construction Specification Institute's standard three-part
format for writing specifications has places to include all requirements related to toler-
ances and measurement protocols. One or more of them can be used as needed to describe
the requirements of a project. These include the following:
• References to industry standards: Part 1, "References"

• Required test reports and similar documents: Part 1, "Submittals"
• Mockup requirements: Part 1, "Quality Assurance"
• Regulatory requirements, mock-ups, and preinstallation meetings: Part 1,
"Quality Assurance"
• Shop fabrication of elements: Part 2, "Fabrication Tolerances"
r=
Chapter 19: Documenting and Enforcing Tolerances 345
• Special techniques and interface with other work: Part 3, "Construction

Requirements"
• Final, installed tolerances: Part 3, "Site Tolerances"
Many manufacturers and trade groups have guide specifications that include their prod-
uct's tolerances. In addition, master specifications, such as SPECTEXT and Masterspec®
include tolerances in many of their sections.
If specific tolerances or requirements are not stated in the specifications (or drawings),
it is generally held that industry standards apply. However, many industries do not have
tolerance standards, or the problematic element may be part of a larger assembly for which
there are no standard tolerances; the placement of a toilet, for example. When tolerances
do not exist and there are no clear standards, disputes arise and the courts may decide the
issue.
In cases where the measuring devices and/or measuring techniques used will affect the
accuracy of the construction, the expected tolerances must be clearly stated. For example,
it may be considered industry standard to layout a house or small commercial building
using a transit and measuring tape. If no other guidance or accuracy requirements are spec-
ified, the contractor may be considered within industry standards when the resulting
building is constructed with these tools and techniques. Unless specific tolerances are
called out, expectations of higher accuracy resulting from using laser-based instruments in
this case cannot be expected.
19-3 Contract Administration

Contract administration provides two points during which tolerance issues can be ad-
dressed: preconstruction meetings and construction observation. Preconstruct ion meet-
ings provide a commonly used technique to communicate the required needs of the
project. All interested parties are together (or on a conference call or teleconference).
The designer may ask if everyone has read the specification requirements and interpreted
the drawings correctly. Everyone may discuss unusual or particularly tight tolerances, ask
questions, suggest construction techniques, review measurement protocols, and verify
how compliance will be checked. As with all meetings, written notes should be distrib-
uted to all parties.
Construction observation is the stage at which tolerances are enforced. Even though
the final responsibility rests with the contractor, the architect, engineer, or other design
professional should be observing construction and requiring the contractor to use the
measurement protocols outlined in the specifications. For large projects, checking for
compliance with tolerances may be done early in a construction process to suggest needed
adjustments to techniques for subsequent construction. For many tolerances, the final
check is by the regulatory agencies.
19-4 Tolerances and Accessibility

Compliance with tolerances for accessible construction is especially problematic for
two reasons. First, although the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guide-
lines (ADAAG) states that all dimensions are subject to conventional building industry
mmllrmrrm
tolerances for field conditions, there are no industry standard tolerances for many accessi-
ble elements. Second, accessible design may be required by both a local building code as
well as by ADAAG or the newer Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers
Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADA/ABA AG), which, at this writing, has not yet been
adopted by the U.S. Department of Justice. While the local authority having jurisdiction
will check compliance with any requirements in the local code being used, other ADA
compliance problems may not be discovered until a complaint is made to and investigated
by the U.S. Department of Justice. Accessible elements that may seem in compliance im-
mediately after construction may later be deemed to be unacceptable. For these reasons, it
is especially important for the architect, engineer, or designer to provide for tolerances
and construction inaccuracies in the design and documentation of a project.
The ADNABA AG attempts to address the first problem by stating that all dimen-
sions are subject to conventional industry tolerances except where the requirement is stated
as a range with specific minimum and maximum endpoints. In the advisory to the section on
construction and manufacturing tolerances (Advisory 104.1.1), it is suggested that when
a range of dimensions is stated, the designer should indicate on the drawings a dimension
somewhere within the range to allow for less than exact field construction. No tolerance
outside of the range at either endpoint is permitted. Likewise, when a maximum or mini-
mum dimension is stated, good practice is to indicate a dimension less than the required
maximum or more than the required minimum by the amount of the expected field or
manufacturing tolerance. However, when a requirement is a minimum or a maximum di-
mension that does not have two specific endpoints, tolerances may apply.
References
Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines July
23,2004 (Washington, DC: U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compli-
ance Board) www.access-board.gov/ada-aba/index.htm.
i
tf
i
Sources
Chapter 1 Building Layout and Sitework

Accessible Rights-of-Way; A Design Guide. Washington, oc: U.S. Architectural and
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, November 1999.
ACI 117-06, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
Farmington Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2006.
Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines.
July 23. Washington, oc: U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board, 2004.
www.access-board.gov/ada-aba/index.htm
Ballast, David Kent. An Analysis of the Draft ADA Guidelines for Accessible Rights-of-
Way .. June. Washington, OC: Transportation Research Board, National Cooperative
Highway Research Program, 2004. NCHRP Project 20-07{Task 167.
Designing Sidewalks and Trails for Access, Part II of II: Best Practices Design Guide,
Beneficial Designs, Inc. Publication No. FHWA-EP-01-027. Washington, oc:
U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, 2001.
Planning and Organization, Measuring Procedures, Acceptance Criteria. November 1.
Latta, J. K. "Inaccuracies in Construction," Canadian Building Digest 171, April 1975. In
Canadian Building Digests, 151-200 (Ottawa, ON: Institute for Research in Construc-
tion, National Research Council Canada, 1989)."Inaccuracies in Construction."
Model Standards of Practice, Section D, NSPS Model Standards for Construction Layout
Surveys. National Society of Professional Surveyors. Gaithersburg, MD: National
Society of Professional Surveyors, 2003.
NIST Handbook 44-2003, Section 5.52. Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of
Standards and Technology, 2003.
http://ts.nist.gov/ts/htdocs/230/235/h442003.htm
Revised Draft Guidelines for Accessible Public Rights-of-way. November 23. Washington,
OC: U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, 2005.
www.access-board.gov/prowac/draft.htm
SPECTEXT Section 02211, Rough Grading. Bel Air, MD: Construction Sciences Re-
search Foundation, 1989.
SPECTEXT Section 02923, Landscape Grading. Bel Air, MD: Construction Sciences Re-
search Foundation, 1989.
SS-l: Model Construction Specifications for Asphalt Concrete and Other Plant-Mix Types.
Lexington, KY: Asphalt Institute, November 1984. Out of print.
Standard Specifications and Supplements. Washington, OC: American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, 1998.
http://fhwapap04.fhwa.dot.gov/nhswp/servlet/LookUpCategory
II III II II II II d
348 Sources
2005 Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTNACSM Land Title Surveys.
Washington, DC: American Land Title Association and National Society of
Professional Surveyors, 2005.
UFGS Section 310000, Earthwork. United Facilities Guide Specifications. August.
Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2004.
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/DOD/UFGS/UFGS%2031 %2000%2000.pdf
UFGS Section 32 12 17, Hot Mix Bituminous Pavement. United Facilities Guide Specifi-
cations. August. Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2004.
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/DOD/UFGS/UFGS%2032%2012%2017.pdf
UFGS Section 32 13 13.06, Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Roads and Site
Facilities. United Facilities Guide Specifications. August. Washington, DC: National
Institute of Building Sciences, 2004.
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/DOD/UFGS/UFGS%203 2%20 13 %20 13.06.pdf
UFGS Section 32 13 14, Concrete Pavements for SmaU Projects. United Facilities Guide
Specifications, August. Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences,
2004.
http://www. wbdg.org/ccb/DOD/UFGS/UFGS%203 2%20 13 %20 14.pdf
Chapter 2 Concrete
ACI 117-06, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. Farm-
ington Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2006.
ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02(fMS 602-02, Specifications for Masonry Structures. Farming-
ton Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2005.
ASTM C 1386-98, Standard Specification for Precast Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (PAAC)
Wall Construction Units. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and
Materials, 1998.
ASTM C 1555-03a, Standard Practice for Autoclaved Aerated Masonry. West Con-
shohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2003.
ASTM E 1155-96 (Reapproved 2001): Standard Test Method for Detennining Fp Floor
Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
for Testing and Materials, 2001.
Guide Specification, 04225, Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Units. Autoclaved Aerated
Concrete Product Association 2005.
International Building Code, 2003, Section 1009.3.1. Country Club Hills, IL: Interna-
tional Code Council, Inc., 2003.
MNL 135-00, Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction.
Chicago: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. 2000.
Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels, 4th ed. MNL-128-0 1.
Chicago: Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, 2001.
The Tilt-Up Concrete Association's Guideline Specifications. Mount Vernon, IA: The
Tilt-Up Concrete Association, 2002.
Chapter 3 Steel
AISC 303-05, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Chicago:
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005.
ASTM A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for RoUed Structural
Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. West Conshohocken, PA: American
Society for Testing and Materials, 2005.
Sources 349
ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
ASTM A618/A618M, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
Building Transportation Standards and Guidelines. Salem, NY: National Elevator Industry,
Inc., 2006.
Chapter 4 Unit Masonry

ACI 530.l-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02, specifications for Masonry Structures Farmington
Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute, 2005}.
ASTM C 34, Standard Specification for Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile. West Con-
ASTM C 55, Standard Specification for Concrete Brick. West Conshohocken, PA: Ameri-
can Society for Testing and Materials, 2003.
ASTM C 56, Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non-Load-Bearing Tile. West Con-
ASTM C 62, Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From
Cay or Shale). West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials,
2004.
ASTM C 90, Standard Specification for Hollow LoadbearingConcrete Masonry Units. West
Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005.
ASTM C 126, Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing
Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Test-
ing and Materials, 2005.
ASTM C 129, Standard Specification for NonloadbearingConcrete Masonry Units. West
ASTM C 212, Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile. West Conshohocken,
PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2000.
ASTM C 216, Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay
or Shale). West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials,
2005.
ASTM C 652, Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from
Clay or Shale). West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materi-
als, 2005.
ASTM C 744, Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry
Units. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005.
ASTM C 901, Standard Specification for Prefabricated Masonry Panels. West Con-
ASTM C 1088, Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale.
West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005.
BIA 11 C, Guide Specifications for Brick Masonry, Part 4, Technical Notes on Brick Con-
struction. Reston, VA: The Brick Industry Association, 1998.
International Building Code, Section 2104.1.2.4, "Glass Unit Masonry." Country Club
Hills, IL: International Code Council, 2003.
Public Works Specifications, Ceramic Veneer. AlA File No.9, October. Architectural Terra
Cotta Institute (now defunct), 1961.
IIII " "',

350 Sources
UFGS Section 04 20 00, Masonry. United Facilities Guide Specifications. August.

http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/OOD/UFGS/UFGS%2004%2020%2000.pdf
Chapter 5 Stone
Cast Stone, Standard Specification 04 72 00. Lawrenceville, GA: The Cast Stone
Institute, 2004.
Dimension Stone Design Manual VI. Cleveland: Marble Institute of American, Inc. 2003.
Indiana Limestone Handbook, 21st ed. Bedford, IN: Indiana Limestone Institute of
American, Inc., 2002.
Specifications for Cut Indiana Limestone, Section 3.3.5. Bedford, IN: Indiana Limestone
Institute of American, 2005.
Chapter 6 Structural Lumber

AITC 113-200 1, Standard for Dimensions of Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
Centennial, CO: American Institute of Timber Construction, 2001.
ANSI A20S.1-1999, Standard for Particleboard. New York: American National
Standards Institute, 1999.
ANSI A20S.2-2002, Standard for MDF. New York: American National Standards
Institute, 2002.
ANSI/AITC AI90.1-2002: Wood Products-Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
New York: American National Standards Institute, 2002.
ANSI{TPI 1-2002, National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Construction. Alexandria, VA: Truss Plate Institute, Inc. 2002.
BCSI 1-03, Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing and Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses. Madison, WI: Wood Truss Council of America and Truss
Plate Institute, 2003.
GA-216, Standard Specification for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
Washington, DC: The Gypsum Association, 2004.
International Building Code, Table 1604.3, "Deflection Limits," Country Club Hills, IL:
International Building Code, 2003.
PS 1-95, Voluntary Product Standard, Construction and Industrial Plywood. Gaithersburg,
MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1996.
PS 2-04, Voluntary Product Standard, Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use
Panels. Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2004.
PS 20-05, Voluntary Product Standard, American Softwood Lumber Standard. Gaithersburg,
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. Washington, DC: National
Association of Home Builders Remodelors Council, 2005.
SPECTEXT Section 06151, Wood Chord Metal Joists, Baltimore: Construction Sciences
Research Foundation, 1990.
SPECTEXT Section 06196, Plywood Web Joists, Baltimore: Construction Sciences
UFGS Section 06 1000, Rough Carpentry. United Facilities Guide Specifications. May.
www.wbdg.org/ccb/OOD/UFGS/UFGS%2006%2010%2000.pdf
Iff
____________
1 ~_~_~ .......
Sources 351
Chapter 7 Finish Carpentry and Architectural Woodwork

ANSIjKCMA A161.1-2000, Recommended PerforTTUlnce and Construction Standards for
Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets. Potomac Falls, VA: Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers
Association, 2000.
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed. Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
Woodwork Institute, 2003.
Master Specifications, Solid Surface Materials. Arlington, VA: International Cast Polymer
Alliance, 2006
www.icpa-hq.org/professionals/mastersp.cfm
PS 20-05, Voluntary Product Standard, American Softwood Lumber Standard. Gaithersburg,
Residential Construction PerforTTUlnce Guidelines, 3rd ed. Washington, DC: National
Association of Home Builders Remodelors Council, 2005.
SPECTEXT Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, Bel Air, MD: Construction Sciences
WM 4-85, General Requirements for Wood Moulding. Woodland, CA: Wood Moulding
and Millwork Producers Association, 1985.
Chapter 8 Curtain Walls

AAMA MCWM-1-89, Metal Curtain Wall Manual. Schaumburg, IL: American
Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2002.
ANSI H35.2-2003, Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum MiU Products. Arlington,
VA: The Aluminum Association, 2003.
GANA Glazing Manual. Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America, 2004.
SFM-1-87, Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. Schaumburg, IL: American
Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2002.
SPECTEXT Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. Baltimore: Construc-
tion Sciences Research Foundation, 1989.
UFGS Section 08 44 00, Glazed Curtain Wall. United Facilities Guide Specifications.
December. Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2005.
www.ccb.org/docs/ufgshome
http://www.wbdg.org/ccbjOODjUFGSjUFGS%2008%2044%2000.pdf
Chapter 9 Finishes
ANSI A108.11, Specification for Interior Installations ofCementitious Backer Units.
Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North America, Inc., 2005.
ANSI A108/A118/A136, American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North American, Inc., 1999.
ANSI A137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile. Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North
American, Inc., 1988.
ANSI H35.2-2003, Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products. Arlington, VA:
The Aluminum Association, 2003.
ANSI/HPVA EF 2000, American National Standard for Engineered Wood Flooring. San
Diego: Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association, 2002.
ASTM A 484/A 484M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel
Bars, Billets, and Forgings. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing
and Materials, 2005.
[ " I"~ "" . 111111 " II fl

352 Sources
ASTM A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. West
ASTM B248 and B248M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plnte, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. West Conshohocken, PA:
American Society for Testing and Materials, 200l.
ASTM B249/B249M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Copper
and Copper-Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
ASTM B251 and B251M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Seamless
Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
Testing and Materials, 2002.
ASTM C1 007, Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)
Steel Studs and Relnted Accessories. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
ASTM C1396, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. West Conshohocken, PA:
American Society for Testing and Materials, 2004.
ASTM C635, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. West Conshohocken,
ASTM C636, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for
ASTM C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
ASTM C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. West
ASTM C843, Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster. West
ASTM C926, Standard Specification for Application of Interior Portlnnd Cement-Based
Plaster. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials, 2005.
Dimension Stone Design Manual VI. Cleveland: Marble Institute of American, Inc. 2003.
Flntness Tolerances. Purcellville, VA: The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association,
Inc., 2005.
GA- 216, Standard Specification for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. Wash-
ington, DC: The Gypsum Association, 2004.
Glass Reinforced Gypsum Guide. St. Charles, IL: Ceilings and Interior Systems Construc-
tion Association, 1990.
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. Washington, DC: National Asso-
ciation of Home Builders Remodelors Council, 2005.
Spec GUIDE, 09550, Wood Flooring. May. Alexandria, VA: The Construction Specifica-
tions Institute, 1988 (Out of print).
Specification Guide for Cold-Formed Lightweight Steel Framing in Lightweight Steel Framing
Systems Manual, 3rd edition. Chicago: Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, 1987.
Specifications. Purcellville, VA: The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.,
2005.
SPECTEXT Section 09511, Suspended Acoustical Ceilings. Baltimore: Construction
Sciences Research Foundation, April 1990.
11111
Sources 353
SPECTEXT Section 09546, Metal Linear Ceiling Systems. July. Baltimore: Constmction
Sciences Research Foundation, 1991.
2006 Handbook for Ceramic TIle Installation. Anderson, SC: Tile Council of North Amer-
ican, Inc., 2006.
UFGS Section 096429, Wood Strip Flooring. United Facilities Guide Specifications,
August 2004. Washington, OC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 2005.
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/OOD/UFGS/UFGS%2009%2064%2029.pdf.
Chapter 10 Glazing
ASTM C 1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. West Conshohocken, PA: American
Society of Testing and Materials, 2001.
ASTM CI048, Standard Specification for Heat-treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society of Testing
and Materials, 2004.
GANA Glazing Manual. Topeka, KS: Glass Association of North America, 2004.
Specification No. 64-3-16a Rev. 5, Specification for Fully Tempered Safety Glass for
General Construction Usage, CPS 16 CPR 1201. Topeka, KS: Glass Association
of North America, 200 1.
Specification No. 66-9-20 Rev. 6, Specification for Heat-Strengthened or Fully Tempered
Ceramic Enameled Spandrel Glass for Use in Building Window/Curtain Walls and Other
Architectural Applications. Topeka KS: Glass Association of North America, 2001.
Specification No. 95-1-31, Specification for Decorative Architectural Flat Glass. Topeka
KS: Glass Association of North America, 2001.
SPECfEXT Section 08971, Suspended Glass. Bel Air, MD: Constmction Sciences Re-
search Foundation, Inc., 1989.
TR-1200-83 SIGMA Voluntary Guidelines for Commercial Insulating Glass-Dimensional
Tolerances. Ottawa, ON: Insulated Glass Manufacturers Alliance, 1983.
Chapter 11 Doors and Windows

AAMA/WDMA/CSA lO1/1.S. 2/A440, Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and
Unit Skylights. Schaumburg, IL: American Architectural Manufacturers Association,
2005.
Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual. Chicago: Architectural Aluminum Manu-
facturers Association, 1979 (Out of print)
ANSIjNAAMM HMMA 863, Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames. Chicago: Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, Division of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 2004.
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 8th ed. Potomac Falls, VA: Architectural
Woodwork Institute, 2003.
Residential Construction Performance Guidelines, 3rd ed. Washington, OC: National Asso-
ciation of Home Builders Remodelors Council, 2005.
SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. Cleveland: Steel
Door Institute, 2000.
Steel Windows, Specifications. Cleveland: Steel Window Institute, 2006.
WDMA 1.S. lA, Industry Specification for Architectural Wood Flush Doors. Des Plaines,
IL: Window and Door Manufacturers Association, 1997.
WDMA 1.S. 6, Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Stile and Rail Doors. Des Plaines,
IL: Window and Door Manufacturers Association, 1997.
mllltlfll11nnil
a
354 Sources
WM 1-99, Quality Standards, Exterior Wood Door Frames. Woodland, CA: Wood
Moulding and Millwork Producers Association, 1999.
WM 1-99, Quality Standards, Hinged Interior Wood Door Jambs. Woodland, CA: Wood
Moulding and Millwork Producers Association, 1999.
Chapter 17 Methods of Measurement

ASTM E 1555-96 (Reapproved 2001). Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor
Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society
ASTM E 1486-98 (Reapproved 2004). Standard Test Method for Determining Floor
Tolerances Using Waviness, Wheel Path and Levelness Criteria. West Conshohocken,
ISO 2631-1, Mechanical Vibration and Shock-Evaluation of Human Exposure to Whole-
Body Vibration-Part 1: General Requirements. Geneva, Switzerland: International
Organization for Standardization, 1997.
Planning and Organization, Measuring Procedures, Acceptance Criteria. November 1.
Latta, J. K. "Inaccuracies in Construction," Canadian Building Digest 171, April 1975.
In Canadian Building Digests, 151-200 (Ottawa, ON: Institute for Research in
Construction, National Research Council Canada, March 1989).
NIST Handbook 44-2003, Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Requirements for
Weighing and Measuring Devices. Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards
and Technology, 2003.
Survey Tools and Techniques: ADA Checklist for New Lodging Facilities. Washington, DC:
U.S. Department of]ustice, 1999. Retrieved April 7, 2006, from
www.usdoj.gov/crt/ada/ckstools.htm.
Tessmer, Jean. Building Flatness into Walks and Ramps. Concrete Technology Today.
April 2001.
TIpping, Eldon. Proposed Tolerances for Sloped Surfaces, Concrete Construction,
September 1998, pp. 769-770.
Chapter 18 The Uncertainty of Measurement in

Construction
ANSI/NCSL Z540.2-1997 (Revised 2002), U.S. Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in
Measurement. New York: American National Standards Institute and the National
Conference of Standards Laboratories, 2002.
Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement. ISBN 92-67-10188-9. Geneva,
International Vocabulary of Basic and General Terms in Metrology (VIM), 2nd ed. Geneva,
Metric Guide for Federal Construction, 1st ed. Washington, DC: National Institute of
Building Sciences, 1991.
Taylor, Barry N., and Chris E. Kuyatt. NIST Technical Note 1297, Guidelines for
Evaluating and Expressing the Uncertainty of NIST Measurement Results. Gaithersburg,
MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, September 1994.
Illn I1IlflHII
" ")-'):' - . _ III .. - ......... ---4
Sources 355
Chapter 19 Documenting and Enforcing Tolerances

Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines.
July 23. Washington, OC: U. S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board, 2004.
rrrfum ImmllllH 111111 ~

Index
AASHTO. See American Association of Asphalt:

State Highway and Transportation pavement, slope tolerances, 13
Officials paving, 11,13, 14
Accessibility, 19 roadways, 21
floor surfaces, 329-331 sidewalks,21
ramps, 327 ASTM E 1155, 330
tolerances, 345-346 ASTM E 1486, 331
Accommodating construction tolerances, Autoclaved aerated concrete, 69, 73
255-259
Base molding, 158-160
Accumulated tolerances, 258-259
Batten joints, 312
Accumulated tolerances in steel frames
Beams:
289-293 '
cast-in-place concrete, 35
Accuracy standards for ALTA/ACSM
prestressed concrete, 49, 51, 61
Land TItle Surveys, 17
reinforcement placement, 23
Acoustical ceilings, 210-211
steel, connection with columns, 91
ADAAG. See Americans with Disabilities
timber, 315-316
Act Accessibility Guidelines
Benchmarks, 3
All-glass entrances, 230-232
Bent glass, 235-237
Aluminum, 218, 220-221
Blinds, 177-178
curtain walls, 189-192
Board lumber, 153-155
storefronts, 193-196
Brass, 216-218
windows, 251-252, 275
Brick:
American Association of State Highway
manufacturing tolerances, 104-107
and Transportation Officials
prefabricated panels, 103-104
(AASHTO), 13
veneer on masonry, 303-304
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessi-
wall construction, 107-108
bility Guidelines (ADAAG), 14,
with cast-in-place concrete, 266-268
19,345-346
with steel, 295-297
Anchor bolts, 31-32,87
Bronze, 216-218
Anchor rods, 31-32,290,
Building joints, 263
Angles, expression of, 338
Building layout, horizontal, 3-5
Angles, measuring, 327
Building layout, vertical, 7-9
Architectural flat glass, 233-234
Building location tolerances, 16, 18
Architectural concrete wall panels, 67
Butt joints, 256, 313
Architectural woodwork. See also specific
types Cabinets, 155-156, 160-161, 163,320
Architectural woodwork installation Camber:
185-188 ' angles and tees, 83
Architecturally exposed structural steel Sand M shapes, 80
91-92 ' Wand HP steel shapes, 75, 77
1111111111111
358 Index
Carpenter's levels, 325 steel erection, 87 -90

Cast-in-place concrete: timber, 315
doors in, 273 Combined tolerances. See Accumulated
frame tolerances, 260-263 tolerances
horizontal tolerances, 37 Compliance measurement, 341
plumb tolerances, 35 Compliance with tolerances, 337
reinforcement in, 25 Concrete:
windows in, 275 autoclaved aerated, 69, 73
with precast concrete, 264 beams, 49, 51
with brick, 266-268 cast-in-place. See Cast-in-place con-
with stone, 269 crete
with curtain walls, 271 floors, 329
Cast stone, 129 footings, 31-32
Ceilings: forms, 23
acoustical, 210-211 glass-fiber-reinforced, 39,41, 69
joists for, 199 hollow-core slabs, 47
linear metal, 213 joint tolerances, 21,263
suspension systems, 210-211 paving, 9
Ceramic tile, 199, 204-206 piers, 32
Ceramic veneer. See Terra cotta precast. See Precast concrete
Chair rails, 158-160 reinforcement, 23
Cladding on steel frames, 289 roadways, 9
Clay facing tile, 109-112 sectional tolerances, 35
Clearance, definition, 255 sidewalks, 14
Clearances: slabs on grade, 29, 31
brick and cast-in-place, 266-268 slip-fonned, 35
brick and steel frames, 297 slope tolerance, 11, 13
curtain walls and cast-in-place con- soffits, 23
crete, 271 stairs, 21, 37, 39, 47-49
curtain walls and steel frames, 299-301 tilt-up, 73-74
doors and cast-in-place concrete, 273 Concrete block, 303-304
doors and masonry, 309 manufacturing, 97
glass-fiber-reinforced concrete, 41 prefabricated panels, 103 -104
precast and cast-in-place concrete, 264 reinforcement in, 99
precast and steel frames, 281-283 Concrete brick, 97
precast concrete and masonry, 283-284 Concrete subfloors for:
precast concrete and steel, 295 terrazzo, 207
stone and cast-in-place concrete, 269 tile, 206
stone and masonry, 305 wood flooring, 208-209, 210
stone and steel, 297 Confidence level, of measurements, 336
windows and cast-in-place concrete, Consttuction lasers, 4, 5, 7, 325-326
275 Construction observation, 345
windows and masonry, 309 Construction Specification Institute, 344
Columns: Construction joints, 263
cast-in-place concrete, 25,35 Contract administration, 345
concrete frames, 37, 260-263 Control joints, 263
precast, 57, 59 Copper, 216-218
steel,289-291 Cored slabs. See Hollow-core slabs
steel, connection with beams, 91 Cornice molding, 158-160
Index 359
Countertops, 163, 166-167 marble, 123

Coverage factor, 336-337 measuring, 329-331
Covered joints, 257 Floor classification, flatness, 29, 31
Cross-slope, measuring, 327-329 Floors:
Curb offset tolerances, 16, 18 ceramic tile, 204-206
Curb ramps, 21,23 concrete, 329
Curtain walls, 271 precast erection, 63
aluminum, 189-192 stone, 210
on steel frames, 289, 299-301 terrazzo, 207
wood, 145-146,208-209
Detectable warning surfaces, 21 Flush paneling, 167-170
Detention doors, 241 Footings, 31-32, 264
Digital inclinometers, 7,9,325,328 Fractional units, 333, 339
Dimension stone, 119, 121 Frames:
Door casing trim, 158-160 door, 241
Door frames, 239- 241 glass, 223, 225, 228, 230
Doors: steel door, 239
detention, 241 wood door, 174-175,246-249
flush wood, 178, 180-181 Framing, lumber, 143
in cast-in-place concrete, 273 Framing, metal wall, 197-198
in masonry, 309 Framing, wood wall, 199
in precast concrete, 286
installation, 246-249 GFRC. See Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete
insulated, 239-241 Glass:
steel, 239 bent, 235-237
stile and rail, 181-185, 244 decorative architectural, 233-234
wood,241-244 entrances, 230-232
wood patio, 246 flat, 223
Double tees, precast, 55 heat-strengthened,227-228
Drawings, tolerances on, 343 insulated, 228-230
Drywall. See Gypsum wallboard laminated, 233-235
patterned, 223-225
Electronic distance meters (EDM), spandrel, 22 7-228
325 tempered, 227-228
Elevator shafts, 94-95 wired, 223-225
Entrances, 193-196 Glass block, 116
Entrances, glass, 230-232 Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete (GFRC),
Error in measurement, 334-335 39,41,69
Expansion joints, 263 Glass-reinforced gypsum, 200-202
Expression of measurement, 343-344 Glued laminated framing, 150
Glued laminated timber, 133,317-318
F-number system, 29, 31, 326, 330 Grading tolerances, 17
Fiberboard, 141 Granite:
Finish carpentry, 153-155, 158 fabrication, 119, 121
Finish grading, 18 installation, 125
Flat glass, 223 interior, 129-132
Flatness, 29, 31 on concrete frames, 269,
floors, 326 on masonry backup, 305
granite, 119 Grooves, in concrete, 263
-
360 Index
Guardrails, 21 Laser:
Gypsum wallboard, 197-198, 199 construction, 5, 7, 325-326
Gypsum, glass-reinforced, 200-202 levels, 7
rangefinders, 325
Handrails, 21 scanners, 326
Heat-strengthened glass, 227-228 Lath and plaster, 202-204
Hoistways. See Elevator shafts Length, measuring, 326
Hollow-core slabs, 47, 63 Level, wood floors, 146
Level alignment in concrete, 35
I-joists, 317 -318 Level, measuring, 329-331
Insulated glass, 228-230 Levelness, 29, 31
Interfacing tolerances, 277 Levels:
ISO 2631-1, Mechanical Vibration and carpenter, 325
Shock-Evaluation of Human digital, 7,9,325,328
Exposure to Whole-Body Vibration- optical,7
Part 1, 329 spirit, 7
ISO 4463-1, Measurement Methods Limestone:
for Building-Setting Out and fabrication, 123, 125
Measurement, 4, 326, 327 installation, 127
Isolation joints, 263 interior, 129-132
on concrete frames, 269
Joint design, 256-258 on masonry backup, 305
Joint tolerances, 263 Lippage, 210
Joints: Lumber:
building, 263 rough,143
butt, 256 sizes, 153-155
calculating width, 258 structural, 133, 136
construction, 263
control, 263 Marble:
covered, 257 fabrication, 121, 123
designing, 255, 256-258 installation, 125
expansion, 263 interior, 129-132
in precast concrete, 278, 279 on concrete systems, 269
isolation, 263 on masonry backup, 305
masonry, 303 tile, 121
movement, 257 Masonry. See also specific types of masonry
offset, 257 Masonry:
reveal,256 backup,303-304,305,306-307
size, 257 -258 construction, 103
sliding, 257 doors in, 309
wood,313 joints, 303
Joists, wood, 145-146 panels, 103-104
Joists, ceiling, 199 reinforcement, 99
windows in, 309
Keystone joists, precast, 57,59 with precast concrete, 283-284
MDF. See Medium-density fiberboard
Laminated flooring, 208-209 Measurement:
Laminated glass, 233-235 compliance, 341
Landscape tolerances, 17,18 errors, 334-335
mum1
Index 361
expression, 333, 343-344 Patterned glass, 223-225

uncertainty,334-335 Paving, 9, 11, 13, 14,21
units, 338-339 Piers, drilled, 32
Measurement Methods for Building- Pilings, precast, 49
Setting Out and Measurement, Planarity, expression of, 338
ISO 4463-1,4,326,327 Plaster, 202-204
Measuring: Plumb:
angles, 327 bobs, 7
devices, 325-326 cast-in-place concrete, 35
flatness, 329-331 concrete frame, 261-263
length,326 lumber framing, 143
level,329-331 setting, 7
slopes, 327-329 steel columns, 87, 89
smoothness, 329-331 Plywood web joists, 150
tapes, 325 Plywood, 136-138
Medium-density fiberboard, 141 Precast concrete:
Metal ceilings, 213 architectural wall panel erection,
Metals. See also specific types 67
Metals, 214, 216-218, 220-221 beam and spandrel erection, 61
Metric conversion, 340-341 beams, 49, 51
Mill tolerances: columns, 57, 59
angles and tees, 82-84 concrete panels, 41
pipe and tubing, 85 doors in, 286
Sand M shapes, 81-82 double tees, 55
Wand HP shapes, 75, 79 erection, 59, 61, 63, 65, 67
Modular cabinets, 163 frame tolerances, 277 -278
Molding, 158-160 insulated wall panels, 43-44
joints, 278
National Elevator Industry, Inc. (NEIl), keystone joists, 57, 59
94-95 pilings, 49
National Institute of Standards and Tech- reinforcing in, 25, 29
nology (NIST), 5 ribbed wall panels, 43
National Society of Professional Surveyors single tees, 53
(NSPS),4 stairs, 47-49
Normal distribution, 335 structural wall erection, 63, 65
system design, 279-281
Offset joints, 257 tee joists, 57,59
Opening tolerances, in concrete, 37 windows in, 286-287
Openings, in elevator shafts, 96 with cast-in-place, 264-266
Optical levels, 7 with masonry, 283-284
Ornamental metal, 214, 216-218 with other systems, 277-287
Overlapping joints, 313 with steel frames, 281-283, 295
Preconstruction meetings, 345
Pad footings, 31-32 Prefabricated structural wood, 150,
Panel doors. See Stile and rail doors 317-318
Paneling, wood, 167-170, 170-172,320 Prefaced concrete block, 97
Parquet flOOring, 208-209 Prestressed concrete. See Precast concrete
Particleboard, 139-141 Primary control surface, 277
Patio doors, 246 Probability distributions, 335
362 Index
Quarry tile, 202-204 tolerance for roadways, 13

tolerance, asphalt pavement, 13
Rail crossings, 21 tolerance, concrete, 11, 13
Ramps: SmartTooI®,9
curb, 21, 23 Smoothness, expression of, 338
documenting slope, 344 Smoothness, measuring, 329-331
measuring for compliance, 341 Sonic measuring devices, 325
measuring slope, 327 Spandrel glass, 227-228
Rangefinders, laser, 325 Spirit levels, 7
Rebar. See Reinforcement Stainless steel, 214
Rectangular distribution, 335 Stairs, 14
Reinforcement: concrete, 21, 37,39
cast-in-place concrete, 23, 25 precast, 47-49
masonry, 99 site-built, 156, 158
prestressed concrete, 25, 29 wood, 172-173
Reveal joints, 256, 313 Standard deviation, 335, 336
Right-of-way construction, 19-23 Standard uncertainty, 336
Roadways, 21 Standing and running trim, 158-160
concrete, 9 Statistics, in calculating uncertainty,
slope tolerance, 13 335-337
Roof, precast erection, 63 Steel:
Rough grading tolerances, 16, 18 adjustable items, 293
Rounding, 339-340 architecturally exposed structural,
91-92
Screens, wood, 176 doors, 239
Sealant, 257 elevator shafts, 94-95
Secondary control surface, 277 erection, 87-96
Security doors and frames, 241 frame tolerances, 289-293
Sewer offset tolerances, 16 frames, 290-293
Shutters, 177-178 mill tolerances, 75, 79,81, 82, 85
SI units, conversion, 340-341 studs, 197-198, 199
Sidelight frames, 174-175 windows, 252-253, 275
Sidewalks: with architectural wall panels, 67
asphalt, 21 with brick, 295-297
concrete, 21 with curtain walls, 299-301
slope tolerance, 14 with precast concrete, 281-283,
Significant figures, 339-340, 341 295
Single tees, precast, 53 with precast floors, 63
SIPs. See Structural insulated panels with precast structural walls, 65
Sitework, 17 with stone, 297 -299
Slabs, cast-in-place concrete, 35, 261 Stile and rail doors, 181-185, 244
Slabs on grade, 29, 31 Stile and rail paneling, 170-172
Slate, 128-129, 129-132 Stone:
Sliding joints, 257 floors, 210
Slope: granite, 119, 121
documenting ramp, 344 installation, 125, 127, 128
establishing, 9 interior, 129-132,306-307
measuring, 327-329, 341 limestone, 123, 125
sidewalk, 14 marble, 121, 123
III I
Index 363
on masonry backup, 305 Wall panels, precast insulated, 43-44

on cast-in-place concrete, 269 Walls:
on steel framing, 297-299 brick,107-108
Storefronts, 193-196 cast-in-place concrete, 35
Street furniture, 21 concrete, 261, 37
Street light location tolerance, 18 concrete block, 103
Strip flooring, 208-209 precast structural erection, 63, 65
Structural clay facing tile, 109-112 Water line offset tolerances, 16, 18
Structural insulated panels, 150, 152 Waviness index, 29,331
Studs, steel, 197-198 Weathering steel, 91-92
Subflooring, 145-146 Window casing trim, 158-160
Sweep: Windows:
angles and tees, 83 aluminum, 251-252
Sand M shapes, 80 in cast-in-place concrete, 275
Wand HP shapes, 75, 77 in masonry, 309
System, primary, 4 in precast concrete, 286-287
System, secondary, 4 steel,252-253
Systeme Internationale. See SI units wood,249
Systems, referencing, 3 Wired glass, 223-225
Wood:
Tape measures, steel, 5 beams, 315-316
Tee joists, 57,59 blinds, 177-178
Telegraphing, 181 cabinets, 155-156, 160-161, 163,
Tempered glass, 227-228 320
Tendons, 29 columns, 315-316
Terra cotta, 115-116 doo~, 178, 180-181,241-244
Terrazzo, 207 floo~, 208-209
Tile, clay, 109-112 frames, 174-175
Tilt-up concrete, 73-74 framing, 145-146, 199
Timber: framing for stone flooring, 210
beams, 315-316 installation of woodwork, 185-188
columns, 315 joints, 313
fabrication, 133 paneling, 167-170, 170-172,320
Transits, 4, 5, 325-326 patio doo~, 246
Trim, wood, 156, 158 prefabricated structural, 317-318
Trusses, wood, 146, 148,317-318 screens, 176
Tubing, 215, 216-218, 219 shutters, 177-178
Type A evaluations, 335 stai~, 172-173
Type B evaluations, 335-336 stile and rail doors, 181-185
structural, 150
Uncertainty in measurement, 334-335 trim, 156, 158
Uncertainty, calculating, 335-337 trusses, 146, 148
Unit masonry. See specific types windows, 249, 275
Units of measurement, 338-339 window frames, 174-175
Wood chord metal joists, 150
Vertical building layout, 7-9 Woodwork installation, 185-188

Handbook of Construction Tolerances J.G

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Handbook of Construction Tolerances J.G

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I

II Handbook of Construction Tolerances

:gte. LA CONSTRUCTA SAL

rnnrrrr rfrrrf f , rr rrrfrII ( 1IIIIII

David Kent Ballast

e t-=I[N Tr NN' . "

John Wiley & Sons, Inc .

Copyright © 2007 by John Wiley & Sons. All rights reserved

Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., H o boken, New Jersey

Wil ey Bicentennial Logo: Richard Pac ifico

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:

Printed in the L nited St3te" of Ame rica

List ,)! Ttlblc.\ Xl

lli(n )dllctiO)l Xli

Part 1: Construction Tolerances

2-26 Precast Structural Wall Panel Erecti,m 63

Chapter 4: Unit Masonry 97

Chapter 5: Stone 119

Chapter 6: Structural Lumber 133

~1111 I(TlIlf! fftffftTtTnnrrTTTTfTlTTln

(, .') \kL Ii · i'iate· C,mnL'c ted \Xt".)".:! 1i-\Is~ Ercct lo n 14t1

Chapter 7 ; Finish Carpentry and Architectural Woodwork 15 3

Chapte r 8: Curtain Walls 189

Chapter 9: Finishes 197

C1l;\ptd 10: G lazing 2n

10~4 Sealed Insulated Glass Units 228

Chapter II: Doors and Windows 239

Part 2: Accommodating Construction Tolerances

Chapter 12: Cast-in-Place Concrete Systems 26 I

Chapter 13: Precast Concrete Systems 277

Chapter 14: Steel Frame Systems 289

1+ <' [ \ ,t,lli ill ,'! f, \I S to ll", \)ll S t",d Sy>te ms 297

Chapter I '): Masonry Systems 301

Chapter 16: Timber and Carpentry Construction 313

Part 3: Measuring Compliance and Documenting

Chapter 18: The Uncertainty of Measurement in Construction 333

Chapter 19: Documenting and Enforcing Tolerances 343

Tahl e 2 -\ C le,lr Distance Tukra l1ce to S ide Forms and Sotfit~

T;hk' 'i , I LdtTII1 Cc'S f, 'I' (ir:mi[(: Vene" r

Tlhle 7-3 Flushness :tnd FLnness "tC;lhiller J(lints ;In, 1 P;tnds

Table 9-1 Tile Manufacturing Tolerances

T;lble 10- 1 Allowable To lera nces for C lear. HH Class

For the Second Edition

For the First Edition

Introduction to the Second Edition

Introduction to the First Edition

How SI Units Are Used in this Book

1fllrrr flIt . _ 'llfii l

steel tape: ±3/4" (19) in 100' (30.5 m) (Latta)

ISO 4463 acceptable deviation: ±l .S\lL mm

For example, in 30.5 m (100')

o ±1/4" (6) per 100' over 100' (over 30.5 m)

Building Layout and

1-1 Horizontal Building Layout

:ll Li rr : rn I~!.c, \ v..' ,,\ · h . [r ir; d·--i ~'. c o n.1 ).

Table 1-1 Maintenance and acceptance tolerances,

Nominal interval from :ero, ft (m)Tolerance, in (film )

Figure 1-2 Vertical building layout

Accuracy in plumbn ess: (Latta)

ISO 4463 acceptable deviation from plumb :

For exampl e, in 30 .S m (100')

SmartTool: :± 1/32 " (0.8) in 2' (600) or 0 .10

8 Part 1: Construction Tolerances

1-3 Concrete Paving

1_' _________ ~j ;~~~~;)

I±l/4'::+UlariO c deviation from specified slope: